JP6097733B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a pachinko gaming machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming machine has been proposed in which a symbol is temporarily stopped a plurality of times during a single symbol variation after the symbol variation is started and the stop symbol is derived and displayed (for example, patents). Reference 1). In the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, an effect display that makes it appear as if a plurality of times of change is performed for one change is performed (referred to as “pseudo-continuous effect”). In this pseudo-continuous production, as the number of times the variation is performed for one variation increases, it is possible to increase a player's sense of expectation that a big hit gaming state will occur. When it reaches the number of times, the probable big hit is fixed.

JP 2002-85694 A (FIGS. 5 to 8)

However, even with the gaming machine described in Patent Document 1, there is a concern that the interest of the game may be reduced.

  This invention is made | formed in view of such a situation, The place made into the objective is to provide the pachinko game machine which can suppress the fall of the interest of a game.

  Effective solutions for achieving the above-described object will be described below. In addition, the effect | action etc. are demonstrated as needed. In addition, for easy understanding, the corresponding configuration in the embodiment of the invention is also shown as appropriate, but is not limited at all.

Means 1: Random number obtaining means for obtaining a winning random number based on the reception of the game ball at the starting port;
When the value of the winning random number acquired by the random number acquisition means is a winning value within the winning numerical value range, it is determined that the big hit is won, and when the winning random number value is outside the winning numerical value range A winning determination means for determining that the player has lost the jackpot,
A jackpot game execution means for performing a jackpot game advantageous to a player when the winning judgment means determines that the jackpot is won;
When a winning random number is acquired by the random number acquiring means, a game holding means for waiting the determination by the winning determination means according to the acquired winning random number until the execution condition is satisfied,
When the execution condition of the determination by the winning determination unit is established and the hold state is released, the variation display control unit that performs control related to the symbol variation display,
When a value outside the winning numerical range is acquired as the value of the winning random number, the acquisition is performed as a determination regarding the preceding effect indicating the big hit expectation degree for the determination by the winning determining means before the execution condition is satisfied. The value outside the hit numerical value range is within a specific numerical value range that is continuous with the hit numerical value range at least in a specific gaming state, or the acquired value outside the hit numerical value range is the Random number preceding determination means for determining whether the remaining numerical range has a numerical range wider than the specific numerical range;
As a result of the determination by the random value preceding determination means, it is determined that the value outside the winning numerical value range is within the specific numerical value range, and the remaining numerical value out of the winning numerical value range. The preceding effect can be executed in any of the cases where it is determined to be within the range, but any of a plurality of effect modes appears as an effect mode that appears when the preceding effect is executed. For the case where it is determined that the value outside the hit numerical range is within the specific numerical range, and the value outside the hit numerical range is within the remaining numerical range. Preceding effect mode determining means for determining at a different rate from the determined case, the preceding effect is executed when it is determined that the value outside the hit numerical value range is within the specific numerical value range. If , As compared with the case where the preceding effect is executed when it is determined in the effect that those in the rest of the numerical range of the per numerical value outside the range, the effect of the plurality of representation embodiment sac Chi specific A gaming machine characterized in that the proportion of appearance of the aspect is increased.

  In claim 1 of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is a perspective view which shows the state which open | released the main body frame with respect to the outer frame of the pachinko gaming machine which concerns on embodiment, and opened the door frame with respect to the main body frame. It is a front view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a side view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a top view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko gaming machine. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the outer frame, main body frame, game board, and door frame which comprise a pachinko game machine. It is the exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, main part frame, game board, and door frame which constitute a pachinko gaming machine. It is a front view of a door frame. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of the door frame. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a door frame. (A) is a front perspective view of a door frame base unit, (B) is a rear perspective view of a door frame base unit. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the door frame base unit and was seen from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the left unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 17 from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right unit of the side speaker electrical decoration unit in a door frame base unit, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at FIG. 19 from the back. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the ball | bowl feeding unit in a door frame base unit. (A) is a perspective view which expands and shows the part of the joint unit in a door frame base unit, (B) is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows a joint unit. (A) is a front perspective view of a top lamp illumination unit, and (B) is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit. It is a perspective view which shows a top lamp electrical decoration unit from diagonally lower front. (A) is a disassembled perspective view which disassembles a top lamp electric decoration unit for every main structure, and shows from the front, (B) is an exploded perspective view which shows (A) after. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the top lamp reflector unit in a top lamp electrical decoration unit, and shows from the front with a top lamp base. FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 26 later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the left rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the right rotation lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the center rotary lamp in a top lamp electrical decoration unit. It is a front perspective view of a plate unit. It is a back perspective view of a plate unit. It is a top view of a dish unit. It is AA sectional drawing in FIG. It is a rear view in the state which removed the plate back plate of the plate unit. It is a perspective view shown later in the state which removed the plate back plate and ball rental unit of a plate unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a tray unit for every main component, and shows from the front. FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 37 from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles the dish unit main body in a dish unit, and shows from the front. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows FIG. 39 from back. It is a rear view which shows the 1st ball removal mechanism in a dish unit. It is a perspective view which shows the 2nd ball removal mechanism in a dish unit later. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom view of the state which removed the operation button unit board | substrate of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit from below. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles and shows the main button of the operation button unit in a plate unit. It is sectional drawing of the handle apparatus attached to the door frame. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between the operation handle part which comprises a handle apparatus, and a joint unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of the operation handle part in a handle device. It is an operation | movement figure for demonstrating operation | movement of an operation handle part and a joint unit. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and the hit ball | bowl launching apparatus provided in a main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. (A) is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in a tray unit, (B) is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the 2nd ball extraction port in a tray unit, and the flow of game ball. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the horizontal ball | bowl inflow port in a dish unit, and a storage tray. It is a front perspective view of a glass unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which decomposes | disassembles a glass unit and shows from the front. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 56 later. It is a front view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a rear view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is a side view of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body before attaching components. It is the perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view which looked at the state which pivotally supported the main body frame which attached components to the outer frame from the front. It is a rear view of the main body frame which attached components. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame which attached components. It is the cross-sectional top view of the pachinko gaming machine cut | disconnected by the horizontal line of the middle (main control board box part) of the pachinko gaming machine. It is the perspective view (A) of the whole hitting ball | bowl launcher, and the perspective view (B) of the state which removed the firing motor part. It is a disassembled perspective view of a hit ball launching device. It is the front view (A) which shows the relationship between a hit ball | bowl launcher and a firing rail, and a perspective view (B) of a launching motor part. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is not operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. It is a rear view which shows the relationship between the hit ball | bowl launching device in the state which is operating the operation handle | steering-wheel part, and a firing rail. They are a top view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), and a front view (B) AA sectional view (D) of the slide member provided in the ball striking device. FIG. 3 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of a prize ball tank. It is the perspective view seen from the back side of pachinko game machine 1 which shows the relation of a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball passage unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is the perspective view seen from the front side of the pachinko game machine 1 which shows the relationship between a prize ball tank, a tank rail member, a ball path unit, a prize ball unit, and a full tank unit. It is a disassembled perspective view which shows the relationship between a main body frame, a ball path unit, and a prize ball unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of a prize ball unit. It is a rear view for demonstrating the relationship between the payout motor and the sprocket as a payout member. It is a perspective view which shows the relationship between a prize ball unit and a full tank unit. It is a perspective view of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front of a full tank unit. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back of a full tank unit. It is a partially broken perspective view which shows the relationship between a full tank unit and a foul mouth. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the back side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the back side of the substrate unit. It is the perspective view which looked at the substrate unit from the front side. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from the front side of the board | substrate unit. It is the front view seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which makes the main body of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate holder for frames. It is a rear view of a substrate unit. It is a rear view of the board | substrate unit in the state which removed the payout control board box and the terminal board box. It is a top view which shows the connection relation of each board | substrate provided in a board | substrate unit. It is the schematic which shows the electrical connection of a board | substrate unit and a game board. It is a part of rear view of the pachinko gaming machine showing the wiring and the like between the payout control board and the board unit. FIG. 97 is a front view of a game board for explaining a cross-sectional location in the cross-sectional view in FIG. 96. It is CC sectional drawing of FIG. It is the perspective view seen from the back of the state which opened the bar body. It is a front view of a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled for every main member which comprises a game board, and was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a perspective view showing only an attacker unit, a side prize opening member, and a center accessory in the game board from an oblique front, and (B) is a perspective view showing (A) from an oblique rear. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the back unit for every main structure and was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the upper unit in a back unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the upper unit from diagonally behind. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper unit in the back unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the upper unit for every main structure and was seen from diagonally behind. (A) is a front view of the rotating decorative body unit in the upper unit, (B) is a perspective view of the rotating decorative body unit as viewed from diagonally forward, and (C) is a perspective view of the rotational decorative body unit as viewed diagonally from behind. It is a perspective view. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotary decoration body unit in an upper unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally forward. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the rotation decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally behind. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of the rotation decoration body which is movable by rotation in a rotation decoration body unit. It is a front view which shows roughly the raising / lowering mechanism which raises / lowers the rotation decoration unit in an upper unit. (A) is a rear view of the lifting mechanism of FIG. 114, and (B) is a rear view of the lifting mechanism of (A) with an upper unit cover added. It is explanatory drawing which shows the motion of the raising / lowering mechanism in an upper unit. (A) is a perspective view which shows the rocking | flush decoration body unit in an upper unit from diagonally forward, (B) is a perspective view which shows a rocking | flush decoration body unit from diagonally behind. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the swing decorative body unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of the swing decorative body unit for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a disassembled perspective view. It is explanatory drawing which shows a motion of a rocking | fluctuation decoration body unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the left movable ceiling unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the right movable ceiling unit from diagonally forward, (C) is the right movable ceiling unit from diagonally behind It is the perspective view seen, (D) is the perspective view which looked at the left movable ceiling unit from diagonally behind. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right and left movable ceiling unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the right and left movable ceiling unit for every main structure, and was seen afterwards. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the character unit in a back unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the character unit from diagonally behind, (C) is the fixed side relay board of a character unit removed It is a side view shown in the state. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the character unit for every main structure and was seen from diagonally forward, (B) is the exploded perspective view which looked at (A) from diagonally behind. It is an AA sectional view in Drawing 123 (C). (A) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 123 (C) with the character body moving to the right, and (B) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 123 (C). , (C) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Wu in FIG. 123 (C). (A) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the character body in a character unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (B) is the exploded perspective view which looked at (A) from diagonally back. It is a side view which shows roughly the movable mechanism of the head of the character body in a character unit. It is a top view which shows roughly the movable mechanism of the trunk | drum part of the character body in a character unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the gear decoration body unit in a back unit from diagonally forward, (B) is the perspective view which looked at the gear decoration body unit from diagonally behind. (A) is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the gear decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen from diagonally forward, (B) is the exploded perspective view which looked at (A) from diagonally behind. It is a front view which shows a game board in the state which the rotation decoration body, the ceiling decoration body, and the character body moved. It is the schematic of the disassembled perspective view of the function display unit in a game board. It is the schematic of a function display sticker. It is a block diagram of a main control board, a payout control board, and a peripheral control board. FIG. 136 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 135. It is a block diagram which shows the power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine. FIG. 138 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 137. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of peripheral control MPU. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection ranging from the periphery control board | substrate with which a game board is equipped to the door decoration drive board | substrate with which a door frame is equipped. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection ranging from a door decoration drive board | substrate to a dish unit, a left side speaker electrical decoration unit, and a glass unit. It is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection ranging from a glass unit to a top lamp electrical decoration unit and a right side speaker electrical decoration unit. It is a part of block diagram of a lamp drive substrate. It is a part of block diagram of a motor drive board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to the payout control board from the main control board. It is a table which shows an example of the various commands transmitted to a peripheral control board from a main control board. 146 is a table showing a continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 146; It is a table which shows an example of the various commands from the payout control board which a main control board receives. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side power-on process. 149 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the main-control-side power-on process in FIG. 149. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the main control side timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol and a special electric accessory control process. It is a flowchart which shows the continuation of the special symbol of FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a process at the time of a start opening prize. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a memory prefetch process. FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the storage prefetching process of FIG. 155. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a special symbol fluctuation waiting process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of power-on of a payout control part. 158 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 158. FIG. 160 is a flow chart showing a continuation of the payout control unit power-on processing following FIG. 159. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a periphery control part 2ms steady process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part base timer interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a peripheral control part command reception end interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a liquid crystal serial command control process. 10 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a transmission buffer empty interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a DSP-ACK signal interruption process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start opening prize abnormality notification determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a start opening prize abnormality notification process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a liquid crystal control part power-on process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a drawing control process. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a liquid crystal control part command reception interruption process. It is a timing chart which shows transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data. This is a look-ahead effect showing an example of one variation drawn on the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
DESCRIPTION OF EXEMPLARY EMBODIMENTS Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the entire pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing a state in which a main body frame is opened with respect to an outer frame of a pachinko gaming machine according to an embodiment and a door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame, and FIG. 2 is a front view of the pachinko gaming machine. 3 is a side view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 4 is a plan view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 5 is a rear view of the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 6 is an outer frame constituting the pachinko gaming machine, FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the rear of the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame. FIG. 7 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the outer frame, the main body frame, the game board, and the door frame constituting the pachinko gaming machine.

  1 to 7, a pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is openable and closable to an outer frame 2 installed on an island (also referred to as pachinko island equipment, not shown) of a game hall (hall). A game in which a player can visually recognize a main body frame 3 that can be pivotally supported and can be mounted with a game board 4, and a game area 605 that is pivotally supported by the main body frame 3 and that is formed on the game board 4 and into which a ball is driven. The door frame 5 includes a window 101 and a tray unit 300 that is disposed below the gaming window 101 and stores a ball to be paid out as a result of the game.

  A cover reinforcing metal fitting 14 that reinforces the decorative cover plate 15 is fixed to the outer frame 2 at the lower front side thereof. Although not shown in detail, the outer frame 2 has upper and lower wooden upper and lower frame plates 10 and 11 and left and right light alloy (aluminum) side frame plates 12 and 13 at their respective ends. It is assembled in a square shape by connecting with a connecting member 19 for connection. The shaft support pin 504 of the upper shaft support bracket 503 of the main body frame 3 is detachably engaged with the support hole 47 of the upper support bracket 45 provided on the upper portion of the outer frame 2. A support hole (not shown) formed in the frame support plate 506 of the main body frame 3 is inserted into the support protrusion 68 of the lower support metal fitting 66 provided on one upper surface of the cover plate 15. In addition, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the upper portion of the open side frame section 13 is engaged with the hook portion 1054 of the lock device 1000 attached along the open side of the main body frame 3. The closing projection 38 is attached, and is attached to the lower portion of the open side frame portion 13 along the open side of the main body frame 3 when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. A hook portion 1065 of the locking device 1000 is attached. By inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the locking device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing projections 38 and 41, and the main body frame 3 is pulled to the front side, thereby pulling the main body frame 3 forward. The frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2.

  Further, as described above, the game board 4 can be detachably attached to the main body frame 3, and the ball hitting device 650 and the door frame 5 excluding the game board 4 and the main body frame 3 are provided at the lower back of the main body frame 3. A board unit 1100 on which various control boards and power boards for controlling electrical components are collectively provided is attached, and a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580 (see FIG. 6) of the main body frame 3 is attached and detached. It is provided freely.

  Furthermore, in addition to the above-described dish unit 300, the door frame 5 is provided with a glass unit 450 and a handle device 400 so as to close the gaming window 101. The feature of the present embodiment is that there is one dish unit 300 provided on the door frame 5, and the handle device 400 conventionally provided on the main body frame 3 is provided on the door frame 5. Since the frame 5 and the main body frame 3 have substantially the same square size when viewed from the front, the main body frame 3 is not visible from the front. Hereinafter, among the members constituting the pachinko gaming machine 1, the door frame 5, the main body frame 3, the hit ball launching device 650, the board unit 1100, and the game board 4 will be described in detail.

[2. Overall structure of door frame]
First, the door frame 5 that can be freely opened and closed on the front side of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 13. FIG. 8 is a front view of the door frame, and FIG. 9 is a rear view of the door frame. FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the right front, and FIG. 11 is a perspective view of the door frame as viewed from the left front. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view seen from the front of the door frame, and FIG. 13 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the door frame.

  As shown in FIGS. 8, 9, 12 and 13, the door frame 5 is a door frame base unit having a gaming window 101 whose outer shape is formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and whose inner peripheral shape is a vertically long polygonal shape. 100, a horizontally long top lamp lighting unit 200 attached to the upper part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, a tray unit 300 attached to the lower part of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, A glass unit 450 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the gaming window 101, and a security cover 470 that is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower rear side of the glass unit 450. And. The door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 is provided with side speaker lighting units 120 on both the left and right sides of the gaming window 101, which will be described in detail later. The outer periphery of the game window 101 is surrounded by the decoration unit 200 and the dish unit 300. Further, the door frame 5 is provided with a handle device 400 for performing a game ball driving operation on the left side (open side) of the dish unit 300 when viewed from the front.

[2-1. Door frame base unit]
Next, the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 14 to 22. FIG. 14A is a front perspective view of the door frame base unit, and FIG. 14B is a rear perspective view of the door frame base unit. FIG. 15 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 16 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit as seen from the back. FIG. 17 is an exploded perspective view of the left unit of the side speaker electric decoration unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 17 as seen from the back. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the right unit of the side speaker lighting unit in the door frame base unit as seen from the front, and FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. 19 as seen from the back. Further, FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view showing the ball feeding unit in the door frame base unit in an exploded manner. 22A is an enlarged perspective view showing a joint unit portion in the door frame base unit, and FIG. 22B is an exploded perspective view showing the joint unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in the figure, the door frame base unit 100 has a door frame base body having a gaming window 101 having an outer shape formed in a vertically long rectangular shape and penetrating in the front-rear direction and having a vertically long inner periphery and a polygonal shape. 110, a side speaker lighting unit 120 fixed to the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front side of the door frame base body 110, and a metal frame-shaped reinforcing sheet metal 140 fixed to the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A horizontally long mounting base 160 fixed to the rear side of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and a ball feeding unit 170 that sends game balls, which are fixed to the mounting base 160 and supplied from the dish unit 300, one by one to the ball hitting device 650, An operation handle in the handle device 400 is disposed on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 and substantially below the ball feed unit 170 fixed via the reinforcing sheet metal 140 and the mounting base 160. And a joint unit 180 to transmit the rotation operation 410 to hitting the firing device 650 mainly includes.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a ball path cover 191 that closes a ball path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball path 393 of the dish unit 300 in the door frame base body 110, and a door frame base body. 110, a door decoration driving board 192 fixed below the gaming window 101 on the rear side, a door decoration driving board cover 193 that covers the door decoration driving board 192 from the rear, and a joint on the rear side of the door frame base body 110. A handle relay terminal plate 194 fixed immediately above the unit 180, a wiring cover 195 that closes the wiring receiving groove 110 b that can store wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194, and the upper left and right sides of the game window 101. Stop levers 196 that are respectively arranged and pivotally supported on the rear side of the door frame base body 110 are provided.

  The door frame base unit 100 according to the present embodiment is fixed to a reinforcing sheet metal 140, which is a metal sheet metal assembled with rivets or the like, on the rear side of a rectangular door frame base body 110 made of synthetic resin. In addition to being enhanced, it has a strength capable of sufficiently supporting the top lamp illumination unit 200, the dish unit 300, and the like.

  Further, the door decoration drive board 192 is connected to the wiring from the electric decoration parts and the electric parts provided on the door frame 5, and the wiring from the door decoration drive board 192 is attached to the back surface of the main body frame 3. It is connected to a payout control board 1186 and a peripheral control board 4139 (see FIG. 136) of a peripheral board box 622 attached to the game board 4 via a door relay board 1102 incorporated in the unit 1100.

[2-1-1. Door frame base body]
First, the door frame base main body 110 in the door frame base unit 100 is formed in a vertically long frame shape with synthetic resin, as shown in FIGS. 15 and 16, and the like. The game window 101 having a shape is formed so as to be offset upward as a whole. The door frame base body 110 has an upper side formed by the gaming window 101 and widths on the left and right sides of an upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141, a shaft side reinforcing sheet metal 142, and an open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of a reinforcing sheet metal 140 described later. The gaming window 101 is formed as large as possible with respect to the size of the door frame base body in a front view. Therefore, a wider range of the game board 4 disposed on the rear side of the door frame 5 can be viewed from the player side, and a wider game area than the conventional pachinko gaming machine can be easily formed. It is like that.

  Also, below the gaming window 101 in the door frame base body 110, a prize ball passing port 111 through which the prize ball contact rod 343 of the dish unit 300 penetrates at the upper part of the shaft support side (left side in front view), and a prize ball A ball removal path opening 112 formed at a position corresponding to the ball removal path 393 in the dish unit 300 below the passage opening 111, and a ball for mounting the ball feeding unit 170 on the upper side of the open side (right side in front view). A feed opening 113, a lock hole 114 through which a cylinder lock 1010, which will be described later, is inserted further toward the opening side of the ball feed opening 113, and a cam insertion opening 115 through which the cam 416 of the handle device 400 can be inserted below the ball feed opening 113. Are formed so as to penetrate the door frame base body 110, respectively.

  Further, the door frame base body 110 has a mounting opening 116 for mounting a mounting elastic piece 473 of the crime prevention cover 470 and a left and right of the mounting opening 116, as will be described in detail later on the left and right sides of the lower end of the gaming window 101. Speaker openings 117 are formed so as to penetrate the rear ends of the left and right side speakers 121 in the side speaker lighting unit 120, which will be described later.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, a glass unit support step 110 a that is recessed forward along substantially the inner periphery of the gaming window 101 and the front outer peripheral edge of the glass unit 450 can contact, and the gaming window 101. On the lower side, a wiring receiving groove 110b that is recessed forward and is formed at a position substantially corresponding to the front surface of the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144, and can accommodate the wiring, and a cam insertion opening 115 is opened to attach the recessed joint unit 180 toward the front side. And a joint unit mounting recess 110c.

  Further, on the rear side of the door frame base body 110, door frame protrusions 110d and 110e projecting a predetermined amount rearward from the lower side are formed, and these door frame protrusions 110d and 110e are formed in a body frame 3 described later. The door frame 5 is positioned and locked with respect to the main body frame 3 by being inserted into the engagement grooves 584 and 585. In addition, the protrusion amount to the rear of the door frame protrusion 110d is formed to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e.

  In addition, as shown in the figure, the door frame base body 110 is provided with a plurality of mounting bosses 110h projecting forward for fixing the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 on the front upper portion thereof, and on the rear surface thereof. A stop lever mounting portion 110i for rotatably supporting the stop lever 196 is provided. In addition, the door frame base body 110 is formed with a large number of mounting bosses and mounting holes for fixing the side speaker lighting unit 120, the reinforcing sheet metal 140, the mounting base 160, the dish unit 300, etc. at appropriate positions. ing.

[2-1-2. Side speaker lighting unit]
Subsequently, the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 illuminates the left and right sides of the gaming window 101 on the front surface of the door frame 5 (light-emitting decoration), and the four arranged at the four corners of the gaming window 101. The left speaker lighting unit 120L that can emit predetermined music, sound effects, and the like to the player by the side speaker 121 and is disposed on the pivotal side of the gaming window 101 (left side in front view). And a right side speaker illumination unit 120R disposed on the open side (right side in front view) of the gaming window 101. The side speaker illumination unit 120 includes a vertically elongated illumination part 122 and an acoustic part 130 having a side speaker 121 disposed above and below the illumination part 122 in each of the left and right units. It has a configuration.

  More specifically, as shown in an exploded view of FIGS. 17 to 20, the lighting unit 122 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 is a vertically long semi-cylindrical transparent side lighting lens 123, and the side lighting lens 123. A transparent side illumination reflector 124 disposed on the rear side and constituting a cylinder with the side illumination lens 123; a side illumination base 125 disposed on the rear side of the side illumination reflector 124; and a side illumination base 125 The side decoration board 126 fixed to the rear side, and the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 are formed so as to enclose the upper end and the lower end from the front side, respectively, and are attached to the side illumination base 125 so that the side illumination lens is attached. 123 and the side electric decoration flash cover 127 which supports the side electric decoration reflector 124, and the side electric decoration flash cover 1 7 has a light-transmitting flash lens 128 that closes the flash opening 127a from the rear side, and a flash substrate 129 that is disposed on the rear side of the flash lens 128 and supported on the front surface of the side electric decoration base 125. .

  The illumination unit 122 of the side speaker illumination unit 120 has a plurality of color LEDs 126a that can emit light in various colors at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction on the front surface of the side decoration substrate 126, and a high luminance above and below the plurality of LEDs 126a. A white LED 126b is mounted. In addition, openings 124a and 125a penetrating in the front-rear direction are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs 126a and 126b of the side decoration board 126 in the side decoration reflector 124 and the side decoration base 125, respectively. The light from the LEDs 126a and 126b mounted on the side can be irradiated forward through the opening 125a of the side electric decoration base 125 and the opening 124a of the side electric decoration reflector 124.

  Moreover, in the electrical decoration part 122, in the inner side in the transparent cylinder of the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124, in the whole inner periphery of the side electrical decoration lens 123, and a part of inner periphery of the side electrical decoration reflector 124 In this way, the side lens sheet 123a having a substantially U-shaped cross section is disposed. The side lens sheet 123a is formed of a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light or reflected light in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. When viewed from the player side, the side lens sheet 123a allows the side illumination lens 123a to be seen. In addition, an appearance as if a fluorescent tube (fluorescent tube) is arranged in a transparent column (pipe) formed by the side electric reflector 124 can be exhibited.

  Furthermore, in the electrical decoration part 122, the dividing wall 124b which divides | segments the several opening part 124a formed corresponding to the several LED 126a of the side decoration board 126 into three groups in the up-down direction is provided in the side electrical decoration reflector 124. The partition wall 124b prevents light from a predetermined LED 126a from entering another group. That is, the dividing wall 124b can clearly divide the fluorescent tube formed by the side illumination lens 123 and the side illumination reflector 124 into upper, middle, and lower three parts. Accordingly, by appropriately emitting light from the plurality of LEDs 126a mounted on the side decorative board 126, the fluorescent tube is caused to emit light in whole or in part, or light is emitted in various colors for each of the upper, middle, and lower parts. Can be done.

  In addition, a lens concave portion 124c that is recessed from the front side is formed in the side electric decoration reflector 124 at a position corresponding to the upper and lower LEDs 126b on the side decorative substrate 126, and a semicircular sub lens is formed in the lens concave portion 124c from the front side. 122a (see FIGS. 19 and 20) is inserted. The electrical decoration unit 122 of the present embodiment causes the sub-lens 122a and the LED 126b to emit only the LED 126b strongly before the LED 126a emits light, thereby forming the fluorescent light formed by the side electrical decoration lens 123 and the side electrical decoration reflector 124. As if it were a real fluorescent lamp, it is possible to produce a light emission effect in which only the both ends illuminate the tube.

  Furthermore, the illumination part 122 has a flashlight 129a (for example, an ultra-bright white LED or the like) that can emit strong light on the front surface of the flash substrate 129 supported on the rear side of the side illumination flash cover 127. The flashlight 129a emits light so that the player can irradiate a flashlight.

  The acoustic part 130 of the side speaker electric decoration unit 120 includes a speaker decoration 131 having a substantially circular speaker opening 131a disposed at the foremost part, and a substantially disk made of punching metal that closes the speaker opening 131a of the speaker decoration 131 from the rear side. Speaker cover 132, a decorative spacer 133 disposed behind the speaker cover 132 and cooperating with the speaker decoration 131 to sandwich the speaker cover and have a circular speaker front support port 133 a, and the speaker of the decoration spacer 133 It mainly includes a side speaker 121 disposed so as to close the front support port 133a from the rear side, and a back pressing member 134 having a speaker fitting port 134a that is fitted to the outer periphery of the side speaker 121 from the rear side. .

  As shown in the figure, the acoustic unit 130 has different speaker decorations 131, decorative spacers 133, and back pressing members 134 in different shapes depending on the positions where they are attached. Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 17 and 18, the upper left acoustic unit 130 in front view has a decoration 131 b that is formed in a cylindrical shape and extends outward from the left side. The decorative spacer 133 has a cylindrical shape that can be inserted into the speaker decoration 131, and the back pressing member 134 is formed with a back pressing decoration part 134 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The upper left acoustic part 130 is further provided with a hinge cover 135 that is disposed above the back press decoration part 134 b of the back press member 134 and covers the lower side of the shaft pin 145 of the upper shaft support part 146 in the reinforcing sheet metal 140. Yes. In the lower left acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a plate shape having a decoration part 131 b, and the decoration spacer 133 includes a spacer decoration part 133 b that is paired with the decoration part 131 b of the speaker decoration 131. The back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIGS. 19 and 20, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in a cylindrical shape and the decoration spacer 133 and the back pressing member 134 are inserted into the speaker decoration 131 in the upper right acoustic unit 130 in front view. It is formed in a possible cylindrical shape. Further, in the lower right acoustic part 130 in front view, the speaker decoration 131 is formed in an annular shape, and the decoration spacer 133 is formed in a flat plate shape having a spacer decoration part 133b that contacts the rear surface of the speaker decoration 131. In addition, the back pressing member 134 is formed in a ring shape. Note that the lower right acoustic unit 130 further includes a decoration base 136 having a back presser member fixing port 136a through which the back presser member 134 can be inserted and fixed from the front side further on the rear side of the back presser member 134. .

  As shown in the drawing, the four side speakers 121 in the side speaker illumination unit 120 of the present embodiment are arranged at the four corners of the game window 101, and are, as a rule, against the head of the player who plays the game. However, since it is arranged at the top, bottom, left, and right positions, independent sound signals for each side speaker 121 (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch including a lower speaker 391 described later) By sending a surround signal or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc., it is possible to present a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before. Note that the side speaker 121 of the present embodiment is mainly responsible for the mid to high sound range, and the lower speaker 391 is responsible for the low sound range.

[2-1-3. Reinforced sheet metal]
Next, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 in the door frame base unit 100 includes an upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached along the back of the upper side of the door frame base main body 110, and a door frame base main body, as mainly shown in FIGS. 110, a pivot-side reinforcement sheet metal 142 attached along the pivot-side side part back surface, an open-side reinforcement sheet metal 143 attached along the open-side side part back surface of the door frame base body 110, and the door frame base body 110. A lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 attached along the lower surface of the lower side of the gaming window 101 is fastened to each other with screws or the like to form a square shape.

  As shown in FIG. 15, the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes an upper shaft supporting part 146 having shaft pins 145 provided on the upper surface and the lower end of the shaft supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction, and a lower surface thereof. And a lower shaft support portion 148 having a shaft pin 147 (see FIG. 9). The upper and lower shaft pins 145 and 147 are pivotally supported by an upper shaft bracket 503 and a lower shaft bracket 509 formed on the upper and lower sides of the body frame 3, so that the door frame 5 is attached to the body frame 3. It can be opened and closed freely.

  Further, the lower reinforcing metal plate 144 of the reinforcing metal plate 140 has a predetermined width and is formed to have a length substantially the same as the horizontal width dimension of the door frame base main body 110. It is a lower bent protrusion piece 149 bent toward the rear (see FIG. 16), and both upper side edge edges are upper bent protrusion pieces 150 bent rearward. However, the portions sandwiched between the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides are vertical bent protrusions 151 extending in the vertical direction. The amount of protrusion of the lower bent protruding piece 149 is not so large, and the lower bent protruding piece 149 does not engage with the groove portion or the concave portion to form the concave / convex engagement, but is formed to increase the strength. On the other hand, the amount of protrusion of the upper bent protrusions 150 on both sides is slightly larger than the amount of protrusion of the lower bent protrusions 149, and somewhat prevents unauthorized tools from entering from below, but rather the lower reinforcement in the present embodiment. The most characteristic configuration of the sheet metal 144 is a vertical bent protrusion piece 151.

  The vertical bent protrusion 151 is formed in a concave shape so that its upper edge shape matches the lower end shape of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450 described later, and when the glass unit 450 is fixed to the back side of the door frame 5 Further, the upper end piece of the vertical bent protrusion piece 151 is engaged with an engagement groove 451c formed along the outer periphery of the substantially central portion in the width direction (front-rear direction) of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. . The lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is formed with a prize ball passage port covering portion 152 that protects the outer periphery excluding the bottom surface of the prize ball passage port 111 formed in the door frame base body 110.

  Further, the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140 includes open side outward bent protrusions 153 bent toward the rear on both sides of the long side between the upper side reinforcing sheet metal 141 and the lower side reinforcing sheet metal 144, and Open side inner bent protrusions 154 are respectively formed, and the open side inner bent protrusions 154 are formed to extend rearward longer than the open side outer bent protrusions 153. The upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 is formed with bent protrusions 155 and 156 that are bent backward on both sides of the long side. Further, the shaft-supporting side reinforcing sheet metal 142 is formed with a shaft-supporting side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 extending rearward at the outer end of the long side. In addition, hook covers 158 that engage with the door frame hooks 1041 of the lock device 1000 are attached to substantially the upper part, center part, and lower part on the rear side of the open-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, respectively. In addition, by inserting a key into the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 and rotating it to one side, the hook portions 1054 and 1065 are disengaged from the closing projections 38 and 41 and the main body frame 3 is pulled to the front side. The main body frame 3 can be opened with respect to the outer frame 2 by rotating in the direction opposite to the one direction, thereby enabling the hook cover 158 of the door frame 5 and the sliding frame for the door frame to be opened. The door frame 5 can be opened with respect to the main body frame 3 by releasing the engagement with the door frame hook portion 1041 of 1040 and pulling the door frame 5 to the front side.

[2-1-4. Mounting base / ball feeding unit]
Next, the mounting table 160 and the ball feeding unit 170 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. First, as shown in FIGS. 9, 15, and 16, the mounting base 160 is attached so as to cover the upper half of the back surface of the plate portion of the door frame base unit 100, and is a transparent synthetic resin similar to the security cover 470. Is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape whose front is opened. In order to smoothly guide the ball fired from the firing rail 515 to the game board 4, the mounting base 160 is formed by the rear surface of the mounting base 160 and the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 when the door frame 5 is closed. The ball flying guide surface 161 is formed on the rear surface of the mounting table 160. By the way, the mounting base 160 according to the present embodiment has a prize ball passing port opening 162 through which the rear protruding portion of the prize ball passing port covering part 152 formed in the lower reinforcing sheet metal 144 is penetrated at the upper part on the pivotal support side. A ball feed unit mounting recess 163 for attaching the ball feed unit 170 is formed in the lower part on the open side. A region in the oblique direction from the ball feed unit mounting recess 163 is a ball flight guide surface 161.

  Further, a lid notch 164 into which a finger can be put when removing a ball passage route cover 191, a door decoration drive board 192, and a door decoration drive board cover 193, which will be described later, is formed in the middle lower part of the mounting base 160. In addition, a vertical wall 165 is formed vertically on a part of the upper side of the mounting table 160. As shown in FIG. 9, the standing wall 165 is for abutting against the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470 so as to prevent the lower portion of the crime prevention cover 470 from moving forward when the crime prevention cover 470 is attached.

  Further, the mounting table 160 includes a crime prevention protrusion 166 that protrudes obliquely rearward from the above-described ball flight guide surface 161 to the prize ball passage opening 162. As described above, the security projecting piece 166 is provided between the security frame 586 formed in the plate portion 511 of the main body frame 3 and the inner ridges and the inner side ridges at the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3. The engaging portion is configured.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 21, the ball feeding unit 170 includes a box-shaped main body 171 fixed to the ball feeding unit mounting recess 163 and a ball pivotally supported by a support shaft 171a of the main body 171. A feed member 172 and a weight 173 pivotally supported by the ball feed member 172 while rotating the ball receiving portion of the ball feed member 172 upward are provided. The ball feed unit 170 is located at the lower end of the third inclined surface 311c of the dish unit 300 by swinging the ball feed member 172 in response to the reciprocal movement difference of the ball striking rod 687 of the ball hitting device 650 described later. The balls are supplied one by one to the firing position of the firing rail 515 through the hitting ball supply port 171b formed in the main body 171.

  Reference numeral 174 in the figure denotes an E-ring that prevents the ball feed member 172 from coming off from the support shaft 171a of the main body 171 and prevents the weight 173 from coming off from the ball feed member 172. It is.

[2-1-5. Joint unit]
Next, the joint unit 180 in the door frame base unit 100 will be described. As shown in FIG. 22, the joint unit 180 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110 c of the door frame base body 110 and is slidable in the lateral direction, and the joint unit 180 is housed in the state where the slide body 182 is housed. The cover body 184 covers the front surface of the unit mounting recess 110c.

  The joint unit mounting recess 110c of the door frame base body 110 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface open, and a cam insertion opening 115 is formed on the rear surface. In addition, a pair of attachment holes 110f for fixing the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in one corner portion of the joint unit mounting recess 110c that is positioned substantially diagonally. Furthermore, the arcuate abutment convex portions for allowing the slide body 182 to move smoothly by abutting against the outer surfaces of the upper and lower sides of the slide body 182 on the upper side and the bottom side of the inner side surface of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. 110g (in FIG. 22B, only the lower-side abutting convex portion 110g is shown, and the upper-side abutting convex portion 110g is omitted in the drawing).

  On the other hand, the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 has a rear surface smaller than the joint unit mounting recess 110c so that the slide body 182 is housed in a space formed by the joint unit mounting recess 110c and the cover body 184 so as to be movable in the left-right direction. Formed in the shape of an open rectangular parallelepiped box, the rear face wall has two guide protrusions 182a that project a predetermined amount rearward and are arranged in a substantially horizontal direction, and the lower guide protrusion 182a on the right side in rear view. A plate-like slide protrusion 183 that protrudes rearward and a hole pierced between the two guide protrusions 182a so that a wiring through tube portion 428 of the handle device 400, which will be described later, penetrates on the left side of the slide protrusion 183 in rear view. And a rectangular cylindrical member through-opening 182b. The slide projecting piece 183 of the slide body 182 has an inclined side 183a in which the traveling direction during sliding (right direction in rear view) is cut obliquely. In addition, a cam engagement recess 182 c that houses a cam 416 that is fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 of the handle device 400 is formed in a U shape on the front wall of the slide body 182 by a rib. Then, a vertical part of a part of the rib forming the cam engagement recess 182c is formed as an arc-shaped rib so as to protrude into the cam engagement recess 182c, and that part is a cam contact part 182d that contacts the cam 416. It has become.

  Further, the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped box shape with the front surface opened, and a cylindrical boss-shaped guide protrusion 182a protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted into the front surface of the slide body 182. Two lateral guide holes 194a that guide the movement of the slide body, an insertion lateral hole 184b through which the slide protrusion 183 projecting from the front surface of the slide body 182 is inserted, and the rear grip member 413 of the operation handle 410 It protrudes outward from a position corresponding to the wiring opening 184c that is attached to the end and is inserted through the cam insertion opening 115 and facing the rear end of the wiring through cylinder 428 and the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c. And a mounting hole 184d formed. The cover body 184 can be attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c by fixing a predetermined screw (not shown) to the mounting hole 110f of the joint unit mounting recess 110c through the mounting hole 184d. .

  In order to assemble the slide body 182 and the cover body 184 of the joint unit 180 into the joint unit mounting recess 110c, the slide body 182 is housed in the joint unit mounting recess 110c, and in this state, the cover body 184 is covered from the front. When covering, the guide protrusion 182a is inserted into the guide lateral hole 194a, and the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion lateral hole 184b. Then, after the coating, by screwing into the mounting hole 110f with the screw through the mounting hole 184d, the slide body 182 is housed inside, and the assembly of the joint unit 180 is completed.

[2-2. Top lamp lighting unit]
Next, the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 23A is a front perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, FIG. 23B is a rear perspective view of the top lamp illumination unit, and FIG. 24 is a perspective view showing the top lamp illumination unit obliquely from the lower front. It is. FIG. 25A is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp electrical decoration unit disassembled for each main configuration and shown from the front, and FIG. 25B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 26 is an exploded perspective view of the top lamp reflector unit in the top lamp illumination unit disassembled and shown from the front together with the top lamp base, and FIG. 27 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. Further, FIG. 28 is an exploded perspective view showing the left rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view showing the right rotating lamp in the top lamp lighting unit in an exploded manner, FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view showing the center rotating lamp in the top lamp illumination unit in an exploded manner.

  As shown in FIG. 24, the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment includes three rotating lights 244, 264, and 284 (so-called Patlite (registered trademark)) arranged in the left-right direction. The sizes of the rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are arranged in order from the left in front view. The top lamp electric decoration unit 200 is fixed to the front side of the horizontally long and box-shaped top lamp base 210 and the top lamp base 210 and to the upper front part of the door frame base unit 100 with the top lamp base 210 interposed therebetween. Top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and central rotating lamp unit 280 attached to the front surface of top lamp reflector unit 220, left rotating lamp unit 240, right rotating lamp unit 260, and Rotating lamp covers 201, 202, 203 that cover the front surface of the central rotating lamp unit 280, respectively, and are attached to the top lamp reflector unit 220, and a reflector inner 204 that covers the substantially central lower surface of the top lamp reflector unit are mainly provided ( (See Figure 25)

  The top lamp illumination unit 200 further includes a top lamp power supply substrate 205 fixed to the front right side of the top lamp base 210 and two top lamp substrates 206 fixed to the rear side of the top lamp base 210. ing. The top lamp power supply substrate 205 is for supplying a reference voltage to various substrates such as the dish unit 300, the side speaker illumination unit 120, and a glass unit 450 described later, in addition to the top lamp illumination unit 200. . The top lamp substrate 206 emits light and drives the LEDs in the top lamp reflector unit 220, the LEDs in the central rotating lamp unit 280, and the motors 245, 265, and 285 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280. It is controlled by a peripheral control board 4139 described later.

[2-2-1. Top lamp base]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the top lamp base 210 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 has a shape in which the upper surface and the left and right side surfaces are substantially aligned with the upper side and the left and right side sides of the door frame base unit 100. At the same time, the lower surface is shaped substantially along the gaming window 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is formed in a box shape that is horizontally long and partitioned in the middle in the front-rear direction. The top lamp base 210 has a rear end of a mounting boss 221 i protruding from the front side to the rear from the top lamp reflector unit 220 while the mounting boss 110 h of the door frame base body 110 is inserted from the rear side at a position along the outer periphery. Are fitted and positioned, and a plurality of substantially cylindrical mounting boss portions 211 having insertion holes through which predetermined screws can be inserted are provided. The front end of the mounting boss 110h of the door frame base unit 100 is inserted into the mounting boss portion 211 from the rear, and the rear end of the mounting boss 221i of the top lamp reflector unit 220 is inserted from the front. By fixing a predetermined screw from the rear side to the mounting boss 221 i of the top lamp reflector unit 220, the top lamp base 210 (top lamp lighting unit 200) is attached and fixed to the door frame base unit 100. ing.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a plurality of fixed boss portions 212 having insertion holes through which a rear end of a fixed boss 221j protruding rearward from the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be fitted and a predetermined screw can pass. ing. By fixing a predetermined screw to the fixed boss 221j of the top lamp reflector unit 220 from the rear side through the fixed boss portion 212, the top lamp base 210 and the top lamp reflector unit 220 can be assembled to each other. It has become.

  Further, the top lamp base 210 is provided with a connector opening 213 through which the connection connector 205a of the top lamp power supply board 205 can be inserted in the vicinity of the right end when viewed from the front, and the connector 205a is inserted through the connector opening 213. Is faced from the rear side of the top lamp base 210. In addition, on the left and right sides of the rear side of the top lamp base 210, substrate mounting portions 214 are provided, and the top lamp substrate 206 is mounted on the substrate mounting portion 214.

[2-2-2. Top lamp reflector unit]
Next, the top lamp reflector unit 220 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 26 and 27, the top lamp reflector unit 220 of the present embodiment includes a box-shaped reflector base 221 that can cover the top lamp base 210 from the front side and that is open on the rear side. The reflector base 221 is a cylindrical cylinder that has three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 mounted side by side on its front surface, and projects between the central rotating lamp 284 and the left and right rotating lamps 244 and 264 greatly forward. It is partitioned by a portion 221a and an inclined portion 221b that hangs downward from the cylindrical portion 221a and inclines backward as it goes downward. In the reflector base 221, a substantially circular opening is formed in the cylindrical portion 221a, and three rectangular openings arranged in the vertical direction are formed in the inclined portion 221b (see FIG. 24). ). In addition, the reflector base 221 includes a vertically long bulging portion 221e that protrudes forward at both left and right ends, and a rectangular slit 221f that opens vertically is formed in front of the bulging portion 221e. As shown in the figure, the reflector base 221 has a shape in which the mounting positions of the three rotating lamps 244, 264, and 284 are recessed backward by two cylindrical portions 221a and inclined portions 221b and two bulging portions 221e. It has become.

  In addition, the reflector base 221 has a gently curved surface shape that is recessed rearward between the two cylindrical portions 221a and the inclined portion 221b (position where the central rotating lamp 284 is disposed). Between the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b, a lens opening portion 221g penetrating in a substantially trapezoidal shape in front view is formed on the left and right sides of the substantially horizontal center. Further, the reflector base 221 is mounted with a rotating lamp through which the front ends of the rotating lamp unit bases 241, 261, 281 of the rotating lamp units 240, 260, 280 having the rotating lamps 244, 264, 284 can pass from the rear side. A mouth 221h is formed. Also, the reflector base 221 has a plurality of mounting bosses 221 i that protrude rearward to fit with the mounting boss portions 211 of the top lamp base 210 and a plurality of mounting boss portions 212 that fit with the fixed boss portions 212 of the top lamp base 210 and protrude rearward. And a fixed boss 221j. Although not shown in detail, the reflector base 221 is also provided with an attachment boss 221k that is directly attached to the door frame base unit 100 without using the top lamp base 210.

  By the way, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes, in addition to the reflector base 221, a pair of top inner lenses 222 that are fixed to the substantially center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the reflector base 221, and the reflector base 221 on the rear side of the top inner lens 222. A pair of lens sheets 223 disposed at a position corresponding to the lens opening 221g, a pair of reflector decorative substrates 224 disposed on the rear side of the lens sheet 223 and having a plurality of color LEDs 224a mounted thereon, and a reflector base 221. A transparent round lens 225 that is inserted into the cylindrical portion 221a from the rear side and closes the opening 221c, and behind the cylindrical portion 221a and the inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221 with the round lens 225 and the top inner lens 222 interposed therebetween. Color LED 2 is arranged on the front 6a is a pair of partition decorative board 226 is mounted.

  The top inner lens 222 is formed of a transparent resin. The top inner lens 222 includes a curved lens portion 222a having a substantially trapezoidal curved surface that closes the lens opening 221g of the reflector base 221, and an inclined portion 221b of the reflector base 221. A partition lens portion 222b that closes the opening 221d and a round lens support portion 222c that contacts the rear end of the round lens 225 are provided. In addition, saw-shaped diffusion lens portions 222d are formed on the upper and lower sides of the curved lens portion 222a, and light can be emitted in a manner different from that of the curved lens portion 222a. Can be irregularly reflected.

  Further, the top inner lens 222 supports a lens sheet 223 on the rear side of the curved lens portion 222a sandwiched between upper and lower protruding pieces, and a protruding piece 222e protruding rearward from the rear side of the diffusion lens portion 222d. A support recess 222f is formed. As shown in the figure, in the reflector decorative substrate 224, a plurality of LEDs 224a are arranged at positions corresponding to the protruding pieces 222e of the top inner lens 222, and correspond to the curved surface lens portion 222a of the top inner lens 222. The positions are also distributed. Accordingly, the curved lens portion 222a and the diffusing lens portion 222d of the top inner lens 222 can emit light in different modes.

  The lens sheet 223 is a known optical sheet that displays transmitted light from the LED 224a mounted on the reflector decorative substrate 224 or reflected light from other light sources in a pearl shape or a chromatic shape. Further, the color LED 226a mounted on the partition decorative board 226 is an ultra-bright LED and can emit a strong flash.

  Further, the top lamp reflector unit 220 includes a top side lens 227 that closes a longitudinal slit 221f formed in the left and right bulged portions 221e of the reflector base 221, and a top side that fixes the upper end of the top side lens 227 from the front side. A lens retainer 228, a lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 and the reflector base 221, and a top side substrate base 230 that holds the lens sheet 229 by being fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221. And a top side substrate 231 mounted on the front surface with a color LED 231a fixed to the top side substrate base 230 and capable of irradiating light to the front top side lens 227 via the lens sheet 229.

  The top side lens 227 is formed in a square shape in a plan view with a transparent resin, and locking pieces 227a and 227b are formed at upper and lower ends, respectively. The locking piece 227b at the lower end is formed on the reflector base. The upper end locking piece 227a is pressed by the top side lens presser 228 after being locked to the lower end of the slit 221f in the set 221 so that it can be attached to the reflector base 221. The lens sheet 229 disposed on the rear side of the top side lens 227 is formed of an optical sheet similar to the lens sheet 223 described above, and is formed in a curved shape as shown in the figure. By being attached to 221, an appearance as if a columnar fluorescent tube is arranged on the rear side of the top side lens 227 can be exhibited.

  Further, as shown in the drawing, the top side substrate base 230 is formed in a vertically long rectangular frame shape, and the light from the LED 231a of the top side substrate 231 that is fixed to the rear side through the frame is converted into the lens sheet 229 and the top side. Light can be applied to the front surface via the lens 227.

[2-2-3. Revolving light unit]
Next, the three rotating lamp units 240, 260, and 280 in the top lamp illumination unit 200 will be described. First, as shown in FIG. 28, the left rotating lamp unit 240 has a circular opening 241a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 241a projects forward from the rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 241 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a substantially annular rotation fixed on the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 disposed coaxially with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241. A base part 242, a rotating lamp base gear 243 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 242, and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 242, and a lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The rotating lamp mounting port 221 of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base 244 and the rotating lamp base gear 243. A left rotating lamp motor 245 disposed on the rear axis of the rotating lamp unit and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241 so that the rotating shaft 245a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 241; A transmission gear 246 that is fixed to the rotating shaft 245a of the H.245 and meshes with the rotating lamp base gear 243, covers the entire rotating lamp base gear 243 and a part of the transmitting gear 246 from above, and covers the rotating lamp base gear 243 from the rotating portion base 242. The rotating unit holder 247 fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 241 and supported on the lower surface of the rotating unit holder 247 is coaxial with the rotating lamp base gear 243 and is directed to the lower rotating lamp 244. And a left rotating lamp substrate 248 having a high-intensity color LED 248a capable of emitting light.

  The left rotating lamp unit 240 is mounted with a rotating lamp unit cover 249 that covers the rotating part holder 247 from above, a left rotating position detection sensor 250 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244, and a left rotating position detection sensor 250. And a counterclockwise rotation position detection substrate 251.

  The rotating lamp unit base 241 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 241b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 241a and at a position rearward of the opening 241a. An attachment portion 241c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a motor fixing portion 241d arranged on the rear side of the opening 241a for fixing the left rotating lamp motor 245 are provided. The attachment step portion 241b is rotated from above. The part base 242 is adapted to be fitted. In addition, the rotating part base 242 has a left rotation position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 241a of the rotating lamp unit base 241 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 243. A substrate support portion 242b that supports the lower end of the substrate 251; a wiring locking portion 242c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 242b and that locks the wiring connected to the left rotation lamp substrate 248 and the left rotation position detection substrate 251; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 243 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 242a of the rotating portion base 242. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 243a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 243b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 242a of the rotating part base 242, and is inserted into the shaft support port 242a. 243 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 242a. In the left rotating lamp unit 240, the rotation position detecting piece 243b of the rotating lamp base gear 243 is detected by the left rotating position detection sensor 250, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 244 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown, the rotating portion holder 247 protrudes downward to a position coaxial with the shaft support opening 242a of the rotating portion base 242, and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft tube is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243. By inserting the holder shaft tube into the shaft support hole 243a of the rotating lamp base gear 243, the rotating lamp The base gear 243 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. In other words, in the left rotating lamp unit 240 of the present embodiment, the rotating lamp base 242 has a shaft support port 242a, a rotating shaft base gear 243 gear shaft cylinder and a shaft supporting hole 243a, and a rotating shaft holder 247 holder shaft cylinder. A base gear 243 is rotatably supported. The left rotating lamp substrate 248 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 247. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 247 has a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the left rotation position detection substrate 251 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 242b of the rotation unit base 242 on the lower surface. The left rotation position detection substrate 251 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 242 and the rotation unit holder 247.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 is disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp lens 252 and the transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 252 disposed on the lower side of the rotating lamp base gear 243 as shown in the figure. The reflector 253 is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector cover 254 that covers the reflector 253. The reflector 253 of the rotating lamp 244 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 253a, an opening 253b drilled in the center of the base portion 253a, and a base portion 253a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 253d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 253a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 243.

  The rotating lamp 244 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 252 facing the opening 253b of the reflector 253, and the rotating lamp lens 252 has an insertion hole 252a through which the mounting boss 253d of the reflector 253 can be inserted. The mounting boss 253d is inserted into the insertion hole 252a and the mounting boss 253d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 243, so that the rotating lamp lens 252 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 243 and the reflector 253. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 254 of the rotating lamp 244 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on the side surface of the reflector 253 facing the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 253c. 254a is formed.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 29, the right rotating lamp unit 260 has a circular opening 261a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 261a projects forward from the left rotating lamp mounting port 221h of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 261 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to be in the position, and a substantially circular shape arranged coaxially with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261. An annular rotating part base 262, a rotating lamp base gear 263 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 262 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 262, and hangs down from the rotating lamp base gear 263. The rotating lamp 264 fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base and the rotating lamp mounting of the reflector base 221 is substantially parallel to the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A right rotating lamp motor 265 that is disposed on the axis behind 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261 so that the rotating shaft 265a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261; A transmission gear 266 fixed to the rotating shaft 265a of the motor 265 and meshing with the rotating lamp base gear 263, the entire rotating lamp base gear 263 and a part of the transmitting gear 266 are covered from above, and the rotating lamp base gear 263 is covered with the rotating part base. Rotating portion holder 267 which is pivotally supported in cooperation with 262 and fixed to rotating lamp unit base 261, and is fixed to the lower surface of rotating portion holder 267 coaxially with rotating lamp base gear 263, to lower rotating lamp 264. And a right rotating lamp substrate 268 having a high-intensity color LED 268a capable of emitting light.

  The right rotating lamp unit 260 includes a rotating lamp unit cover 269 that covers the rotating unit holder 267 from above, a right rotating position detection sensor 270 that detects the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264, and a right rotating position detection sensor 270. And a right rotation position detection board 271.

  The rotating lamp unit base 261 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 hangs downward at an upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 261b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 261a and at a position behind the opening 261a. An attachment portion 261c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a motor fixing portion 261d arranged on the rear side of the opening 261a for fixing the right rotating lamp motor 265 are provided. The attachment step portion 261b rotates from above. The part base 262 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 262 detects the right rotation position at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 261a of the rotating lamp unit base 261 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 263. A substrate support portion 262b that supports the lower end of the substrate 271; a wiring locking portion 262c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 262b and that locks the wiring connected to the right rotation lamp substrate 268 and the right rotation position detection substrate 271; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 263 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating unit base 262, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft supporting port 262a of the rotating unit base 262. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 263a that has a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrates in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection that protrudes radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 263b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and is inserted into the shaft support port 262a. 263 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 262a. In the right rotating lamp unit 260, the rotating position detection piece 263b of the rotating lamp base gear 263 is detected by the right rotating position detection sensor 270, so that the rotating position of the rotating lamp 264 can be detected. Yes.

  Furthermore, although not shown, the rotating part holder 267 protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft support port 262a of the rotating part base 262, and can be inserted into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of this holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 263a of the rotating lamp base gear 263, the rotating lamp The base gear 263 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the right rotating lamp unit 260 of the present embodiment, the rotating lamp base 262 has a shaft support port 262a, a rotating shaft base gear 263 and a shaft shaft hole 263a, and a rotating shaft holder 267 has a holder shaft tube. A base gear 263 is rotatably supported. The right rotating lamp substrate 268 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 267. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 267 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the right rotation position detection substrate 271 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 262b of the rotation unit base 262 on the lower surface. The right rotation position detection board 271 is nipped and fixed between the rotating part base 262 and the rotating part holder 267.

  In addition, the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260 is generally larger than the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 as shown in the figure, and is a transparent disk-like shape disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 263. , A reflector 273 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 272 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 263, and a reflector cover 274 that covers the reflector 273. The reflector 273 of the rotating lamp 264 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 273a, an opening portion 273b drilled in the center of the base portion 273a, and a base portion 273a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 273d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 273a and whose upper ends can come into contact with the rotating lamp base gear 263.

  The rotating lamp 264 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 272 facing the opening 273b of the reflector 273, and the rotating lamp lens 272 is formed with an insertion hole 272a through which the mounting boss 273d of the reflector 273 can be inserted. The mounting boss 273d is inserted into the insertion hole 272a, and the mounting boss 273d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 263, so that the rotating lamp lens 272 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 263 and the reflector 273. It is designed to be fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 274 of the rotating lamp 264 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in a plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening portion on a side surface of the reflector 273 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 273c. 274a is formed.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 30, the central rotary lamp unit 280 has a circular opening 281 a penetrating in the vertical direction, and the opening 281 a is on the front side from the rotary lamp mounting port 221 h in the horizontal center of the reflector base 221. A rotating lamp unit base 281 fixed to the rear side of the reflector base 221 so as to protrude to the rear, and an opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 are arranged coaxially and fixed to the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281. A substantially annular rotating part base 282, a rotating lamp base gear 283 that is arranged coaxially with the rotating part base 282 and is slidably mounted on the upper surface of the rotating part base 282, and depends from the rotating lamp base gear 283. The rotating lamp 284 fixed to the lower surface thereof and the axis of the rotating lamp base gear 283 are substantially parallel to the rotation of the reflector base 221. A central rotating lamp motor 285 that is disposed on the axis behind the lamp mounting port 221h and that is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281 so that the rotating shaft 285a protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotating lamp unit base 281; A transmission gear 286 that is fixed to the rotation shaft 285a of the central rotary lamp motor 285 and meshes with the rotary lamp base gear 283, and the entire rotary lamp base gear 283 and a part of the transmission gear 286 are covered from above and the rotary lamp base gear 283 is covered. A rotating part holder 287 that is pivotally supported in cooperation with the rotating part base 282 and fixed to the rotating lamp unit base 281, and is fixed to the lower surface of the rotating part holder 287 coaxially with the rotating lamp base gear 283, and rotates downward. And a central rotating lamp substrate 288 having a high-luminance color LED 288a capable of emitting light toward the lamp 284.

  The central rotary lamp unit 280 is mounted with a rotary lamp unit cover 289 that covers the rotary unit holder 287 from above, a central rotational position detection sensor 290 that detects the rotational position of the rotary lamp 284, and a central rotational position detection sensor 290. And a central rotational position detection board 291.

  The rotating lamp unit base 281 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 hangs downward on the upper surface thereof at an attachment step 281b formed substantially along the inner periphery of the opening 281a and at a position rearward of the opening 281a. An attachment portion 281c attached to the rear side of the reflector base 221 and a motor fixing portion 281d arranged on the rear side of the opening 281a to fix the central rotary lamp motor 285 are provided. The attachment step portion 281b is rotated from above. The part base 282 is fitted. In addition, the rotating portion base 282 has a center rotational position detected at a predetermined position on the upper surface that is coaxial with the opening 281a of the rotating lamp unit base 281 and is smaller in diameter than the outer periphery of the rotating lamp base gear 283. A substrate support portion 282b for supporting the lower end of the substrate 291; and a wire locking portion 282c that is disposed behind the substrate support portion 282b and that locks wires connected to the central rotary lamp substrate 288 and the central rotational position detection substrate 291; It has.

  The rotating lamp base gear 283 is an annular spur gear having an outer diameter larger than that of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282, and extends downward from the lower surface to the shaft support port 282a of the rotating unit base 282. A cylindrical gear shaft (not shown) that can be inserted into the shaft, a shaft support hole 283a having a smaller diameter than the gear shaft and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a rotational position detection projecting radially outward from the outer periphery of the lower surface And a piece 283b. The outer diameter of the shaft tube of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the shaft support port 282a of the rotating part base 282, and is inserted into the shaft support port 282a. 283 can rotate substantially coaxially with the shaft support port 282a. In the central rotating lamp unit 280, the rotational position detection piece 283b of the rotating lamp base gear 283 is detected by the central rotational position detection sensor 290, so that the rotational position of the rotating lamp 284 can be detected. Yes.

  Further, although not shown in the drawings, the rotating part holder 287 has a cylindrical shape that protrudes downward to a position that is coaxial with the shaft supporting port 282a of the rotating part base 282 and can be inserted into the shaft supporting hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. The holder shaft cylinder is formed. The outer diameter of the holder shaft cylinder is slightly smaller than the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283. By inserting the holder shaft cylinder into the shaft support hole 283a of the rotating lamp base gear 283, the rotating lamp The base gear 283 can be rotated substantially coaxially with the holder shaft cylinder. That is, in the central rotating lamp unit 280 of this embodiment, the rotating lamp base 282 has a shaft support port 282a, a rotating shaft base gear 283 gear shaft tube and a shaft supporting hole 283a, and a rotating shaft holder 287 holder shaft tube. A base gear 283 is rotatably supported. The central rotating lamp substrate 288 is fixed to the lower end of the holder shaft cylinder of the rotating part holder 287. Although not shown in the drawings, the rotation unit holder 287 is provided with a substrate support unit that supports the upper end of the center rotation position detection substrate 291 at a position corresponding to the substrate support unit 282b of the rotation unit base 282 on the lower surface. The central rotation position detection substrate 291 is nipped and fixed between the rotation unit base 282 and the rotation unit holder 287.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the rotating lamp 284 of the central rotating body unit 280 has an intermediate size between the rotating lamp 244 of the left rotating lamp unit 240 and the rotating lamp 264 of the right rotating lamp unit 260. A transparent disk-shaped rotating lamp lens 292 disposed below the rotating lamp base gear 283, a reflector 293 disposed below the rotating lamp lens 292 and fixed to the lower surface of the rotating lamp base gear 283, and the reflector 293 And a reflector cover 294 for covering. The reflector 293 of the rotating lamp 284 is plated with a metallic luster on its surface, and has a disk-like base portion 293a, an opening portion 293b drilled in the center of the base portion 293a, and a base portion 293a. And a plurality of mounting bosses 293 d that extend upward from the upper surface of the base portion 293 a and whose upper ends can contact the rotating lamp base gear 283.

  The rotating lamp 284 has the lower surface of the rotating lamp lens 292 facing the opening 293b of the reflector 293, and the rotating lamp lens 292 has an insertion hole 292a through which the mounting boss 293d of the reflector 293 can be inserted. The mounting boss 293d is inserted into the insertion hole 292a, and the mounting boss 293d is fixed to the rotating lamp base gear 283, whereby the rotating lamp lens 292 is narrowed between the rotating lamp base gear 283 and the reflector 293. It is designed to be held and fixed. In addition, the reflector cover 294 of the rotating lamp 284 has a substantially regular octagonal shape in plan view, has a box shape with the upper part opened, and has an opening on a side surface of the reflector 293 that faces the inner surface side of the reflecting portion 293c. 294a is formed.

  By the way, the central rotating lamp unit 280 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of front side surfaces of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 formed between the rotating unit holder 287 and the rotating lamp unit cover 289 as shown in the drawing. A cover lens 295 having a plurality of protrusions 295a inserted into the notch 289a from the rear side, and a cover decorative substrate 296 disposed on the rear side of the cover lens 295 and having a plurality of color LEDs 296a mounted thereon. In addition. The cover lens 295 and the cover decoration substrate 296 are formed on the rotating lamp unit cover 289 while the lower ends thereof are supported by the grooved lens support portion 287a and the substrate support portion 287b formed at the front end of the rotation portion holder 287, respectively. The upper end is supported by a groove-shaped lens support portion and a substrate support portion (not shown). In this embodiment, the front end of the rotating lamp unit cover 289 of the central rotating lamp unit 280 can be illuminated and decorated by causing the LED of the cover decoration board 296 to emit light.

[2-3. Dish unit]
Next, the dish unit 300 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 54. 31 is a front perspective view of the dish unit, FIG. 32 is a rear perspective view of the dish unit, and FIG. 33 is a plan view of the dish unit. 34 is a cross-sectional view taken along line AA in FIG. FIG. 35 is a rear view showing the plate unit with the plate back plate removed, and FIG. 36 is a perspective view showing the plate unit after the plate back plate and the lending unit are removed. FIG. 37 is an exploded perspective view showing the plate unit disassembled for each main component from the front, and FIG. 38 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 37 from the back. FIG. 39 is an exploded perspective view showing the dish unit main body of the dish unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 40 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. 39 from the rear. FIG. 41 is a rear view showing the first ball removal mechanism in the dish unit, and FIG. 42 is a perspective view showing the second ball removal mechanism in the dish unit later. 43 is an exploded perspective view showing the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded state, FIG. 44 is a bottom view of the operation button unit in the dish unit with the operation button unit substrate removed, and FIG. FIG. 46 is a bottom perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the unit from below, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view showing the main button of the operation button unit in the dish unit in an exploded manner.

  47 is a sectional view of the handle device attached to the door frame, FIG. 48 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the operation handle portion constituting the handle device and the joint unit, and FIG. 49 is an operation in the handle device. It is a disassembled perspective view of a handle part. 50 is an operation diagram for explaining the operation of the operation handle portion and the joint unit. FIG. 51 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the handle device and the hitting ball launching device provided on the main body frame. It is sectional drawing for demonstrating the state which connects a handle | steering-wheel apparatus and a hit ball | bowl launcher. Further, FIG. 53A is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls in the dish unit, and FIG. 53B is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the second ball outlet and the flow of game balls in the dish unit. It is. FIG. 54 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the horizontally long sphere inlet and the storage tray in the dish unit.

  The tray unit 300 in the door frame 5 of the present embodiment can store game balls that are paid out from a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, and a ball hitting device 650, which will be described later, via the ball feeding unit 170. Can be supplied to. 37 and 38, the dish unit 300 covers a front surface of the dish body 310 and a dish body 310 having a storage tray 311 that is open upward and rearward and can store a predetermined amount of game balls. The dish unit main body 320, the plate-like dish back plate 340 that covers the rear surfaces of the dish unit main body 320 and the dish body 310, and the first ball removal mechanism that can discharge all the game balls stored in the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310 350, a second ball removing mechanism 360 that can discharge a part of the game balls stored in the storage plate of the plate 310, and a CR unit (not shown) installed adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1 are operated. A ball unit 301, an operation button unit 370 that is fixed to the upper surface of the dish body 310 and can be operated by the player according to a game state (game situation), and a dish unit main body 320 and a dish back plate 340 below the dish body 310. while A lower speaker unit 390 having a lower speaker 391 that is larger than the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100 and a handle base 303 that is disposed in the lower right corner of the dish unit main body 320 when viewed from the front. And a handle device 400 that is supported by the handle base 303 and performs a game ball driving operation. As in this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is electrically connected to the CR unit is different from a ball lending machine that rents out a game ball used for a game by inserting cash, and has a high gambling game content ( So-called game content having a probability variation) can be adopted. Reference numeral 302 denotes a wiring cover that covers the electrical wiring connected to the dish illumination board 336 in the later-described dish unit main body 320. Further, as shown in the drawing, a tray relay board 190 that electrically connects the door decoration drive board 192 and the operation button unit 370 is disposed on the left side of the dish back plate 340 when viewed from the front. The saucer relay board 190 is also electrically connected to the side decoration board 126 of the left side speaker illumination unit 120L.

  As shown in the figure, the lending unit 301 in the dish unit 300 is fixed to the upper side of the dish back plate 340 at the approximate center in the left-right direction, and is disposed next to the lending button 301a and the lending button 301a. A return button 301b, and a remaining lending indicator (not shown) arranged between the lending button 301a and the return button 301b and displaying the remaining number of cash and prepaid cards on the CR unit are provided. When the ball rental unit 301 pushes a ball rental button 301a after inserting cash or a prepaid card into a CR unit provided adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1, a predetermined number of game balls are transferred to the dish unit 300. Can be rented (paid out) into the storage tray 311 and when the return button 301b is pushed, the balance of the loaned portion is drawn and the cash balance or prepaid card that has been inserted is returned. Yes.

  Further, the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372 of the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 are used when the player participates in the game content (game effect) performed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 provided on the game board 4 or the like. To operate.

[2-3-1. Dish body]
First, as shown in the drawing, the plate body 310 in the plate unit 300 occupies approximately 2/3 of the whole from the left end in a plan view, and has a storage tray 311 having a predetermined depth opened upward and rearward, and a storage plate 311 A second ball outlet 312 which is arranged at a predetermined position on the bottom and penetrates in the vertical direction, and is arranged on the downstream side of the third inclined surface 311c from the right end of the storage plate 311 and is connected to the storage plate 311 and can flow game balls. The first ball extraction path 313 (see FIGS. 35 and 38) that can guide the game ball to a position just below the second ball extraction port 312 and the upper side of the storage dish 311 are opened in a substantially rhombus shape and operated. An operation button unit mounting recess 314 in which the button unit 370 can be mounted, and a first ball extraction button 351 of the first ball extraction mechanism 350 that opens in a substantially circular shape behind the operation button unit installation recess 314 is mounted. Ball removal A button mounting port 315, a first ball vent mechanism supporting portion 316 for supporting the first ball vent mechanism 350 is disposed substantially directly below the first ball vent button mounting port 315 is mainly provided with.

  The storage plate 311 in the plate body 310 is disposed on the front surface of the ball inlet 341 of the plate back plate 340, and has a first inclined surface 311a that is lowered toward the right side and the front side in plan view, and a right end of the first inclined surface 311a. A second inclined surface 311b that is continuous with the rear part of the plate and decreases toward the right and rear sides, and a third inclined surface that is continuous with the right end of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases toward the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340. An inclined surface 311c, a fourth inclined surface 311d that is continuous with a front portion of the right end portion of the first inclined surface 311a and a front end portion of the second inclined surface 311b, and decreases toward the right and second inclined surfaces 311b; A fifth inclined surface 311e that is continuous with the right end portion of the four inclined surfaces 311d and decreases toward the fourth inclined surface 311d (see FIGS. 33 and 34).

  In addition, the storage tray 311 is disposed between the partition wall 311f where the rising game ball cannot be crossed from the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, and between the partition wall 311f and the third inclined surface 311c. And a sixth inclined surface 311g that decreases toward the third inclined surface 311c. The second ball outlet 312 is arranged between the first inclined surface 311a and the second inclined surface 311b. The second ball removal port 312 is normally closed by the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360.

  In the storage tray 311 of this embodiment, the first inclined surface 311a has a quadrangular shape (trapezoidal shape) that occupies approximately half the size of the storage tray 311 in plan view as shown in the figure. The second inclined surface 311b has a variable pentagon shape in which the length in the left-right direction is about 1/4 of the length of the storage plate 311 and the depth in the front-rear direction becomes narrower toward the third inclined surface 311c. The third inclined surface 311c has a horizontally long rectangular shape whose depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball. The fourth inclined surface 311d has a rectangular shape (trapezoidal shape) whose length in the left-right direction is substantially the same as that of the second inclined surface 311b and decreases in length toward the second inclined surface 311b. Further, the fifth inclined surface 311e has a rear end portion extending from the left end portion in the right direction by a predetermined distance substantially parallel to the third inclined surface 311c and then obliquely extending toward the rear third inclined surface 311c. While extending along the third inclined surface 311c across the partition wall 311f, the front end portion (right end portion) extends toward the right toward the right end portion of the rear end portion so as to extend rearward, and as a whole. The partition wall 311f is formed along the rear end of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the storage plate 311 includes a left end portion and a front end portion of the first inclined surface 311a, a front end portion of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and a front end portion (right end portion of the fifth inclined surface). The outer peripheral wall 311h rising upward is provided, and the outer peripheral wall 311h has a shape in which the storage tray 311 is recessed downward from the upper surface of the dish body 310 by a predetermined amount. In addition, the outer peripheral wall 311h of the storage tray 311 is formed in a loose arc shape that goes forward as it goes rightward at the front end portions of the first inclined surface 311a, the fourth inclined surface 311d, and the fifth inclined surface 311e. When the game ball that has flowed into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inlet 341 comes into contact with the position facing the ball inlet 341 in the outer peripheral wall 311h, it is reflected in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e and It distribute | circulates on the four inclined surfaces 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is a gentle slope that allows the game ball flowing into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 to climb up to the right end of the fifth inclined surface 311e, Is changed to flow downward (to the left) in the direction of the fourth inclined surface 311d. That is, the storage tray 311 of the present embodiment once diverts the game ball flowing in from the ball inflow port 341 to the fifth inclined surface 311e and then flows into the third inclined surface 311c serving as a supply path to the ball supply port 342. It is supposed to let you.

  In addition, the sixth inclined surface 311g in the storage tray 311 has a steeper inclination angle than the other inclined surfaces 311a to 311e, and a plurality of game balls are placed on the third inclined surface 311c on the downstream side. It is possible to facilitate alignment in a left-right direction toward the sphere supply port 342. Note that a stainless steel rail body 304 is attached to the third inclined surface 311c so as to improve the wear resistance of the circulating game balls and to prevent static electricity charged on the game balls. It can be removed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 35 and 38, the third inclined surface 311c of the storage tray 311 is formed in a groove shape in which the right end of the storage pan 311 sinks obliquely to the lower right and hangs downward and the rear side is opened. In addition, it is formed so as to be continuous with the first ball extraction path 313, and a flow path that is folded back with respect to the left-right direction by being continuous with the first ball extraction path 313 is formed. The boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 is configured such that the flow path is closed by the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350. As desired for the slide 356, the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 is opened. As a result, the game ball that has flowed down the third inclined surface 311c is blocked from flowing by the first ball removal slide 356, so that it flows to the ball supply port 342 side.

  Note that the first sphere removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 has a first sphere beside the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere removal path 313 (right side in front view, left side in FIG. 35). A slide groove 316a in which the extraction slide 356 is inserted and arranged to be slidable in the left-right direction, and a first sphere described later on the opposite side of the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first sphere extraction path 313 across the slide groove 316a. A flange portion 316b that locks the lower end portion of the extraction spring 357 is formed.

[2-3-2. Plate unit body]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 39 and 40, the dish unit main body 320 in the dish unit 300 constitutes the front surface of the dish unit 300, covers the front surface of the dish body 310 and the lower speaker unit 390, and is opened upward and rearward. A box-shaped main body 321 is provided. The main body 321 is shaped such that about 3/4 of the left side bulges forward in front view, and the lower speaker unit 390 is accommodated inside (rear side) of the bulged portion. It has become. Further, the main body 321 includes a speaker opening 321a formed so as to penetrate to a position corresponding to the lower speaker 391 of the lower speaker unit 390 on the right side of the center of the front surface of the bulged portion, and a speaker opening 321a. A dummy opening 321b formed on the left side and a second ball removal button opening 321c formed on the left side of the dummy opening 321b are formed so as to penetrate therethrough. Further, the main body 321 has an elliptical handle base attachment port 321d for attaching the handle base 303 to the lower right corner, and a lock opening 321e disposed above the handle base attachment port 321d and facing a cylinder lock 1010 described later. A rectangular duct opening 321f that opens to the right side of the portion that bulges to the front side on the left side of the handle base mounting port d, and a rectangular sphere discharge port 321g that opens to a substantially central lower portion in the left-right direction. I have.

  The dish unit main body 320 of the dish unit 300 has a front back plate 322 that covers the speaker opening 321a and the dummy opening 321b of the main body portion 321 from the front side, and a speaker of the main body portion 321 through the through hole 322a of the front back plate 322. A plate-shaped right cover 323 made of punching metal, which is disposed on the front surface corresponding to the opening 321a, and having four corners cut off, and disposed on the approximate center of the front surface of the right cover 323, which is smaller than the right cover 323 and has a metallic luster on the surface. A plate-shaped right decoration base 324 that has been plated, a right decoration 325 that is smaller than the right decoration base 324 and disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the right decoration base 324, and a main body portion of the front back plate 322 A plate-shaped left cover made of punching metal and cut off at the four corners, disposed on the front surface corresponding to the dummy opening 321b of 321 26, a plate-like left decorative base 327 that is disposed in the approximate center of the front surface of the left cover 326 and that is smaller than the left cover 326 and has a metallic luster plating process on the surface thereof, The frame-shaped front surface that decorates the periphery of the speaker-shaped opening 321a, the dummy opening 321b, and the second ball-release button opening 321c of the main body 321 and the plate-shaped left decoration 328 that is smaller than the left decoration base 327. And a main body 329. A plurality of through holes 322a are formed in the front back plate 322 of the dish unit main body 320 so as to penetrate the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 as desired. The punch holes of the through holes 322a and the right decoration base 324 are formed. The sound from the lower speaker 391 can be satisfactorily transmitted to the outside via (not shown).

  In addition, the tray unit main body 320 of the present embodiment has a main body left decorative base 330 fixed to the left end of the main body portion 321 on the front side of the tray relay board 190 and a front surface of the main body left decorative base 330 and has a metallic gloss on the surface. And a main body left ornament 331 that has been plated. The main body left decoration base 330 has translucency.

  Furthermore, the plate unit main body 320 is formed with a plate-like duct cover made of punching metal that covers the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 and a duct notch 333a such that the duct cover faces from the surface. And a main body right decoration 333 that covers the entire right side surface of the portion 321 that bulges to the front side and that has been subjected to a metallic luster plating process on the surface.

  The dish unit main body 320 has a plurality of horizontally long slits 334a arranged along the upper edge of the main body portion 321 and penetrating in the vertical direction, and a main body decoration 334 whose surface is plated with metallic luster, An upper decoration lens 335 having a light guide portion 335a disposed in the main body 321 below the main body upper decoration 334 and inserted into the slit 334a of the main body upper decoration 334, and an upper decoration lens 335 is disposed below the upper decoration lens 335. And a dish decorating board 336 on which a plurality of color LEDs 336a are mounted. By appropriately emitting light from the LED 336a of the dish illumination board 336, the main body upper decoration 334, that is, the upper edge of the dish unit main body 320 can be illuminated and decorated via the upper decoration lens 335.

[2-3-3. Dish back plate]
Subsequently, as shown in FIGS. 37 and 38, the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300 is formed in a horizontally long plate shape, and is disposed in the upper left corner portion in a front view, and is a horizontally long rectangular shape in the front-rear direction. A sphere inlet 341 penetrating through the sphere, a sphere supply port 342 penetrating in a rectangular shape through which a game ball can be passed with a predetermined distance from the sphere inlet 341, and a rear side communicating with the sphere inlet 341. And a square tube-shaped prize ball contact bar 343 extending mainly. As shown in FIG. 34 and the like, the ball inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 opens into the storage dish 311 of the dish body 310, and the length in the left-right direction is the first inclined surface 311a of the storage dish 311. Is approximately the same length. Further, the sphere supply port 342 is disposed at a position corresponding to the first sphere removal slide 356 of the first sphere removal mechanism 350 at the right end of the third inclined surface 331 c in the storage tray 311. The prize ball contact bar 343 is disposed at a position biased to the left end in front view with respect to the ball inlet 341 and the length in the left-right direction is about half of the length of the ball inlet 341. The rear end penetrates the prize ball passing port 111 of the door frame base main body 110 and communicates with an outlet 921 at the lower end (front end) of the front guide passage 920 in the full tank unit 900 described later. .

  In addition, the dish back plate 340 is disposed at a position where the front end of the prize ball contact bar 343 is a predetermined amount behind the ball inlet 341 and between the ball inlet 341 and the prize ball contact bar 343. The ball inlet 341 further includes a shelf 344 that extends over the entire length in the left-right direction and through which game balls can be circulated. The game balls distributed through the prize ball contact bar 343 by the shelf portion 344 can be made to flow downstream from the second ball outlet 312 of the storage tray 311.

  Further, the dish back plate 340 corresponds to a ball extraction path 393 of the lower speaker unit 390 described later, and has a ball extraction path opening 345 penetrating in a substantially L shape, and a ball flow in the upper left of the ball extraction path opening 345 when viewed from the front. A latch opening 346 that is disposed below the inlet 341 (the second ball outlet 312 in the dish 310) and penetrates in a rectangular shape through which a rear end of a latch unit 366 of a second ball outlet mechanism 360 described later is inserted. , A wiring insertion port 347 that is arranged in the upper right corner when viewed from the front and penetrates in a substantially rectangular shape, and a ball rental unit 301 that is arranged on the upper side of the dish back plate 340 between the ball inlet 341 and the wiring insertion port 347 And a ball rental unit mounting portion 348.

[2-3-4. First ball removal mechanism]
Next, the first ball removal mechanism 350 in the dish unit 300 includes a first ball removal button 351 and a first ball removal button 351 that are pressed by the player, as shown in FIGS. A first ball release button base 352 that is slidably supported in the vertical direction and is inserted from the lower side with respect to the first ball release button mounting opening 315 of the plate body 310, and a dish on the upper portion of the first ball release button base 352 The first ball removal button decoration body 353 fixed so that the first ball removal button 351 protrudes upward across the body 310, the first ball removal button decoration body 353, and the first ball removal button base 352 are supported. A rotation shaft 354 supported at the position of the first ball removal mechanism support portion 316 of the dish body 310 on the right side (left side in FIG. 41) in front view of the lower end of the first ball removal button 351, and a rotation shaft 354 times An inverted L-shaped first sphere extraction crank 355 whose one end is in contact with the lower end of the first sphere extraction button 351 and the other end extends downward, and the other end of the first sphere extraction crank 355. The third lower surface 311c of the dish 310 and the first ball removal path 313 are supported by the first ball removal mechanism support portion 316 of the dish 310 so as to be slidable substantially in the left-right direction. And a first ball removal spring 357 that urges the first ball removal crank 355 to rotate in a predetermined direction.

  The first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is inserted in the slide groove 316a of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310 so that it can slide in the left-right direction. In this state, the first sphere extraction crank 355 rotates and is slid in the left-right direction by the lower end on the other end side of the first sphere extraction crank 355. By sliding the first ball removal slide 356 in the left-right direction, the tip can move forward and backward with respect to the flow path at the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311 c of the dish body 310 and the first ball removal path 313. When the advancing to the boundary part and closing the flow path, the game ball that has circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied to the ball supply port 342, and the flow path is retreated from the boundary part. When opened, the game balls that have circulated through the third inclined surface 311c can be supplied (discharged) to the first ball removal path 313 side.

  Further, the upper end portion of the first ball removal spring 357 is locked to the first ball removal crank 355 on the opposite side to the one end side contacting the lower end portion of the first ball removal button 351 with the rotation shaft 354 interposed therebetween. A collar portion 355a is formed. The first ball removal spring 357 has its upper end engaged with the flange 355a of the first ball removal crank 355 and its lower end engaged with the flange 316b of the first ball removal mechanism support 316 in the dish 310. By stopping, the first ball removal crank 355 is moved to the position where the first ball removal slide 356 closes the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313, and the first ball removal button 351 is the most. It can be urged to rotate in the direction of the raised position.

  When the first ball removal button 351 is pressed by the player, the first ball removal mechanism 350 has a first ball removal crank 355 via a contact pin 355b that contacts the lower end of the first ball removal button 351. Is rotated in a direction in which one end thereof moves downward against the urging force of the first ball release spring 357, and the other end side is away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball extraction path 313. Move to. Then, the first ball removal slide 356 moves in a direction away from the boundary portion between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal passage 313 together with the lower end of the first ball removal crank 355, and the tip of the first ball removal slide 356 is moved. The third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313 communicate with each other by retreating from the flow path at the boundary portion, and all the game balls in the third inclined surface 311c, that is, the storage dish 311 are transferred to the first ball. It can be discharged to the outside through the extraction path 313.

  When the pressing of the first ball removal button 351 is released, the first ball removal crank 355 is rotated by the urging force of the first ball removal spring 357 so that the first ball removal button 351 is raised and the first ball is released. The leading end of the pull slide 356 advances into the flow path at the boundary between the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball discharge path 313, closes the flow path, and is on the third inclined surface 311c (in the storage tray 311). A game ball can be supplied to the hitting ball launching device 650 through the ball supply port 342.

[2-3-5. Second ball removal mechanism]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 42 and the like, the second ball removal mechanism 360 in the dish unit 300 is a second ball that protrudes forward from the second ball removal button opening 321c of the main body portion 321 in the dish unit main body 320. A pull-out button 361, a second ball-extracting slide 362 fitted and fixed at the tip, and supported so as to be slidable in the front-rear direction by a lower speaker unit 390 described later, and the front and rear of the second ball-extracting slide 362 The second ball-extracting crank 363 that is pivotally supported by the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be able to rotate around an axis extending in the left-right direction, and the second ball-extracting crank 363 is rotated to rotate the plate 310 Rotation about an axis extending in the vertical direction between a closed position for closing the second ball outlet 312 and an open position for opening the second ball outlet 312 A second ball-extracting shutter 364, a second ball-extracting spring 365 that urges the second ball-extracting shutter 364 to a closed position where the second ball-extracting port 312 is closed, and a second ball-extracting spring 365 A latch unit 366 capable of holding the second ball removal shutter 364 in the open position against the biasing force, and an opening corresponding to the second ball removal port 312 while slidably supporting the lower surface of the second ball removal shutter 364. A second ball removal base 367 fixed to the lower side of the plate body 310 and a rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 slidably and supporting a latch unit 366, which will be described later. A second ball removal mechanism support 368 (see FIGS. 35 and 38) that pivotally supports the second ball removal crank 363 in cooperation with the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390; To have.

  The second ball removal slide 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 has a transmission groove 362a that is opened upward at the rear end portion thereof and into which the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is inserted, and protrudes rearward from the rear end portion. An engagement protrusion 362b that can be engaged with the engagement claw 366a of the latch unit 366 is provided. The second ball removal crank 363 is a rod-like member extending substantially in the vertical direction, and a lower end portion thereof is inserted into the transmission groove 362a of the second ball removal slide 362 from above, and substantially in the middle in the vertical direction. The portion is pivotally supported by the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 so as to be rotatable. Thus, when the second ball removal slide 362 slides in the front-rear direction, the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 moves along with the slide of the transmission groove 362a, and the second ball removal crank 363 rotates. The upper end of the second ball removal crank 363 moves in the direction opposite to the lower end.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the second ball removal shutter 364 is disposed above the second ball removal slide 362, and the second ball removal port 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball removal base 367 are provided. A substantially semicircular (D-shaped) plate-like closing portion 364a that can be closed, and a rod-like collar portion that extends from the closing portion 364a in one of the left and right directions (left direction in front view, right direction in FIG. 42). 364b, and is formed in a substantially P-shape as a whole. In addition, the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported by the plate body 310 and the second ball removal base 367 so that the tip of the flange portion 364b can rotate about an axis extending in the vertical direction, and the flange portion 364b. On the rear side, the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 comes into contact with a substantially middle portion in the left-right direction. Further, the front end portion of the second ball extraction spring 365 is locked to the rear base end portion of the flange portion 364b of the second ball extraction shutter 364. Although not shown, the rear end portion of the second ball release spring 365 is locked by a locking boss that hangs downward from the lower surface of the dish 310, and the second ball release spring 365 is provided. Accordingly, the closing portion 364a of the second ball removal shutter 364 is biased to a closed position (position shown in FIG. 42) for closing the second ball removal port 312.

  The second ball removal base 360 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 allows the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 to pass between the opening 367a and the position where the second ball removal shutter 364 is pivotally supported. A slit 367b extending in the front-rear direction is provided, and the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 supported on the lower side of the second ball removal base 367 through the slit 367b is the upper surface of the second ball removal base 367. It can contact | abut with the collar part 364b of the 2nd ball | bowl extraction shutter 364 arrange | positioned in this. In addition, the 2nd ball removal base 367 is formed in the shape of a shallow dish, as shown in the figure, and can form an accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 with the dish body 310. Yes. Further, the height of the accommodation space for accommodating the second ball removal shutter 364 is set to be smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball, and the second ball removal shutter 364 is rotated to turn the second ball removal port 312. Even if is opened, the game ball is prevented from entering between the dish body 310 and the second ball removal base 367.

  In the second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment, when the player presses the second ball removal button 361 that protrudes forward from the front surface of the dish unit main body 320, the second ball removal slide 362 slides backward, The second ball removal crank 363 rotates so that the lower end portion of the second ball removal crank 363 is guided rearwardly by the transmission groove 362a of the two ball removal slide 362. Then, as the second ball removal crank 363 rotates, the upper end portion thereof moves forward in the direction opposite to the lower end portion, and the second ball removal shutter 364 that contacts the upper end portion of the second ball removal crank 363. However, it rotates so that the closing portion 364a moves forward around the tip of the flange portion 364b against the urging force of the second ball release spring 365. Thus, when the closing part 364a moves forward and the second ball outlet 312 of the dish body 310 and the opening 367a of the second ball outlet base 367 are opened, the second ball outlet 312 in the storage dish 311 is opened. Thus, the game balls stored on the upstream side are discharged to the lower outside of the dish unit 300 through the second ball outlet 312.

  The second ball removal mechanism 360 of the present embodiment includes a latch unit 366, and the second ball removal button 361 is pushed so that the engagement protrusion 362b at the rear end of the second ball removal slide 362 is in the latch unit 366. When abutting between the pair of engaging claws 366a, the pair of engaging claws 366a are closed and engaged so as to sandwich the engaging projection 362b, and the second ball is resisted against the urging force of the second ball releasing spring 365. The second button 314 is held in the opened (opened) position when the button 361 is pressed, that is, by the closing portion 364a of the second ball shutter 364. In this state, when the second ball release button 361 is pressed, the pair of engagement claws 366a of the latch unit 366 are opened, and the engagement with the engagement protrusions 362b is released, and the biasing force of the second ball release spring 365 is used. The closing part 364a of the second ball extraction shutter 364 can be returned to a position where the second ball extraction port 312 is closed.

[2-3-6. Operation button unit]
Next, the operation button unit 370 in the dish unit 300 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button unit mounting recess 314 of the dish body 310 in the dish unit 300, as shown in FIGS. A pair of an octagonal main button 371 obtained by cutting off the four corners of a square in plan view and a left base button 372L and a right subbutton 372R having a home base shape in plan view and arranged symmetrically on the left and right sides of the main button 371. Sub-button 372, main button 371 and sub-button 372 are slidably held in the up-down direction, and operation button unit base 373 inserted into operation button unit mounting recess 314 of dish 310, and operation button unit base A plate-like operation button unit decoration member 374 for decorating the upper surface of 373; Includes a work key unit operation button unit substrate 375 color LED375a is to be fixed to the lower light emission decorated the operation button unit 370 has a plurality of mounted on the upper surface of the base 373, a.

  The operation button unit 370 includes a main button sensor 376 that detects an operation of the main button 371, a left sub button sensor 377L that detects an operation of the left sub button 372L, and a right sub that detects an operation of the right sub button 372R. A button sensor 377R. The main button sensor 376, the left sub button sensor 377L, and the right sub button sensor 377R are photosensors each having a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and are fixed to predetermined positions on the operation button unit substrate 375, respectively. .

  As shown in the figure, the operation button unit base 373 in the operation button unit 370 has a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, and includes a main button housing recess 373a capable of housing the main button 371 from above, and a main button housing recess 373a. A plurality of guide grooves 373b that are formed on the inner peripheral surface and extend in the vertical direction to guide the main button 371 in the vertical direction, and a substantially circular opening formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a. 373c, a plurality of light guide openings 373d that guide the light from the LED 375a of the operation button unit board 375 that opens at a predetermined width along the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a to the upper surface side, and the sub A pair of sub-button housing recesses 373e that can accommodate the button 372 from above, and a diagonal upper corner of the long axis The screw insertion hole 373f, the plate-like top plate portion 373g that forms the upper surface of the operation button unit base 373, and the plate-like shape that hangs downward from the lower surface along the outer periphery of the top plate portion 373g. Side wall part 373h.

  The operation button unit base 373 is formed in a box shape having a lower surface opened by a top plate portion 373g and a side wall portion 373h. A main button housing recess 373a and a plurality of ( Here, eight light guide openings 373d, two sub-button accommodating recesses 373e, and two screw insertion holes 373f are opened. In the operation button unit base 373, the main button receiving recess 373a is formed with a thickness where the guide groove 373b is not formed, and the strength and rigidity of the inner wall surface and the bottom surface are increased. In addition, each light guide opening 373d formed on the outer periphery of the main button housing recess 373a is formed in a cylindrical shape that is long in the vertical direction, and is also formed by the outer peripheral wall of the cylindrical light guide opening 373d. The main button accommodating recess 373a is reinforced (see FIG. 44).

  45 and 46, the main button 371 includes a main button lens 371a that forms the upper surface of the main button 371 and has translucency, and a cylinder that supports the main button lens 371a and is open at the top and bottom. Main button base 371b, a vibrating body 371c disposed below the main button base 371b, and a vibrating body holder that encloses the vibrating body 371c and is fixed to the lower side of the main button base 371b via mounting screws 371d. 371e. Although not shown, the main button 371 has an upper end that contacts the lower side surface of the main button base 371b and a lower end that contacts the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373. A main button spring is provided to bias the 371 so as to rise.

  The main button lens 371a of the main button 371 is formed in a box shape with an octagonal shape in plan view and an open bottom surface, and has a smooth shape on the front side, whereas a plurality of small lenses are provided on the back side. The light is emitted from the LEDs 375a of the operation button unit board 375 so that the entire surface of the main button 371 can be decorated with light emission substantially uniformly.

  As shown in the figure, the main button base 371b has an octagonal outer shape similar to that of the main button lens 371a. The lower end portion extends downward from an opening 373c formed in the bottom surface of the main button housing recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373 and directly above the LED 375a group disposed in the center of the operation button unit substrate 375. Can be located in. The main button base 371b includes a main locking claw 371f extending downward from two opposite sides and a plurality of guide protrusions extending in the vertical direction inserted into the guide groove 373b of the operation button unit base 373. 371g. The main button claw 371f of the main button base 371b is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the main button receiving recess 373a in the operation button unit base 373, so that the main button 371 is moved to the main button spring. It is possible to prevent the main button accommodating recess 373a from being pulled out by the urging force.

  Further, the main button base 371b is configured such that the vibrating body 371c can be attached to the inner side of the one main locking claw 371f via the vibrating body holder 371e and the mounting screw 371d, and a portion to which the vibrating body 371c is attached. A detection piece 371h (see FIG. 45) detected by the main button sensor 376 is formed inside.

  When the main button 371 of this embodiment pushes the main button 371 downward against the urging force of the main button spring, the detection piece 371 h of the main button base 371 b is located between the light emitting part and the light receiving part of the main button sensor 376. The operation is detected by the main button sensor 376. The main button 371 is configured such that when an operation is detected by the main button sensor 376, the vibrating body 371 c is activated. Thus, it can be recognized that the operation of the main button 371 is accepted, and the player can be surprised by the vibration of the main button 371. The operation button unit board 375 is provided with a light shielding plate 375b for preventing the main button sensor 376 from malfunctioning due to light from the mounted LED 375a.

  In addition, the sub button 372 of the operation button unit 370 has a sub button lens 372a having a substantially isosceles right triangle shape in plan view and a light transmitting property, and a sub button lens 372a supported on an upper surface having a home base shape in plan view. The operation button unit base 373 is disposed below the sub button lens 372a between the sub button base 372b accommodated from above into the sub button accommodation recess 373e and the bottom surface of the sub button base 372b and the sub button accommodation recess 373e. And a sub button spring 372c that urges the button base 372b to move upward. The sub-button base 372b of the sub-button 372 includes a sub-locking claw 372d that hangs downward in the front-rear direction across the sub-button spring 372c, and a plate-shaped guide wall portion 372e that hangs down from the long side of the home base. And a detection piece 372f extending further downward from the lower end of the guide wall portion 372e.

  This sub button 372 has a sub locking claw 372d that is locked to a locking portion (not shown) in the sub button receiving recess 373e of the operation button unit base 373. Since the 372d is locked to the locking portion, the sub button 372 can be prevented from coming out of the sub button accommodating recess 373e by the urging force of the sub button spring 372c. Further, when the sub button 372 is pushed downward against the urging force of the sub button spring 372c, the detection piece 372f of the sub button base 372b enters between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the sub button sensor 377. The operation of the sub button 372 is detected by the sub button sensor 377.

  Further, the operation button unit decoration member 374 of the operation button unit 370 is formed in a plate shape with a substantially rhombus shape in plan view, as shown in the figure, and the main button lens 371 a of the main button 371 and the two sub buttons 372. An opening 374a through which the sub button lens 372a can pass is formed, and a decorative member lens 374b having translucency is provided at a position corresponding to the light guide opening 373d of the operation button unit base 373. . In addition, a mounting hole 374c through which a mounting screw (not shown) can be inserted from above is formed in the upper corner of the long axis diagonal line, and through this mounting hole 374c and the screw insertion hole 373f of the operation button unit base 373. The operation button unit 370 is fixedly attached to the dish body 310 by a predetermined mounting screw. In the present embodiment, a screw concealment 378 for concealing the two attachment holes 374 c is attached to the upper surface of the operation button unit decoration member 374.

  As described above, in the operation button unit 370 of the present embodiment, the operation button unit base 373 is formed in a triple cylindrical shape by the main button housing recess 373a, the light guide opening 373d, and the side wall 373h. Since the strength and rigidity are enhanced, the operation button unit 370 is not easily damaged even if the main button 371 or the like is hit and operated strongly. Further, the operation button unit 370 is mounted and fixed from above to the operation button unit mounting recess 314 of the plate 310, and in the unlikely event that the operation button unit 370 is damaged or malfunction occurs. However, it can be easily attached and detached from the top of the plate 310. Further, since the operation button unit 370 is supported (placed) on the speaker box 392 of the lower speaker unit 390 described below via the plate body 310, the shock resistance and load resistance from the main button 371 and the like. Therefore, not only the operation button unit 370 but also the entire dish unit 300 is hardly damaged.

[2-3-7. Lower speaker unit]
Subsequently, the lower speaker unit 390 in the dish unit 300 includes a lower speaker 391 having a diameter larger than that of the side speaker 121 of the side speaker lighting unit 120 in the door frame base unit 100, as shown in FIGS. A box-like speaker box 392 that mainly holds the speaker 391 at a position to the rear of the speaker opening 321a of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 at a position on the right side of the front face in a front view. The lower speaker unit 390 of the present embodiment is a bass-reflex type speaker in which the internal space of the speaker box 392 is opened to the outside through the open port 392a, and can produce a heavy bass with respect to the speaker diameter of the lower speaker 391. It can be done.

  The opening 392a of the speaker box 392 is formed at a desired position in the duct opening 321f of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320. It enters and exits through the duct opening 321f. Further, the flow of air entering and exiting through the duct opening 321f by driving (vibration) of the lower speaker 391 is formed so as to pass through the grip members 412 and 413 of the operation handle portion 410 in the handle device 400. The player can operate the unit 410 by applying the air flow (wind) from the lower speaker 391 to the player's hand, giving the player an unprecedented feel and having fun. Yes. Note that by sending an acoustic signal having a frequency lower than the human audible band to the lower speaker 391, only the wind can be applied to the player from the duct opening 321f, and combined with the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. As a result, it has become possible to entertain a tactile sensation that is not available in previous gaming machines.

  The speaker box 392 is disposed on the rear surface thereof downstream of the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312 of the dish 310, and flows through the first ball extraction path 313 and the second ball extraction opening 312. A ball removal path 393 is provided for guiding the game ball that has been played to the lower portion of the speaker box 392 in the substantially horizontal direction. The ball extraction path 393 is formed in a substantially L shape with the rear open, and the door frame base main body in the door frame base unit 100 through the ball extraction path opening 345 of the dish back plate 340 in the dish unit 300. The rear side is closed by the 110 ball-out path cover 191. In addition, the game balls that have circulated through the ball removal path 393 are discharged from the ball discharge port 321 g of the main body 321 in the dish unit main body 320 to the lower side of the dish unit 300.

  Further, the speaker box 392 has a second ball removal slide holding hole 394 for holding the front end of the second ball removal slide 362 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 slidably in the front-rear direction at the upper left portion in front view, A second ball removal mechanism support portion 395 that is disposed on the rear side of the two-ball removal slide holding hole 394 and supports the second ball removal mechanism support 368 of the second ball removal mechanism 360. The second ball removal mechanism 360 can be supported at a predetermined position by the second ball removal slide holding hole 394 and the second ball removal mechanism support 395.

[2-3-8. Handle device]
Next, as shown in FIGS. 47 to 49, the handle device 400 in the dish unit 300 includes an operation handle portion 410 provided on the lower front surface of the door frame 5 on the open side, and a door frame 5 corresponding to the operation handle portion 410. And a joint unit 180 that is linked to a rotation shaft 415 that rotates in response to a rotation operation of the operation handle portion 410 and changes the rotation motion of the rotation shaft 415 to a slide motion.

  First, the operation handle portion 410 is a handle support tube portion of a cylindrical handle base 303 attached so as to protrude forward from the handle base attachment port 321d of the main body portion 321 of the plate unit main body 320 of the plate unit 300 in the door frame 5. Inserted and fixed to 303a. Since the handle support cylinder portion 303a is formed so as to be inclined outward (right side) when viewed from above the pachinko gaming machine 1, the operation handle portion inserted and fixed to the handle support cylinder portion 303a. 410 is also inclined outward in plan view (in other words, its tip is inclined so as to be directed to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 with respect to a line perpendicular to the front vertical surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 5. Thus, by tilting the operation handle portion 410 outward in a plan view, there is an advantage that the player can easily grasp the operation handle portion 410 and can easily perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable in the rotation operation. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, even if the operation handle portion 410 is installed at an inclination, the rotational motion of the rotation shaft 415 of the operation handle portion 410 is smoothly transmitted, and the resilience of the ball hitting device 650 is increased. A structure that can be adjusted is adopted. After the operation handle portion 410 is inserted into the handle support tube portion 303a, the handle support tube portion 303a and the operation handle portion 410 (more precisely, the rear grip member 413) are connected with a screw or the like so that the operation handle portion 410 is It cannot be pulled out from the handle support cylinder 303a.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 49, the operation handle portion 410 is pivotally supported so as to be rotatable between the front gripping member 412, the rear gripping member 413, and the front gripping member 412 and the rear gripping member 413. The operation member 414 includes a linear columnar rotation shaft 415 whose one end is fixed to the rotation operation member 414, and a cam 416 fixed to the other end of the rotation shaft 415. The rear grip member 413 is integrally formed with a small-diameter portion fitted to the handle support cylinder portion 303a and a large-diameter portion in front of the small-diameter portion. Is formed. When the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the shaft through hole 418, the bearing bush 417 is fitted into the rear end of the shaft through hole 418, and the rotating shaft 415 is inserted into the bearing bush 417. On the other hand, the rotating shaft 415 that is passed through the shaft through hole 418 via the bearing bush 417 passes through the bearing hole 424 of the fixed bearing member 423 that is fixed to the front surface side of the rear grip member 413, and the rotation operation member 414. It is fitted in a shaft fitting hole 426 formed at the center.

  Further, on the front side of the rear grip member 413, a projection and a mounting hole (both not shown) for fixing the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 are provided, and the single button 421 is supported in a swingable manner. A swing pin (not shown) is formed, and a touch sensor 420, a firing stop switch 422, and a single button 421 are attached to the protrusions, mounting holes, and swing pins. Then, the wiring through cylinder having the wiring through hole 419 formed in the side of the shaft through hole 418 of the rear grip member 413 by collecting the wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 in a state where they are attached. It is led from the part 428 and the wiring opening 184c (see FIG. 22) to the back surface of the door frame 5, and is connected to the handle relay terminal plate 194 (see FIGS. 15 and 16). The wiring from the handle relay terminal plate 194 is attached along the lower reinforcing plate 36 described above, and is electrically connected to a payout control board 1186 described later. Further, an urging spring 425 is provided between the fixed bearing member 423 and the rotation operation member 414 so as to be provided around the rotation shaft 415. It is designed to return to the position. Further, a switch contact convex portion 427 protrudes outside the shaft fitting hole 426 of the rotation operation member 414. When the rotation operation member 414 is in the original position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 425, the switch contact is made. When the convex portion 427 contacts the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 to turn off the firing stop switch 422 and the rotation operation member 414 is rotated by the player, the switch contact convex portion 427 becomes the actuator of the firing stop switch 422. Turn away and turn on. Further, since the single button 421 can be swung while the firing stop switch 422 is ON, the actuator of the firing stop switch 422 can be turned off by pressing the single button 421. ing.

  Note that the outer peripheral surface of the rotation operation member 414 is subjected to conductive plating, and the touch sensor 420 detects contact when the player contacts the rotation operation member 414. Then, when the player rotates the turning operation member 414, the firing stop switch 422 is turned on and the touch sensor 420 detects contact, a later-described firing motor 695 of the ball striking device 650 (see FIG. 68). ) Is driven to rotate.

  In addition, the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 is formed in a ball shape, and the cam contact of a slide body 182 (see FIGS. 22 and 50) of the joint unit 180 described later according to the rotation of the rotation shaft 415. The part 182d is pressed and slid in one direction. In this embodiment, the operation handle portion 410 is attached in an inclined manner in plan view as described above by the cooperative structure of the cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotating shaft 415 and the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180. It is possible.

  As described above, the operation handle portion 410 is inserted and supported from the front side of the door frame 5 into the handle support cylinder portion 303a of the handle base 303, and the joint unit 180 is attached to the joint unit mounting recess 110c from the back side of the door frame 5. Thus, as shown in FIG. 47, the cam 416 fixed to the tip end portion of the rotating shaft 415 is accommodated in the cam engaging recess 182 c of the slide body 182. In this case, the operation handle portion 410 is attached to be inclined in a plan view, so that the cam 416 is also inclined with respect to the vertical surface of the door frame 5, but the cam engaging recess 182c is predetermined in the front-rear direction. Since the space is wide, the entire inclined cam 416 can be accommodated in the space of the cam engaging recess 182c. Further, as shown in FIG. 50 (A), the storage state is such that the rotation center of the cam 416 is located on the side of the cam contact portion 182d, and the tip of the slanted cam 416 is below the cam engagement recess 182c. It is located in the space.

  When the player rotates the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 in the above-described state, the rotation shaft 415 rotates and the cam 416 rotates accordingly, as shown in FIG. The slide body 182 is moved in one direction (in the case of FIG. 50, in the right direction in the figure) by the contact between the cam contact portion 182d of the cam engagement recess 182c and the one outer surface of the cam 416 (the outer surface of the rotation front). Move to slide. That is, the rotational motion of the rotating shaft 415 is converted into the sliding motion of the slide body 182. For this reason, the distance S1 between the rotation center of the cam 416 and the end of the slide protrusion 183 in the moving direction of the slide body 182 in the initial state (before rotation) shown in FIG. The distance S2 is greater than the distance S1 due to the rotation. That is, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 slides by a distance of “S2-S1”. 48, 51, and 52, the slide movement of the slide piece 183 of the joint unit 180 is transmitted to the slide member 710 of the hitting ball launcher 650, and the biasing spring 684 ( The tension of the striking ball 687 can be adjusted by adjusting the tension (see FIG. 68) to obtain the ball striking force desired by the player. The relationship between the handle device 400 and the ball hitting device 650 will be described in detail after the ball hitting device 650 is described.

  The wiring led out from the inside of the operation handle 410 to the back surface of the door frame 5 through the wiring through hole 419, the wiring through tube portion 428, and the wiring opening 184c And then connected to the operation handle terminal 1194 (see FIG. 90) of the payout control board 1186 that is collectively attached to the board unit 1100 attached to the back side of the main body frame 3. .

[2-3-9. Effect of dish unit]
Next, the flow of game balls in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment will be described with reference mainly to FIG. 53 and FIG. In the present embodiment, a game ball paid out from a prize ball unit 800 described later flows from the ball inlet 341 into the storage tray 311 via the full tank unit 900 and the prize ball contact bar 343 of the dish back plate 340. The game ball that has flowed in from the ball inlet 341 first flows into the first inclined surface 311a. The first inclined surface 311a is formed so that the front side and the right side when viewed from the front are lowered, and the game balls that flow into the first inclined surface 311a from the ball inflow port 341 follow the inclination of the first inclined surface 311a. The outer peripheral wall 311h that surrounds the front outer periphery of the storage plate 311 comes into contact with a position substantially opposite to the ball inlet 341. This position of the outer peripheral wall 311h is inclined in a curved line with respect to the surface of the dish back plate 340 on which the ball inlet 341 is formed, and the game ball in contact with the outer peripheral wall 311h moves rightward in front view. It is designed to reflect.

  Then, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 and reflected rightward on the outer peripheral wall 311h enters the fifth inclined surface 311e beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d. The fifth inclined surface 311e is lower on the left side when viewed from the front, that is, on the fourth inclined surface 311d side, and the inclination angle is set to a gentle inclination that allows a game ball entering from the first inclined surface 311a to climb up. Thus, the game ball that has entered the first inclined surface 311a beyond the fourth inclined surface 311d circulates to the upper portion (right end portion in plan view) of the fifth inclined surface 311e while ascending the fifth inclined surface 311e. It will be. The fifth inclined surface 311e is partitioned from the front side to the rear side by the outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f around the right end, and the game ball that has entered the fifth inclined surface 311e The outer peripheral wall 311h and the partition wall 311f are surrounded by the fifth inclined surface 311e so as to return to the fourth inclined surface 311d disposed on the left side of the fifth inclined surface 311e.

  The game balls that have entered the fourth inclined surface 311d from the fifth inclined surface 311e flow to the second inclined surface 311b on the rear side of the fourth inclined surface 311d according to the inclination of the fourth inclined surface 311d, and further It enters from the inclined surface 311b to the right third inclined surface 311c, and is supplied to the ball striking device 650 from the ball supply port 342 of the dish back plate 340 disposed at the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c. It has become. That is, the game ball that has flowed into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341 does not go directly from the first inclined surface 311a to the third inclined surface 311c via the second inclined surface 311b, but from the first inclined surface 311a. After entering the fifth inclined surface 311e via the fourth inclined surface 311d, the third inclined surface 311c is reached via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the second inclined surface 311b. The game ball flowing in from 341 can be detoured.

  As a result, the entire storage tray 311 can be used effectively to store a plurality of game balls, and the game balls are stored in a state of low storage as in conventional pachinko gaming machines, and the game balls block the ball inlet 341. As a result, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is actuated to stop the payout of the game ball, or the game ball firing operation at the ball hitting device 650 is stopped and the game is interrupted. This can be prevented well.

  By the way, a large number of game balls are stored in the storage tray 311 of the tray unit 300 of the present embodiment, whereby the ball inlet 341 is closed by the stored game balls, and the prize ball contact bar 343 of the tray back plate 340 When the game ball stays in the full tank unit 900 arranged between the prize ball unit 800, the full tank switch 916 of the full tank unit 900 is operated to stop paying out the game balls from the prize ball unit 800. Or stopping the game ball launching operation in the hitting ball launching device 650, and especially when the launching operation of the hitting ball launching device 650 is stopped, the game cannot be interrupted. When the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 reaches an appropriate amount, the first ball extraction button 351 and the second ball extraction button 361 are operated to remove the game balls from the storage tray 311 to the dish unit 300. Container disposed below (e.g., dollars boxes) it is necessary to discharge the. In the present embodiment, when the full tank switch 916 is activated, the player is informed that the inside of the storage tray 311 is full, and then the firing operation of the ball hitting device 650 is stopped.

  In order to discharge the game ball from the storage tray 311, the first ball removal slide 356 of the first ball removal mechanism 350 is operated by operating (pushing) the first ball removal button 351 disposed on the upper surface of the dish unit 300. Slides to release the closure between the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c and the first ball removal path 313, and causes the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c to flow down to the first ball removal path 313. It can discharge | emit to the downward direction of the dish unit 300 from the ball discharge port 321g via the extraction path | route 393. FIG. By operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls can be extracted from the downstream end of the third inclined surface 311c which is the lowest position in the storage tray 311. Therefore, all the game balls are discharged from the storage tray 311. Be able to. However, in the ball removal by operating the first ball removal button 351, the game balls are aligned in a row on the third inclined surface 311c, so that there is a problem that it takes time to remove the ball.

  Therefore, when the second ball removal button 361 disposed on the left side of the front surface of the dish unit 300 is operated (pressed), the second ball removal shutter 364 of the second ball removal mechanism 360 moves to move the second ball removal shutter 364 in the storage tray 311. The ball outlet 312 is opened, and the game ball upstream of the second ball outlet 312 in the storage tray 311 passes through the second ball outlet 312 and passes from the ball outlet 321g through the ball outlet 393 to the dish unit. It can be discharged below 300 (see FIG. 53B). As shown in the drawing, the second ball outlet 312 has an opening that is several times larger than the outer diameter of the game ball, so that many game balls can be quickly discharged at once. Accordingly, the presence of the two buttons, the first ball removal button 351 and the second ball removal button 361, allows the player to select the length of time to remove the ball. In addition, when a big hit is made during the game, a large amount of balls are paid out to the dish unit 300, and if the game is continued with the ball left unattended, the full tank switch 916 provided on the upstream side of the dish unit 300 (see FIG. 80) is activated and the payout operation is stopped or the ballistic operation is stopped and the hitting operation of the game ball stops and the game cannot be continued even though it is a big hit. Yes, in such a case, by operating the second ball removal button 361, the ball being stored in the dish unit 300 is removed, and at the same time, the supply of the ball to the launch position is maintained and the game that is in big hit Can be continued.

  In the dish unit 300 of the present embodiment, when the second ball removal button 361 is operated, the second ball removal shutter 364 is held at the open position by the latch unit 366 of the second ball removal mechanism 360, and the second ball removal button 361 is held. The mouth 312 can be kept open. In this state, when the game balls on the upstream side of the second ball outlet 312 are discharged and there are almost no game balls on the first inclined surface 311a, the game balls flowing in from the ball inlet 341 are as described above. The second inclined surface 311b, which is reflected from the outer peripheral wall 311h and flows in the direction of the fifth inclined surface 311e, the fourth inclined surface 311d, the fifth inclined surface 311e, the second inclined surface 311b, A game ball is supplied on the third inclined surface 311c. Therefore, even if the game ball on the third inclined surface 311c is consumed by the launching operation of the hit ball launching device 650, as long as the game ball flows into the storage tray 311 from the ball inlet 341, the second inclined surface 311b, If the game balls are supplied to the third inclined surface 311c via the fourth inclined surface 311d and the fifth inclined surface 311e, and the number of game balls that flow in by stopping the firing operation of the game balls increases, the second ball Since it will be produced from the outlet 312, a certain amount of game balls can always be secured in the storage tray 311 and the game can be continued even when the second ball outlet 312 remains open. ing. That is, the game can be continued without paying attention to the amount of game balls in the storage tray 311 even in a state where game balls are continuously paid out, such as during a big hit game.

  In the dish unit 300 of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54 and the like, the storage tray 311 of the dish body 310 has a bottom surface continuously including a first inclined surface 311a, a second inclined surface 311b, and a third inclined surface 311c. In contrast, the sphere inlet 341 of the dish back plate 340 has a rectangular shape extending substantially horizontally in the left-right direction, while the height decreases toward the right (the sphere supply port 342) in a front view. Therefore, a step is formed between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341, and the step is increased as it goes to the right in the front view. It has become. The step between the bottom surface of the storage tray 311 and the bottom of the ball inlet 341 has almost no step at the left end of the ball inlet 341, and the outer diameter of the game ball at the right end of the ball inlet 341. There is a slightly higher step. As a result, the game balls that have flowed substantially straight in the front-rear direction via the prize ball communication rod 343 flow into the storage tray 311 mainly through the left side portion of the ball inlet 341 with few steps. As a result, the potential energy (falling energy) of the game ball falling from the ball inlet 341 to the storage tray 311 is small due to the small level difference, and the load applied to the storage tray 311 is reduced and the storage tray 311 is damaged. Can be prevented.

  By the way, when the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases and a large number of game balls are stored on the first inclined surface 311a, the ball inflow port 341 is connected via the prize ball contact hole 343. The game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 are shaped so as to push the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 from the side, and the game balls are pressed against each other by applying a lateral force to each game ball. It becomes a state. In this state, when the game balls in the storage tray 311 (third inclined surface 311c) are consumed via the ball supply port 342, the game balls are collected near the upstream side of the third inclined surface 311c (second inclined surface 311b). When the width of the flow path is narrowed, the game balls may be pressed against each other and the fluidity of the game balls may be reduced, resulting in clogging of the balls. In this embodiment, as described above, the ball inlet 341 is in the horizontal direction. The game ball from the prize ball contact bar 343 directly flows into the second inclined surface 311b through the shelf 344, and the game ball is supplied to the third inclined surface 311c. This is possible (see FIG. 53B).

  In addition, in the portion on the right side of the center in the left-right direction of the ball inlet 341, the lower side of the ball inlet 341 is higher than the outer diameter of the game ball with respect to the bottom surface of the storage dish 311. Thus, the game balls flowing into the storage tray 311 flow into the upper side of the game balls stored in the storage tray 311, and the fluidity of the game balls is suppressed by preventing the game balls from pushing sideways. In addition to being able to prevent the lowering, the game balls flowing in from the top promote the lateral movement of the lower game balls (especially the game balls in contact with the front surface of the dish back plate 340), and naturally Ball clogging can be eliminated (see FIG. 54).

  As described above, the tray unit 300 according to the present embodiment allows the game balls paid out from the prize ball unit 800 to be stored in the horizontally long ball inlet 341 even if the amount of game balls stored in the storage tray 311 increases. Since the game balls stored in the storage tray 311 are allowed to flow into the upper side of the storage tray 311 via the shelf 344, it is possible to satisfactorily prevent the game balls from clogging in the storage tray 311. The game can be continued without worrying about the game balls in the storage tray 311 so that the interest of the player can be prevented from decreasing.

[2-4. Glass unit]
Next, the glass unit 450 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a front perspective view of the glass unit, FIG. 56 is an exploded perspective view showing the glass unit exploded from the front, and FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view showing FIG. As shown in the drawing, this glass unit 450 has an annular, vertically-long octagonal unit frame 451 that has a larger opening than the game window 101 and is molded of synthetic resin, and two front and rear ends of the unit frame 451 are closed. The transparent glass plate 452 of a sheet | seat, and the strip | belt-shaped glass decoration board | substrate 453 arrange | positioned along the inner periphery of the unit frame 451 between the two glass plates 452 are provided.

  The unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 has a substrate insertion groove 451a into which the rear side is opened and the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted, and a plurality of openings 451b that open from the substrate insertion groove 451a toward the inner peripheral side of the unit frame 451. An engagement groove 451c formed in the outer periphery of the center of the unit frame 451 in the front-rear direction, a terminal plate support portion 451d protruding leftward from the upper left end in a front view, and an outer periphery that is higher than the center in the vertical direction Stop pieces 451e that respectively protrude in the left-right direction from the position, and locking protrusions 451f that protrude outward in the left-right direction from both ends of the lower side are provided.

  In addition, the glass decorative substrate 453 in the glass unit 450 is strip-like and flexible, and has a plurality of color LEDs 453a at positions corresponding to the openings 451b of the unit frame 451 on the front surface side (inner surface side of the unit frame 451). When the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451a of the unit frame 451, the LED 453a faces the inner surface side of the unit frame 451 through the opening 451b.

  Further, the glass unit 450 is connected to the glass decorative substrate and is supported by the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451, and a substrate for fixing the end of the glass decorative substrate 453 to the glass decorative relay substrate 454. A press plate 455 and a terminal plate holder 456 that covers the terminal plate support portion 451d of the unit frame 451 that supports the glass decorative relay substrate 454 are further provided.

  In the glass unit 450, glass plates 452 are bonded and fixed to the front and rear of the unit frame 451 in a state where the glass decorative substrate 453 is inserted into the substrate insertion groove 451 a of the unit frame 451. In the glass unit 450, the engaging groove 451c formed on the outer peripheral lower side of the unit frame 451 engages with the vertical bent protruding piece 151 of the reinforcing sheet metal 140, and the outer peripheral edge of the unit frame 451 and the stopper piece 451e The locking projection 451f is fitted in the glass unit support step 110a of the door frame base body 110 from the rear side, and is detachably attached to the door frame 5 by the stop lever 196. .

  In addition, the glass unit 450 is configured to emit light between the two glass plates 452 by appropriately emitting light from the color LED 453a of the glass decoration substrate 453, which is different from conventional pachinko gaming machines. A pachinko gaming machine 1 having a gaming window 101 having an atmosphere (with a mood) can be provided.

[2-5. Security cover]
Next, the security cover 470 in the door frame 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 12 and 13. The security cover 470 is provided with a security function that covers the lower back surface of the glass unit 450 and prevents the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the game board 4. Are formed in a flat plate shape so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 450 between the reinforcing metal plates 142 and 143, and the upper side portion thereof is an arc-shaped contact recess 471 along the lower arc surface of the inner rail 603 of the game board 4. And a post-crime prevention protruding piece 474 projecting rearward along the contact recess 471. Further, a crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is formed in a slanting manner on the back surface of the shaft support side with the crime prevention cover 470 attached. On the other hand, on the front surface of the crime prevention cover 470, a crime prevention pre-projection piece 472 along the lower shape of the unit frame 451 in the glass unit 450 is projected with the crime prevention cover 470 attached, and U-shaped at both lower ends. A mounting elastic piece 473 is formed so as to project forward.

  The security cover 470 configured as described above is detachably attached to the back side of the door frame 5 by mounting the mounting elastic piece 473 on the mounting opening 116 formed in the door frame base unit 100. And in the attached state, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the protrusion piece 472 before crime prevention faces the back lower one side of the unit frame 451 of the glass unit 450. FIG. Further, the front end of the crime prevention front protrusion 472 is in contact with the vertical bent protrusion 151. In addition, the post-crime projecting piece 474 and the post-crime end end projecting piece 475 are in a state of projecting backward, but when the door frame 5 is closed, the half of the post-crime projecting projecting piece 474 on the shaft support side is The bottom side of the inner rail 603 fixed to the game board 4 enters and faces the lower side, but the half of the open side of the post-crime projection 474 is rail security formed on the inner rail 603 of the front component 601 The state is inserted into the groove 607, and the crime prevention rear end protrusion 475 is in a superposed position along the upper surface of the crime prevention projection 608 formed on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3.

  Thus, in the state in which the security cover 470 is attached and the door frame 5 is closed, the security structure by the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement grooves 584 and 585 described above, and the security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 described later. In addition to the crime prevention structure by the above, even if it is attempted to intrude an unauthorized tool from below the glass unit 450, the unauthorized device enters from the front lower direction of the security cover 470 due to the polymerization of the pre-crime projection piece 472 and the unit frame 451. The anti-crime piece 474 and the inner rail 603 constituting the front component 601 are superposed to prevent unauthorized equipment from entering from the lower side of the rear face of the security cover 470. In particular, against the intrusion of unauthorized tools from the diagonally lower side of the door frame 5 on the shaft support side, the intrusion of unauthorized tools into the outer rail 602 is prevented by the superposed structure of the security projection 608 and the rear end projection 475. In addition, the overlapping structure of the inner rail 603 and the post-crime protrusion 474 can prevent unauthorized equipment from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4.

  Similarly, in addition to the crime prevention structure by the double bent projecting pieces 153 and 154 of the above-described opening-side reinforcing sheet metal 143, intrusion of unauthorized tools from obliquely below the opening side of the door frame 5, The uneven engagement between the rail crime prevention groove 607 and the post-crime projection piece 474 can further prevent the unauthorized tool from entering the game area 605 of the game board 4. Note that a vertical surface between the post-crime protrusion 474 and the rear-end protrusion 475 on the back side of the security cover 470 is formed by the outer rail 602 and the inner rail 603 with the door frame 5 closed. Since it covers the lower part of the front surface of the guide path of the hit ball, it also has a function of preventing the hit ball that jumps or reverses the guide path part from colliding with the glass plate 452.

[3. Body frame]
Next, the main body frame 3 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 58 is a front view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, FIG. 59 is a rear view of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 60 is a main body frame main body before mounting the parts. FIG. 61 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame main body 500 before mounting the parts, and FIG. 62 is a perspective view seen from the front of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. 63 is a perspective view of a state in which the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached is pivotally supported on the outer frame 2, and FIG. 64 is a rear view of the main body frame 3 to which the parts are attached. FIG. 66 is a perspective view seen from the back of the main body frame 3 to which the components are attached, and FIG. It is.

  The main body frame 3 of the present embodiment has a game board 4 that can be detachably mounted from the front side, a hitting ball launching device 650, a prize ball tank 720 for delivering a prize ball, a tank rail member 740, and a ball path unit. 770, a prize ball unit 800, a full tank unit 900, a locking device 1000 for locking the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 and a door frame 5 to the main body frame 3, and the door frame 5 and the main body frame excluding the game board 4 Various components such as a substrate unit 1100 in which various control boards for controlling electrical components provided in 3 and a power supply board 1136 are collectively provided, a cover body 1250 that covers the rear opening 580, and the like are mounted. The main body frame main body 500 is provided.

  First, the main body frame main body 500 on which the above-described various components are mounted and the main body frame 3 on which the various components are mounted will be described. 58, an upper shaft support bracket 503 and a lower shaft support bracket 509 (both see FIG. 62) for opening and closing the main body frame 3 to the outer frame 2 are attached to the upper and lower sides of the main body frame main body 500. In the state where the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 are mounted on the shaft bracket mounting steps 501 and 502, the upper side and the side of the main body frame main body 500 are formed. The sides are substantially flush with the top and sides of the upper shaft support 503, and the lower and sides of the main body frame main body 500 are substantially flush with the lower and sides of the lower shaft support 509 (see FIG. 64). Note that a wiring opening 537 that communicates with a wiring opening 1124 (see FIG. 86) formed in a frame substrate holder 1101 described below is provided below one side of the main body frame main body 500 (left side in FIG. 62). Is formed. Here, the upper shaft bracket 503 and the lower shaft bracket 509 will be described with reference to FIGS. 62 and 64. The upper shaft support fitting 503 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and its upper end protrudes forward, and a shaft support pin 504 is erected and fixed to the upper surface protruding forward. A door shaft support hole 505 is formed on the side.

  On the other hand, the lower shaft support 509 has a mounting portion on the back surface of the main body frame main body 500, and two support plates 506 and 507 are integrally projected on the lower end side and slightly on the upper side. The lower support plate 506 constitutes a frame support plate 506 for supporting the main body frame 3 on the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2, and the upper support plate 507 is provided on the door frame 5. A door support plate 507 for supporting the lower shaft support portion 148 on the main body frame 3 is configured. For this reason, a shaft support hole (not shown) for inserting the support protrusion 68 of the lower support fitting 66 of the outer frame 2 is formed in the frame support plate 506, and the lower support portion 148 of the door frame 5 is formed in the door support plate 507. A shaft support hole 508 for inserting the projecting shaft pin 147 is formed.

  By the way, the main body frame main body 500 is formed in a rectangular shape when viewed from the front, and about 3/4 of the upper part thereof becomes a game board installation recess 510 (see FIG. 62) for installing the game board 4. A slightly recessed area below the game board installation recess 510 is a plate portion 511. In addition, the front upper side portion and the front open side portion on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are formed with a predetermined width so as to face the rear surface of the door frame 5, An upper crime prevention double groove 581 is formed by a protrusion protruding in parallel with the lateral direction, and a side crime prevention groove 582 is formed on the outer side and on the inner side of the front opening side edge on the right side when viewed from the front. A security recess 583 is formed which is formed by an inner wall having an inclined surface that is connected to the first side wall 540 at the rear end. Unlike the side part, it is not formed so as to have a predetermined width that faces the back surface of the door frame 5, but the front shaft support side part of the main body frame main body 500 is more forward than the front upper side part or the front open side part. The shaft support side portion 587 (see FIG. 79) has a large protrusion amount.

  More specifically, the upper crime prevention double groove 581 formed on the upper side of the front surface is bent toward the rear with both long side ends of the upper reinforcing sheet metal 141 attached and fixed to the back side of the upper side of the door frame 5. The bent projecting pieces 155 and 156 are inserted respectively. Further, the side security grooves 582 and the security recesses 583 formed on the front open side edges are folded back at the long side ends of the open side reinforcing sheet metal 143 attached and fixed to the open back of the door frame 5. The open-side outer bent protrusion 153 and the open-side inner bent protrusion 154 to be bent are respectively inserted. Further, on the shaft support side portion 587 of the front shaft support side portion, the tip end of the shaft support side L-shaped bent protruding piece 157 of the shaft support side reinforcing sheet metal 142 attached and fixed to the shaft support side rear surface of the door frame 5 is provided. The parts come into contact.

  Further, the above-described structure can prevent an illegal act of inserting a fraudulent tool such as a piano wire through the gap between the contact surfaces of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3, and in particular, the open side where the fraudulent act is most likely to be performed. It has a structure that can prevent fraud at the side and then at the upper side where fraud is likely to be performed. Of course, the prevention of fraud by the contact between the support-side reinforcing sheet metal 142 on the support side and the support-side L-shaped bent protrusion 157 also works well, but in many cases the support side is sturdy. Since the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 are connected to each other by the support brackets 45 and 66 and the shaft support brackets 503 and 509, the space between the main body frame 3 and the door frame 5 is larger than that of the upper side and the open side. It is difficult to make a gap. For this reason, in this embodiment, not a double crime prevention structure but a single crime prevention structure. These points will be described in detail later.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the front upper side, front open side, and front pivot side on the front side surrounding the game board installation recess 510 are arranged on the upper, middle, and lower sides of the front open side. A door hook hole 549 is formed to pass through a door frame hook portion 1041 provided on a lock device 1000, which will be described later, attached to the open side rear surface of the main body frame 3, and to jump forward. A board positioning projection 576 for engaging with a positioning recess 611 formed in the game board 4 is provided on the inner side surface of the side part. Further, the pivot side L-shaped bent projection piece 157 of the pivot side reinforcement sheet metal 142 with the door frame 5 closed on the inner front surface of the lower side position of the panel positioning projection 576 on the front side pivot side side part. Two upper and lower restricting projections 577 into which the distal ends are inserted project. The operation of the restricting protrusion 577 is as described above. Also, as shown in FIG. 58, a board stopper insertion hole into which an end of a game board stopper 614 provided on the game board 4 is engaged above and below the boundary between the open-side plane portion and the game board installation recess 510. 578 is formed.

  Next, the configuration of the plate portion 511 will be described with reference to FIGS. The upper surface of the plate portion 511 is a game board placement section 512 for placing the game board 4, and when the game board 4 is placed at the approximate center of the game board placement section 512, the game board A channel support protrusion 513 is provided to support the lower surface of the out port 606 formed in the base plate 4. Further, as shown in FIG. 58, a rail mounting boss 514 protrudes from the central portion of the front surface of the plate portion 511 toward the opening side end portion at a predetermined interval, and the launch rail 515 ( 62) is fixed with screws. Further, a rail connection member 516 protrudes from the front surface of the plate portion 511 corresponding to the tip position of the launch rail 515, and when the game board 4 is installed in the game board installation recess 510, the inner rail of the game board 4 is provided. It is configured to be adjacent to the connection passage portion 609 which is the downstream end of 603.

  Further, an upper end portion of an elliptical game board fixture 519 (see FIG. 62) for fixing the lower part of the game board 4 to the side position of the rail connection member 516 (position opposite to the firing rail 515). A fixing tool mounting boss 517 for mounting is protruded, and a stopper 518 is protruded obliquely below. That is, the game board fixing tool 519 is provided so as to be rotatable about the fixing tool mounting boss 517, and rotates in the clockwise direction in a state where the game board 4 is placed on the game board mounting portion 512, thereby playing the game board. The fixture 519 is pressed against the front surface of the game board 4 to fix the game board 4. Further, when removing the game board, it can be easily performed by turning the game board fixture 519 counterclockwise and removing it. In this case, the game board fixture 519 is prevented from being rotated counterclockwise by the stopper 518.

  In addition, the lower part of the open side of the plate part 511 is formed with a rectangular parallelepiped launching device mounting portion 520 that projects in a bulging shape toward the front side (which is concave when viewed from the back side). A hitting ball launcher 650 is fixed to the mounting portion 520 from the back surface of the main body frame main body 500. This will be described in detail later. A handle connecting window 522 that houses a slide member 710 (see FIG. 72) that cooperates with the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 described above is formed on the front wall portion of the launcher mounting portion 520, A shaft hole 523 is formed at the position adjacent to the handle connection window 522 so that the end face of the bearing 689 (see FIG. 68) of the ball striking rod 687 faces. In addition, the upper wall portion of the launching device mounting portion 520 is formed with a notch-shaped through-hole opening 521 for projecting the hitting ball rod 687 of the hitting ball launching device 650 upward. Is formed with a cylinder lock through hole 526 through which the cylinder lock 1010 of the lock device 1000 passes.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 59, on the back surface of the plate portion 511, a ball discharge passage 524 is formed that extends from the upper portion on the shaft support side toward the central portion of the plate portion 511 and then goes downward. . The ball discharge passage 524 is for discharging a ball discharged from a ball connection passage 880 (see FIG. 62), which will be described later, from below the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the inside of the island. Further, a cylindrical guide protrusion 525 protrudes rearward above the above-described launching device mounting portion 520, and a guide hole 1125 (see FIG. 87) of the substrate unit 1100 described later is provided in the guide protrusion 525. The board unit 1100 is easily attached by being inserted. Also, mounting holes 527 for mounting the board unit 1100 with screws are formed on the left and right and upper and lower sides of the plate part 511, and the mounting pieces 1122 of the board unit 1100 are made to correspond to the mounting holes 527 and fastened with screws. In addition, a launching device mounting boss 529 for mounting the hitting ball launching device 650 is projected rearwardly inside the concave shape of the launching device mounting portion 520. As shown in the figure, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a guide protrusion with a tapered tip and a vertically long shape is provided to guide the closing operation of the main body frame 3 while contacting the upper surface of the decorative cover plate 15. 528 protrudes rearward.

  In addition to the configuration described above, the plate portion 511 has a ball removal connection opening 530 that is an opening at the upstream end of the ball removal discharge passage 524 on the upper surface of the end portion on the shaft support side, as shown in FIG. . The downstream end of the ball removal connection passage 880 is connected to the ball removal connection opening 530. Further, the portion adjacent to the ball-opening connection opening 530 is horizontal so that a full unit mounting portion 531 for mounting a full unit 900 (see FIG. 62), which will be described in detail later, is orthogonal to the plate portion 511. A unit engagement groove 532 that engages with an engagement piece 924 (see FIG. 80) of the full tank unit 900 is formed in the front portion of the full unit mounting portion 531. Further, as shown in FIG. 62, an exit for damming a prize ball discharged from the exit 921 of the full tank unit 900 when the door frame 5 is opened is provided on the front surface of the plate portion 511 in front of the full unit mounting portion 531. An opening / closing device 579 is provided.

  Although the outlet opening / closing device 579 is not described in detail, when the door frame 5 is closed, the opening / closing plate is lowered by a lever that contacts the back surface of the door frame 5, but the door plate 5 is opened. Then, the contact with the lever disappears, so that the opening / closing plate rises and closes the outlet 921. For this reason, even when the door frame 5 is opened, the prize balls stored in the full tank unit 900 do not fall down from the outlet 921. In addition, as shown in FIG. 62, a fastening hole penetrating vertically in a position corresponding to the upper part of the launching portion of the firing rail 515 in the game board mounting portion 512 formed along the upper end side of the plate portion 511. 533 is formed, and a fastening link 534 for holding the fastening band 619 is passed to the front portion of the fastening hole 533. The fastening linkage 534 is a mechanism for preventing the game board 4 from being detached from the main body frame 3.

  Next, the structure of the game board installation recessed part 510 is demonstrated. The game board installation recess 510 is provided around a first side wall 540 that is provided in a rearward direction from the inner side surface on the pivot support side, the above-described upper side portion, and the open side surface portion, and a rear side provided from the first side wall 540. The main body frame 3 includes a second side wall 541, a third side wall 542 that is provided rearward from the second side wall 541, and a fourth side wall 543 that is provided rearward from the third side wall 542. The left and right sides and the rear side of the upper side are formed in a concave shape.

  The first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 are formed such that the upper side and the right side (sides on the shaft support side) are straightly extended rearward with a step when viewed from the back, whereas the left side ( The open side) is formed in a stepped shape (see FIG. 66) that inwardly slopes from the first side wall 540 toward the fourth side wall 543. This is because the rear end of the fourth side wall 543 is opened when the main body frame 3 is opened when the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 on the left side (side on the open side) are straightly formed rearward. May be in contact with the inner surface of the side frame plate 13 of the outer frame 2 so that it cannot be opened smoothly. It is something that can be done.

  At the same time, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side. In order to form the lock mounting hole 547, the fourth side wall 543 is formed in an inclined step shape from the first side wall 540 on the open side. Furthermore, as for the step size of the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543, the step between the first side wall 540 and the second side wall 541 needs to be in contact with the periphery of the back surface of the game board 4 described later. For this reason, it is formed with a somewhat large step, but the other steps are extremely small steps. Of course, the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 may be formed continuously without forming a step.

  The side walls 540 to 543 described above are formed to have depth width dimensions d1, d2, d3, and d4 as shown in FIG. 60. In the case of this embodiment, d1 + d2 + d3 + d4 = about 135 mm. . In particular, the width dimension d1 of the first side wall 540 corresponds to the thickness of the game board 4, and the game board is formed in the space formed by the remaining second side wall 541, third side wall 542, and fourth side wall 543. The rear projecting portions of various gaming devices provided in 4 are accommodated.

  That is, the first side wall 540 constitutes a front side wall having a depth dimension substantially the same as the thickness of the game board 4, and the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are in contact with the rear surface of the peripheral part of the game board 4. A rear side wall that has a stepped portion that contacts the rear side wall of the gaming device 4 that extends from the first side wall 540 in a rearward direction substantially parallel to the first side wall 540 and that is provided on the game board 4; It constitutes. In particular, in the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the rearward protruding amounts of all the parts of the second side wall 541 to the fourth side wall 543 are fixed to the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. It is formed so as to be at substantially the same position as the rear wall 722 of the storage portion 728 for storing the balls of the prize ball tank 720.

  Thereby, since the size of the space formed by the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall 543 is secured up to a position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, for example, a game Even in the case where a gaming device is installed in which the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the board 4, the rearward protruding portion of such a gaming device can be easily stored.

  59 and 61, from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 to the left side (open side), the upper side and the right side (shaft support side) when viewed from the back side, the open side rear wall 544, An upper rear wall 545 and a pivot support side rear wall 546 as a rear wall are projected inward so as to be parallel to the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine. The shaft support side rear wall 546 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 58), and a ball path unit 770 (to be described later) and a prize ball unit 800 constituting a ball payout mechanism are detachably attached to the rear surface. It is supposed to be. Therefore, the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the pivot support side rear wall 546 is sufficient if the ball passage unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 are wide enough to be mounted.

  Further, the upper rear wall 545 has a flat front surface (see FIG. 58), and a tank rail member 740, which will be described later, is attached to the rear surface of the upper rear wall 545, and its lower end side is formed in an inclined shape. Therefore, it is sufficient for the projecting width to the inside of the upper rear wall 545 to have a height width dimension of the tank rail member 740 attached in an inclined manner. Furthermore, the front surface of the open-side rear wall 544 has a flat plate shape (see FIG. 58), and a cover body support cylinder portion 575 that pivotally supports the shaft support pin 1251 of the cover body 1250 is formed on the rear surface. ing. Accordingly, it is sufficient that the width of the projecting width toward the inside of the open-side rear wall 544 is a width that forms the cover body support cylinder 575.

  As described above, the front surfaces of the open-side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot-side rear wall 546 that project inward from the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are formed in a flat plate shape. Since the flat plate portion corresponds to the peripheral portion of the game board 4, as described above, the second side wall 541, the third side wall 542, and the fourth side wall to the position corresponding to the peripheral portion of the game board 4. Since the size of the space formed by 543 is ensured, for example, even when a gaming device is attached such that the liquid crystal display screen occupies substantially the entire area of the gaming board 4, The rear projecting portion can be easily stored. The inner side of the open side rear wall 544, the upper rear wall 545, and the pivot support side rear wall 546 is a rear opening 580, and the rear opening 580 is closed by the cover body 1250 so as to be freely opened and closed. Yes.

  Next, a more detailed configuration of the game board mounting recess 510 will be described. As described above, the door hook hole 549 through which the door frame hook portion 1041 of the lock device 1000 passes is formed on the open side plane portion. There are three places in the middle and bottom, but a lock locking hole 548 (see FIG. 59) into which a locking projection 1004 (described later) of the lock device 1000 is engaged further above and below the upper and lower door hook holes 549. ) Is formed. Further, the lock device 1000 is attached along the first side wall 540 on the open side. A lock attachment hole 547 (see FIG. 59) for attaching the lock device 1000 with a screw is provided at the rear end of the first side wall 540. It is formed in the upper part and the middle. It should be noted that the locking device 1000 is attached not only at the upper and middle positions, but also at a screw mounting portion 543 formed in a lock mounting piece 1008 described later and a lock mounting hole 547 formed in the vicinity of the cylinder lock through hole 526. And the lower part of the locking device 1000 can be attached.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, on the left and right in front of the upper side of the first side wall 540, when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 A guide arc projection 552 that abuts is provided, and a relief recess 551 that communicates with a notch 729 of a prize ball tank 720, which will be described later, is formed at the center of the rear end side of the first side wall 540. A tank mounting groove 550 is formed on a vertical surface connected to the side wall 541. When the mounting flange 733 of the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the tank attachment groove 550, the notch 729 of the prize ball tank 720 communicates with the relief recess 551 as shown in FIG. When the ball pressure of the sphere stored in the tank increases, the pressure is released to prevent clogging. When the prize ball tank 720 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rear side wall 722 on the back side and the rear end side of the fourth side wall 543 are substantially coincident when viewed from the front side of the prize ball tank 720 in plan view (FIG. 4). See). The guide arc projection 552 described above lifts the main body frame 3 by bringing the upper side of the main body frame 3 into contact with the inner peripheral surface of the upper frame plate 10 of the outer frame 2 and the decorative cover plate. 15 is formed to prevent a fraudulent act such as forming a gap with 15 and inserting a fraudulent instrument through the gap.

  Further, the above-described upper rear wall 545 is formed with a rail locking groove 553 for attaching the tank rail member 740 along the opening edge of the rear opening 580, and the fourth side wall 543 and the upper rear wall. A rail locking groove 554 is formed in the bent portion of 545. The tank rail member 740 can be attached to the main body frame 3 by locking the locking protrusions 749, 750 (see FIG. 75) of the tank rail member 740 in the rail locking grooves 553, 554. In addition, a rail latching elastic piece 555 is formed on the upper part of the upper rear wall 545 corresponding to the downstream side when the tank rail member 740 is attached, and the tank rail member 740 is locked in the rail locking grooves 553 and 554. When the projecting pieces 749 and 750 are locked and the tank rail member 740 is attached to the main body frame 3, the rail latching elastic piece 555 is arranged at the upper end on the downstream side of the tank rail member 740 so that the locked state is not released. It comes in contact with the top.

  When the tank rail member 740 is removed, the rail rail elastic member 555 is pressed backward, and then the tank rail is released to release the locking state between the rail locking grooves 553 and 554 and the locking protrusions 749 and 750. The member 740 may be lifted upward. Further, a relief hole 556 is formed on the side of the rail latching elastic piece 555, and a ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 79 and the like) is formed below the rail latching elastic piece 555. The escape hole 556 is formed to escape the end of the shaft pin 748 of the alignment gear 747 provided in the tank rail member 740, and the ground wire connector 557 is provided inside the tank rail member 740. In addition to being in contact with a metal conductive plate (not shown) to be attached, a wiring connected to a ground connector provided on the power supply board 1136 is connected.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 and 61, vertical standing walls 560 are erected on the left and right ends of the shaft support side rear wall 546 on the shaft support side rear wall 546, and a spherical passage unit is provided between the standing walls 560. 770 and a prize ball unit 800 are attached. In addition, a prize ball guide projection 561 is provided in a bent shape from the most upstream part between the left and right standing walls 560 to slightly above the middle stream part. The award ball guide protrusion 561 is protruded rearward on the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the protrusion height gradually decreases toward the downstream side, and a ball passage unit 770 described later is attached. Corresponding to the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770, the award balls are guided in a line. Further, a path unit mounting boss 562 for fixing the ball path unit 770 with screws and a positioning pin 574 for positioning are provided on the left and right sides of the prize ball guide projection 561, and a ball break switch described later. A switch-corresponding protrusion 563 is provided so as to face 778. The passage unit mounting boss 562 and the positioning pin 574 will be described in detail later.

  Furthermore, an engaging protrusion 565 as a locking portion that engages with a hook-like engaging portion 824 (see FIG. 77) as an engaging portion of the prize ball unit 800 from the midstream portion to the downstream portion of the left and right standing walls 560; The lock elastic claw 564 that engages with the button insertion engagement hole 821 (see FIG. 77) of the prize ball unit 800 is formed, and the rotation shaft 808 (see FIG. 77) of the sprocket 807 of the prize ball unit 800 is formed. A clearance hole 566 for receiving the end of the reference is formed. Also, a payout motor escape opening 572 is formed below the pivot support side rear wall 546 so that the payout motor 815 as the drive motor of the prize ball unit 800 faces the payout motor escape opening 572. (See FIG. 62). Then, the prize ball unit 800 is engaged with the lower end of the locking groove 573 formed at the lowermost bottom surface of the rear surface of the shaft support side rear wall 546 and the rear of the shaft support side by the engaging protrusion 565 and the lock elastic claw 564. The face wall 546 is detachably attached. This detachable configuration will be described in detail later.

  In addition, a cover body contact groove 567 into which the open side end of the cover body 1250 enters is formed at the open end of the pivot support side rear wall 546 and below the cover body contact groove 567. A locking wall 569 is provided in a protruding manner. The cover body abutment groove 567 is formed with stop holes 568 corresponding to the stop holes 1253 (see FIG. 65) of the cover body 1250, and these stop holes 1253 and 568 are aligned with each other and fixed with screws (not shown). By wearing, the rear opening 580 of the main body frame 3 can be closed and fixed by the cover body 1250. The locking wall 569 is provided with a U-shaped locking protruding hook piece 570 in a plan view, and the locking protruding hook piece 570 is attached to the cover body 1250 with the cover body 1250 closed with respect to the main body frame 3. Only the person having the key of the padlock can open the cover body 1250 by penetrating the formed through hole 1254 (see FIG. 65) and hooking a lock such as a padlock on the locking protrusion 570. Can not be. Note that a connection operation opening 1255 is provided in the lower left portion of the cover body 1250, so that the RAM clear switch 624a (see FIG. 101) can be operated without performing the work of opening the cover body 1250, or for testing. The test equipment can be connected to the test terminals 624b and 624c (see FIG. 101).

  As mentioned above, although the structure of the main body frame main body 500 which consists of the game board installation recessed part 510 and the board part 511 was demonstrated, when the door frame 5 was closed to the lowest end side part of the board part 511 other than having demonstrated above. Further, engagement grooves 584 and 585 (see FIG. 58) are formed into which door frame protrusions 110d and 110e (see FIG. 16) bent downward with the lower side of the door frame base body 110 bent rearward. Yes. The engagement groove 584 is a groove formed below the firing device mounting portion 520 described above, and the engagement groove 585 is a groove formed from one end of the engagement groove 584 toward the shaft support side. Note that the door frame protrusion 110d corresponding to the engagement groove 585 protrudes rearward so as to be larger than the protrusion amount of the door frame protrusion 110e corresponding to the engagement groove 584. However, a door frame protruding piece 110d having a large protruding amount is slightly formed at the lower end of the open end. The door frame protruding pieces 110d and 110e and the engaging grooves 584 and 585 constitute the outer protrusions and engaging portions on the lower side portions of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the plate portion 511 is provided with the launch rail 515 and the outlet opening / closing device 579, and the rail connection member 516 and the launch device attachment portion 520 are formed to project, but the launch device attachment portion 520 and the launch rail 515 are provided. The position of the plate portion 511 is biased toward the open side, and they are formed so as to protrude from the surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, in a state where the door frame 5 is closed, the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 on which the launching device mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are arranged to the open side is the rear surface of the door frame 5 and the launching device mounting portion. 520 and the front surface of the firing rail 515 are in close contact with each other, so that the unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protruding piece 110d and the engagement groove 585 can be removed from the back surface of the door frame 5. It is extremely difficult to make the gap between the launcher mounting portion 520 and the front surface of the launch rail 515 even better and reach the front side of the game board 4 or the back side of the game board 4.

  On the other hand, since the region from the substantially central portion of the plate portion 511 where the launcher mounting portion 520 and the firing rail 515 are not arranged to the shaft support side does not have a portion protruding on the surface of the plate portion 511, the door frame 5 is closed. In this case, a space 586 is generated between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. For this reason, an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire that has passed through the gap between the door frame protrusion 110d and the engagement groove 584 can easily open the space 586 between the back surface of the door frame 5 and the front surface of the plate portion 511. In order to prevent unauthorized tools from slipping through the space 586 upward, the mounting base 160 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 has a space 586 in a state where the door frame 5 is closed. Crime prevention protrusions 166 are formed to invade. The security protrusion 166 is formed on the mounting base 160 so as to extend from substantially the middle of the plate portion 511 to the end portion on the shaft support side. Therefore, the space below the outer rail 602 attached to the launch rail 515 and the game board 4 constitutes a crime prevention space 586 that receives the crime prevention protrusion 166 protruding from the mounting base 160. The security protrusion 166 and the security space 586 constitute an inner protrusion and engagement portion at the lower side of the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  As described above, the main body frame 3 includes the game board 4, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, the lock device 1000, and the board unit. 1100 and the cover body 1250 are attached. Of these, the hit ball launching device 650, the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, the full tank unit 900, and the substrate unit 1100 will be described below. Will be described sequentially.

[3-1. Hitting ball launcher]
Next, the hit ball launching device 650 will be described with reference to FIGS. 67 is a perspective view (A) of the entire hitting ball launcher 650, a perspective view (B) with the firing motor part removed, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the hitting ball launching device 650, FIG. These are the front view (A) which shows the relationship between the hit ball launcher 650 and the launch rail 515, and the perspective view (B) of the launch motor part, and FIG. 70 shows the hit ball in a state where the operation handle 410 is not operated. 71 is a rear view showing the relationship between the device 650 and the firing rail 515, and FIG. 71 is a rear view showing the relationship between the ball hitting device 650 and the firing rail 515 in a state where the operation handle portion 410 is operated. 72 is a plan view (A), a front view (B), a perspective view (C), a front view (B) of the slide member 710 provided in the ball striking device 650, and a cross-sectional view taken along the line A-A (D) in FIG. It is.

  The hitting ball launching device 650 pivotally supports a hitting ball rod 687 on the firing base frame 651 and attaches a shot motor 695 that gives reciprocating rotation to the hitting ball rod 687 to the firing base frame 651, and further hits the hitting ball rod 687. The firing base frame 651 is provided with a slide rod 677 and a slide member 710 that adjust the urging force of the urging spring 684 that imparts the urging force that returns to the position.

  More specifically, as shown in FIG. 68, the launch base frame 651 is molded into a horizontally long rectangular shape by a synthetic resin, and a bearing in which a bearing 689 of a ball striking rod 687 is fitted at substantially the center thereof. A cylinder 652 is formed, and rubber stopper members 653 and 654 for restricting the firing origin position of the hitting ball 687 are attached and fixed to the upper part and the side thereof. That is, the rubber stopper members 653 and 654 receive the impact of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 returns to the firing origin position by the biasing force of the biasing spring 684. In addition, a slide guide hole 655 having a horizontally elongated groove is formed on the rear side of the firing base frame 651 (on the opposite side of the portion corresponding to the lower side of the firing rail 515), and a slide member storage space is formed below the slide guide hole 655. 656 is formed.

  The slide guide hole 655 is inserted with a guide locking piece 678 projecting from the upper rear end of a slide rod 677, which will be described later, and guides the slide movement of the slide rod 677. The slide member 710 is accommodated so as to be movable in the left-right direction. The slide guide of the front portion of the slide rod 677 is guided by a guide bush 681 fixed to a guide hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 in a stop hole 662 formed in the firing base frame 651 by a set screw 682. This is done by penetrating through. Further, a rectangular connection opening 664 is formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG.

  Further, a hook portion is formed on the front portion of the upper side of the firing base frame 651 with respect to the main body of the firing base frame 651, and an operating piece opening 657 is formed in the hook portion above the bearing cylinder 652. Yes. In the working piece opening 657, a weight 173 of a ball feeding member 172 (see FIG. 9) provided facing the hitting ball supply port 171b (see FIG. 9) on the downstream side of the dish unit 300 of the door frame 5 is provided. Is provided on a mounting portion 660 that protrudes from the rear upper part of the opening edge of the working piece opening 657 by a stop pin 659. The operating piece 658 is formed in a “te” shape, the rear end portion of the upper side thereof is pivotally supported by a stop pin 659, and the base plate rotates integrally with the ball striking rod 687 from the pivotal support portion to the arc portion below. 690 is in contact with an operating piece abutting portion 693 provided in a projecting manner at 690, and the upper side portion swings the ball feeding member 172 in conjunction with the reciprocating motion of the hitting ball rod 687. One hit ball that flows out from 171b is supplied to the launch position of launch rail 515 one by one.

  Further, on the firing base frame 651, motor mounting bosses 661 for fixing a motor cover 694 containing the firing motor 695 are projected in a total of three locations, two at the rear lower part and one at the front upper part. At the same time, a swinging piece boss 663 into which a shaft hole 673 at the lower end of the swinging piece 672 connected to the slide member 710 is inserted in a protruding manner is provided at the lower rear of the slide member storage space 656. ing.

  A metal plate 665 is attached to the above-described launch base frame 651 so that the hitting ball launcher 650 has high rigidity. For this reason, the metal plate 665 has through holes 666, 667, 668, 669 corresponding to the bearing cylinder 652, the lower rubber stopper member 653, the slide guide hole 655, the guide bush 681, and the swing piece boss 663, respectively. A horizontal oblong through hole 670 through which the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 passes is also formed. In the metal plate 665 configured as described above, after the slide member 710 is stored in the slide member storage space 656, each of the through holes 666 to 671 has the corresponding members 652, 653, 655, 681, 712, 663. It is fixed to the firing base frame 651 by being brought into close contact with the firing base frame 651 so as to penetrate or match with the screws.

  The tip of the swing piece boss 663 of the firing base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 671, and the shaft hole 673 of the swing piece 672 is inserted into the head portion. The swing piece 672 is pivotally supported so as to be swingable about the lower end. As shown in FIG. 68, the swing piece 672 is formed in a vertically long bowl shape, a shaft hole 673 is formed at the lower end thereof, and the connecting convex part 712 of the slide member 710 is inserted in the middle thereof. The connecting hole 674 is formed. The front surface above the connection hole 674 is an abutting portion 675 that abuts one end (rear end) of the slide rod 677. Accordingly, the rocking piece 672 is inserted into the rocking piece boss 663 and the connecting hole 674 is inserted into the connecting convex portion 712 of the slide member 710 protruding from the through hole 670 to connect the pin 676 with washer. The rocking piece 672 is attached to the firing base frame 651 by being fixed to the convex portion 712. The attached swinging piece 672 swings at the upper part around the lower end as the slide member 710 slides.

  Further, a horizontally long bowl-shaped slide bar 677 is attached to the upper front surface of the metal plate 665 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction. That is, an L-shaped guide locking piece 678 projecting from the rear upper part of the slide rod 677 is engaged with the through hole 668 of the metal plate 665, and the guide elongated hole 680 formed in front of the slide rod 677 is engaged. The guide bush 681 having the set screw 682 is passed through, and the set screw 682 is fixed to the set hole 662. The slide hook 677 is slidably mounted on the firing base frame 651 via the metal plate 665 by the guide locking piece 678 and the through hole 668, and the guide long hole 680 and the guide bush 681. The slide rod 677 is formed with a contacted portion 679 that contacts the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672 described above at one end (rear end), and one end of the biasing spring 684 at the other end (front end). A spring locking portion 683 for hooking the locking ring 685 is projected.

  A bearing cylinder 652 of the launch base frame 651 to which the metal plate 665 is attached protrudes from the through hole 666, and the bearing cylinder 652 is fitted so that the bearing 689 of the hitting ball rod 687 does not fall off. The lower end portion of the hit ball 687 is fixed to the shaft of the bearing 689 and, at the same time, the base plate 690 is fixed. An operating piece abutting portion 693 that abuts against the operating piece 658 protrudes from the front back surface side of the base plate 690, and a spring for latching the locking ring 686 at the other end of the biasing spring 684 on the front front surface thereof. A locking portion 692 is projected, and a motor contact projection 691 that engages with and disengages from the motor cam 697 of the firing motor 695 is projected from the rear front surface thereof. A synthetic resin rivet tip 688 is fixed to the upper end of the hitting ball 687, and the firing position formed by the lower end portion of the firing rail 515 and the firing position stopper 702 secured above the tip 688. I am going to rush into.

  On the other hand, a firing motor 695 housed in a motor cover 694 is attached to the above-described motor mounting boss 661 of the firing base frame 651. More specifically, as shown in FIG. 69 (B), the motor cover 694 includes a cylindrical portion formed so as to accommodate the firing motor 695 therein, and an enlarged motor mounting boss 661 that extends forward of the cylindrical portion. And an anti-rotation preventing cam 698 and a motor cam 697 at the tip of the rotating shaft 696 of the firing motor 695 which are integrally formed and are mounted in the cylindrical portion. Is fixed.

  A large number of reverse teeth are formed on the outer periphery of the reverse rotation prevention cam 698, which engages with a stopper piece 700 (see FIG. 70) that is fixed to the stopper piece mounting boss 701 so as to be swingable. The reverse rotation of 695 is prevented. This is to prevent the motor cam 697 from rotating in the reverse direction so that the motor cam 697 and the motor abutting protrusion 691 mesh with each other to prevent a failure in which the ball striking device 650 cannot be driven. Further, the motor cam 697 is formed in a ball shape, and reciprocates the hitting ball rod 687 while being engaged with and disengaged from the motor abutting protrusion piece 691 as the firing motor 695 rotates. When the motor cover 694 is attached to the motor attachment boss 661, as shown in FIG. 67 (A), the main structure of the hit ball launching device 650 is covered as seen from the rear surface.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 72, the slide member 710 housed in the slide member housing space 656 and slidably moving is formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape with the rear open, and an elliptical oval convex portion 711 projects on the front surface thereof. Further, a circular connecting convex portion 712 is projected from the rear position of the elliptical convex portion 711. Further, on both the upper and lower surfaces, slide contact protrusions 713 having an arc cross section are provided at both ends so as to easily slide in the slide member storage space 656. On the other hand, the space of the slide member 710 formed in a rectangular parallelepiped shape is an insertion space 714 into which the slide protrusion 183 of the joint unit 180 provided in the lower part of the back surface of the door frame 5 is inserted.

  The insertion space 714 has a first inclined surface 715 formed on the front side of the side wall in the sliding direction, and protrudes from the inside of the upper surface and the lower surface to the inside slightly behind the first inclined surface 715. In addition, a clamping piece 716 is formed in which a predetermined interval is formed between the tips of each other. A second inclined surface 717 is also formed on the front side of the sandwiching piece 716 so as to incline in a C shape when viewed from the side. Thus, in the state in which the slide protrusion 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, as shown in FIG. 72 (B), one end of the slide protrusion 183 on the inclined side 183a side abuts against the side wall in the sliding direction. In this state, it is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716. In addition, although the space part 718 is formed in the side of the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, this space part 718 is not necessarily playing a function.

  Thus, the slide member 710 configured as described above is an ellipse formed on the bottom surface of the slide member storage space 656 as shown in FIG. The insertion space 714 is formed so as to face the connection opening 664 having a shape, and the slide member 710 is in contact with one inner wall of the slide member storage space 656 (in FIG. 69A, the left inner wall is Although it is illustrated as being in contact, in a normal state, it is in a state of being in contact with the inner wall of the right space.

  First, the relationship of adjusting the strength of the urging spring 684 of the slide member 710 and the ball striking device 650 will be described. The slide member 710 has a right position at the initial position inside the slide member storage space 656 (FIG. 69A). 70, the swinging piece 672 connected to the connecting projection 712 of the slide member 710 is in a substantially vertical state. For this reason, the slide rod 677 that is in contact with the swing piece 672 is also urged in one direction (left side in FIG. 70) by the biasing force of the bias spring 684 and the contact portion 675 of the swing piece 672. The contacted portion 679 of the slide rod 677 is in contact. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is not tensioned, even if the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the firing motor 695, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 is weak, and the hit ball at the firing position is not elastic. Even if issued, the game area 605 of the game board 4 is not reached.

  On the other hand, when the slide member 710 moves in the other direction from the initial position in the slide member storage space 656 (when it moves toward the left inner wall in FIG. 69A), as shown in FIG. Since the swing piece 672 swings and tilts about the shaft hole 673 at the lower end, the slide rod 677 is moved in the other direction (right side in FIG. 71) by the contact between the contact portion 675 and the contacted portion 679. Slide towards you. Then, the biasing spring 684 locked to the spring locking portion 683 of the slide rod 677 is also tensioned and extended. In this state, since the urging spring 684 is tensioned, the return force of the hitting ball rod 687 when the hitting ball rod 687 is reciprocally rotated following the rotation of the shooting motor 695 is increased, and the hit ball at the shooting position is The game area 605 of the game board 4 is reached by being strongly bulleted. The strength of the impact force of the hit ball can be adjusted according to the amount of slide in the slide member storage space 656 of the slide member 710.

  As described above, by moving the slide member 710, it is possible to adjust the resilience by the hitting ball launching device 650. This is interlocked with the movement of the slide body 182 of the joint unit 180 that moves in accordance with the turning operation of the moving operation member 414. This point will be described with reference to FIG.

  As described above, when the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is rotated, the slanting cam 416 fixed to the tip of the rotation shaft 415 is also rotated, so that the slide body of the joint unit 180 182 slides in one direction inside the joint unit mounting recess 110c. For this reason, the slide protrusion 183 protruding from the front surface of the slide body 182 also slides in the same direction. When the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the slide body 182 passes through the connection opening 664 formed in the launching device mounting portion 520 of the main body frame 5 and inserts the slide member 710. It is inserted into the space 714. The insertion state in this case is a state where one end side on the inclined side 183a side of the slide projecting piece 183 is in contact with the side wall on the front side in the sliding direction and is inserted between the upper and lower clamping pieces 716 as described above. . Therefore, when the slide protrusion 183 slides in one direction, the slide member 710 also slides in the same direction. At this time, as described above, since the slide rod 677 also slides as the slide member 710 slides, the biasing force of the biasing spring 684 can be adjusted. That is, by rotating the rotation operation member 414 of the handle device 400, the resilience of the hit ball of the hit ball launching device 650 can be adjusted.

  By the way, in this embodiment, since the handle device 400 is provided on the door frame 5 and the hitting ball launching device 650 is provided on the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 of the handle device 400 is opened each time the door frame 5 is opened and closed. And the slide member 710 of the ball striking device 650 are linked or separated. However, in the present embodiment, as described above, by closing the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide projecting piece 183 is automatically inserted into the insertion space 714 of the slide member 710, and the handle device 400. The ball striking device 650 is linked, and conversely, by opening the door frame 5 with respect to the main body frame 3, the slide protrusion 183 is separated from the insertion space 714 to separate the handle device 400 and the ball striking device 650. Therefore, the handle device 400 and the hitting ball launching device 650 can be linked and separated very easily as the door frame 5 is opened and closed. In particular, when the slide projecting piece 183 is inserted into the insertion space 714, even if the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is slightly shifted in the vertical direction, the second inclination of the sandwiching piece 716 projecting into the insertion space 714 is provided. The slide protrusion 183 is smoothly inserted into the clamping position by the surface 717.

  In some cases, a player may stuff the padding operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410 and fix it at a position rotated to some extent. 5 may be opened and closed. Even in such a case, when the door frame 5 is opened, there is no problem because the slide projecting piece 183 is merely separated from the insertion space 714. However, when the door frame 5 is closed, the position of the slide projecting piece 183 is determined. Is slightly displaced in one direction, but the sliding member is accompanied with the closing operation of the door frame 5 by the cooperative action of the inclined side 183a of the sliding protrusion 183 and the first inclined surface 715 of the sliding member 710. The slide protrusion 183 and the slide member 710 are finally engaged while moving 710 in one direction. In other words, in the present embodiment, the handle device 400 and the hit ball launching device 650 can be linked with each other regardless of the rotation position of the rotation operation member 414 of the operation handle portion 410. is there.

[3-2. Prize ball tank]
Next, the prize ball tank 720 attached to the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 73 is a perspective view (A), a plan view (B), and a side view (C) of the prize ball tank 720. As described above, the prize ball tank 720 is detachably attached to the tank attachment groove 550 (see FIG. 61) formed in the upper part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. Thus, the prize ball tank 720 is formed in a rectangular box shape, and when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1, a notch portion 729 is formed in the front wall 721, and the bottom surface thereof extends from the upstream side wall 724 to the downstream side wall. A storage portion 728 is formed by a first inclined bottom surface 726 inclined toward 723 and a second inclined bottom surface 727 inclined from the front wall 721 toward a discharge port 730 described below.

  In addition, a discharge port 730 is formed at the inclined lower end of the second inclined bottom surface 727, and this discharge port 730 protrudes outward from the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720 when viewed from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. Thus, it is formed so as to be surrounded by a discharge port protruding wall 725 that connects the downstream side wall 723 and the rear wall 722 in a U-shape. Further, on both outer sides of the front wall 721 of the prize ball tank 720, attachment flanges 733 that engage with the tank attachment groove 550 are formed, and the main frame 3 is arranged on the back side of the bottom surface of the prize ball tank 720. Placement contact pieces 731 and 732 for placement and contact with the four side walls 543 project, and a ball for attaching a ball leveling member 744 described later to the lower part of the rear surface wall 722 on the upstream side of the prize ball tank 720. A leveling attachment shaft 735 is protruded. Further, an overflow preventing member 734 for preventing the ball from jumping is detachably attached to the rear wall 722 and the upstream side wall 724 of the prize ball tank 720 excluding the discharge port 730.

  In the prize ball tank 720 configured as described above, the mounting flange 733 is attached to the tank mounting groove 550 of the main body frame 3 so as to be inserted from above, and the mounting contact pieces 731 and 732 are attached to the main body frame 3. It abuts on the fourth side wall 543. As a result, the prize ball tank 720 is placed and mounted on the upper part on the back side of the main body frame 3. In this mounted state, as shown in FIG. 65, the prize ball tank 720 is stored via the notch 729 of the front wall 721. The portion 728 and the relief recess 551 formed on the back surface of the main body frame 3 communicate with each other, and as shown in FIG. 4, the discharge port 730 faces the upstream end of the tank rail member 740 to be described next. ing. Accordingly, in the prize ball tank 720, the width in the front-rear direction of the storage portion 728 for storing the sphere (the storage space portion corresponding to the first inclined bottom surface 726 and the second inclined bottom surface 727) is the second side wall 541 of the main body frame 3. It forms so that it may become substantially the same as the width | variety of the front-back direction to -4th side wall 543, and is mounted in the upper part to those side walls 541-543.

  Further, as described above, the first side wall 540 to the fourth side wall 543 of the main body frame 3 are deeply formed so as to cover the rear projecting space of the peripheral part of the game board 4, so that the side walls 541 to 541 are formed. Although the depth of the storage portion of the prize ball tank 720 placed on the upper part of the 543 is shallower than that of the conventional storage tank, the prize ball tank 720 is stored even if the prize ball is stored and increases in weight. Is supported by the side walls 542 to 543 of the main body frame 3, the stored sphere can be smoothly guided to the discharge port 730 without the inclined bottom surfaces 726 and 727 being deformed. Further, since the discharge port 730 is provided at a position outside the rear wall 722 of the prize ball tank 720, the flow of the sphere stored in the storage portion 728 flows outward from the second inclined bottom surface 727. It is configured. For this reason, as compared with the prize ball tank in which a part of the inclined bottom surface is provided with an opening as a discharge port as in the prior art, a spherical break-up protrusion for eliminating the clogging is formed in the storage portion near the discharge port. In addition, it is possible to obtain a structure in which ball clogging hardly occurs.

[3-3. Tank rail member]
Next, the tank rail member 740 disposed below the prize ball tank 720 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 74 and 75. 74 is a perspective view of the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball passage unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900 as seen from the back side of the pachinko gaming machine 1. These are the perspective views seen from the front side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 showing the relationship between the prize ball tank 720, the tank rail member 740, the ball path unit 770, the prize ball unit 800, and the full tank unit 900.

  As described above, the tank rail member 740 is detachably attached to the rail engaging grooves 553 and 554 (see FIG. 61) of the upper rear wall 545 of the main body frame 3. Therefore, the tank rail member 740 is provided with a plurality of locking protrusions 749 that are inserted from above into the rail locking groove 553 on the left and right sides and the lower side of the rear side surface, and the upper side of the rear side surface. At the center, a hook-shaped locking protrusion 750 is provided so as to be hooked on the rail locking groove 554 from above. Thus, the tank rail member 740 is formed in a slanted bowl shape having an open upper surface, the upper surface of the upstream end faces the discharge port 730 of the prize ball tank 720, and the lower surface of the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 forms a ball passage unit 770 described in detail later. I'm here. Further, as shown in FIG. 4, the inside of the tank rail member 740 is a passage 742 through which the spheres flow down in two rows by the partition wall 741.

  The bottom surface of the passage 742 is notched with a narrow groove, and foreign matters that roll along the passage 742 together with the sphere fall downward from the narrow groove. Further, a metal plate (not shown) for removing static electricity is attached to the side wall of the passage 742, and the downstream end of the metal plate is connected to the ground wire connector 557 (see FIG. 59) described above. ing. For this reason, static electricity charged in the sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 is grounded from the metal plate to the outside via the ground wire connector 557 via the ground connector of the power supply board 1136.

  In addition, an egg-shaped ball leveling member 744 having a weight on the slightly downstream side of the midstream region of the tank rail member 740 is swingably provided. The ball leveling member 744 is pivotally supported by the ball leveling mounting shaft 735 of the award ball tank 720 described above, and moves toward the two paths 742 in the tank rail member 740. The spheres that are suspended and flow down the respective passages 742 flow down in a plurality of stages in the vertical direction so as to be rectified so as to become one stage. Further, the upper surface of the tank rail member 740 on the downstream side from the installation position of the ball leveling member 744 is covered with a ball pressing plate 745. The ball holding plate 745 is formed in an inclined arc shape so that the ball that has not been made one step by the ball leveling member 744 is forced to one step.

  Further, a pair of alignment gears 747 are rotatably supported by shaft pins 748 at the downstream end of the tank rail member 740 so as to face the respective passages 742. The alignment gear 747 has a plurality of teeth formed on the outer periphery, and is fixed to the shaft pin 748 so that the pitch of the teeth in the pair of alignment gears 747 is shifted by a half pitch. For this reason, when the upper part of the sphere that has flowed down each passage 742 of the tank rail member 740 flows downstream while meshing with the teeth of the alignment gear 747, the spheres in the two rows of passages 742 are alternately sent one by one. become. The alignment gear 747 is covered with an arcuate gear cover 746 on its upper surface.

[3-4. Ball passage unit]
Next, the ball passage unit 770 for guiding the balls dropped from the tank rail member 740 in a line to the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference mainly to FIGS. 74 and 75 are as described above, and FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view showing the relationship between the main body frame 3, the ball path unit 770, and the prize ball unit 800.

  In the spherical passage unit 770 of the present embodiment, a spherical drop passage 772 is formed by a pair of bent passage walls 771 bent on the back surface (a surface seen from the back surface) of a substantially rectangular plate material. As shown in FIG. 76, the ball drop passage 772 communicates with the front and rear bent passage portion 772a whose upstream is bent in the front and rear direction (depth direction when viewed from the back), and the front and rear bent passage portion 772a (right and rear). Left and right bent passage portions 772b bent in the left-right direction as viewed from the right side, and a vertical passage portion 772c communicating with the left and right bent passage portions 772b and having a substantially vertical shape.

  Since the position of the upper end inlet 773 dropping from the tank rail member 740 described above is substantially the center of the two rows of passages 742 as described above, the front / rear bent passage 772a has the upper rear wall 545 and the shaft support. Since the rear rear wall 546 is located away from the rear surface, the ball drop passage 772 is pivotally supported by the front / rear bent passage 772a and the prize ball guide protrusion 561 projecting from the pivot side rear wall 546. It bends in the front-rear direction so as to be positioned close to the surface of the side rear wall 546. Further, the left and right bent passage portions 772b are formed to be bent in a U-shape to the full width of the ball passage unit 770 in order to weaken the momentum of the sphere that has dropped from the tank rail member 740 to the front and rear bent passage portions 772a. It is.

  Further, although the vertical passage portion 772c is formed in a substantially vertical shape, the vertical passage portion 772c is slightly curved and formed, and a notch portion 775 is formed in one bent passage wall 771 constituting the vertical passage portion 772c. A ball breakage detecting piece 776 whose upper end is supported by a support shaft 777 is attached to 775 so as to be swingable. A ball break switch 778 is attached to the side of the ball break detection piece 776, and an actuator of the ball break switch 778 is in contact with the ball break detection piece 776. The ball break detection piece 776 and the ball break switch 778 constitute a ball break detection mechanism for detecting a ball break in the vertical passage portion 772c.

  Thus, when a sphere is present in the vertical passage portion 772c, the sphere breakage detecting piece 776 is pressed by the sphere present in the vertical passage portion 772c and the actuator is pushed to turn on the sphere breakage switch 778. When a ball is no longer present due to clogging or ball deficiency at 772c, the ball breakage detecting piece 776 swings into the vertical passage portion 772c, so that the actuator turns off the ball breakage switch 778. When the ball break switch 778 is turned off, the rotation of a payout motor 815 of a prize ball unit 800, which will be described later, stops and the payout of prize balls is stopped.

  Further, a stop hole 782 and a positioning boss 783 are formed in the ball path unit 770 at a position avoiding the above-described ball drop path 772. The positioning boss 783 is engaged with a positioning pin 574 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the stop hole 782 is similarly a passage unit formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546. This corresponds to the mounting boss 562. Thus, to attach the ball passage unit 770 to the main body frame 3, the passage unit mounting boss 562 and the stop hole 782 are made to coincide with each other while the positioning boss 783 is engaged with the positioning pin 574. This can be done by screwing 784. Further, the ball passage unit 770 is formed with a cover body engagement groove 785 that engages with the engagement piece 1252 of the cover body 1250 in the middle of one side thereof, and is connected to the prize ball unit 800 at the lower part. The connecting lid member 786 is rotatably provided.

  The connecting lid member 786 is configured by projecting a pair of passage walls 790 projecting in an arc shape on the back surface of a rectangular plate member, and projecting from both left and right end portions of the lower surface of the spherical passage unit 770. A projecting shaft 789 serving as a rotary shaft projecting from the tip of a support piece 788 extending from both ends of the connecting lid member 786 is fitted to a support projecting piece 787 serving as a shaft support portion, so that the shaft can rotate freely. It is to be supported. Further, the connecting lid member 786 extends below the spherical passage unit 770 by closing, and the passage formed by the passage wall 790 communicates with the downstream end of the ball dropping passage 772 and opens to open the passage. The passage formed by the wall 790 and the downstream end of the ball drop passage 772 can be rotated to a state where they do not communicate with each other, but when the transition from the open state to the closed state occurs, the support piece of the connecting lid member 786 is supported. A guide projection 791 for guiding 788 is provided at the lower end of the rear surface of the ball path unit 770.

  Thus, in a state where the ball passage unit 770 is fixed to the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and the prize ball unit 800 is also mounted on the shaft support side rear wall 546 as described later, The lid member 786 is closed and its rear surface is locked by a locking elastic claw 820 provided in the prize ball unit 800, whereby the ball drop path 772 of the ball path unit 770 and the bent path 803 of the prize ball unit 800 are connected to the passage wall. The ball that falls through the ball drop passage 772 of the ball passage unit 770 can be guided to the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 by communicating at 790. The reason why the rotatable connecting lid member 786 is provided in the ball passage unit 770 is that the award ball unit 800 can be easily attached to and detached from the main body frame 3 as will be described later, and the attachment and detachment thereof is possible. This is to prevent the space formed between the ball path unit 770 and the prize ball unit 800 from being hindered from falling smoothly.

  Further, between the pair of bent passage walls 771 projecting from the ball passage unit 770, the projecting height is provided on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3 so as to gradually decrease toward the downstream side. By inserting the award ball guide protrusion 561, the upstream portion of the ball drop passage 772 is placed on the rear side so that the upper end inlet 773 of the ball drop passage 772 is positioned substantially at the lower center of the two rows of passages 742 of the tank rail member 740. It is formed as a front / rear bent passage portion 772a that bends in the front / rear direction when viewed from the side. Accordingly, in the configuration in which the balls flowing down in two rows by the pair of alignment gears 747 are alternately sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 side, the balls are smoothly sent one by one to the prize ball unit 800 through the ball drop passage 772. Can do. Further, according to this configuration, since it is not necessary to form the ball drop passage 772 from an assembly of a plurality of members, the number of parts constituting the ball drop passage 772 can be reduced, and the ball drop passage 772 can be assembled. Workability can be improved.

  In addition, the sphere that has fallen from the tank rail member 740 in the front / rear bent passage portion 772a weakens its momentum by passing through the left / right bent passage portion 772b, and then is sent to the winning ball unit 800 through the vertical passage portion 772c. . In addition, the vertical passage portion 772c into which the ball is fed in a state where the momentum is weakened is provided with a ball break detection mechanism (a ball break detection piece 776 and a ball break switch 778) for detecting the ball break. Accordingly, it is possible to reliably detect a break in the ball drop passage 772, in other words, a break in the ball supplied to the winning ball unit 800 (a ball break).

[3-5. Prize ball unit]
Next, the prize ball unit 800 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described ball path unit 770 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 77 and 78. 77 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and FIG. 78 is a rear view for explaining the relationship between the payout motor 815 and the sprocket 807 as a payout member.

  77, a prize ball unit 800 includes a unit base body 801 in which a bent path 803, a prize ball path 810, and a ball extraction path 811 that form a ball path by a pair of bent path walls 802, and a unit base body 801. A unit sub-plate 825 covering the rear surface of the unit sub-plate, an intra-prize ball relay terminal plate 830 attached to the upper surface (rear side) of the unit sub-plate 825, and a substantially central surface region (rear side region) of the unit sub-plate 825. And a gear cover 866 that covers the detection disk 850 (rotation transmission member). Hereinafter, these configurations will be sequentially described.

  The unit base body 801 is formed in a substantially rectangular plate shape (this plate portion may be referred to as a “bottom surface”), and a pair of bent passages projecting toward the plate-like unit sub plate 825 side. A bent passage 803 is formed by the wall 802. The bent passage wall 802 protrudes from the center of the upper part of the unit base body 801 to a substantially middle position on the downstream side at a distance slightly larger than the diameter of the sphere. It also serves as side walls on both ends of the unit base body 801 from the downstream end to the downstream end. The middle bent passage wall 802 is largely divided into left and right portions to form a distribution space 805 in which a sprocket 807 serving as a ball feed rotating body is arranged. A passage partition wall 809 is formed in a projecting manner so as to form a pair of bent passage walls 802 divided to the left and right until the downstream end.

  That is, the right and left bent passage walls 802 and the passage partition wall 809 on the downstream side from the middle form two passages on the left and right from the distribution space 805, and one passage constitutes the prize ball passage 810, The other passage forms a ball passage 811. The passage partition wall 809 is also largely divided into left and right, and a motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed inside the divided passage partition wall 809. That is, the payout motor 815 is stored in a motor storage space 814 that is located at a position avoiding the ball passage (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811) and is formed within the depth width dimension of the ball passage. Fixed. The bent passage 803 is formed in a meandering shape so as to weaken the pressure applied to the sprocket 807 of a sphere staying in the passage 803 and reaches the distribution space 805, but on the upstream side of the distribution space 805. An elliptical opening 804 is formed on the bottom surface. The opening 804 stores small dust or the like that has entered the bent passage 803, and can collect dust or the like that is collected when the prize ball unit 800 is removed from the main body frame 3.

  In the distribution space 805, a sprocket 807 serving as a payout member having a plurality of (three in the illustrated example) recesses in which a sphere fits on the outer periphery is rotatably disposed. A bearing cylinder 806 that pivotally supports the other end of the rotary shaft 808 to which the 807 is fixed is formed on the bottom surface of the distribution space 805. Further, the upper end portion of the passage partition wall 809 constituting the bottom portion of the distribution space 805 is formed in a concave arc shape along the rotation arc of the sprocket 807, and in the upstream portion of the prize ball passage 810 formed on one side thereof The counting switch 812 is detachably attached.

  The counting switch 812 is formed of a rectangular parallelepiped magnetic sensor having a circular passage hole through which a sphere passes, and a switch fitting recess 865 that matches the shape of the rear end is formed by a bent passage wall 802. By doing so, it can be easily attached and detached. A wiring (not shown) from the counting switch 812 is connected to a prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 described later. Further, on the downstream side of the bent passage wall 802 constituting the prize ball passage 810, a locking claw that engages with a locking portion 860 formed on a passage lid plate portion 859 formed integrally with the unit sub plate 825. A plurality of 813 are formed. However, among the plurality of locking claws 813, the locking claw 813 that engages with one locking portion 860 at the lower end of the passage lid plate portion 859 is formed on the passage partition wall 809 side.

  In addition, a circular motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 is formed below the unit base body 801 and between the prize ball passage 810 and the ball removal passage 811. This motor storage space 814 The cylindrical main body of the payout motor 815 is accommodated in the inside. However, the payout motor 815 is fixed to the back side of the aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 attached below the unit sub plate 825 with a pair of mounting pieces 816 formed on the front surface thereof with screws 817. Then, in a state where the payout motor 815 is attached to the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub-plate 825, the rotating shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 passes through the shaft insertion hole 842 drilled in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841. The gear 843 is fixed.

  In addition, a space in the depth width direction in which the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball removal passage 811 described above are formed by covering the rear side of the unit base body 801 with the unit sub plate 825 and the aluminum heat sink 841. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is also accommodated in the inside. Since the motor storage space 814 for storing the payout motor 815 and the distribution space 805 in which the sprocket 807 described above is arranged are formed in an extremely close positional relationship in the vertical direction, the unit base body 801 in the vertical direction The length can be shortened, and as a result, the prize ball unit 800 can be made compact.

  Further, the unit base body 801 is provided with a guide protrusion 819 that guides the ball extracted from the lowermost end of the above-described ball extraction passage 811 to the back side of the prize ball unit 800, and the guide protrusion 819 includes a guide protrusion 819. The guided ball is guided to a ball pulling connection passage 880 described later, and finally discharged to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (a collection basket provided below the island platform). A locking elastic claw 820 that locks the connecting lid member 786 of the above-described ball passage unit 770 protrudes from the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and the prize ball unit 800 is mounted on the shaft support side of the main body frame 3. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the button insertion engagement hole 821 and the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 for removably attaching to the rear wall 546 and the gear cover 866 with the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825 sandwiched therebetween. Is provided.

  The button insertion engagement hole 821 is provided on one side of the upper portion of the unit base body 801, and a rod-like attachment / detachment button 822 is slidably attached in the depth width direction. Corresponds to the locking elastic claw 564 formed on the pivot side rear surface wall 546 of the main body frame 3. In addition, as shown in FIG. 76, the rear end surface of the button insertion engagement hole 821 has a concave shape so that the distal end portion of the lock elastic claw 564 enters. The hook-shaped engaging portion 824 engages with an engaging protrusion 565 formed on the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, and presses the prize ball unit 800 against the shaft support side rear wall 546. By pushing down downward, the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 are engaged. In the engaged state, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged with each other, so that the upward movement of the prize ball unit 800 cannot be performed.

  Note that the hook-shaped engagement portions 824 are formed on the upper left and right of the unit base body 801. A mounting boss 823 for connecting the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched therebetween is long and protrudes toward the rear surface, and is a through hole formed in the unit sub-plate 825. After passing through 858, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are coupled with the unit sub-plate 825 sandwiched by fitting the screw 868 from the surface of the gear cover 866 to correspond to the mounting hole 867 of the gear cover 866. doing.

  The configuration of the unit sub-plate 825 that covers the unit base body 801 will be described. The unit sub-plate 825 is a composite that covers the bent passage 803 portion, the distribution space 805 portion, and the prize ball passage 810 portion of the unit base body 801. A payout motor 815 is attached to a resin plate, and an aluminum heat dissipating plate 841 that covers the downstream portion of the ball extraction passage 811 is attached. On the front side (rear side) of the synthetic resin plate portion of the unit sub-plate 825, a relay board region 826 for attaching the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is formed in the upper part, and a plurality of gears 843 are provided below the relay board area 826. A gear region 840 to which 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 are attached is formed.

  The relay board region 826 is formed in a substantially square shape, and mounting ribs 827 for placing the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 are projected along the square shape. An engaging groove portion 828 that engages with an engaging protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is formed, and a locking claw portion 829 that engages with a locking protrusion 837 of the substrate cover 835 is formed at the center of the other side vertical side. Yes. The relay board region 826 is formed with a button insertion hole 834 through which the attach / detach button 822 is inserted and a mounting boss portion 832 for fixing the in-prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 with screws (not shown). .

  The prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached to the relay board area 826 is connected to the above-described counting switch 812, payout motor 815, and rotation angle switch 855, which will be described later, provided in the prize ball unit 800, as will be described later. It relays the wiring from the payout control board 1186 (see FIGS. 62 and 84). For this purpose, a plurality of connectors are provided, and the button insertion hole 833 through which the detachable button 822 is inserted and the mounting boss portion 832 are provided. Corresponding mounting holes 831 are formed. The award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 is placed on the placement rib 827 of the relay board region 826, and the mounting hole 831 and the mounting boss portion 832 are aligned with each other and fastened with screws (not shown). The intra-sphere relay terminal plate 830 can be fixed to the surface (rear surface) of the unit sub-plate 825.

  Further, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 attached as described above is covered with the substrate cover 835. The substrate cover 835 is formed in a box shape having a substantially square front side open, and an engagement protrusion 836 is formed on the upper and lower bases of one vertical side, and a locking projection 837 is formed on the substantially central side surface of the other vertical side. ing. A button opening 838 and a connection opening 839 are formed on the square vertical surface of the substrate cover 835. Thus, after the engagement protrusion 836 of the substrate cover 835 is inserted into the engagement groove portion 828 of the relay substrate region 826 and engaged, the engagement protrusion 837 and the engagement claw portion 829 are engaged with each other. The baseball unit relay terminal plate 830 can be covered with the substrate cover 835. On the other hand, when removing, the latching claw portion 829 is elastically deformed to release the engagement with the latching projection 837 and the substrate cover 835 is pulled diagonally forward to engage the engagement projection 836 and the engagement groove 828. The engagement with can be released. In the state where the substrate cover 835 is covered, the head of the detachable button 822 engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821 passes through the button insertion holes 833 and 834 and slightly faces the outside from the button opening 838. Yes. Further, the wiring connected to the inward prize unit relay terminal plate 830 is drawn out from the connection opening 839 to the outside.

  Next, the gears 843, 844, 847 and the detection disk 850 provided in the gear region 840 formed in the unit sub plate 825 will be described. As described above, the tip of the rotation shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 protrudes from the surface (rear side) of the unit sub plate 825 through the shaft insertion hole 842 formed in the aluminum heat radiating plate 841 of the unit sub plate 825. The first gear 843 (drive gear, number of teeth Z1 = 30) is fixed to the protruding portion. Above the first gear 843, a second gear 844 (rotation transmission gear, number of teeth Z2 = 30) meshing with the first gear 843 is press-fitted into the back surface (front side) of the gear cover 866, and the aluminum heat sink 841 A shaft 845 that is supported at the other end by a shaft hole 846 formed in the shaft 845 is rotatably provided. Above the second gear 844, a third gear 847 (rotation transmission gear; The number of teeth Z3 = 20) is rotatably provided on a shaft 848 press-fitted into a shaft hole 849 formed in the unit sub-plate 825. Further, above the third gear 847, a detection disk 850 having a gear portion 852 (driven gear, number of teeth Z4 = 34) meshing with the third gear 847 is rotatable on a rotating shaft 808 that supports the sprocket 807. Is provided.

  Note that the distal end portion of the rotating shaft 818 is loosely fitted in a receiving hole formed in the gear cover 866. The rotating shaft 808 is supported by being pressed into a bearing cylinder 806 formed on the unit base body 801 and supported at the other end by a bearing hole formed on the gear cover 866. The sprocket 807 is rotatably supported in the distribution space 805 through a shaft through hole 864 formed slightly below the center of the 840, and the detection disk 850 is formed in the space formed by the unit sub plate 825 and the gear cover 866. Is pivotally supported. However, since the rear end portion of the sprocket 807 is engaged with the center front surface portion of the detection disk 850, the sprocket 807 and the detection disk 850 rotate integrally around the rotation shaft 808. ing. Accordingly, when the dispensing motor 815 is driven to rotate, the rotation is transmitted to rotate the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850.

  Here, the rotation speed of the sprocket 807 is obtained by reducing the rotation speed of the rotation shaft 818 of the dispensing motor 815 by the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850. . The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z1 (= 30) of the first gear 843 / the number of teeth Z4 (= 34) of the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850 by calculation based on the mechanism. In this embodiment, the payout motor 815 is a four-phase stepping motor whose rotation shaft 818 rotates once in 48 steps. Therefore, in order for the sprocket 807 to rotate once, the rotation shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 rotates about 54 steps. It will be. In this case, the sprocket 807 rotates 7.5 degrees (= 360 degrees / 48 steps) in one step, and the sprocket 807 rotates about 6.6 degrees (7.5 degrees × deceleration) in one step of the rotation shaft 818 of the payout motor 815. Ratio n) will be rotated.

  The outer periphery of the detection disk 850 is formed to be slightly larger than the circle of the gear portion 852, and the outer peripheral portion protruding outward from the gear portion 852 has the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807 (in the case of illustration). 3) detection notches 851 are formed. This detection notch 851 is detected by a light projection / reception type rotation angle switch 855 provided on a sensor substrate 854 sandwiched and supported by a substrate mounting portion 857 formed on the surface of the unit sub-plate 825. The rotation angle switch 855 is for monitoring whether or not the sprocket 807 is rotating normally by detecting the number of detection notches 851 within a predetermined interval during the payout operation. If abnormal rotation is detected by the rotation angle switch 855 (in many cases, the ball is engaged with the sprocket 807), the sprocket 807 is rotated forward and backward a predetermined number of times to eliminate the abnormal state (for example, the ball engagement state). To do. Note that the number of balls actually paid out is detected by the counting switch 812 provided in the prize ball passage 810 and used for counting. Note that the other end side of the sensor substrate 854 is also sandwiched between substrate mounting portions formed on the gear cover 866.

  Here, as described above, the detection cutouts 851 are three in the same number as the recesses of the sprocket 807, and are formed on the outer circumference of the detection disk 850 equally (every 120 degrees). The rotation shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 is rotated by the sprocket 807 via the first gear 843, the second gear 844, the third gear 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850. Since the rotation shaft 818 of the dispensing motor 815 rotates about 54 steps, the sprocket 807 rotates once, and therefore the rotation between the detection notches 851 (120 degrees) of the detection disk 850 (sprocket 807) is the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 815. 818 rotations of 18 steps (= about 54 steps / 3).

  As described above, of the plurality of gears provided in the gear region 840, only the second gear 844 is rotatably provided on the rotary shaft 845 that is press-fitted to the gear cover 866 side. As a result, the gear cover 866 covering the gear region 840 is provided. A mounting hole 867 is formed at a position corresponding to the tip of the mounting boss 823 that protrudes from the unit base body 801 and passes through the through hole 858 of the unit sub-plate 825. The mounting hole 867 and the mounting boss 823 are aligned with each other while meshing the teeth of the second gear 844 provided on the gear cover 866 side with the teeth of the first gear 843 and the third gear 847 provided on the unit sub-plate 825 side. In this state, the unit base body 801 and the gear cover 866 are integrally fixed in a state where the unit sub plate 825 is sandwiched by screwing with the screw 868 from the rear surface of the gear cover 866. Further, on one side surface of the gear cover 866, wiring connected to the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830 (for example, wiring connecting the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830 and a payout control board 1186 described later) is provided. A wiring processing piece 869 that is hooked up and gathered is projected.

  The configuration of the prize ball unit 800 has been described above. However, in the state where the unit base body 801, the unit sub board 825, the prize ball unit relay terminal board 830, the board cover 835, and the gear cover 866 are assembled, they should be paid out. The cylindrical main body portion of the dispensing motor 815 is positioned below the bent passage 803 through which the sphere is guided. Further, the unit base body 801 includes a sprocket 807 arranged in a ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) and a depth width dimension of the ball passage at a position avoiding the ball passage. A payout motor 815 housed in a motor housing space 814 formed therein, and the rotation of the rotating shaft 818 of the payout motor 815 along the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825 is rotated by the sprocket 807. A rotation transmission member (first gear 843, second and third gears 844, 847, and a gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) for transmitting to the shaft 808 is provided, and in the distribution space 805 of the dispensing motor 815 and the bending passage 803. A plurality of gears 843, 844, 847 provided in the gear region 840 on the rear surface of the unit sub-plate 825 with the sprocket 807 serving as a payout member disposed. And it has a connecting structure to be rotated by 850 (852). That is, the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are accommodated within the depth width of the ball passage (bending passage 803, prize ball passage 810, ball removal passage 811) formed between the unit base body 801 and the unit sub plate 825. In addition, the rotation transmission members (the first gear 843, the second and third gears 844 and 847, and the gear portion 852 of the detection disk 850) that connect the sprocket 807 and the payout motor 815 are connected to the non-blocking surface side of the unit sub-plate 825. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 can be made thinner than the one in which a payout motor and a part of the sprocket are arranged outside the ball passage.

  In addition, such a prize ball unit 800 is further thinned by forming the ball passages (the bent passage 803, the prize ball passage 810, and the ball passage 811) in the prize ball unit 800 in a single passage shape. It is planned. That is, unlike the conventional case in which the payout motor 815 protrudes to the front side, the rear side or the side of the prize ball unit, when attached to the rear side of the shaft support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, Any part of the prize ball unit 800 can be structured not to protrude further rearward. Note that the front end portion of the payout motor 815 is configured to slightly protrude from the rear surface of the unit base body 801, and this protruded portion is provided below the shaft support side rear wall 546 as shown in FIG. Since the relief opening 572 faces the front portion of the main body frame 3, as a result, only the dimension obtained by subtracting the plate thickness dimension of the pivot support side rear wall 546 from the projection dimension is obtained. The amount of protrusion toward the front side of the side rear wall 546 is slight. In addition, by adopting such a configuration, in the present embodiment, the game board 4 is provided between the pivot side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3 to which the prize ball unit 800 is attached and the back surface of the game board 4. A storage space for storing the rearward protruding portion of the gaming apparatus can be increased in the depth width direction.

  Further, in order to attach the prize ball unit 800 configured as described above to the pivotal support side rear wall 546 of the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 76, a hook-shaped engagement portion 824, an engagement protrusion 565, After the alignment, the lower end of the prize ball unit 800 is hooked in the locking groove 573, and the prize ball unit 800 is pivotally supported to engage the hook-like engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565. The lower side wall 546 is pressed down while being in close contact with the side rear wall 546. At this time, since the lower end portion of the prize ball unit 800 and the locking groove 573 are engaged, and the hook-shaped engaging portion 824 and the engaging protrusion 565 are engaged, the mounting itself is completed. When the prize ball unit 800 is moved upward, the respective engagement states are easily released. To prevent this, the lock elastic claw 564 is engaged with the button insertion engagement hole 821. It is supposed to be.

  That is, the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821 are engaged to prevent the prize ball unit 800 from moving upward in the attached state. Thus, after the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the connecting lid member 786 of the ball path unit 770 is rotated as described above and locked by the locking elastic claw 820, so that the ball path of the ball path unit 770 drops. The downstream end of the passage 772 and the upstream end of the bent passage 803 of the prize ball unit 800 can be communicated with each other through a passage constituted by a pair of passage walls 790. When the prize ball unit 800 is attached, the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is connected to the prize ball inlet 927 of the full tank unit 900 described in detail later, and the downstream end of the ball removal path 811 is connected to the ball removal connection path. Connected to the upstream end of 880.

  On the other hand, when the prize ball unit 800 is removed, the engagement by the latching elastic claws 820 is released and the connecting lid member 786 is rotated forward, and then the detachable button 822 is pressed to release the locking elastic claws 564. It is moved to the front side to release the engagement between the lock elastic claw 564 and the button insertion engagement hole 821, and then the prize ball unit 800 is pulled upward with the detachable button 822 pressed, and the prize ball unit 800. By releasing the engagement between the lower end portion of the lens and the locking groove 573 and the engagement between the hook-shaped engagement portion 824 and the engagement protrusion 565 and pulling out the prize ball unit 800 to the front side, Easy to remove.

[3-6. Full tank unit]
Next, the full tank unit 900 disposed on the downstream side of the above-described prize ball unit 800 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 79 to 83. 79 is a perspective view showing the relationship between the prize ball unit 800 and the full tank unit 900, FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 81 is a front view of the full tank unit 900. 82 is an exploded perspective view, FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view seen from the back of the full tank unit 900, and FIG. 83 is a partially broken perspective view showing the relationship between the full tank unit 900 and the foul port 610.

  The full unit 900 is placed and fixed on the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3 as described above. As shown in FIG. 901 and a lid body 926 that covers the upper surface of the box main body 901. The box main body 901 is configured such that the sphere that has flowed in from the downstream end of the prize ball passage 810 is guided in a zigzag shape inside and discharged from the outlet 921. Therefore, a side guide passage 902 that guides a sphere that has flowed in from a prize ball inlet 927 formed in the lid 926 to the side from one end to the other end is formed in the upstream portion. A side guide receiving portion 903 formed in a concave arc shape so as to guide the sphere toward the side is provided at one end portion of the side guide passage 902 directly below the prize ball entrance 927, and the side guide passage is provided. A buffer member 904 is provided on the inner surface of the other end of 902 to receive the impact of the sphere flowing through the side guide passage 902 and guide the sphere downstream.

  Further, the ball that collides with the buffer member 904 provided on the inner surface of the other end of the side guide passage 902 is guided to flow in the opposite direction to the flow of the sphere in the side guide passage 902 after changing the direction to the downstream side. A reverse side guide passage 905 is formed. The sphere that has flowed through the reverse side guide passage 905 is then guided to the front guide passage 920 formed toward the front, and the award of the dish unit 300 described above from the outlet 921 formed at the lower end of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the ball contact 343.

  By the way, a bottom surface opening 906 that opens over the entire bottom surface is formed on the bottom surface on the upstream side of the reverse side guide passage 905, and the bottom surface swinging plate 907 is closed so that the bottom surface swinging plate 907 can swing freely. Yes. The bottom surface opening 906 is formed in a substantially square concave shape having an open top surface, and a pair of shaft projections 911 project from the side walls in the front-rear direction when viewed from the front inside. A circular spring mounting recess 912 for positioning the lower end of the spring 913 is formed on the concave bottom surface of the bottom surface opening 906. On the other hand, the bottom rocking plate 907 that closes the bottom opening 906 is formed in a substantially square shape, and is a semicircular bearing that is pivotally supported by being fitted to a pivot projection 911 as viewed from the front on the downstream side of the back surface. A portion 908 is formed to project.

  Further, a spring locking projection 910 that locks the upper end of the spring 913 protrudes downward from the center of the back surface of the bottom rocking plate 907. Therefore, the bottom rocking plate 907 is biased in the direction in which the upstream side is always rocked upward by the biasing force of the spring 913. The spring 913 does not swing the bottom rocking plate 907 downward even when a normal number of payout balls (for example, 15) is placed on the bottom rocking plate 907 at a time. A predetermined number of balls equal to or greater than the payout number is formed by a spring member having a spring coefficient that swings downward when placed on the bottom swing plate 907. Further, a detection protrusion 909 protrudes forward on the upstream side of the bottom rocking plate 907. The detection protrusion 909 passes through the communication hole 929 and is positioned in a switch storage space 914 described below when the bearing portion 908 of the bottom rocking plate 907 is fitted and supported on the shaft support protrusion 911. It has become.

  In addition, a switch storage space 914 for storing the full tank switch 916 is integrally formed on the outer side of the upstream end side wall of the reverse side guide passage 905. In order to mount the full switch 916 in the switch storage space 914, a switch mounting portion 918 is formed on the outer surface of the side wall of the upstream end portion of the reverse side guide passage 905 above the switch storage space 914. A mounting piece 917 of the switch holder 915 that holds the full switch 916 is fixed to the portion 918 by a screw 919. The full tank switch 916 is configured as a switch composed of a projector and a light receiver, and detects ON / OFF when the detection protrusion 909 swings up and down between the light receiver and the light projector.

  Further, a foul ball passage 922 is formed on one side downstream of the reverse side guide passage 905. As shown in FIG. 83, the foul ball passage 922 is bent and formed such that the foul ball inlet 923 communicates with the foul port 610 described above and the downstream side communicates with the upstream side of the front guide passage 920. Has been. Therefore, the foul ball taken into the foul port 610 is guided from the foul ball inlet 923 through the bent foul ball passage 922 to the front guide passage 920, and further through the outlet 921 and the prize ball connecting rod 343 to the dish unit. Returned to 300.

  The box main body 901 has engaging pieces 924 that are engaged with unit engaging grooves 532 formed in the full unit mounting portion 531 on both sides of the outlet 921 and one side of the foul ball inlet 923. A latching protrusion 925 that engages with a latching piece 928 formed on the lid 926 is formed. The latching protrusion 925 is appropriately formed on the upper left and right side walls of the box main body 901.

  On the other hand, the lid 926 is formed in a plate shape so as to cover the upper surfaces of the side guide passage 902, the reverse side guide passage 905, the front guide passage 920, and the foul ball passage 922 of the box main body 901. A square prize ball entrance 927 is opened at a position corresponding to the upstream end at 902. Further, a latching piece 928 for engaging with a latching projection 925 of the box main body 901 is provided around the lid 926 so as to project downward.

  In the full tank unit 900 configured as described above, as shown in FIG. 79, the balls paid out from the prize ball path 810 of the prize ball unit 800 are moved upstream from the prize ball entrance 927 to the upstream side of the side guidance path 902. It enters and is guided toward the side by the side guide receiving portion 903 and collides with the buffer member 904. The ball colliding with the buffer member 904 is guided in the reverse side guide passage 905 toward the downstream side in the direction opposite to the guide direction of the side guide passage 902 and guided to the front guide passage 920. The exit 921 is led to the dish unit 300 through the prize ball communication rod 343. Further, the foul sphere entered from the foul ball entrance 923 is also weakened by the bent foul ball passage 922 and joined to the front guide passage 920, and passes through the prize ball connection rod 343 from the exit 921 of the front guide passage 920. Guided to the dish unit 300.

  In normal times, when the sphere naturally flows in the full tank unit 900, when the sphere moves from the side guide passage 902 to the reverse side guide passage 905, it falls to the bottom rocking plate 907. Since the elastic force of the spring 913 is strong when the number of normal award balls is paid out, the bottom rocking plate 907 does not rock, and the detection protrusion 909 receives the light projector and light receiving device of the full tank switch 916 of the light projecting / receiving method. The switch is not in conduction (OFF). On the other hand, when the prize balls are stored in the dish unit 300 and the full tank unit 900 is also filled with balls, the bottom fluctuations formed in the entire upstream area of the front guide path 920 and the reverse side guide path 905 are formed. The bottom rocking plate 907 rocks downward against the biasing force of the spring 913 due to the pressure of the sphere stored on the moving plate 907, and the detection projection 909 is projected and received by the light emitting / receiving full tank switch 916. The switch is disconnected from the container and the switch becomes conductive (ON). When the full switch 916 is turned ON, the rotational driving of the payout motor 815 of the prize ball unit 800 is stopped (if the ON signal is derived while the predetermined number of prize balls are being paid out, the predetermined number of prize balls Will be stopped after it has been paid out).

  As described above, in the full tank unit 900, the full tank switch is operated by the bottom rocking plate 907 having substantially the same width as the width of the bottom of the path of the path through which the ball flows (in the illustrated case, the reverse side guide path 905). 916 is actuated and biased by a biasing member (spring 913) so that the bottom rocking plate 907 swings when a certain amount of balls are placed without swinging due to the normal flow of the balls. Therefore, compared to the conventional case where a ball is placed on the bottom surface of some passages or the like to detect a clogged ball, the placement of the balls in that portion of the passage is not detected due to the clogging. It can be surely prevented. This can reliably detect a full tank.

  Moreover, in the full unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the full unit is formed on the main body frame as in the prior art because it is detachably attached to the full unit mounting portion 531 of the main body frame 3. It is not necessary to form a passage for the full tank structure in the main body frame as compared with the one assembled in the dispensing passage. Further, by making the inside of the full tank unit 900 a zigzag passage, it is possible to guide to the dish unit 300 while weakening the momentum of the balls paid out from the prize ball passage 810 of the prize ball unit 800. The awarded ball does not jump out of the dish unit 300. Further, in the full tank unit 900 according to the present embodiment, the foul ball passage 922 that guides the foul ball joins the ball in the middle of the front guide passage 920 that pays out the award ball. The foul sphere can be merged without hindering the flow of the sphere.

[3-7. Substrate unit]
Next, the substrate unit 1100 attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, FIG. 85 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit as seen from the back side, and FIG. 86 is a perspective view of the board unit as seen from the front side. 87 is an exploded perspective view as seen from the front side of the substrate unit, FIG. 88 is a front view as seen from the front side of the frame substrate holder which is the main body of the substrate unit, and FIG. 90 is a rear view of the board unit, FIG. 91 is a rear view of the board unit with the dispensing control board box and the terminal board box removed, and FIG. FIG. 93 is a plan view showing the connection relationship of each board provided in the board unit, FIG. 93 is a schematic diagram showing the electrical connection between the board unit and the game board, and FIG. 94 is a diagram showing the payout control board and the board unit. Pachinko game showing wiring etc. Is part of a rear view of the machine, Figure 95 is a front view of a game board for explaining a cross-sectional portion of the sectional view of FIG. 96, FIG. 96 is a sectional view taken along line C-C of Figure 95.

  The substrate unit 1100 is attached to a plurality of holder mounting holes 527 (see FIGS. 59 and 61) formed in the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3. As shown in FIGS. Various substrates such as a door relay board 1102, a power board box 1103, a terminal board box 1104, a payout control board box 1105, a main drawer relay board 1107, and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are attached to a resin-molded frame board holder 1101. It is comprised by. Among the above boards, the door relay board 1102, the power board box 1103, the terminal board box 1104, and the payout control board box 1105 are attached to the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 so as to overlap in the front-rear direction. The substrate 1107 and the sub drawer relay substrate 1108 are attached to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. Since the power supply board 1136 creates and supplies + 34V, + 18V and + 9V, it becomes a very high temperature heat source, and the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 stored in the power supply board box 1103 rises. For this reason, the payout control board box 1105 that houses the payout control board 1186 is attached to the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 so as not to receive the rising heat. A metal shield heat dissipating plate 1106 is attached to the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to prevent the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like and to dissipate heat generated from the power supply board 1136. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are covered and attached to the board cover 1109. Hereinafter, each member constituting the substrate unit 1100 will be described in detail.

  It should be noted that the shield heat dissipation plate 1106 in this embodiment is particularly shielded as shown in FIGS. 85 and 87 in order to dissipate heat generated from the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 to the outside (outside air). The plate surface of the plate 1106 is formed as an uneven surface 1106a. Heat transmitted to the payout control board 1186 by the shield heat sink 1106 can be kept small. The uneven surface 1106a increases the contact area with the outside (outside air) to enhance the heat dissipation effect. The uneven surface 1106a is desirably formed in a vertical or inclined shape so that heat can be easily dissipated when installed. Of course, even if the uneven surface 1106a is formed on the shield heat sink 1106, the shielding effect against electromagnetic waves is not impaired. The shield heat sink 1106 prevents the influence of electromagnetic waves from the power supply board 1136 and the like. Thereby, since the influence of the noise by electromagnetic waves can be suppressed, the malfunctioning of the payout control board 1186 accommodated in the payout control board box 1105 by the influence of noise can be prevented. Further, the shield heat dissipation function of the shield heat sink 1106 is not only between the power supply board box 1103 and the payout control board box 1105 but also when a plurality of other board boxes are attached to the frame board holder 1101 in an overlapping manner. Is also achieved by providing the same shield heat dissipating plate 1106 as in the present embodiment between the lower and upper substrate boxes.

  The heat of the power supply board 1136 is radiated to the inside of the power supply board box 1103 by uneven radiating fins (not shown). Since the heat dissipating fins are inside the power supply board box 1103, the size of the heat dissipating fins is restricted by the structure. For this reason, it is difficult to radiate the heat of the power supply board 1136, which is a high heat source, into the power supply board box 1103 by making the radiating fins huge. On the upper and lower surfaces of the power supply board box 1103 that houses the power supply board 1136, which is a high heat source, as shown in FIGS. A plurality of suction ports which are long in the front-rear direction are formed at predetermined intervals on the lower surface of the power supply board box 1103 corresponding to the heat radiation ports. As a result, when the heat generated from the power supply board 1136 rises and is released through the heat radiating port formed on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 (when it is discharged), it is pulled by this released (this discharged) air. Thus, outside air can be taken into the power supply board box 1103 through a suction port formed on the lower surface of the power supply board box 1103.

  In the pachinko island facilities where the pachinko gaming machines 1 are installed, pachinko gaming machines with a large number of various lamps are arranged in the back as well as the pachinko gaming machines 1, so they are attached to these pachinko gaming machines. Due to the heat generated from the power supply board, the temperature inside the pachinko island facility is also increasing. For this reason, the temperature difference between the internal temperature of the power supply board box 1103 and the ambient temperature of the power supply board box 1103 is reduced, so that the efficiency of heat radiation from the power supply board box 1103 to the surroundings is reduced. The heat generated by the power supply board 1136 accumulates inside, and the temperature inside the power supply board box 1103 rises. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a discharge control board box 1105 which is a heat radiation port formed in the left half of the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103 when viewed from the back and which is attached to the rear side of the power supply board box 1103 is attached. As shown in FIG. 84, an air-cooling fan unit 1500 for cooling the power supply board 1136 is attached to a position corresponding to the position to be provided. The air cooling fan unit 1500 includes a box-shaped air cooling fan unit main body 1501 having an opening corresponding to the upper surface side of the power supply board box 1103, and an air cooling fan 1502 accommodated in the air cooling fan unit main body 105. It is configured. When the air-cooling fan 1502 rotates to take in outside air, the taken-in air is exhausted from an elongated rectangular exhaust port 1503 formed along the front front side of the air-cooling fan unit main body 1501. In FIG. 84, since the air cooling fan 1502 of the air cooling fan unit 1500 is arranged so as to block the heat radiation port formed on the upper surface of the power supply board box 1103, when the air cooling fan 1502 rotates, it is blocked by the air cooling fan 1502. Air inside the power supply board box 1103 is taken in through the heat radiating port, and the taken-in air is exhausted from the exhaust port 1503. When the air inside the power board box 1103 is taken in by the air cooling fan 1502, the outside air is pulled inside the power board box 1103 through the suction port formed on the lower surface of the power board box 1103 by being pulled by the taken air. Incorporated. As described above, since the air inside the power supply board box 1103 is forcibly replaced by the rotation of the air cooling fan 1502, the power supply board 1136 stored in the power supply board box 1103 is in an air-cooled state. As a result, the uneven radiating fins of the power supply board 1136 are also air-cooled, so that the efficiency of radiating heat generated from various voltage generation circuits for generating + 34V, + 18V, and + 9V to the inside of the power supply board box 1103 is not lowered. It has become. In the present embodiment, even if the rotation of the air cooling fan 1502 is stopped and the inside of the power supply board box 1103 is air-cooled, the illumination of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely turned off, so that the power supply board The load on 1136 is suppressed. The size of the radiating fin is designed so that the power supply board 1136 is not broken due to heat generation even in such a state, so that the player can continue the game even when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is completely turned off. It has become.

  The frame substrate holder 1101 is formed of a synthetic resin in a horizontally long shape, and as shown in FIGS. 85 and 88, a wiring opening 1124 is formed on one side of the rear surface side (right side in FIG. 88). A relay board recess 1110 for attaching the door relay board 1102 is formed inside the opening 1124. The relay substrate recess 1110 is formed as a square recess so as to match the outer shape of the substantially square door relay substrate 1102, and on the upper and lower sides of the relay substrate recess 1110, the back surface of the door relay substrate 1102 is formed. And a retaining claw 1111 that is engaged with the surface of one vertical side of the door relay board 1102 in a state where the door relay board 1102 is stored in the relay board recess 1110. ing. In addition, on the upper and lower sides of the relay board recess 1110, there are mounting bosses 1112 that are engaged with engagement locking holes 1135 formed on one end side of the power supply board box 1103 and fixed with screws (not shown). Projected.

  Further, on the rear surface side of the frame substrate holder 1101, two wiring processing pieces 1114 are formed for locking and collecting wirings passing through the inside closer to the center than the above-described relay substrate recess 1110. The wiring processing piece 1114 is formed so as to project in an L shape when viewed from the side with respect to the vertical surface, and the wiring is hung between the vertical surface and the L-shaped projecting piece. ing. Further, the area from the upper part of the relay board recess 1110 of the frame board holder 1101 to a part slightly closer to the other end side than the center is an area for attaching the power supply board box 1103 (the lower area on the right side described below). Abutting protrusions 1115 that abut against the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 are provided on the upper and lower sides. Therefore, in a state where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the power supply board box attachment area so as to contact the contact protrusion 1115, there is a space between the back surface of the power supply board box 1103 and the vertical surface of the frame substrate holder 1101. The wirings that are formed and connect the substrates to each other are accommodated in this space, and the two wiring processing pieces 1114 hold and hold the accommodated wirings together.

  It should be noted that the rearward projecting amount is large from the other end side of the region where the power supply board box 1103 is attached to the other end side of the frame substrate holder 1101 (left side in FIG. 88). In other words, the frame substrate holder 1101 is formed in a stepped shape slightly higher on the left side and lower on the right side at a position slightly left of the center when viewed from the back, and the lower region on the right side is for attaching the power supply board box 1103. (Hereinafter sometimes referred to as “power supply board box mounting region”). An insertion port 1115a is formed on the other end side of the power supply board box mounting region. Therefore, in order to attach the power supply board box 1103, after inserting the insertion protrusion 1134 into the insertion slot 1115 a, the engagement locking holes 1135 formed on the upper and lower ends of one end side of the power supply board box 1103 are formed on the attachment boss 1112 from above. The power supply board box 1103 can be fixed to the frame board holder 1101 by being inserted and fastened with screws (not shown).

  Further, on the back side of the frame substrate holder 1101, the above step-like high region is one of regions for attaching the payout control board box 1105 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “payout control board box attachment region”). A horizontal L-shaped concave wiring routing space 1116 is formed in a part of the step-like high region. A wiring opening 1121 (see FIGS. 87 to 90) is formed on the bottom surface of the wiring routing space 1116, and the wirings hooked to the two wiring processing pieces 1114 in the power supply board box mounting region are connected. The wiring routing space 1116 and the wiring opening 1121 are pulled out to the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, a locking projection 1117 for engaging with the engagement elastic piece 1184 of the dispensing control board box 1105 is formed to project from the other end side (left end side in FIG. 85) of the dispensing control board box mounting region. ing.

  Next, the configuration of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIGS. 86, 87, and 89, the out ball passage 1119 is inverted at the approximate center of the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101. It is formed in an L shape. The out-ball passage 1119 is located above the outlet 606 (see FIG. 101), the downstream side of the ball discharge passage 524 (see FIG. 59), and the drop-out port 629 (see FIG. 66). Is formed wide, and the downstream side is formed narrow so that the spheres are discharged in a row. Therefore, when the substrate unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, as shown in FIG. 62, the wide upstream portion of the out ball passage 1119 is positioned behind the passage support projection 513 that supports the lower surface of the out port 606. ing. Then, an out ball, a winning ball, or a ball without ball is discharged from the downstream end of the out ball passage 1119 toward the outside of the pachinko gaming machine (generally, an island recovery basket).

  In addition, on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 corresponding to the payout control board box mounting area, a main drawer relay board 1107 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 are laterally spaced at a predetermined interval in the upper area. A drawer mounting area 1120 is formed to be spaced and mounted in parallel. In the drawer mounting area 1120, support holes 1204 and 1205 formed in the respective relay boards 1107 and 1108 are penetrated, and drawer mounting bosses 1118 for supporting the relay boards 1107 and 1108 are projected and provided. Bonding guide holes 1126 and guide holes 1125 are formed above and below the intermediate positions of the relay boards 1107 and 1108. As shown in FIG. 96, the joint guide holes 1126 are connected to drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 (holder side connectors) provided on the board unit 1100 side and the game board 4 as the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3. The joint guide protrusion 628 (see FIG. 101) formed on the board substrate holder 623 of the game board 4 is inserted so that the drawer connectors 626 and 627 (game board side connectors) provided on the side are naturally connected. Is. On the other hand, when the board unit 1100 is attached to the main body frame 3, the guide hole 1125 is inserted with a guide protrusion 525 (see FIGS. 59 and 61) that protrudes from the main body frame 3. The positioning is performed and the mounting operation is facilitated. Further, on both the left and right sides and the lower side of the frame substrate holder 1101, attachment pieces 1122 for attaching the substrate unit 1100 to the main body frame 3 protrude outward, and the attachment pieces 1122 are attached to the attachment holes 527 of the main body frame 3. The board unit 1100 is attached to the lower part of the back surface of the main body frame 3 by fastening with screws (not shown) corresponding to (see FIG. 59). In addition, as shown in FIG. 61, the attachment hole 527 has an outer peripheral wall that matches the outer shape of the attachment piece 1122. Further, a wiring latching piece 1123 for locking the wiring is formed on the outside of the side wall on the other end side (right side in FIG. 86) of the frame substrate holder 1101.

  The configuration of the frame substrate holder 1101 is generally as described above, and the configurations of various substrates attached to the frame substrate holder 1101 having such a configuration will be described. First, the door relay board 1102 mounted in the relay board recess 1110 on the rear surface side of the frame board holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 85, the door relay board 1102 has an internal connection terminal of a multi-pin connector type. 1130 and a door frame connection terminal 1131 are provided. As shown in FIG. 90, the door frame connection terminal 1131 can be seen from the outside as viewed from the back, even when all the substrates are attached to the frame substrate holder 1101, and is provided on the door frame 5. The door frame wiring 1212 (refer to FIG. 92) such as an electric decoration component and a speaker composed of a lamp and an LED is connected to the door frame connection terminal 1131 through the wiring opening 1124. The internal connection terminal 1130 is connected to a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108 by an internal wiring 1213 (see FIG. 92). However, the internal wiring 1213 is provided inside the frame substrate holder 1101 so that the wiring processing piece 1114, the wiring routing space 1116, and the wiring opening 1124 are laid.

  The power supply board box 1103 attached to the power supply board box attachment region on the rear side of the frame board holder 1101 includes a box main body 1132 for fixing the power supply board 1136 (see FIG. 91) and a cover body covering the box main body 1132. 1133. The box main body 1132 is integrally formed with an engagement locking hole 1135 that engages with the mounting boss 1112 at the top and bottom of one end thereof, and the insertion protrusion 1134 that is inserted into the insertion port 1115a at the top and bottom of the other end. Is formed. Further, as shown in FIG. 91, a power switch 1137, a power line connector 1138, a CR unit power connector 1139, and a grounding portion are provided on a portion of the power substrate 1136 that is not covered with the cover body 1133 (the right side portion and the lower left portion in FIG. 91). A connector 1140 and a payout control board power connector 1141 are provided. The power switch 1137 is a switch for supplying power to all electric devices of the pachinko gaming machine 1 and is turned on when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is used. In addition, the power line connector 1138 connects the power line from the AC 24V (AC 24V) power line supplied to the island, and grounds the noise charged in the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the outside as a frame ground. It is a connector to do. The CR unit power connector 1139 is a connector for supplying power to a card-type ball lending machine (not shown; generally referred to as a CR unit) adjacent to the pachinko gaming machine 1. . The grounding connector 1140 is electrically connected to various antistatic grounding wires provided in the pachinko gaming machine 1, and noise or the like that has entered the pachinko gaming machine 1 is connected to the outside via the power line connector 1138. It is a connector for grounding. Specifically, a ground wire that removes noise from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214) is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140a as a frame ground, and noise from a sphere flowing down the tank rail member 740 The ground wire for removing the noise and the like is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140b as the frame ground FG1, and the ground wire for removing noise from the prize ball unit 800 is electrically connected to the ground connector 1140c as the frame ground FG1. An earth wire for removing noise from the CR unit is electrically connected to the earth connector 1140d as a frame ground. These frame grounds are electrically connected to the frame ground of the power line connector 1138, and are grounded to the outside of the pachinko gaming machine 1 through the frame ground. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 92, a power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply connector 1141 for the payout control board, and the power supply wiring 1214 is connected to the power supply terminal 1192 of the payout control board 1186. Then, by this power supply wiring 1214, another control board or the like (for example, the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 or the peripheral control board housed in the peripheral board box 622 via the payout control board 1186. 4139 and the like). The power supply wiring 1214 is led from the payout control board power supply connector 1141 to the wiring routing space 1116 and drawn backward from the back surface of the payout control board box 1105 to be connected to the power supply terminal 1192. Yes. That is, the power supply wiring 1214 is also laid inside the frame substrate holder 1101.

  By the way, as shown in FIG. 85, the rear surface of the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is formed in a stepped shape, and an area with the high step is an attachment area 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104. Is a mounting region 1143 for mounting the dispensing control board box 1105. The attachment area 1143 constitutes an attachment area for attaching the horizontally long delivery control board box 1105 together with the above-described delivery control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101. In addition, an engagement hole 1146 into which an engagement piece 1182 (see FIG. 87) described later of the payout control board box 1105 is inserted is formed substantially at the center of the stepped portion.

  The cover body 1133 constituting the attachment region 1142 for attaching the terminal board box 1104 has a positioning hole 1145 for positioning or engaging with the positioning pin 1148 and the engaging piece 1147 formed on the back surface side of the terminal board box 1104. A mounting engagement hole 1144 is formed. The engagement piece portion 1147 is formed in an L-shaped cross section, while the attachment engagement hole 1144 is formed in a hole shape in which the wide portion and the narrow portion are continuous, so the engagement piece portion 1147 is attached. After being inserted into the wide portion of the engagement hole 1144, the L-shaped engagement piece 1147 and the mounting engagement hole are slid in one direction (in the illustrated case, the center direction of the frame substrate holder 1101). The narrow portion 1144 is engaged. Note that a latching piece 1149 protrudes from the lower side of the other side of the terminal board box 1104, and when the terminal board box 1104 is slidably engaged with the cover body 1133, the latching piece 1149 is disengaged from the dispensing control board box 1105. The box main body 1180 is engaged with a part of the box main body 1180. This engagement is an engagement state that can be easily released by sliding the terminal board box 1104 in the non-engagement direction with a little force.

  In the terminal board box 1104, as shown in FIG. 90, an external terminal board 1150a provided with a plurality of external information terminals 1151 and a payout control board terminal 1156, a frequency indicator terminal 1152, a power ground terminal 1153, Two boards, a CR unit terminal board 1150b provided with a CR unit terminal 1154 and a payout control board terminal 1155, are housed in parallel in the vertical direction. A plurality of external information terminals 1151 provided on the external terminal board 1150a externally (for example, installed in a game arcade) various information signals necessary for the management of the pachinko gaming machine 1, such as a jackpot information output signal and a start opening prize information output signal. The main drawer relay connector 1200 which will be described in detail later from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624. Is transmitted to the payout control board 1186, and is further transmitted to each of the plurality of external information terminals 1151 by connecting the external terminal board terminal 1188 and the payout control board terminal 1156 provided on the payout control board 1186. Is done. The frequency indicator terminal 1152 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b is connected to the wiring of the remaining frequency indicator, a lending switch, and a return switch of a prepaid card provided in the plate unit 300 of the pachinko gaming machine 1, for example. is there. The power supply ground terminal 1153 includes two connectors. One connector (the left side in FIG. 90) is connected to the wiring from the CR unit power connector 1139 of the power supply board 1136, and the other connector is the power supply board 1136. The wiring from one earth connector 1140 of the plurality of earth connectors 1140 is connected. Further, the CR unit terminal 1154 is connected to a wiring from a CR unit (not shown), and the CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 of the payout control board 1186 and the payout control board terminal 1155 are connected. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are connected.

  As described above, the terminal board box 1104 connects the external terminal board 1150a for leading game information from the main control board 4100 housed in the main control board box 624 to the outside, and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit. Both the CR unit terminal board 1150b to be relayed are housed, and these are conventionally housed in separate board boxes and provided at different positions on the back surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1. In the embodiment, the terminal board box 1104 is collectively attached to the frame board holder 1101. For this reason, in particular, in the case of the present embodiment, the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a have a unique configuration in which the main control board 4100 and the external terminal board 1150a are connected via the payout control board 1186 without being directly connected.

  Next, the payout control board box 1105 that can be mounted over the payout control board box mounting area of the frame board holder 1101 and the mounting area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power board box 1103 is mainly shown in FIGS. Reference is made to FIG. The payout control board box 1105 includes a box main body 1180 to which a horizontally long payout control board 1186 is fixed with a screw (not shown), a cover body 1181 attached to the box main body 1180 and covering the surface of the payout control board 1186, It is composed of The box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 are engaged with one side (the right side in FIG. 90), and are fixed to the other side (the left side in FIG. 90) by a separation cutting portion 1183. Thus, in order to separate the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181, the separation cannot be performed unless the separation / cutting portion 1183 is cut. However, the caulking and fixing at the separation / cutting portion 1183 may be performed by caulking any one of a plurality of locations (in the illustrated case, 4 locations indicated by numerals 1 to 4) by, for example, inspection. If necessary, it can be done up to 3 times. Of course, in the case of an illegal separation, a cut trace remains, so that it is possible to immediately know whether there has been an illegal act. In addition, an engagement piece 1182 that is inserted into an engagement hole 1146 formed in the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103 is projected and formed at the center of one side short side of the box main body 1180, and the other side short side lower portion is formed. An engagement elastic piece 1184 is formed which elastically engages with a locking projection 1117 formed on the frame substrate holder 1101. Therefore, in order to attach the payout control board box 1105 to the frame board holder 1101, the engaging piece 1182 is inserted into the engaging hole 1146, and then the engaging elastic piece 1184 is engaged with the locking protrusion 1117. Can be installed easily. In the state where the payout control board box 1105 is attached across the payout control board box attachment area of the frame substrate holder 1101 and the attachment area 1143 formed on the cover body 1133 of the power supply board box 1103, The payout control board box 1105 is housed in a fixed state so that it cannot move in the left-right direction or the up-down direction. On the contrary, when removing, the engaging elastic piece 1184 is pressed in the direction opposite to the elastic direction to disengage the engaging elastic piece 1184 and the locking projection 1117 and pulling up the dispensing control board box 1105, By pulling out the engagement piece 1182 from the engagement hole 1146, the payout control board box 1105 can be removed from the frame board holder 1101.

  Further, the dispensing control board 1186 covered by the box main body 1180 and the cover body 1181 has a door frame opening switch terminal 1185a and a body frame opening switch terminal 1185b on one side (right side in FIG. 90). , A prize ball unit terminal 1187, an external terminal board terminal 1188, a CR unit terminal board terminal 1189, an operation handle terminal 1194, an error LED indicator 4130, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132 are provided. A full switch terminal 1190, an inspection output terminal 1191, a power supply terminal 1192, a firing motor terminal 1193, and an internal connection terminal 1195 are provided on the lower side (left side in FIG. 90).

  The door frame opening switch terminal 1185a is a connector to which wiring from a door frame opening switch 4133 that detects that the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 is connected. The main body frame opening switch terminal 1185b is a connector to which wiring from the main body frame opening switch 4134 for detecting that the main body frame 3 is released from the outer frame 2 is connected. The prize ball unit terminal 1187 is a multi-pin connector to which the wiring from the relay board 480 of the prize ball unit 800 described above is connected. The external terminal board terminal 1188 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1156 of the external terminal board 1150a as described above. The CR unit terminal board terminal 1189 is a multi-pin connector connected to the payout control board terminal 1155 of the CR unit terminal board 1150b as described above. The full tank switch terminal 1190 is a connector to which wiring from the full tank switch 916 of the full unit 900 is connected. The error LED display 4130 displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine such as CR unit connection abnormality. When the error cancel switch 4131 is operated, a guide for a cancel method corresponding to the error displayed on the error LED display 4130 flows from the side speaker 121 or the lower speaker 391. When operated, the ball removal switch 4132 starts discharging the balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 (starts ball removal). The inspection output terminal 1191 is a connector for connecting to an inspection device when inspecting the payout control board 1186, and is a terminal for outputting various output signals for inspection. The power supply terminal 1192 is a connector connected to the payout control board power connector 1141 of the power supply board 1136 by the power supply wiring 1214 as described above. The launch motor terminal 1193 is a connector to which the wiring from the launch motor 695 of the hit ball launcher 650 is connected. The operation handle terminal 1194 is a connector to which wiring from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 provided in the operation handle portion 410 of the handle device 400 is connected. The internal connection terminal 1195 is a connector connected to a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 by a signal power supply wiring 1215.

  In addition, resistors R1194a to R1194d are arranged near the left side of the error release switch 4131 as shown in FIG. These resistors R1194a to R1194d are connected to the ground (GND) when noise or the like from the door frame 5 (reinforcing plates 211 to 214 shown in FIG. 9) enters various detection signals input to the operation handle terminal 1194. Is described in detail later.

  Next, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 attached to the drawer attachment area 1120 formed on the front side of the frame substrate holder 1101 will be described. As shown in FIG. 87, the main drawer relay board 1107 is connected to a main drawer connector 626 (game board side connector: see FIG. 101) provided on a relay terminal board 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. A main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector), a payout control board connector 1201 connected via an internal connection terminal 1195 of the payout control board 1186 and a signal power supply wiring 1215 are provided vertically. Further, the sub drawer relay board 1108 is connected to a sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector: see FIG. 101) provided on a relay terminal plate 625 attached to the back side of the game board 4. (Holder side connector) and a door frame connector 1203 connected via an internal connection terminal 1130 of the door relay board 1102 and an internal wiring 1213 are provided vertically. Further, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are provided with support holes 1204 and 1205 on the left and right sides of each board, and the support holes 1204 and 1205 are protruded from the drawer mounting area 1120. By inserting into 1118, the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are positioned and supported in the drawer mounting area 1120, and then firmly fixed by covering with the board cover 1109.

  By the way, the board cover 1109 includes a main drawer relay connector 1200 and a payout control board connector 1201 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107, a sub drawer relay connector 1202 and a door frame connector 1203 provided on the sub drawer relay board 1108. Are formed in rectangular connector openings 1206, 1207, 1208, 1209 for projecting outward from the substrate cover 1109, and a pin through which the tip of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted on the back surface side of the substrate cover 1109. Insertion holes 1210 (see FIG. 85) are formed, and stop holes 1211 for fixing the substrate cover 1109 to the frame substrate holder 1101 with screws (not shown) are formed on the left and right ends. Therefore, the support holes 1204 and 1205 of the main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 are inserted into the drawer mounting boss 1118 protruding from the drawer mounting area 1120, and the leading end of the drawer mounting boss 1118 is inserted into the pin insertion hole 1210. The main drawer relay board 1107 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 can be firmly fixed in the drawer mounting area 1120 by covering with the board cover 1109 while being inserted and fixing with a screw (not shown) in the stop hole 1211.

  As described above, the configuration of the board unit 1100 has been described. In the case of the present embodiment, among the various boards necessary for driving and controlling the pachinko gaming machine 1, the board unit 1100 is replaced as the game board 4 is changed. Door relay board 1102, which is a board other than main control board 4100 and peripheral control board 4139, power board 1136 housed in power board box 1103, external terminal board 1150 housed in terminal board box 1104, and dispensing control board box 1105 The accommodated dispensing control board 1186 is assembled in advance into a frame substrate holder 1101 to form a unit, and the assembled and unitized board unit 1100 is conventionally separated separately by simply attaching it to the lower part on the back side of the main body frame 3. Work efficiency is improved compared to various board mounting work that was attached to the back side of the body frame 3 Door can be. Further, in this case, the wiring between the substrates unitized in the substrate unit 1100 can also be accommodated in the frame substrate holder 1101, so that the wiring connecting the substrates is not messed up and disturbed. can do.

  In the present embodiment, a main drawer relay board 1107 having a main drawer relay connector 1200 (holder side connector) on the front surface of the board unit 1100 and a sub drawer relay board 1108 having a sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector); 96, as shown in FIG. 96, the main drawer connector of the relay terminal plate 625 provided on the back side of the game board 4 as the game board 4 is mounted on the main body frame 3 from the front side. 626 and the sub drawer connector 627 (game board side connector) are connected to the corresponding main drawer relay connector 1200 and sub drawer relay connector 1202 (holder side connector), respectively. Can be performed simultaneously. For this reason, the exchange work of the game board 4 can be performed skillfully.

  Further, in the present embodiment, after the substrate unit 1100 is fixed to the back surface of the main body frame 3, a payout control board box 1105 that requires wiring work with various electric devices provided on the main body frame 3, and an external A terminal board box 1104 that needs to be connected to a CR unit or a management computer is arranged in parallel at the rearmost position of the board unit 1100 where it can be easily seen, while a power supply board that requires less external connection work. Since the box 1103 and the door relay substrate 1102 are arranged inside, a plurality of substrates can be efficiently overlapped in the front-rear direction, and the size of the substrate unit 1100 can be designed to a minimum. However, even in the power supply board box 1103 and the door relay board 1102 arranged inside, all the terminal portions connected to the outside can be visually recognized from the outside, so that the connection work becomes a problem. There is no.

[3-7-1. Electrical connection between board unit and game board (connection using drawer connector)]
Next, electrical connection between the board unit 1100 and the game board 4 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 are provided on the game board 4 side, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 are provided on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 93 (a), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side can be electrically connected by inserting them into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side. As shown in FIG. 93 (b), the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are provided with terminals 626a and 627a, and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are shown in FIG. 93 (c). As shown, contacts 1200a and 1202a are provided. When the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side are inserted into the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side, as shown in FIG. 93 (c), the terminals 626a and 627a push down the contacts 1200a and 1202a, and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Is displaced. The repulsive force of the contacts 1200a and 1202a generated by this displacement is brought into an electrically conductive state by strongly contacting the terminals 626a and 627a. As a result, the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are mutually controlled by various control boards (for example, by the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186). Control signal lines for transmitting various control signals are formed. The drawer connector 626 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connector 1200 on the board unit 1100 side are further formed with voltage supply lines for supplying various voltages created by the power supply board 1136. In this way, by attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3 in a detachable manner, control signal lines and voltages by the drawer connectors 626 and 627 on the game board 4 side and the drawer connectors 1200 and 1202 on the board unit 1100 side are provided. The supply line can be connected freely.

  In this embodiment, the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a are of the bellows type. In the case of the pin type, there is a possibility that the pin may be inadvertently touched and bent during the work, but in the case of the bellows type, there is no such risk. Further, gold plating with a small friction coefficient is adopted for plating of the terminals 626a and 627a and the contacts 1200a and 1202a. Thereby, the sliding goodness (goodness of fitting) at the time of attachment and detachment of game board 4 is secured.

  Here, when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3, if the operation is performed with the power switch 1137 shown in FIG. 91 being turned on, the contact between the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a, specifically, Since a large current (an inrush current described later) flows at the contact points for various voltage supply lines, welding occurs. If the game board 4 is forcibly pushed into and attached to the main body frame 3 in this welded state, the contact 1200a is bent and broken, or the contact 1200a is removed from the main body frame when the game board 4 is removed from the main body frame. The drawer connector 1200 cannot be used due to being peeled off and damaged.

  Further, when the terminal 626a and the contact 1200a are welded, various control boards may malfunction or electronic components mounted on the various control boards may be damaged due to breakage of the connector. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a circuit for preventing welding is provided on the main control board 4100 described later. Detailed description thereof will be described later.

[3-7-2. Wiring with prize ball unit]
Next, wiring between the payout control board 1186 housed in the payout control board box 1105 and the prize ball unit 800 will be described with reference to FIG. As described above, the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 includes the counting switch connector 830a, the payout motor connector 830b, the rotation angle switch connector 830c, the ball break switch connector 830d, the ground connector 830e, and the payout control. A board connector 830f is provided.

  The count switch connector 830a is connected to the wiring from the count switch 812, the payout motor connector 830b is connected to the wire from the payout motor 815, the rotation angle switch connector 830c is connected to the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The ball break switch connector 830d is connected to the wire from the ball break switch 778 of the ball passage unit 770, and the ground connector 830e is connected to the ground wire from the payout motor 815. The payout control board connector 830f is connected to the prize ball unit terminal 1187 of the payout control board 1186 by wiring (harness).

  The wiring from the counting switch 812, the wiring from the payout motor 815, the ground wire from the payout motor 815, and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, excluding the wiring from the ball break switch 778 and the wiring from the rotation angle switch 855, The harness is assembled by being hooked by a wiring processing piece 869.

  As described above, the balls supplied from the island are stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740, taken into the ball path unit 770, and guided to the prize ball unit 800. When the spheres rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge occurs to generate noise. Therefore, the prize ball unit 800 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment.

  As described above, the rotation angle switch 855 is provided on the sensor substrate 854 of the prize ball unit 800, and the detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855 is easily affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the sphere. Further, the harness connecting the payout control connector 480f and the prize ball unit terminal 1187, that is, the harness connecting the prize ball unit 800 and the payout control board 1186, is also affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the ball. Cheap.

[4. Detailed configuration of game board]
Subsequently, a detailed configuration of the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 97 is a front view of the game board, and FIG. 98 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed obliquely from the front right. FIG. 99 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from diagonally left front, and FIG. 100 is a perspective view of the game board as viewed from diagonally rear. FIG. 101 is a perspective view of the main members constituting the game board disassembled and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 102 is an exploded view of the main members constituting the game board and obliquely viewed from the rear. FIG. FIG. 103 (A) is a perspective view showing only the attacker unit, the side prize opening member, and the center combination in the game board from an oblique front, and FIG. 103 (B) is a perspective view showing (A) from the oblique rear.

  As shown in the figure, the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has an outer rail 602 and an inner rail 603, and a game ball (as a game medium) is simply operated by a player operating an operation handle portion 461. A frame-shaped front component member 601 that defines the outer periphery of the game area 605 into which the game area 605 is to be driven, and a game panel that is attached to the rear side of the front component member 601 and is disposed so as to close the game area 605 600, a function display unit 640 disposed below the front component 601 on the right side of the out port 606 outside the game area 605, a function display seal 649 affixed to the front surface of the function display unit 640, and a game area 605 An attacker unit 2000 that is disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction and above the out port 606 and supported by the front surface of the game panel 600; A side prize opening member 2100 disposed along the outer periphery of the game area 605 on the left side of the unit 2000 and supported by the front surface of the game panel 600, and a frame shape disposed at a substantially central portion of the game area 605 and supported by the game panel 600. Panel lens member 2500 that is inserted from the rear side of the game panel into the center accessory 2300 and a plurality of light emitting decoration holes 600f that are formed so as to penetrate the game panel 600, and guides light to the front side of the game panel 600. And a rear unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the gaming panel 600, and a predetermined effect image attached to the rear side of the rear unit 3000 so as to be visible from the player side through the frame of the transparent gaming panel 600 and the center accessory 2300. And a liquid crystal display device 1400 as an effect display means capable of displaying the image.

  As shown in the drawing, the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example includes a circular rotating decorative body 3102 disposed on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 at approximately the center in the left-right direction through the frame of the center accessory 2300. A swing-shaped swing decorative body 3202 disposed on the rear side of the rotating decorative body 3102 and on both right and left sides, a three-dimensional character body 3402 having a ninja shape disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and a liquid crystal display device A plurality of gear-shaped gear decorations 3502 arranged on the left side of 1400 and arranged in the vertical direction are arranged so as to be visible from the player side. The details of the rotating decorative body 3102, the swing decorative body 3202, the character body 3402, and the gear decorative body 3602 are provided in the back unit 3000, as will be described in detail later. The back unit 3000 includes a ceiling decoration body 3302 on both the left and right sides of the swing decoration body 3202 and on the front side.

  Further, on the rear side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the game board 4, a peripheral substrate box 622 that stores the peripheral substrate 4010 and an inverter substrate box 1410 that stores the inverter substrate 1411 that supplies power to the liquid crystal display device 1400 are provided. It has been. The liquid crystal display device 1400 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 621 in the back unit 3000 via a lock member 3036.

[4-1. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2000 of the gaming board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of this example is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e formed in the lower part of the center in the left-right direction of the gaming panel 600, and then the front surface of the gaming panel 600. It is fixed to. The attacker unit 2000 has a plurality of entrances (winning entrances) through which game balls that have been driven into the game area 605 can be received. Specifically, the attacker unit 2000 is arranged substantially at the center in the left-right direction. The first start port 2001, the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001, and the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002. It has a section-shaped large winning opening 2003 that greatly extends in the left-right direction, and a general winning opening 2004 arranged slightly on the left and right sides of the large winning opening 2003.

  The first start port 2001 of the attacker unit 2000 is open on the upper side so that game balls can be received (winning) at all times. The game ball received in the first starting port 2001 is discharged downward after being detected by a first starting port sensor 3022 provided in the right guiding member 3018 of the back unit 3000 described later.

  On the other hand, a pair of movable pieces 2005 that can be expanded by a start port solenoid 2010 is disposed between the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001 and the first start port 2001. In a state where the pair of movable pieces 2005 rises substantially vertically, the first starting port 2001 and the pair of movable pieces 2005 make it impossible to receive the game ball into the second starting port 2002, whereas the pair of movable pieces 2005 In a state in which 2005 is expanded in the left-right direction, the game ball can be received at the second start port 2002, and the probability that the game ball enters (invades) than the first start port 2001 is set higher. It becomes a state. That is, the second starting port 2002 is a variable winning port by the pair of movable pieces 2005. The pair of movable pieces 2005 are configured to be opened and closed by driving the start opening solenoid 2010 based on the detection of the passage of the game ball by the gate sensor 2352 of the gate portion 2350 in the center accessory 2300 described later. The game ball received in the second starter port 2002 is detected by a second starter port sensor 2012 provided in the attacker unit 2000 and then discharged downward.

  Further, the special winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 can be opened and closed by a horizontally-long rectangular opening / closing member 2006 capable of closing the opening. The opening / closing member 2006 is pivotally supported at its lower side, and in a substantially vertical state, the special winning opening 2003 can be closed to make it impossible to receive a game ball, and the upper side can move forward. When it is turned, the special winning opening 2003 is opened so that a game ball can be received. The game balls received in the special winning opening 2003 are detected by a count sensor 2014 provided in the attacker unit 2000 and then discharged downward. Further, the opening / closing member 2006 is in a state in which the big prize opening 2003 is closed in the normal gaming state, and lottery is performed when a game ball is received (start winning prize) in the first starting opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2002. Depending on the special lottery result (when the special lottery result is “big hit” or “small hit”), the attacker solenoid 2016 is driven to open and close.

  Furthermore, as shown in the drawing, the general winning opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times. The game balls received in the left general winning opening 2004 in the attacker unit 2000 are detected by a general winning opening sensor 3020 provided in the left guiding member 3016 of the back unit 3000 described later, and then discharged downward. It has become. Further, the game ball received in the right general winning opening 2004 is detected by a general winning opening sensor 3020 provided in the right guiding member 3018 of the back unit 3000 described later, and then discharged downward. .

[4-2. Side prize opening member]
In addition, the side prize port member 2100 in the game board 4 is a lower part of the game panel 600 that is located on the left side from the center in the left-right direction, and an opening 600e that is formed on the left side of the opening 600e into which the attacker unit 2000 is inserted and fixed. After being inserted from the front side, it is fixed to the front surface of the game panel 600 and faces away from each other along the outer periphery of the game area 605 so as to line up with the general winning port 2004 on the left side of the attacker unit 2000 when viewed from the front. Two general winning openings 2101 are provided. As shown in the drawing, these two general winning ports 2101 are opened upward so that game balls can be received (winned) at all times.

  Further, the side prize opening member 2100 is arranged at a position where the left end is substantially in contact with the outer periphery of the game area 605 at the upper left end of the side prize opening member 2100 and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right end. The shelf portion 2102 and the first shelf portion 2102 are arranged on the opposite side and the lower side with the two general winning holes 2101 sandwiched therebetween, and the game area 605 is located in the center in the left-right direction (the second start opening 2002 of the attacker unit 2000 or the big prize A second shelf 2103 that is lowered toward the mouth 2003 side), and the first shelf 2102 brings the game balls that have flowed down along the outer periphery of the game area 605 toward the center of the game area 605. Can be done.

  Note that the two general winning ports 2101 are arranged on the right side of the right end portion of the first shelf 2102, and even if the game ball is brought closer to the center side of the game area 605 by the shelf 2102, There is a possibility of winning a prize in the mouth 2102. In addition, a third shelf 2104 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the center side of the game area 605 is also provided on the upper side between the two general winning ports 2101.

  The side prize port member 2100 is formed so as to have a light-transmitting property as a whole. A side prize port decoration board is provided on the rear side of the second shelf 2103, and A side lamp decoration board 3014 in a back unit 3000, which will be described later, is arranged on the rear side, and the side prize opening member 2100 can be decorated with light emission by these side prize opening decoration board and the side lamp decoration board 3014. .

[4-3. Center character]
Further, the center accessory 2300 in the game board 4 is inserted from the front side into the opening 600e that is formed so as to penetrate substantially the center of the transparent game panel 600, and is then placed on the front surface of the game panel 600. As shown in the figure, the frame occupies most of the game area 605 and is formed in a frame shape. The outer peripheral surface on the right side of the front view is between the outer diameter of the game area 605 and the outer diameter of the game ball. Are formed in an arc shape so that a slightly larger gap is formed, and the outer peripheral surface on the left side is formed on a substantially straight line that hangs down so as to form an area of a predetermined width with the outer periphery of the game area 605. Has been.

  The center accessory 2300 includes a flange portion 2300a formed in a thin plate-like frame shape that comes into contact with the front surface of the game panel 600, and an insertion wall portion extending from the flange portion 2300a into the opening portion 600e of the game panel 600. 2300b and a front wall portion 2300c protruding forward from the flange portion 2300a. On the front wall portion 2300c of the center accessory 2300, an upper shelf portion 2301 that is inclined so as to become lower toward the left direction is formed on the left side from a position slightly on the right side in the center in the left-right direction on the upper outer peripheral surface, When a game ball driven into the upper part of the game area 605 flows down to the upper shelf 2301, it flows through the left side of the center accessory 2300 and also flows (invades) to the right side of the upper shelf 2301. The game balls flow down to the lower part of the game area 605 through the right side of the center bonus 2300. In other words, when a game ball is driven so that the game ball enters the right side of the upper shelf 2301 in the center accessory 2300, the chance of enjoying the flow of the game ball is reduced. It is possible to appropriately adjust the length, and to maintain a sense of tension and to suppress a loose game.

  The center accessory 2300 also releases a warp entrance 2302 into which a game ball flowing down the game area 605 can enter the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front wall 2300c, and a game ball that has entered the warp entrance 2302 into the frame. And a stage 2310 formed on the upper surface of the lower side of the insertion wall portion 2300b by rolling the game ball released from the warp outlet 2303 in the horizontal direction and then releasing it into the game area 605 on the upper side of the attacker unit 200. And mainly. The stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 is arranged on the front side of the first stage 2311 to which the game ball discharged from the warp outlet 2303 is supplied, and the game ball is supplied from the first stage 2311. A second stage 2312 capable of releasing a game ball into the game area 605.

  The first stage 2311 and the second stage 2312 are formed in curved surfaces such that the approximate center in the left-right direction is lowered. In addition, a chance entrance 2313 into which a game ball can enter is formed on the rear side of the center of the first stage 2311 in the left-right direction, and the game ball that has entered the chance entrance 2313 is formed on the flange portion 2300a of the center accessory 2300. It is discharged into the game area 605 from the chance exit 2314 on the lower front surface. As shown in the figure, the chance exit 2314 is arranged immediately above the first start opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2000, and the game balls released from the chance exit 2314 are accepted into the first start opening 2001 with high probability. (Wins).

  In addition, the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 of this example is formed of a transparent member, and through this stage 2310, a lower decorative body 3010 of a back unit 3000 described later can be visually recognized from the player side. .

  The center accessory 2300 further includes a transparent arch portion 2315 extending leftward so as to substantially contact the inner rail 603 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion 2300c and above the warp inlet 2302. Yes. The arch portion 2315 extends in a thin plate shape from a substantially front end of the front wall portion 2300c, and forms a space through which a game ball can pass between the arch portion 2315 and the front surface of the game panel 600. As a result, the game ball that is driven into the upper part of the game area 605 and guided to the left side of the center accessory 2300 by the upper shelf 2301 flows down to the downstream side through the rear side of the arch part 2315.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 includes a gate portion 2350 that detects the passage of a game ball in the vicinity of the arch portion 2315 on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall portion 2300c. The gate part 2350 is arranged on the left outer peripheral surface of the front wall part 2300c above the arch part 2315, and allows a game ball flowing down the game area 605 to enter, and a game entering the gate inlet 2351. A gate sensor 2352 that detects a ball and a gate outlet 2353 that discharges the game ball detected by the gate sensor 2352 from the outer peripheral surface of the front wall 2300c to the game area 605 are provided. In this example, the gate outlet 2353 of the gate portion 2350 is formed at the same height as the arch portion 2315, and the game ball detected by the gate sensor 2352 is as if the arch portion 2315 has dived. It can be seen.

  Further, the center accessory 2300 includes a circular opening window 2316 at the right side of the upper shelf 2301 and at the substantially center in the left-right direction. It has become.

[4-4. Panel lens member]
The panel lens member 2500 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present example penetrates in the front-rear direction in a circular or X shape at a position outside the opening 600e into which the center accessory 2300 is inserted in the game area 605 of the game panel 600. The plurality of light emitting decoration holes 600f formed as described above are decorated with light emission. The panel lens member 2500 includes a transparent upper panel lens 2510 corresponding to the plurality of light emitting decoration holes 600f formed on the upper left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and a plurality of panel lens members 2500 disposed on the rear side of the upper panel lens 2510. The upper panel lens substrate 2512 on which the color LEDs are mounted, the transparent lower panel lens 2520 corresponding to the plurality of light emitting decoration holes 600f formed on the lower left side of the outer periphery of the center accessory 2300, and the rear of the lower panel lens 2520 And a lower panel lens substrate 2522 having a plurality of color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof.

  The upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 in the panel lens member 2500 have substantially the same shape as a plate-like lens base portion 2501 and a light emitting decoration hole 600f that protrudes forward from the lens base portion 2501 and is inserted. A plurality of insertion light guides 2502. The insertion light guide portion 2502 of the upper panel lens 2510 and the lower panel lens 2520 is inserted in the light emitting decoration hole 600f of the gaming panel 600 from the rear side so that the front ends thereof substantially coincide with the front surface of the gaming panel 600. It is formed so as not to affect the game balls flowing down the front surface of the game panel 600 as much as possible.

  The panel lens member 2500 of the present example appropriately emits the color LEDs of the upper panel lens substrate 2512 and the lower panel lens substrate 2522 so that the game ball flows down even when using an opaque game panel 600 such as a veneer plywood. It is possible to decorate the game panel 600 that has never been seen before, and to make the pachinko gaming machine 1 stand out and to differentiate from other pachinko gaming machines.

[4-5. Back unit]
Next, a detailed configuration of the back unit 3000 of the game board 4 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 104 to 131. FIG. 104 (A) is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 104 (B) is a perspective view of the back unit viewed from an oblique rear. 105 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 106 is an exploded perspective view in which the back unit is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the oblique rear. is there. FIG. 107 (A) is a perspective view of the upper unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 107 (B) is a perspective view of the upper unit as seen from an oblique rear. FIG. 108 is a perspective view of the upper unit in the rear unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 109 is a perspective view of the upper unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the oblique rear. It is. FIG. 110A is a front view of the rotating decorative body unit in the upper unit, FIG. 110B is a perspective view of the rotating decorative body unit seen from diagonally forward, and FIG. FIG.

  FIG. 111 is an exploded perspective view of the upper decorative unit in the upper unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from the front, and FIG. 112 is an exploded perspective view of the main unit in each main configuration. It is the disassembled perspective view seen from diagonally behind. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the rotating decorative body that is movable by rotation in the rotating decorative body unit. 114 is a front view schematically showing an elevating mechanism for elevating and lowering the rotary decoration unit in the upper unit, FIG. 115 (A) is a rear view of the elevating mechanism of FIG. 114, and (B) is an elevating / lowering of (A). It is a rear view in which an upper unit cover is added to the mechanism. FIG. 116 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the lifting mechanism in the upper unit. 117A is a perspective view showing the swing decorative body unit in the upper unit from an oblique front, FIG. 117B is a perspective view showing the swing decorative body unit from an oblique rear, and FIG. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the dynamic decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen from the front, (B) is the exploded perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the swing decoration body unit for every main structure, and was seen afterwards FIG. 119 is an explanatory diagram showing the movement of the swing decorative body unit.

  Further, FIG. 120A is a perspective view of the left movable ceiling unit as viewed from an oblique front, FIG. 120B is a perspective view of the right movable ceiling unit as viewed from an oblique front, and FIG. 120C is a right movable ceiling unit. Is a perspective view of the left movable ceiling unit as viewed obliquely from behind. FIG. 121 is an exploded perspective view of the left and right movable ceiling units disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. It is a disassembled perspective view. FIG. 123 (A) is a perspective view of the character unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, FIG. 123 (B) is a perspective view of the character unit as seen from an oblique rear, and (C) is a fixed-side relay board of the character unit. It is a side view shown in the state which removed. FIG. 124 (A) is an exploded perspective view in which the character unit is disassembled into main components and viewed obliquely from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view in which (A) is viewed from the oblique rear. 125 is a cross-sectional view taken along the line A in FIG. 123C, and FIG. 126A is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Ey in FIG. 123C with the character body moving to the right. FIG. 123B is a cross-sectional view taken along the line II in FIG. 123C, and FIG. 12C is a cross-sectional view taken along the line Wu in FIG.

  FIG. 127A is an exploded perspective view of the character body in the character unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 127B is an exploded perspective view of FIG. . 128 is a side view schematically showing the movable mechanism of the head of the character body in the character unit, and FIG. 129 is a plan view schematically showing the movable mechanism of the body of the character body in the character unit. FIG. 130 (A) is a perspective view of the gear decoration body unit in the back unit as seen from an oblique front, and FIG. 130 (B) is a perspective view of the gear decoration body unit as seen from an oblique rear. FIG. 131 (A) is an exploded perspective view of the gear decoration body unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed obliquely from the front, and (B) is an exploded perspective view of (A) viewed from the oblique rear. Further, FIG. 132 is a front view showing the game board in a state where the rotational decoration body, ceiling decoration body, and character body are movable.

  The back unit 3000 in the game board 4 of this embodiment is arranged and fixed on the rear side of the game panel 600, and supports the liquid crystal display device 1400 at a position away from the game panel 600 to the rear side by a predetermined distance as shown in the figure. A back box 621, an upper unit 3002 disposed above the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621, a character unit 3400 disposed on the right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621, and the back box 621 The gear decoration body unit 3500 disposed on the left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is mainly provided.

  The back unit 3000 includes a shelf-like lower decorative body 3010 disposed below the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the back box 621 and below the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300, and the front side of the lower decorative body 3010. In addition, a lower stage decorative substrate 3012 which is arranged at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and is arranged immediately below the stage 2310 in the center accessory 2300 and has a surface mounted with a color LED for emitting and decorating the stage 2310 from below, and a back box 621. And a side lamp decoration board 3014 having a plurality of color LEDs mounted on the surface thereof, which is disposed at a position corresponding to the side prize opening member 2100 attached to the game panel 600 near the lower left front end.

  Further, the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower front end of the back box 621 and has a game ball received in the general winning port 2101 of the side winning port member 2100 and a game received in the left general winning port 2004 in the attacker unit 2000. A left guide member 3016 that guides the ball downward, and a game ball that is disposed on the right side of the left guide member 3016 and received in the first start port 2001 and the right general winning port 2004 of the attacker unit 2000 is guided downward. A right guide member 3018. The left guiding member 3016 guides and discharges the game balls received in the general winning port 2101 of the side winning port member 2100 and the general winning port 2004 on the left side of the attacker unit 2000 downward through different flow paths. The general winning opening sensor 3020 for detecting the passage of the game ball is provided in each flow path. On the other hand, the right guide member 3018 guides and discharges the game balls received at the first start port 2001 and the right general winning port 2004 of the attacker unit 2000 through different flow paths to the lower end. The first start port sensor 3022 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the first start port 2001, and the general winning port sensor 3020 is provided in the flow path corresponding to the right general winning port 2004. Further, the right guide member is provided with a magnetic detection sensor 3024 capable of detecting magnetism.

  Further, the back unit 3000 has a horizontally long lamp and motor drive board box 3030 which is disposed at the lower rear side of the back box 621 and accommodates the lamp drive board and the motor drive board, and is fixed to the back side of the back box 621. The panel relay terminal plate 3032 arranged on the left side of the lamp and motor drive board box 3030, the horizontally elongated upper relay terminal plate 3034 arranged on the upper rear side of the back box 621, and the back box 621 And a lock member 3036 attached to the rear side and detachably holding the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  As shown in the figure, the back box 621 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a box shape with the front side open, and is provided with a plurality of flange-shaped fixing portions 621a protruding outward at the front end. This is fixed to the rear side of the game panel 600 through the. Further, the back box 621 has a rectangular opening 621c formed substantially at the center of the rear wall 621b, and the liquid crystal display device 1400 supported on the rear side through the opening 621c can be viewed from the player side. Yes. Further, the back box 621 is provided with mounting portions at appropriate positions for mounting and fixing the units 3002, 3400, 3600, the substrates 3012, 3014, 3032, 3034 and the like.

  In addition, the back box 621 includes a liquid crystal support portion on the right side of the opening 621c when viewed from the back, and for inserting and locking one fixing piece 1402 that protrudes outward from the left and right sides of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (right side when viewed from the back). In addition, a lock member 3036 is attached to the left side of the opening 621c when viewed from the back, and the other fixing piece 1402 of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (left side when viewed from the back) is supported by the lock member 3036. 1400 is detachably attached to the rear side of the back box 621.

  Further, as shown in the figure, the back box 621 includes two triangular protective pieces 621d extending inwardly from the inner periphery on the right side when viewed from the front in the rectangular opening 621c. A character unit 2400, which will be described later, is disposed on the front surface of the protective piece 621d. When the right arm portion 2402c is reciprocally turned in a substantially horizontal direction by a body movable mechanism 2470 in the character unit 2400, the inertial force or the like is used. The character unit 2400 can be prevented from coming into contact with the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the occurrence of problems in the liquid crystal display device 1400 and the character unit 3400 can be avoided.

  A panel relay terminal plate 3032 attached to the rear side of the back box 621 includes a main control board 4100, a magnetic detection sensor 3024, a count sensor 2014, a general winning port sensor 3020, a gate sensor 2352, a start port solenoid 2010, which will be described later. It also relays the connection between the attacker solenoid 2016 and the function display board 640a.

  A lamp driving board 3031 and a motor driving board 3013 are accommodated in the lamp and motor driving board box 3030 attached to the rear side of the back box 621. The lamp driving board 3031 and the motor driving board 3013 are directly electrically connected by an inter-board connector without using a harness. The lamp driving board 3031 drives the color LEDs provided on the decorative boards 3012, 3014, 3124, 3214, 3216, 3320, 3328, 3432, 3456, 3482, 3526, 3530 of the game board 4. Of these decorative boards, the lamp driving board 3031 drives the color LEDs provided on the decorative boards 3124, 3214, 3216, 3320, 3328 via the upper relay terminal plate 3034. The motor drive board 3013 drives game board side motors 3106, 3160, 3212, 3312, 3418, 3472, 3514 and game board side solenoids 3127, 3455 which drive each decorative body of the back unit 3000 described later. . The motor drive board 3013 drives the game board side motors 3106, 3160, 3212, 3312 and the game board side solenoid 3127 via the upper relay terminal plate 3034.

[4-5-1. Overall configuration of upper unit]
As shown in FIG. 107 and the like, the upper unit 3002 in the back unit 3000 is formed in a horizontally long shape and is fixedly mounted on the upper side of the opening 621c in the back box 621. The upper unit 3002 is disposed on the front surface at a substantially central position in the left-right direction and has a circular rotational decoration body unit 3100 in front view, and an elevating mechanism 3150 that is disposed on the rear side of the rotational decoration body unit 3100 and moves the rotational body unit 3100 up and down. An upper unit cover 3004 that supports the elevating mechanism 3150, a swing ornament body unit 3200 disposed at the approximate center in the left-right direction on the rear side of the upper unit cover 3004, and upper portions on both the left and right sides of the swing ornament body unit 3200. A movable ceiling unit 3300 disposed on the rear side of the unit cover 3004, and an upper unit cover 3004, a rocking decoration body unit 3200, and a movable ceiling disposed on the rear side of the movable ceiling unit 3300 and the rocking decoration body unit 3200. An upper unit base 3006 that supports the unit 3300; It is provided.

  The upper unit 3002 is disposed at a corresponding position between the outer periphery of the game panel 600 and the inner periphery (inside the frame) of the frame-shaped center accessory 2300 in front view, as shown in FIG. In a normal state, a part of the rotating decorative body 3102 and a lower part of the swing-shaped swinging decorative body 3202 can be seen from the opening window 2316 of the center accessory 2300, and a position that is difficult to see from the player side (also referred to as an arrangement range). ).

  The upper unit 3002 can move up and down the rotating decoration body unit 3100 arranged at the approximate center in the left-right direction on the front surface, and the rotating decoration body 3102 of the rotation decoration body unit 3100 serves as the center when in the raised position. It faces the player side from the opening window 2316 of the object 2300. Further, when the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is in the lowered position, the approximate center in the left-right direction of the upper unit cover 3004 can be viewed from the player side through the opening window 2316 of the center accessory 2300 (see FIG. 132). The upper unit cover 3004 disposed on the rear side of the upper unit cover 3004 is decorated with light emission by an upper unit rear decoration board 3214 attached to the front surface of a cover member 3210 in a swing decorative body unit 3200 described later.

[4-5-1 (a). Rotating decorative body unit]
As shown in FIGS. 110 to 113, the rotating ornament body unit 3100 in the upper unit 3002 includes four rotating ornament bodies 3102 arranged in a predetermined circle and divided into four shuriken shapes. By rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3102 around a predetermined rotation axis, each of the rotating decorative bodies 3102 moves away from the rotation axis, that is, protrudes from a predetermined circle, and widens greatly as a whole. It can be rotated in such a state. More specifically, a shallow cylindrical rotating decorative body unit base 3104 supported by the elevating mechanism 3150 and extending in the front-rear direction and closed at the rear end, and the rotating decorative body unit base 3104 on the rear side of the rotating decorative body unit base 3140 A rotary decorative body drive motor 3106 disposed at a predetermined position eccentric from the central axis, a drive gear 3108 that is rotationally driven by the rotary decorative body drive motor 3106, meshed with the drive gear 3108, and substantially coaxial with the rotary decorative body unit base 3104 A driven gear 3110 disposed above, and a first rotating member 3112 having a disk-shaped rotating surface 3112a that rotates together with the driven gear 3110 and extends in the direction perpendicular to the rotation axis in the vicinity of the front end of the rotating decorative unit base 3104; , A ring-shaped first supported on the outer periphery of the first rotating member 3112 so as to be relatively rotatable on the same axis. A rotary member 3114 includes a four rotary decorative body 3102 are respectively supported on the front side of the first rotating member 3112 and the second rotating member 3114.

  As shown in the drawing, four rotary shafts 3116 arranged at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction and extending forward are held on the second rotary member 3114 in the rotary decorative body unit 3100. . On the other hand, in the first rotating member 3112, as shown in the figure, four holes are arranged on the disk-shaped rotating surface 3112 a at substantially equal intervals in the circumferential direction and extend in a predetermined direction on a line that does not pass through the rotating shaft. A portion 3112b is formed. A second shaft member 3118 that can rotate forward is supported on the guide portion 3112b of the first rotating member 3112 via a bush that is slidable in the elongated hole. Further, the first rotating member 3112 is provided with a plurality of rollers 3112c at predetermined intervals near the outer periphery and the outer edge of the front surface. When the rollers 3112c come into contact with the second rotating member 3114, the second rotating member 3114 can be supported so as to be relatively rotatable.

  The rotating decorative bodies 3102 are supported at the tips of the first shaft member 3116 and the second shaft member 3118 held by the second rotating member 3114 and the first rotating member 3112. Specifically, one rotating decorative body 3102 is supported by a pair of a first shaft member 3116 and a second shaft member 3118, and on the first shaft member 3116 side, a first rotation member 3112 (second rotation The position in the radial direction with respect to the rotation axis of the member 3114) does not change, and the second shaft member 3118 has a radius with respect to the rotation axis of the first rotation member 3112 by sliding the guide portion 3112b. The position of the direction changes. As a result, when the position of the second shaft member 3118 changes, the rotating decorative body 3102 rotates around the first shaft member 3116, and a part of the rotating decorative body 3102 rotates more than the outer periphery. It can project outward.

  The rotating ornament body unit 3100 is disposed on the rear side of the disk-shaped rotating surface 3112a of the first rotating member 3112, and is fixed to the second rotating member 3114 in a ring shape having substantially the same diameter as the second rotating member 3114. The rotation holding member 3120 is further provided, and the rotation surface 3112a of the first rotation member 3122 is disposed between the second rotation member 3114 and the rotation holding member 3120, so that the second rotation member 3114 moves in the front-rear direction. The movement can be restricted. As shown in the figure, the second rotation member 3114 and the rotation holding member 3120 are provided with notch-shaped lock portions 3114a and 3120a, respectively, at predetermined positions in the circumferential direction. In addition, a notch 3104 a extending in the front-rear direction with a width corresponding to the lock portions 3114 a and 3120 a of the second rotating member 3114 and the rotation holding member 3120 is formed on the upper portion of the rotating decorative body unit base 3104.

  Further, the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is arranged on the rear side of the rotation holding member and has a substrate support member 3122 having a substantially rectangular opening 3122a, and is fixed to the rear side of the substrate support member 3122 and is moved forward from the opening 3122a. Further, a rotating decorative body decoration board 3124 on which a plurality of color LEDs are mounted is provided. In this example, the rotating decorative body 3102, the first rotating member 3112, the second rotating member 3114, and the like are formed to have translucency, and the rotating decorative body 3102 and the like that are rotated by the rotating decorative body decorative substrate 3124 are used. It can be decorated with light emission. The first rotating member 3112, the second rotating member 3114, the rotation holding member 3120, the board support member 3122, and the rotating decoration body decoration substrate 3124 are accommodated in the cylindrical rotation decoration body unit base 3104. ing.

  The rotating ornament body unit 3100 is provided with a rotation lock mechanism 3126 that locks the rotation of the second rotating member 3114 at the upper rear side of the rotating ornament body unit base 3104. In this rotation lock mechanism 3126, a lock solenoid 3127 whose plunger can be advanced and retracted upward, and a lock piece 3128a that can be fitted to the lock portion 3114a of the second rotation member 3114 by the drive of the lock solenoid 3127 can be moved up and down. And a locking member 3128. In the rotation lock mechanism 3126, when the plunger of the lock solenoid 3127 is raised, the lock piece 3128a of the lock member 3128 is lowered, and when the plunger is lowered, the lock piece 3128a is raised, and the lock piece 3128a is lowered. When the second rotating member 3114 is inserted into the lock portion 3114a of the second rotating member 3114, the rotation of the second rotating member 3114 is locked. The plunger of the lock solenoid 3127 is urged in the upward direction by the coil spring, and the plunger is lowered when energized, and the lock piece 3128a is lowered (normally (not energized)) ( Locked state).

  Further, the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is attached to the rear side of the rotary ornament body unit base 3104, and houses the drive gear 3108, the driven gear 3110, the lock solenoid 3127 of the rotation lock mechanism 3126, etc. on the front side, and the rotary ornament on the rear side. The gear box 3130 to which the body drive motor 3106 is fixed, the wiring cover 3132 fixed to the upper side of the rotary decoration body drive motor 3106 on the rear side of the gear box 3130, and the rotation of the rotary decoration body 3102 (first rotation member 3112) And a rotational position detection sensor 3134 for detecting the position. In this example, as shown in the figure, the driven gear 3110 is provided with a detection piece 3110a protruding outward, and the rotation position of the rotary decoration body 3102 is detected by detecting the detection piece 3110a with the rotation position detection sensor 3134. It can be detected.

  In addition, the rotary ornament body unit 3100 includes a pair of support portions 3104b on the rear side of the rotary ornament body unit base 3104 at the approximate center in the vertical direction and near both left and right ends. Support pins 3136 extending rearward are attached to the support portions 3104b in a non-rotatable state, and each support pin 3136 has a large-diameter flange 3138a on one end side. The two support bushes 3138 are rotatably inserted so that the respective flanges 3138a are oriented away from each other. Further, an E ring is attached to the front end (rear end) of the support pin 3136, and the E bushing prevents the support bush 3138 from coming off the support pin 3136 (see FIG. 110 and the like).

  The support pins 3136 fixed to the pair of support portions 3104b and the two support bushes 3138 inserted into the support pins 3136 have two cylindrical portions of the two support bushes 3138, and two slide members 3152 in the lifting mechanism 3150 described later. In this state, the support pins 3136 are supported so as to be rotatable with respect to the unit support holes 3152a and slidable in the direction in which the long holes extend. Accordingly, the rotating decorative body unit 3100 is supported on one end side of the two slide members 3152 in the lifting mechanism 3150.

  Note that the rotating decorative body unit 3100 of the present example has a diameter of the second rotating member 3114 (rotating decorative body unit base 3104) that is substantially half the vertical dimension of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the rotating decorative body. The rotation diameter when the 3102 rotates and protrudes outward is about 2/3 of the vertical dimension of the liquid crystal display device 1400. The rotating decorative body 3102 has a plurality of through-openings that match the decoration on the surface, and is provided with a silver gloss plating layer on the entire surface. On the other hand, the first rotating member 3112 and the second rotating member 3114 are substantially colorless and transparent, and from the rotating decorative body decoration substrate 3124 disposed on the rear side by a fine relief-like decoration formed on the surface. Light can be irregularly refracted and the rotating decorative body decoration substrate 3124 can be made difficult to see from the player side. Note that the front surface of the rotating decorative body decoration board 3124 is white, and it is difficult to recognize from the player side through the first rotating member 3112 and the like.

  Next, the movement of the rotating decorative body 3102 in the rotating decorative body unit 3100 of this example will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, in a normal state, the lock piece 3128a of the rotation lock mechanism 3126 is fitted and inserted into the lock portion 3114a of the second rotation member 3114, and the second rotation member 3114 and the first rotation member 3112 are in the first state. The rotating decorative body 3102 is connected via the shaft member 3116 and the second shaft member 3118. Even if the rotating decorative body drive motor 3106 is driven to rotate in this state, the first rotating member 3112 does not rotate. Yes.

  In this state, when the lock solenoid 3127 of the rotation lock mechanism 3126 is driven to raise the lock piece 3128a, the lock piece 3128a is removed from the lock portion 3114a of the second rotation member 3114, and the rotation lock is released. Thereafter, the first rotating member 3122 is driven to rotate by the rotating decorative body driving motor 3106 so as to rotate counterclockwise in a front view (see FIG. 113A). Then, as the first rotating member 3112 rotates, the second rotating member 3114 also rotates counterclockwise, and centrifugal force acts on each rotating decorative body 3102.

  Then, due to the centrifugal force acting on the rotating decorative body 3102, the rotating decorative body 3102 attempts to move outward from the rotation axis, but the first shaft member 3116 that supports the rotating decorative body 3102 is attached to the second rotating member 3114. On the other hand, the position is relatively fixed, and the first shaft member 3116 side does not move radially outward. On the other hand, the second shaft member 3118 extends along the guide portion 3112b extending on the rotation surface 3112a of the first rotation member 3112 so as to approach the first shaft member 3116 that becomes a pair as it goes outward in the radial direction of the rotation shaft. It is slidable and tries to move away from the rotation axis by the centrifugal force acting.

  However, since the distance between the first shaft member 3116 and the second shaft member 3118 does not change, the first shaft member 3116 is supported to maintain the distance when the second shaft member 3118 moves away. Then, the second rotating member 3114 that can rotate relative to the first rotating member 3112 relatively rotates (further rotates counterclockwise), so that the second shaft member 3118 slides along the guide portion 3112b. It becomes possible to do. When the second shaft member 3118 moves in the direction in which the rotation axis moves away, the rotation decoration body 3102 rotates in the counterclockwise direction around the first shaft member 3116, and the blade of the rotation decoration body 3102 The protruding portion protrudes from the outer periphery of the second rotating member 3114 (rotating decorative body unit base 3104) (see FIG. 113B).

  When the second shaft member 3118 reaches the end of the guide portion 3112b that is away from the rotation axis, the second shaft member 3118 cannot slide any further. In this state, the four rotating decorative bodies 3102, the first rotating member 3112, and the second rotating member 3114 continue to rotate (see FIG. 113C).

  On the other hand, when the rotation of the rotating decorative body 3102 is stopped, while the rotational driving of the rotating decorative body drive motor 3106 is maintained, the driving of the rotation lock mechanism 3126 and the lock solenoid 3127 is stopped, and the rotation is stopped by the urging force of the coil spring. The piece 3128a is biased in the descending direction. At this time, when the lower end of the lock piece 3128a comes into contact with the outer periphery of the second rotation member 3114 and the second rotation member 3114 rotates and the lock portion 3114a reaches the upper end (at the position of the lock piece 3128a), the lock piece 3128a Is fitted into the lock portion 3114a of the second rotation member 3114, and the rotation of the second rotation member 3114 is locked by the lock piece 3128a and stopped (see FIG. 113D).

  Even in a state where the rotation of the second rotating member 3114 is locked, the rotating decorative body drive motor 3106 is driven to rotate, and the first rotating member 3112 attempts to rotate counterclockwise. At this time, the second shaft member 3118 tends to approach the first shaft member 3116 by the rotation of the first rotation member 3112 with respect to the first shaft member 3116 supported by the second rotation member 3114 that is made non-rotatable. As described above, since the distance between the pair of the first shaft member 3116 and the second shaft member 3118 that supports the rotating decorative body 3102 does not change, the second shaft member 3118 is maintained in order to maintain these distances. Moves along the guide portion 3112b in a direction approaching the rotation axis. As a result, the rotating decorative body 3102 rotates clockwise around the first shaft member 3116, and the portion protruding from the outer periphery of the second rotating member 3114 moves toward the inner periphery side ( (See FIG. 113 (E)).

  When the second shaft member 3118 reaches the end of the guide portion 3112b that is close to the rotation axis, the second shaft member 3118 cannot slide any more, so the first shaft member 3116 rotates. The rotation of the first rotating member 3112 is blocked via the decorative body 3102 and the second shaft member 3118, the rotation of the first rotating member 3112 is stopped, and the protrusions of the four rotating decorative bodies 3102 are accommodated in the initial state. After that, the rotational drive of the rotary decorative body drive motor 3106 is stopped.

  As described above, according to the rotating decorative body unit 3100 of this example, the rotating decorative body 3102 not only rotates at the end but also protrudes outward in the radial direction. Can be greatly changed, it can have a strong impact on the player, it can entertain the player and prevent the interest in the game from deteriorating, and also attract the player's interest strongly The pachinko gaming machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko gaming machine that is greatly differentiated from other pachinko gaming machines.

[4-5-1 (b). Elevating mechanism]
As shown in FIG. 108, FIG. 114, and the like, an elevating mechanism 3150 for elevating the rotating decorative body unit 3100 in the upper unit 3002 is slidably supported on the front surface of the upper unit cover 3004 and is vertically A pair of transparent, arcuate slide members 3152 arranged symmetrically with respect to the moving axis extending in the direction, and abutting rotatably on the inner peripheral side surface of the slide member 3152 and along the inner peripheral side surface Corresponding to the distance between the two first slide holding members 3154 and the two first slide holding members 3154, which are arranged apart from each other by a predetermined distance and prevent the slide member 3152 from moving toward the inner peripheral side (center direction). One second slide holding member which is disposed at a position and prevents the slide member 3152 from moving outward in the central direction and the radial direction And 156, a mainly provided.

  Each of the first slide holding member 3154 and the second slide holding member 3156 includes a pin fixed to the upper unit cover 3004 and a bush inserted to be rotatable with respect to the pin, and the outer periphery of the bush is a slide member 3152. The first slide holding member 3154 and the second slide holding member 3156 allow the slide member 3152 to move (slide) along the arcuate slide axis. . More specifically, the arc-shaped slide axis is centered so that the center is positioned on the lower side in the arrangement range between the outer periphery of the game panel 600 and the inner periphery of the frame-shaped center accessory 2300 in front view. It is an arcuate axis that extends toward the approximate center of the game area 605 on the inner peripheral side of the accessory 2300. The slide member 2352 is formed in an arc shape having a substantially constant width along the slide axis.

  The slide member 3152 in the elevating mechanism 3150 includes an elongated unit support hole 3152a that extends long in a direction intersecting the slide axis on one end side (side toward the center in the left-right direction) close to each other, and a side surface on the outer peripheral side. A rack gear 3152b having a plurality of teeth arranged along the axis, a slit 3152c extending in an arc along the slide axis, and a rearward projecting from the rear surface of the slide member 3152 and extending in an arc along the base end of the rack gear 3152b It mainly includes a shelf-shaped detection unit 3152d. As illustrated, the second slide holding member 3156 is inserted into the slit 3152 c of the slide member 3152.

  By inserting the support pin 3136 and the support bush 3138 of the rotary ornament body unit 3100 into the unit support hole 3152a of the slide member 3152, the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is supported at a substantially central position in the left-right direction by the two slide members 3152. (See FIG. 115A and the like).

  The elevating mechanism 3150 is disposed on an axis that passes through the first slide holding member 3154 disposed outside the center in the left-right direction and extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the arcuate slide axis, and the rack gear 3152b of the slide member 3152 A meshing pinion gear 3158, a lift drive motor 3160 fixedly driven on the rear side of the upper unit cover 3004 by rotating the pinion gear 3158, a contact portion 3162a capable of contacting the detection portion 3152d of the slide member 3152, and A detection member 3162 having a fan-shaped detection piece 3162b and pivotally supported on the upper unit cover 3004 between the contact portion 3162a and the detection piece 3162b, and the detection piece 3162b of the detection member 3162 can be detected. A lift detection sensor 3164 fixed to the upper unit cover 3004; It has to.

  The detection member 3162 is biased so that the contact portion 3162a faces the center of the arcuate slide axis by a predetermined biasing means, and the contact portion 3162a is in contact with the detection portion 3152d of the slide member 3152. When the detection piece 3162b rotates to a position that can be detected by the elevation detection sensor 3164 and the contact portion 3162a contacts the detection portion 3152d of the slide member 3152, the detection piece 3162b cannot be detected by the elevation detection sensor 3164. (See FIG. 116).

  The elevating mechanism 3150 further includes a holding magnet 3166 attached to the lower end of the upper unit cover 3004 at the substantially center in the left-right direction so that the lower surface faces downward. The holding magnet 3166 is magnetically attached to the motor case of the rotary decorative body drive motor 3106 when the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is in the raised position, so that the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is interposed via the rotary decorative body drive motor 3106. Can be held in the raised position.

  Further, the elevating mechanism 3150 is disposed on an axis that passes through the first slide holding member 3154 disposed near the center in the left-right direction and extends in a direction substantially perpendicular to the arc-shaped slide axis, and detects the shelf in the slide member 3152. A third slide holding member 3168 that rotatably contacts the upper surface of the portion 3152d, the first slide holding member 3154, the second slide holding member 3156, the third slide holding member 3168, and the front end of the pinion gear 3158 are pivotally supported. And a cover member 3170 (see FIG. 107 and the like) that is fixed to the upper unit cover 3004 and covers a part of the slide member 3152 and the pinion gear 3158 from the front side. Similar to the first slide holding member 3154 and the second slide holding member 3156, the third slide holding member 3168 includes a pin fixed to the upper unit cover 3004 and a bush inserted rotatably with respect to the pin. The outer periphery of the bush is in contact with the upper surface of the detection unit 3152d.

  Next, the movement of the elevating mechanism 3150 in the upper unit 3100 of this example will be described mainly with reference to FIG. First, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 116 (A), the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is located at the ascending position. The other end side that does not support 3100 is at a position away from each other, and the one end side that supports the rotary ornament unit 3100 is raised to a position that is substantially the same height as the central lower end of the upper unit cover 3004. As a result, the two slide members 3152 are located within the arrangement range between the outer periphery of the game panel 600 and the inner periphery of the center accessory 2300, and are hardly visible from the player side (see FIG. 97).

  Since the lifting mechanism 3150 supports the rotating ornament body unit 3100 on one end side of the slide member 3152 and does not support anything on the other end side, the lifting mechanism 3150 always moves downward due to the weight of the rotating ornament unit 3100 on one end side. A force to move is applied, and a lifting drive motor 3160 that rotationally drives the pinion gear 3158 meshed with the rack gear 3152b acts as a resistance so that the rotating decorative body unit 3100 can be maintained at the raised position. It has become. Further, in the elevating mechanism 3150, the holding magnet 3166 attached to the upper unit cover 3004 is magnetically attached to the motor cover of the rotating decorative body drive motor 3106 of the rotating decorative body unit 3100, so that the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is raised. You can help maintain the position.

  As the pinion gears 3158 rotate, the left elevating drive motor 3160 is rotated counterclockwise and the right elevating drive motor 3160 is rotated clockwise simultaneously from the raised position. Thus, the left slide member 3152 slides in the clockwise direction and the right slide member 3152 slides in the counterclockwise direction via the rack gear 3152b meshing with the pinion gear 3158. That is, one end side of the left and right slide members 3152 moves downward, and the rotary ornament body unit 3100 supported by the unit support hole 3152a on the one end side moves downward. In this example, when each slide member 3152 starts moving in the descending direction, the contact portion 3162a of the detection member 3162 is disengaged from the detection portion 3152d of the slide member 3152, and the contact portion 3162a is detected. By detaching from the part 3152d, the detection member 3162 is rotated by the urging means, and the detection piece 3162b is detected by the elevation detection sensor 3164.

  By the way, the left and right slide members 3152 move along arcuate slide axes that are symmetrically arranged, so that the distance between one end sides of the slide member 3152 also changes according to the movement position. However, since the unit support hole 3152a for supporting the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is formed in a long hole shape, the support pin 3136 and the support bush 3138 of the rotary ornament body unit 3100 slide in the unit support hole 3152a. The rotary ornament body unit 3100 can be supported in response to a change in the distance between the one end sides, and the slide member 3152 (rotary ornament body unit 3100) can be smoothly slid (lifted / lowered). .

  When the one end side of the slide member 3152 slides downward by the rotational drive of the elevating drive motor 3160 and the end of the other end side of the slit in the slide member 3152 contacts the second slide holding member 3156, the second slide holding member 3156 regulates the sliding of the slide member 3152, stops the movement of the slide member 3152 in the downward direction, stops the rotational drive of the lifting drive motor 3160, and the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is positioned at the lowered position. (See FIG. 116B).

  Then, when the rotary ornament body unit 3100 reaches the lowered position, as described above, the lock solenoid 3127 is driven to release the lock piece 3128a of the lock member 3128, and then the rotary ornament body drive motor 3106 is driven to rotate. The first rotating member 3112, the second rotating member 3114, and the rotating decorative body 3102 are rotated, and each rotating decorative body 3102 is rotated around the first shaft member 3116 by the centrifugal force to protrude outward. In this state, a rotation effect is presented to the player (see FIG. 116C). Note that rotation of the rotating decorative body 3102 may be started before the rotating decorative body unit 3100 reaches the lowered position.

  On the other hand, when the rotary ornament body unit 3100 is moved from the lowered position to the raised position, the one end side of the slide member 3152 is slid in the raised direction by rotating each lifting drive motor 3160 in the opposite direction to the above. Then, the rotating decorative body unit 3100 starts to rise. When the detection portion 3152d of the slide member 3152 contacts the contact portion 3162a of the detection member 3162, the detection piece 3162b of the detection member 3162 rotates, and the detection piece 3162b cannot be detected by the elevation detection sensor 3164. The rotational drive of the elevating drive motor 3160 is stopped, the slide of the slide member 3152 is stopped, and the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is located at the raised position (see FIG. 116A).

  As described above, according to the lifting mechanism 3150 of this example, the slide member 3152 having the rack gear 3152b is formed in an arc shape, and therefore, compared to the case where the slide member 3152 is formed in a linear shape, the center accessory 2300 in the arrangement range. Even if the arrangement space in the radially extending direction around the center of the (game area 605) is narrow, the slide member 3152 can be bent to make the slide member 3152 longer, and the rotary decoration body unit 3100 can be moved up and down. The range can be made as long as possible, and the rotation decoration body unit 3100 that moves greatly can prevent the player from being entertained to reduce the interest in the game.

  In addition, a transparent and long slide member 3152 supporting the rotary ornament body unit 3100 on one end side moves in the arc-shaped slide axis direction extending inward of the frame-shaped center accessory 2300, so that the rotary ornament The body unit 3100 can be moved in the vertical direction, and the slide member 3152 extends so as to substantially follow the movement trajectory of the rotating decorative body unit 3100. Therefore, as seen in a conventional pachinko gaming machine, the moving direction of the decorative body Compared with the case where the decorative body is supported and moved by the arm member (corresponding to the slide member) from the direction intersecting (substantially orthogonal) with respect to the slide member 3152 that moves together with the rotary decorative body unit 3100 is conspicuous It is possible to make the rotating decorative body unit 3100 relatively conspicuous, and the rotating decorative body unit Interest is for entertained by the game the movement of rotation decorations 3102 100 can be suppressed.

[4-5-1 (c). Swing decoration unit]
Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 117 to FIG. 119, the swing ornament body unit 3200 in the upper unit 3002 has a plurality of (four) swing ornament bodies 3202 having a high bill shape and the swing ornament body 3202 on the tip side. A rod-shaped eaves member 3204 supported so as to be rotatable and supported so as to be rotatable around a predetermined axis whose base end side extends in the front-rear direction, and the eaves member 3204 can be rotated in the left-right direction and slidable in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped slide plate 3206, a base member 3208 that supports the slide plate 3206 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and a base end side of the flange member 3204 so as to be rotatable, and a slide plate fixed to the front surface of the base member 3208 3206 and the cover member 3210 that covers the front surface of the eaves member 3204, and a cover member 3210 that is fixed to a predetermined position on the cover member 3210. A swing drive motor 3212 that slides the id plate 3206 in the left-right direction, an upper unit rear decoration board 3214 that is disposed at a substantially center in the left-right direction on the front surface of the cover member 3210 and has a plurality of color LEDs mounted on the front side; A swing decorative body decoration substrate 3216 mounted with a plurality of color LEDs that are mounted on the rear side of the base member 3208 and on the front side of which a plurality of swing decorative bodies 3202 can be illuminated and decorated from the rear side, and a slide fixed to the base member 3208. A swing detection sensor 3218 for detecting the slide position of the base 3206 is mainly provided.

  As shown in the figure, the swing ornament body 3202 of the swing ornament body unit 3200 has substantially the same shape as a so-called high bill in which a roof-like bar is placed on the upper side of a shogi piece, and three pieces of wood are suspended on the front surface. The shape is similar to that of the naruko, and the whole is integrally formed of a transparent resin, and the back surface is formed substantially flat. The swing decorative body 3202 is provided with a color corresponding to each part from the back side.

  Further, the bar-shaped eaves member 3204 includes a slit extending in the longitudinal direction, and a swing pin that protrudes forward from the slide base 3206 is inserted into the slit. In addition to the swing pin 3206a, the slide base 3206 has three elongated holes extending in the left-right direction, and the base end side of the flange member 3204 can be rotated to the base member 3208 separately from the slide holes. And a detection piece 3206e provided with a notch 3206d at a predetermined position, and a long-hole-shaped swing extending in the vertical direction at the left end in a front view. And a slit 3206f. In the swing slit 3206f of the slide base 3206, a crankshaft 3220a disposed at a position eccentric to the rotation shaft of the crank member 3220 fixed to the rotation shaft of the swing drive motor 3212 is slidable. It is supposed to be inserted.

  Further, the base member 3208 is formed in a thin box shape whose front side is opened by a synthetic resin having translucency, and a slide support shaft 3208a inserted into the slide hole 3206b of the slide base 3206, and a flange member A boss-shaped shaft fixing portion 3208b for fixing a support shaft 3205 that pivotally supports the proximal end side of 3204. By inserting the slide support shaft 3208a of the base member 3208 into the slide hole 3206b of the slide base 3206 via a predetermined bush, the slide base 3206 can be slidably supported in the left-right direction. In addition, in this state, the shaft fixing portion 3208b is disposed at a position corresponding to the insertion hole 3206c of the slide base 3206, so that the support shaft 3205 fixed to the shaft fixing portion 3208b does not hit the slide base 3206. .

  Further, the base member 3208 has a translucent window 3208c penetrating in a X shape at a portion located on the rear side of the swing decorative body 3202. After the light transmitting window 3208c, the color LED mounted on the swing decorative body decoration substrate 3216 is arranged, and the light from the color LED directly passes through the light transmitting window 3208c. 3202 is irradiated.

  Next, the movement of the swing ornament body 3202 in the swing ornament body unit 3200 of this example will be described mainly with reference to FIG. Although not shown in the front view, the swing decorative body unit 3200 is in a state in which the collar member 3204 extends in a substantially vertical direction in a normal state. In this state, the sliding support of the base member 3208 is supported. The shaft 3208a is in a state of being positioned at the approximate center in the left-right direction of the slide hole 3206b in the slide base 3206 (see FIG. 118 and the like). In this state, the notch 3206d of the detection piece 3206e in the slide base 3206 is in a position substantially coincident with the swing detection sensor 3218, and the detection piece 3206e is in a non-detected state. Further, the crank member 3220 fixed to the rotation shaft of the swing drive motor 3212 is in a state where the crank shaft 3220a is located at either the top dead center or the bottom dead center.

  When the swing drive motor 3212 is rotationally driven in this state, the crankshaft 3220a of the crank member 3220 starts rotating around the circumference of a predetermined radius with respect to the rotation shaft. As the crankshaft 3220a rotates, the crankshaft 3220a slides in the swing slit 3206f of the slide base 3206, and the slide base 3206 slides in the left-right direction along the slide hole 3206b by the crank action. Along with the movement of the slide base 3206 in the left-right direction, the swing pin 3206a of the slide base 3206 inserted into the slit 3204a of the flange member 3204 also moves, so that the flange member 3204 rotates around the base end side. The swing decorative body 3202 that is pivotally supported on the distal end side also moves in the same direction as the slide base 3206.

  As shown in FIG. 119 (A), when the crankshaft 3220a of the crank member 3220 reaches the rightmost position in a front view, the movement of the swing decorative body 3202 to the right also becomes maximum, and further, the crankshaft When the rotation of the crankshaft 3220a is started, the crankshaft 3220a starts moving to the left side, and the swing decorative body 3202 is also moved to the left side through the flange member 3204. When the crankshaft 3220a reaches the leftmost position, the swing decoration The leftward movement of the body 3202 is also maximized (see FIG. 119 (B)). In this manner, the crankshaft 3220a is repeatedly circulated so that the slide base 3206 slides alternately in the left-right direction, the swing decoration body 3202 alternately moves in the left-right direction, and the swing decoration body 3202 moves left and right. You can make it shake.

  Since the swing decorative body 3202 is pivotally supported on the distal end side of the heel member 3204, when the moving direction of the slide base 3206 (the heel member 3204) changes, the inertial force of the heel member 3204 is changed. The swing decorative body 3202 rotates around the front end side and moves more greatly than the movement of the front end of the collar member 3204, and the movement of the swing decorative body 3202 that swings greatly can be enjoyed. ing.

  When the slide base 3206 slides from the center in the left-right direction to the left and right, the swing detection sensor 3218 detects the detection piece 3206e of the slide base 3206, and the swing decoration body 3202 swings. Is stopped at a position where the detection piece 3206e is not detected, that is, a position where the notch 3206d of the detection piece 3206e and the fluctuation detection sensor 3218 substantially coincide with each other. The hook member 3204 can be returned to the general state (initial position) in the substantially vertical state.

  Thus, according to the swing ornament body unit 3200 of this example, since a plurality (four) of swing ornament bodies 3202 swing in the left-right direction, the player can be entertained by the movement, and the game It can suppress that interest falls. Further, the swing decorative body 3202 pivotally supported on the distal end side of the collar member 3204 is moved in the left-right direction by a slide base 3206 that slides in the left-right direction through a slit 3204a in the middle of the collar member 3204 supported on the base end side. Since the swing ornament body 3202 can be moved more than the slide base 3206, the swing ornament body 3202 can be moved more greatly. The effect can be easily noticed by the player, and by noticing the swing, a sense of expectation for the game can be enhanced, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

[4-5-1 (d). Movable ceiling unit]
The movable ceiling unit 3300 in the upper unit 3002 is disposed on the left and right sides of the swing decorative body unit 3200 slightly behind the rotating decorative body unit 3100, and connects the upper inner periphery of the center accessory 2300 and the upper end of the liquid crystal display device 1400. It is provided with a plate-like ceiling decoration body 3302 that ties together to form a ceiling, and is composed of a left movable ceiling unit 3300L arranged on the left side and a right movable ceiling unit 3300R arranged on the right side. Yes. As shown in FIGS. 120 to 122 and the like, the movable ceiling unit 3300 includes a rectangular plate-shaped ceiling decoration body 3302 having a rotation shaft 3302a on one side extending in the left-right direction, and a ceiling decoration body 3302. A ceiling base 3304 that pivotally supports the rotation shaft 3302a, and a ceiling decoration body 3302 that is fixed to one rotation shaft 3302a of the ceiling decoration body 3302 and is eccentric from the axis of the rotation shaft 3302a. Is a link member 3306 having a shaft portion 3306a extending in the opposite direction, and a predetermined axis extending in parallel with the rotation shaft 3302a at a position different from the shaft portion 3306a of the link member 3306 and the rotation shaft 3302a of the ceiling decorative body 3302 And an engaging portion 3308a that is slidably engaged with the shaft portion 3306a of the link member 3306, and a plurality of portions along the outer circumference of the arc shape. A cam member 3308 having a gear portion 3308b in which teeth are arranged, a circular drive gear 3310 meshing with the gear portion 3308b of the cam member 3308, a ceiling drive motor 3312 for rotating the drive gear 3310, and a ceiling drive It mainly includes a motor fixing member 3314 that supports the motor 3312 and supports the cam member 3308 so as to be slidable in the arc extending direction and is fixed to the ceiling base 3304.

  The movable ceiling unit 3300 is disposed on the opposite side of the motor fixing member 3314 with the cam member 3308 interposed therebetween, and cooperates with the motor fixing member 3314 to hold the cam member 3308 slidably in the arc direction. The motor fixing member 3314 further includes a ceiling position detection sensor 3318 that is fixed to the outside of one sliding end of the cam member 3308 and detects the sliding position of the cam member 3308. As for the cam member 3308 in this movable ceiling unit 3300, the engaging part 3308a is arrange | positioned at one edge part of a circular arc direction, and the gear part 3308b is formed in the circular-arc-shaped outer peripheral surface. The cam member 3308 has a slit 3308c extending in the arc direction and a detection piece 3308d detected by the ceiling position detection sensor 3318 in a flat plate shape disposed at the other end. On the other hand, the motor fixing member 3314 has a cylindrical shaft pin 3314a that is slidably inserted into the slit 3308c of the cam member 3308, and the cam member 3308 extends within the slit 3308c by the shaft pin 3314a. It is possible to slide in the arc direction.

  Furthermore, the movable ceiling unit 3300 is arranged on the back side of the ceiling decoration body 3302 and has a ceiling decoration board 3320 on which a plurality of color LEDs are mounted, and wiring that is attached to the top surface of the ceiling base 3304 and connected to the ceiling decoration board 3320. And a bracket 3324 for fixing the movable ceiling unit 3300 fixed to the upper surface of the ceiling base 3304 to the upper unit base 3006. Further, as illustrated, the ceiling base 3304 has a side wall portion 3304a that hangs downward from an end portion facing the outside of the game area 605 in the left-right direction. When the movable ceiling unit 3300 is attached to the lower side of the side wall 3304a of the ceiling base 3304, the movable ceiling unit 3300 is attached to the side wall member 3326 and the back side of the side wall member 3326 (the side facing the outside of the game area 605). And a side wall decorative board 3328 on which the LED is mounted. Although not shown in detail, the ceiling decorative body 3302 of this example includes a main body having a plurality of shuriken-shaped through holes and a translucent lens that is inserted and fitted into the through holes of the main body from the back side. The color LED is mounted at a position corresponding to the back side of the through hole of the ceiling decorative board 3320.

  Next, the movement of the movable ceiling unit 3300 in the upper unit 3100 of this example will be described. In a normal state, the movable ceiling unit 3300 has a plate-like ceiling decoration body 3302 facing in a substantially horizontal direction so as to close the upper surface of the inner peripheral rear side of the center accessory 2300. It ’s like a ceiling. In this state, the cam member 3308 is in the raised position, and the detection piece 3308d is detected by the ceiling position detection sensor 3318.

  When the ceiling drive motor 3312 is driven to rotate in a predetermined direction from this state, the cam member 3308 having the gear portion 3308b that meshes with the drive gear 3310 along with the rotation of the drive gear 3310 follows the arc direction in which the cam member 3308 extends. Move downward. When the engaging portion 3308a moves downward together with the cam member 3308, a force acts in a direction in which the shaft portion 3306a of the link member 3306 engaged with the engaging portion 3308a also moves downward, and the force causes the shaft portion 3306a. As a result, the link member 3306 rotates so as to move downward. By the rotation of the link member 3306, the ceiling decorative body 3302 rotates about the rotation shaft 3302a, and the rear side extending in the left-right direction of the ceiling decorative body 3302 starts to move downward.

  When the upper end of the slit 3308c of the cam member 3308 moving downward along the arc direction comes into contact with the shaft pin 3314a of the motor fixing member 3314, the downward movement of the cam member 3308 is restricted, and the movement of the cam member 3308 is performed. Stops, and the rotational drive of the ceiling drive motor 3312 also stops. In this state, as shown in the drawing, the plate-like ceiling decoration body 3302 is in a substantially vertical state, and the ceiling surface faces the player side (see FIG. 132).

  On the other hand, in order to move the ceiling decoration body 3302 from the substantially vertical state to the substantially horizontal state, the ceiling decoration body 3302 is rotated about the rotation shaft 3302a by rotating the ceiling drive motor 3312 in the opposite direction. , The lower side extending in the left-right direction of the ceiling decorative body 3302 rises and can return to a normal substantially horizontal state.

  As described above, according to the movable ceiling unit 3300 of the present example, the arc-shaped cam member 3308 centered on the predetermined axis disposed at the position eccentric with respect to the rotation axis of the ceiling drive motor 3312 is driven to the ceiling. By sliding the motor 3312 in the arc direction, and engaging the eccentric shaft portion 3306a of the link member 3306 having the shaft center disposed at a different position with the engaging portion 3308a of the cam member 3308, the link member 3306 is engaged. Since the ceiling decoration body 3302 is rotated via the ceiling, the driven gear having a predetermined diameter is fixed to the rotation shaft 3302a of the ceiling decoration body 3302 and the driven gear is fixed to the rotation shaft of the ceiling drive motor 3312. Compared with the case where the drive gear 3310 is driven to rotate, the rotation mechanism is combined into a compact size. Possible and it will also be able to be placed in a narrow place the movable ceiling unit 3300, to entertain the movement of the ceiling decorations 3302 interest on the game player's can be suppressed.

  In addition, the ceiling decoration body 3302 is rotated by the ceiling drive motor 3312 via the link member 3306, the cam member 3308, and the drive gear 3310. Compared with the case where the rotating shaft 3302a is directly connected, the load applied to the rotating shaft of the ceiling drive motor 3312 can be reduced by the gear ratio or the like, and the durability of the ceiling drive motor 3312, that is, the movable ceiling unit 3300 can be improved. In addition, it is possible to prevent problems from occurring at an early stage.

[4-5-2. Character unit]
The character unit 3400 in the back unit 3000, as shown in FIG. 123, etc., is a model of a ninja and a three-dimensionally shaped character body 3402, and the character body 3402 is moved in the horizontal direction and rotated around a predetermined axis. And a character body moving mechanism 3410 fixed in the back box 621. The character body 3402 in the character unit 3400 is roughly divided into a head 3402a above the neck and a body part 3402b below the neck in a predetermined character. The character unit 3400 further includes a head movable mechanism 3450 that moves the head 3402a and a trunk movable mechanism 3470 that moves the right arm 3402c of the trunk 3402b.

  As shown in FIGS. 124 and 125, the character body moving mechanism 3410 in the character unit 3400 is supported at a predetermined position in the back box 621, is a vertically long plate-like unit base 3411, and an upper front surface of the unit base 3411. An upper guide member 3412 that is fixed and extends in the left-right direction in a box shape that is open downward and rearward, a lower guide member 3413 that is fixed to the lower front surface of the unit base 3411, and an upper end that is the unit base 3411 and the upper guide member 3412. Between the unit base 3411 and the lower guide member 3413, and is supported by the lower base member 3413 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction, and slightly downward from the center in the vertical direction on the front surface. A slide having an upper rack gear 3414a in which protruding teeth are arranged in a plurality of rows in the left-right direction. , A rack member 3415 having a lower rack gear 3415a fixed to the front lower end of the slide base 3414 and facing the upper rack gear 3414a, and fixed to the front left side of the slide base 3414 and supporting the head 3402a of the character body 3402. A head support arm 3416 that rotatably supports the head movable mechanism 3450 and a body part movable mechanism that is fixed to the front surface of the slide base 3414 below the head support arm 3416 and supports the body part 3402b of the character body 3402. A character body attached to the front surface of the lower guide member 3413 at a predetermined position between the upper rack gear 3414a and the lower rack gear 3415a so that the rotary shaft extends rearward at a predetermined position between the body portion support arm 3417 for rotatably supporting the 3470. Drive motor 3418 and key A disk-shaped drive gear 3419 that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the tractor body drive motor 3418 and meshes with the lower rack gear 3415a, and meshes with both the drive gear 3419 and the upper rack gear 3414a, and is rotatably supported by the lower guide member 3413. And a ring-shaped sub-gear 3420 having the same outer diameter.

  The upper guide member 3412 in the character body moving mechanism 3410 has a box-shaped front surface with a flat rear surface extending substantially parallel to the front surface of the unit base 3411. The lower guide member 3413 includes a bottom plate portion 3413a extending a predetermined amount forward from the lower end of the unit base 3411 and extending in the left-right direction, a front plate portion 3413b rising upward in a plate shape from the front end of the bottom plate portion 3413a, A leg portion 3413c is provided which extends rearward from the left and right ends at a predetermined position of the plate portion 3413b and a rear end of which contacts the front surface of the unit base 3411.

  As shown in the figure, the lower guide member 3413 has a character body drive motor 3418 on the front surface of the front plate portion 3413b so that the rotation shaft is positioned at a position approximately below the center in the vertical direction at a substantially central position in the horizontal direction. It can be installed. In addition, the lower guide member 3413 further includes four shaft bosses 3413d that protrude in a cylindrical shape rearward from the back surface of the front plate portion 3413b and are arranged in a cross shape above the position where the character body drive motor 3418 is attached. Yes. A rolling bush 3421 is rotatably inserted into each of the shaft bosses 3413d, and the inner periphery of the sub gear 3420 is in contact with the four rolling bushes 3421 (see FIG. 125). Thereby, the sub gear 3420 is rotatably supported by the lower guide member 3413.

  In addition, the character body moving mechanism 3410 includes a pair of upper rollers 3422 that are rotatably supported around an axis extending in the vertical direction near both ends in the left-right direction at the upper end of the slide base 3414, and downward from the lower surface of the rack member 3415. A pair of lower rollers 3423 that are rotatably supported around a shaft that extends and extends in the front-rear direction, and a pair of lower rollers 3423 that are spaced apart from each other in the left-right direction. And a pair of lower rear rollers 3424 rotatably supported around the lower rear roller 3424. The upper roller 3422 can roll on the back surface of the upper guide member 3412. The lower roller 3423 can roll on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 3413a of the lower guide member 3413, and the lower rear roller 3424 can roll on the front surface of the unit base 3411.

  In addition to the lower rack gear 3415a, the rack member 3415 further includes a plate-shaped detection piece 3415b that protrudes to the front side as shown in the figure. The detection piece 3415b is detected by a character body movement detection sensor 3425 attached to the lower guide member 3413, and the movement position of the lower guide member 3413, that is, the slide base 3414 (character body 3402) in the left-right direction is detected. It can be detected.

  A head support arm 3416 and a body support arm 3417 fixed to the slide base 3414 are respectively provided in a triangular plate-like arm portions 3416a and 3417a protruding forward and separated in the vertical direction, and in the vertical direction near the front ends of the arm portions 3416a and 3417a. Support holes 3416b and 3417b. By inserting into the support holes 3416b and 3417b support shafts 3252b and 3453b of a head movable mechanism 3450, which will be described later, and support shafts 3480b and 3477b of a body movable mechanism 3470, respectively, the head 3402a and the body 3402b are rotated. It can be pivotally supported and can be moved in the left-right direction together with the slide base 3414. Although detailed illustration is omitted, in this example, the support holes 3416b and 3417b of the head support arm 3416 and the body support arm 3417 are fixed to the slide base 3414, and the respective axes are different from each other. Is arranged.

  The character body moving mechanism 3410 has a plate shape extending in a substantially horizontal direction, is disposed on the front surface of the slide base 3414, is fixed to the unit base 3411, penetrates in a vertical direction with a predetermined width, and extends in a predetermined direction. A slope member 3426 having a slit 3426a is further provided. On the other hand, as shown in the figure, the lower guide member 3413 protrudes forward from the position above the character body drive motor 3418 attached at the approximate center in the vertical direction on the front surface of the front plate portion 3413b and extends in the left-right direction. A plate-shaped slope piece 3413e is further provided, and a body portion slit 3413f that penetrates in a vertical direction with a predetermined width and extends in a predetermined direction is formed in the slope piece 3413e. The head portion slit 3426a and the body portion slit 3413f of the slope member 3426 and the lower guide member 3413 are formed so as to extend in the forward direction in the plan view (see FIG. 126). In addition, although detailed illustration is abbreviate | omitted, in this example, the head slit 3426a and the trunk | drum part slit 3413f are formed so that the extension method may mutually differ.

  A slide shaft 3453c of a head movable mechanism 3450 and a slide shaft 3480c of a body movable mechanism 3470, which will be described later, are slidably inserted into the head slit 3426a and the body slit 3413f, respectively. When the head movable mechanism 3450 and the body movable mechanism 3470 move in the left-right direction as the slide base 3414 moves in the left-right direction, the sliding shafts 3453c and 3480c slide along the head slit 3426a and the body slit 3413f. Thus, the head movable mechanism 3450 and the torso movable mechanism 3470, that is, the head 3402a and the torso 3402b of the character body 3402 are rotated around a predetermined axis.

  Further, the character body moving mechanism 3410 includes a character body fixing side relay board 3428 fixed to the right end portion of the unit base 3411, a character body movable side relay board 3429 fixed to the front side of the slide base 3414, and a character body. A wiring cable 3430 that electrically connects the fixed-side relay board 3428 and the character body movable-side relay board 3429, and a translucent right lens member that is disposed at the front right end of the character body moving mechanism 3410 and extends long in the vertical direction. 3431 and a character body right decorative board 3432 disposed on the rear side of the character body right lens member 3431 and having a plurality of color LEDs mounted on the front surface. In this example, a flexible flat cable is used as the wiring cable 3430. Also, the character body right decorative board 3432 is divided into upper and lower parts as shown in the figure.

  On the other hand, the head movable mechanism 3450 in the character unit 3400 has a translucent head base 3451 and a head-top support fixed to the top of the head base 3451 as shown in FIGS. A member 3452, a head lower support member 3453 fixed to the lower part of the head base 3451, and a head 3402 a of the character body 3402 that can be rotated around an axis extending in the left-right direction on the front surface of the head base 3451. A head crank 3454, a head solenoid 3455 that is pivotally driven by the advancement and retraction of the plunger, and is attached to the approximate center of the head base 3451. And a head decoration board 3456 on which color LEDs are mounted. A lens portion is formed at a predetermined position on the rear surface of the head base 3451, and the light from the head decoration board 3456 can be diffused forward by the lens portion.

  The head upper support member 3452 and the head lower support member 3453 of the head movable mechanism 3450 include a plate-like upper piece portion 3452a and a lower piece portion 3453a extending to the rear side. Cylindrical support shafts 3452b and 3453b extend from the lower surface and the upper surface of the lower piece 3453a so as to face each other. These support shafts 3452b and 3453b are arranged coaxially in plan view. The head lower support member 3453 includes a cylindrical sliding shaft 3453c that extends downward from the lower surface of the lower piece 3453a. The sliding shaft 3453c is arranged on the rear side and the right side in a plan view with respect to the support shafts 3453b and 3453b.

  The head movable mechanism 3450 is moved up and down by inserting the support shafts 3452b and 3453b of the head upper support member 3453 and the head lower support member 3453 into the support holes 3416b of the head support arm 3416 in the character body moving mechanism 3410. It is supported so as to be rotatable around a predetermined axis extending in the direction. Further, by inserting the slide shaft 3453c of the lower head support member 3453 into the head slit 3426a of the slope member 3426 in the character body moving mechanism 3410, the head is moved along with the movement of the slide base 3414 in the left-right direction. By the cam action of the slit 3426a, the head movable mechanism 3450 (the head 3402a of the character body 3402) can be rotated around the support shafts 3252b and 3453b.

  The head moving mechanism 3450 can rotate the head 3402a of the character body 3402 in the vertical direction by appropriately driving the head solenoid 3455, and can make the character move as if the character is scolding. It can be done.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 127, FIG. 129, etc., the body part movable mechanism 3470 in the character unit 3400 is attached and fixed to the back side of the body part 3402b in the character body 3402, and attached to the back side of the body part 3402b. A lower arm 3471, a right arm drive motor 3472 fixed to the lower side of the lower member 3471 so that the rotary shaft extends upward, and fixed to the rotary shaft of the right arm drive motor 3472 and above the lower member 3471. The fan-shaped drive gear 3473 arranged on the outer periphery of the fan-shaped outer periphery, the fan-shaped first driven gear 3474 that meshes with the fan-shaped drive gear 3473, and the transmission shaft that rotates together with the first driven gear 3474 and extends upward. 3475, a fan-shaped second driven gear 3476 fixed near the upper end of the transmission shaft 3475, and the upper end of the transmission shaft 3475 The upper member 3477 is supported on the upper side of the lower member 3471 so as to be pivotally supported around the shaft extending in the vertical direction on the base end side of the right arm portion 3402c in the body portion 3402b in cooperation with the lower member 3471. And. The right arm portion 3402c has a semicircular arm portion gear 3478 that is supported by the lower member 3471 and the upper member 3477 and meshes with the second driven gear 3476 around the rotation shaft, and the right arm drive motor 3472. The right arm portion 3402c is rotated in the horizontal direction by the rotational drive.

  The fan-shaped drive gear 3473 in the body portion movable mechanism 3470 has a fan-shaped detection piece 3473a adjacent to the gear, and is detected by a right arm rotation detection sensor 3479 fixed to the upper surface of the lower member, whereby the right arm The rotational position of the part 3402c can be detected.

  The body part movable mechanism 3470 further includes a body part lower support member 3480 fixed to the back side of the body part 3402b at a position below the lower member 3471. The trunk portion lower support member 3480 and the upper member 3477 include a lower piece portion 3480a and an upper piece portion 3477a extending rearward, and cylindrical support shafts from the upper and lower surfaces of the lower piece portion 3480a and the upper piece portion 3477a. 3480b and 3477b extend so as to face each other. These support shafts 3480b and 3477b are arranged coaxially in plan view. The body portion lower support member 3480 includes a cylindrical sliding shaft 3480c extending downward from the lower surface of the lower piece portion 3480a. The sliding shaft 3480c is arranged on the rear side and the right side in a plan view with respect to the support shafts 3480b and 3477b.

  By inserting the support shafts 3480b and 3477b of the body part lower support member 3480 and the upper member 3477 into the support holes 3417b of the body part support arm 3417 in the character body movement mechanism 3410, the body part movable mechanism 3470 extends in a vertical direction. It is supported so as to be rotatable around an axis. Further, by inserting the sliding shaft 3480c of the lower body support member 3480 into the body slit 3413f of the lower guide member 3413 in the character body moving mechanism 3410, the body part is moved in accordance with the movement of the slide base 3414 in the left-right direction. By the cam action of the slit 3413f, the body part moving mechanism 3470 (the body part 3402b of the character body 3402) can be rotated around the support shafts 3480b and 3477b.

  Further, the body part moving mechanism 3470 includes a body part lens member 3481 having translucency inserted from the back side into a through hole opened in a shuriken shape in the upper left hand of the body part 3402b, and a rear part of the body part lens member 3481. And a body part decoration board 3482 which is disposed on the side and has at least one color LED mounted on the front surface. The body part lens member 3481 and the body part decoration substrate 3482 are attached to the back side of the body part 3402b.

  This body part movable mechanism 3470 repeats forward rotation and reverse rotation of the right arm drive motor 3472 within the range of the fan-shaped drive gear 3473, so that the right arm part 3402c repeats reciprocal rotation in a substantially horizontal direction, as if a shuriken held in the left hand. Can be operated as if they are being fed out.

  Next, the movement of the character body 3402 in the character unit 3400 of this example will be described. In a normal state, the character body 3402 of the character unit 3400 is located at a retracted position that is located outside the right end of the liquid crystal display device 1400 in the front view as shown in FIG. The character body 3402 slides to the left by driving the character body drive motor 3418, and is positioned at the entry position located on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 (see FIG. 132). It can be slid in the left-right direction from the entry position.

  Specifically, the character body 3402 is supported on the front side of the slide base 3414 in the character body moving mechanism 3410, and meshes with the drive gear 3419 when the drive gear 3419 is rotated in a predetermined direction by the character body drive motor 3418. The slide base 3414 moves to one side in the left-right direction via the rack member 3415 having the lower rack gear 3415a. In this character body moving mechanism 3410, a ring-shaped sub gear 3420 disposed on the upper side of the drive gear 3419 is engaged with the drive gear 3419, and rotates in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the drive gear 3419. At the same time, the outer diameter of the sub gear 3420 is the same as the outer diameter of the drive gear 3419 and rotates in the reverse direction at the same speed as the drive gear 3419.

  Further, the sub gear 3420 meshes with the upper rack gear 3414a of the slide base 3414 arranged to face the lower rack gear 3415a, and the rotation of the sub gear 3420 causes the upper rack gear 3414a to move in the same direction at the same speed as the lower rack gear 3415a. Thus, the slide base 3414 moves in one of the left and right directions by the lower rack gear 3415a and the upper rack gear 3414a which are separated in the vertical direction. The detection piece 3415b of the rack member 3415 is detected by the character body movement detection sensor 3425 when the slide base 3414 is moved to the right side, and is not detected when the slide base 3414 is moved to the left side. It is like that.

  The character body moving mechanism 3410 not only moves the character body 3402 in the left-right direction, but also supports the head 3402a and the torso 3402b of the character body 3402 so as to be rotatable about different axes, respectively. The part 3402a and the body part 3402b can be moved at different rotation angles.

  More specifically, the head 3402a of the character body 3402 is pivotally supported by a head support arm 3416 attached to the slide base 3414, and moves in the left-right direction together with the slide base 3414. ing. In addition, the sliding shaft 3453c of the head movable mechanism 3450 in the head 3402a is inserted into the head slit 3426a of the slope member 3426 fixed to the unit base 3411, and the slide base 3414 (head 3402a) is left and right. By moving in the direction, the sliding shaft 3453c slides in the head slit 3426a.

  As shown in FIG. 126, the head slit 3426a is formed so as to extend to the front side toward the left side. When the head portion 3402a moves to the left side, the sliding shaft 3453c moves to the front side by the head slit 3426c. As a result, the head 3402a rotates around the support shafts 3452b and 3453b that are pivotally supported by the head support arm 3416 due to the change in the position of the sliding shaft 3453c in the front-rear direction.

  On the other hand, the body portion 3402b of the character body 3402 is pivotally supported by a body portion support arm 3417 attached to the slide base 3414 so as to move in the left-right direction together with the slide base 3414. . In addition, the sliding shaft 3480c of the body portion movable mechanism 3470 in the body portion 3402b is inserted into the body portion slit 3413f of the lower guide member 3413 fixed to the unit base 3411, and the slide base 3414 (body portion 3402b) is inserted. By moving in the left-right direction, the sliding shaft 3480c slides in the body portion slit 3413f.

  As shown in FIG. 126 (C), the body part slit 3413f is formed so as to extend to the front side toward the left side. When the body part 3402b moves to the left side, the sliding shaft 3480c is moved by the body part slit 3413f. The body portion 3402b rotates around the support shafts 3480b and 3477b supported by the body portion support arm 3417 due to the change in the position in the front-rear direction on the slide shaft 3480c. The head slit 3426c and the torso portion slit 3413f have different forms of extension, and the support shafts 3452b and 3453b of the head portion 3402a and the support shafts 3480b and 2477b of the torso portion 3402b are disposed at different positions. The rotation angles of the head 3402a and the body 3402b are different from each other, and the movement of the character body 3402 is deeply added.

  As described above, according to the character unit 3400 of this example, the character body 3402 slides in the left-right direction so as to be positioned on the front surface of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and rotates around the predetermined axis. As the character body 3402 moves, the character body 3402 can be focused and entertained, and the movement of the character body 3402 increases the player's expectation, thereby improving the game. It can suppress that interest falls.

  Further, the character body 3402 can be moved in the left-right direction and rotated around a predetermined axis by simply sliding the slide base 3414 in the left-right direction by driving the character body drive motor 3418. Therefore, it is not necessary to separately provide a rotation driving means for making the movement of the character body 3402 simple. Further, since a rotation driving means for rotating the character body 3402 is not required, a head movable mechanism 3450 or a body for moving the head 3402a, the body 3402b, etc. of the character body 3402 instead of the rotation driving means. Part movement mechanism 3470 and the like can be provided, and the character body 3402 can be further complicatedly moved, and the movement can delight and surprise the player, thereby reducing the interest in the game. Can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, with respect to the slide base 3414 that supports the character body 3402 on the front side, on the lower side, the lower roller 3423 rolls on the upper surface of the bottom plate portion 3413a of the lower guide member 3413, and the lower rear roller 3424 rolls on the front surface of the unit base 3411. The upper roller 3422 rolls on the back surface of the upper guide member 3412 on the upper side, and a load is applied to the slide base 3414 so that the upper end of the character body 3402 falls to the front side. However, the slide base 3414 can be held in a substantially upright state and smoothly slid in the left-right direction.

  Also, in the character body moving mechanism 3410, the slide base 3414 is extended by the upper rack gear 3414a arranged at the lower end and substantially at the center in the vertical direction in addition to the lower rack gear 3415a with respect to the slide base 3414 extending long in the vertical direction. Since it is driven to move in the left-right direction, the slide base 3414 can be smoothly slid without play.

  Further, since the sub gear 3420 that meshes with the drive gear 3419 and the upper rack gear 3414a is formed in a ring shape, if an excessive force acts on the sub gear 3420, the sub gear 3420 can be elastically deformed to release the force. Further, it is possible to prevent the gear teeth from being engaged and the movement of the slide base 3414 to stop, or the slide base 3141 to move while being loose.

[4-5-3. Gear decoration body unit]
As shown in FIGS. 130 and 131, the gear decoration body unit 3500 in the back unit 3000 includes three gear-shaped upper gear decoration bodies 3502a, medium gear decoration bodies 3502b, and lower gear decoration bodies 3502c arranged in the vertical direction. The gear decoration body 3502 is provided, and the gear decoration body 3502 rotates according to the gaming state. More specifically, the gear decoration body unit 3500 supports the gear decoration body 3502 such that the gear decoration body 3502 is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the left-right direction and the left base is opened. A unit cover 3512 that closes the opened left surface, a gear drive motor 3514 that is attached to a lower portion of the left surface of the unit cover 3512 and that has a rotation shaft extending into the unit base 3510, and a drive gear that is fixed to the rotation shaft of the gear drive motor 3514 3516, a lower gear 3518 that meshes with the drive gear 3516 and is fixed to the shaft portion 3503 of the lower gear decoration body 3502c, and an intermediate gear 3520 that meshes with the lower gear 3518 and is fixed to the shaft portion 3503 of the intermediate gear decoration body 3502b. The upper gear meshed with the middle gear 3520 and fixed to the shaft portion 3503 of the upper gear decoration 3502a. And 522, a mainly provided.

  The gear decoration body unit 3500 includes a gear position detection sensor 3524 that detects the rotational position of the drive gear 3516, and the right side (the gear decoration body 3502 side) of the lower gear 3518, the middle gear 3520, and the upper gear 3522 in the unit base 3510. ) Disposed on the right side and mounted with a plurality of color LEDs on the right side, and a three-dimensional candle simulating a candle attached toward the front near the center in the vertical direction at the rear end of the right side of the unit base 3510 It further includes a decorative body 3528 and a candle decorative substrate 3530 which is disposed on the rear side of the candle decorative body 3528 and has a color LED mounted on the front surface. The drive gear 3516 includes a detection piece 3516a extending outward in the radial direction, and the detection of the detection piece 3516a by the gear position detection sensor 3524 allows the rotation of the drive gear 3516, that is, the three gear decoration bodies 3502. The position can be detected.

  In this gear ornament body unit 3500, the three gear ornaments 3502 are such that the upper gear ornament 3502a has a larger diameter than the medium gear ornament 3502b and the lower gear ornament 3502c, and the shaft of the medium gear ornament 3502b. The portion 3503 is shorter than the shaft portion 3503 of the upper gear decoration body 3502a and the lower gear decoration body 3502c. Accordingly, the middle gear decoration body 3502b is located on the left side of the gears of the upper gear decoration body 3502a and the lower gear decoration body 3502c and is not engaged therewith. Further, the unit base 3510 is formed with an L-shaped frame pattern and a plurality of gear-shaped reliefs arranged along the bottom and rear sides, as shown in the drawing, on the right side thereof. The design is enhanced.

  The lower gear 3518, the middle gear 3520, and the upper gear 3522 are spur gears having the same diameter, and the rotation of the drive gear 3516 causes the lower gear 3518 and the upper gear 3522 to move in the opposite directions to the drive gear 3516. 3520 rotates in the same direction as drive gear 3516 at the same rotational speed.

  The three gear decorations 3502 and the unit base 3510 are partially formed to be translucent, and are decorated with light emission by a gear decoration substrate 3526 arranged in the unit base 3510. In addition, each tooth of the gear decoration body 3502 is opaque, and a color LED of the gear decoration board 3526 is mounted at a position corresponding to a position where each tooth circulates. Thereby, the rotation of the gear decoration body 3502 alternately repeats that the light from the gear decoration board 3526 is blocked or not blocked by the teeth of the gear decoration body 3502, thereby changing the light emission mode and the like. It is possible to make a dynamic light-emitting decoration without any problems.

  In this way, the gear decoration body unit 3500 of the present example is configured such that the three gear decoration bodies 3502 arranged in the vertical direction are not meshed with each other, but the shaft extending the gear decoration body 3502 in the left-right direction Since it is made to rotate around simultaneously, from the player side, it is possible to make an illusion that each gear decoration 3502 is meshed and rotating, and the rotation effect of the gear decoration 3502 is enjoyed. It can suppress that the interest with respect to a game falls.

[4-6. Function display unit]
Next, the function display unit 640 in the pachinko gaming machine 1 includes a function display substrate 640a and a cover member 640b as shown in FIG. As shown in the figure, the function display board 640a includes segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, and LED1 to LED12. A first special symbol indicator 641 is assigned to the segment indicator SEG1, and the segment indicator SEG2 has a first indicator. Two special symbol indicators 642 are assigned. The segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can display alphanumeric characters and figures, etc., and by displaying these alphanumeric characters and figures as special symbols, the first starting port 2001 of the attacker unit 2000 is displayed. When the game ball wins, the segment display SEG1 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, and when the game ball wins at the second start port 2002, the segment display SEG2 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner. Yes.

  LED 1 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643a, LED 2 is assigned a first special symbol memory lamp 643b, LED 3 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644a, and LED 4 is assigned a second special symbol memory lamp 644b. Each is assigned. When the game ball won in the first starting port 2001 is not used in the special symbol fluctuation display, the first special symbol memory display 643 lights up or blinks with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. Yes. Specifically, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is turned off, and the first special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both the indicators 643 are lit and the number of the holding balls is three, the first special symbol memory lamp 643a blinks and the first special symbol memory lamp 643b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the first special symbol memory display Both devices 643 flash. On the other hand, when the game ball won to the second starting port 2002 is not used in the special symbol change display, the second special symbol memory display 644 is turned on or blinking with the number of the game balls won as the holding number. It has become. Specifically, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a is turned on when the holding ball (starting memory) is one ball, the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is turned off, and the second special symbol memory when the holding ball is two balls. When both of the indicators 644 are turned on and the number of the holding balls is three, the second special symbol memory lamp 644a flashes and the second special symbol memory lamp 644b is lit, and when the number of the holding balls is four, the second special symbol memory display Both units 644 flash.

  Further, a normal symbol display 645 is assigned to the LED 5. The LED 5 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 5 displays the lit color as a normal symbol so that when the game ball passes through the gate entrance 2351 of the gate portion 2350, the predetermined normal symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  Further, a normal symbol storage display 646 is assigned to each of the LEDs 6 to 9. When the game ball that has passed through the gate entrance 2351 is not used for normal symbol fluctuation display (when the normal symbol display is performed on the normal symbol display 645 and when the movable piece 2005 is opened / closed) For the game balls that are not used for the normal symbol variation display immediately after passing through the gate entrance 2351, the normal symbol memory display 646 is turned on with the number of game balls passed as the number of reserves. Specifically, the normal symbol memory lamp 646a is turned on when the holding ball is one ball, and the normal symbol memory lamps 646b to 646d are turned off. When the holding ball is two balls, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a and 646b are turned on. The normal symbol memory lamps 646c and 646d are turned off, the normal symbol memory lamps 646a to 646c are turned on when the holding ball is three balls, the normal symbol memory lamp 646b is turned off, and the normal symbol memory indicator is displayed when the holding ball is four balls. All 646 lights up.

  Further, a gaming state indicator 647 is assigned to the LED 10. The LED 10 is an LED capable of lighting red / green / orange, and can be turned on by combining these red / green / orange. The LED 10 displays the color to be lit as a gaming state, thereby notifying that the gaming state has a probability variation or a small hit.

  Further, a 2-round display lamp 648a is assigned to the LED 11, and a 15-round display lamp 648b is assigned to the LED 12. As described above, the 2-round display lamp 648a lights and notifies that the number of times (rounds) that the grand prize winning opening 2003 is in the open state from the closed state is two, while the 15-round display is displayed. The lamp 648b lights up and notifies that there are 15 rounds.

  Thus, the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 mounted on the function display board 640a are the first special symbol indicator 641, the second special symbol indicator 642, the first special symbol memory indicator 643, A second special symbol memory display 644, a normal symbol display 645, a normal symbol memory display 646, a game status display 647, and a round display 648 are allocated to each of them, and a segment display SEG1, which displays various functions. SEG2, LED1 to LED12, that is, the first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage The display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648 are integrated on the function display board 640a. That.

  In addition, the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 each variably display the jackpot gaming state as a special symbol, so the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, Differentiating from the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the gaming state display 647, and the round display 648, segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 different from the LED1 to LED12 assigned to them are used to display alphanumeric characters and graphics. Etc. are variably displayed as special symbols.

  The sum of the number of LEDs 6 to 9 assigned to the normal symbol memory display 646 and the number of LEDs 11 and 12 assigned to the round display 648 is a fixed value 6.

  By the way, the function display board 640a is fixed to the cover member 640b with screws (not shown), and the cover member 640b is attached from the back surface of the front component member 601 of the game board 4 with screws (not shown). The front component 601 is provided with segment indicator openings 601c at positions corresponding to the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 of the function display board 640a so that the contents displayed by these segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 can be visually recognized. It has become.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 133, the front constituent member 601 is provided with LED insertion holes 601d at positions corresponding to the LEDs 1 to 12 of the function display board 640a, and the cover member 640b is connected to the front constituent member 601. LED1 to LED12 do not interfere with the game board 4 when being attached to the back surface of the game board. These LED insertion holes 601d are formed in a cylindrical shape so that the lights of the LEDs 1 to 12 that are turned on or blinking are not mistaken for the lights of the adjacent LEDs that are turned on or blinked. The contents displayed by the segment indicators SEG1 and SEG2 and the contents displayed by turning on or blinking the LEDs 1 to 12 are printed on a function display sticker 649 described later. The front component member 601 is provided with a function display seal pasting portion 601e to which the function display seal 649 is pasted. In addition, a concave portion 601f is formed in the function display seal pasting portion 601e. The function display seal 649, which is pasted by inserting a tool such as a flat-blade screwdriver, into the recess 601f, is easily peeled off. Here, in order to make it easy to peel off the function display seal 649, it is conceivable to provide a protrusion on the function display seal 649. However, when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3, the protrusion is pulled for some reason. The function display sticker 649 may be peeled off from the function display sticker pasting portion 601e. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the function display sticker 601e is formed in the function display sticker 601e so that the function display sticker 649 does not peel from the function display sticker 601e when the door frame 5 is opened and closed from the main body frame 3. ing.

[4-6-1. Function display sticker]
Next, as shown in FIG. 134, the function display sticker 649 in the gaming machine 4 is printed on the surface of the gaming machine 4 by grouping it into groups Grp1 to Grp3 for each function display. It is affixed to a function display seal affixing portion 601e formed on a certain front component 601.

  As shown in FIG. 134, the group Grp1 includes a first special symbol display 641 and a first special symbol storage display 643. These first special symbol display 641 and first special symbol storage display 643 is divided and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL1. The area surrounded by the solid line SL1 is displayed in the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol memory so that the display by the first special symbol display 641 and the lighting or blinking by the first special symbol memory display 643 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 643 is transparent. In the group Grp1, various kinds of information related to the special symbol change display by winning the game ball to the first start port 2001 are displayed. For example, when a winning prize is received at the first starting port 2001, the first special symbol display 641 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or the first special symbol memory display 643 sets the number of winning game balls as a holding number. Lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 into one group Grp1, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol storage display 643 Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the display of variation of the special symbol due to the winning of the game ball at the first start port 2001 are shown. As a result, the player sees the group Grp1 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL1, and changes the special symbol due to the start winning of the game ball to the first start port 2001. Various information related to the display can be easily confirmed.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 134, the group Grp2 includes a second special symbol display 642 and a second special symbol storage display 644, and these second special symbol display 642 and second special symbol storage The display unit 644 is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by a solid line SL2. The area surrounded by the solid line SL2 is the second special symbol display 642, the second special symbol storage so that the display by the second special symbol display 642 and the lighting or blinking by the second special symbol storage display 644 can be visually recognized. The position corresponding to the display 644 is transparent. In this group Grp2, various types of information related to the special symbol variation display by winning a game ball to the second starting port 2002 are displayed. For example, when a game ball starts winning a prize at the second start opening 2002, the second special symbol display 642 displays a predetermined special symbol in a variable manner, or displays the number of winning game balls as the number of reserves in the second special symbol memory display. The device 644 lights up or flashes. Thus, by grouping the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 into one group Grp2, the second special symbol display 642 and the second special symbol storage display 644 are combined. Can indicate to the player that various types of information related to the special symbol variation display due to the winning of the game ball at the second starting port 2002 are shown. As a result, the player can visually observe the group Grp2 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL2 and printed on the function display sticker 649, thereby changing the special symbol display by winning the game ball at the second starting port 2002. Various information regarding can be easily confirmed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 134, the group Grp3 includes a normal symbol display 645 and a normal symbol storage display 646, and a solid line SL3 through which the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. And is printed on the function display sticker 649. In the area surrounded by the solid line SL3, the positions corresponding to the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are transparent so that the lighting by the normal symbol display 645 and the lighting by the normal symbol storage display 646 can be visually recognized. It has become. As described above, the normal symbol display unit 645 variably displays whether or not the movable piece 2005 is opened and closed as a predetermined normal symbol. It becomes easy to win. Therefore, the normal symbol display 645 includes a first special symbol display 641, a first special symbol storage display 643, a second special symbol display 642, a second special symbol storage display 644, and a normal symbol storage display. Stars are printed so that they can be distinguished from the game display 646, the game status display 647, and the round display 648. In this group Grp3, various information related to the gate entrance 2351 of the gate portion 2350 can be displayed. For example, when a game ball passes through the gate entrance 2351, the normal symbol display unit 645 displays a predetermined normal symbol in a variable manner, or the normal symbol storage display unit 646 lights up with the number of game balls passed as a holding number. . As described above, the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 are grouped into one group Grp3, so that the normal symbol display 645 and the normal symbol storage display 646 can perform various operations related to the normal symbol variation display. The player can be informed that the information is shown. As a result, the player can easily confirm various information regarding the variation display of the normal symbol by visually observing the group Grp3 which is partitioned in a state surrounded by the solid line SL3 and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  Furthermore, the positions corresponding to the gaming status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be seen by the gaming status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648, respectively, as shown in FIG. It is partitioned and printed. In the area surrounded by the solid lines SL4 to SL6, the positions corresponding to the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 are transparent so that the lighting by the game status indicator 647 and the round indicator 648 can be visually recognized. In order to make it easy to understand the maximum number of rounds, the round indicator 648 is printed with a value 2 which is the maximum number of rounds at a position corresponding to the 2-round display lamp 648a, and a position corresponding to the 15-round display lamp 648b. Is printed with a value 15 which is the maximum number of rounds. As described above, the gaming status indicator 647 displays the lighting color as the gaming status, thereby notifying that the gaming status has a probability variation or a small hit, and the two-round display lamp 648 a The fact that the number of times (rounds) from the closed state to the open state (round) is 2 is turned on and notified, and the 15-round display lamp 648b lights and notifies that the round is 15 times. Thus, the player can easily check the gaming state by visually observing the gaming state indicator 647 that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649 in a state surrounded by the solid line SL4. By visually observing the two-round display lamp 648a that is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649, it is possible to easily confirm whether or not the maximum number of rounds is two. Whether or not the maximum number of rounds is 15 can be easily confirmed by visually observing the 15-round display lamp 648b which is partitioned and printed on the function display sticker 649.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the groups Grp1 to Grp3 are partitioned and surrounded by solid lines SL1 to SL6 and printed on the function display sticker 649. The position corresponding to 648 is partitioned and printed in a state surrounded by solid lines SL4 to SL6 that can be visually recognized by the game status display 647 and the round display 648.

  As described above, the function display seal 649 is grouped so that the functions of the segment indicators SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12, which are collectively mounted on the function display board 640a shown in FIG. 133, are grouped as groups Grp1 to Grp3. The contents are printed and partitioned. In addition, a star symbol is printed on the normal symbol display 645 or the like, and even if the contents displayed by the segment displays SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 are collectively printed on the function display sticker 649, their meanings are displayed. It can be easily understood.

  The correspondence between such functions and the printed contents is printed on the function display sticker 649 as a sticker management number 649a as shown in FIG. This seal management number 649a is printed at a position that is difficult to see from the game window 101 through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, and does not convey unnecessary information to the player. It is like that. Further, the concave portion 601f provided in the function display sticker attaching portion 601e is also formed at a position that is difficult to see through the game window 101 when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, and the concave portion 601f is provided to the player. It is difficult to see.

  Further, the seal management number 649a is used to prevent a worker of a manufacturer who manufactures the pachinko gaming machine 1 from mistakenly attaching a function display seal of another specification when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is assembled. . The seal management number 649a is also used for inventory management of the function display sticker 649, and modes such as the group Grp1 to the group Grp3 are managed in association with the seal management number 649a. Thereby, when the seal management number 649a is examined, the stock of the function display sticker 649 corresponding to the seal management number 649a can be known.

  Here, with the recent shortening of the life cycle of the pachinko gaming machine, the development period of the pachinko gaming machine is also shortened. For this reason, in the present embodiment, for example, a 2-round display lamp and a 15-round display lamp for lighting and informing that the number of times (rounds) that the winning prize opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state is 2 times and 15 times. In addition to adding 5 round display lamps and 8 round display lamps that light up and notify that the number of rounds is 5 or 8, depending on the case of reducing the number of starting ports from two to one, etc. The specification change of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be dealt with by using a common function display board 640a. In order to change the contents printed on the function display sticker in accordance with the specification change of the pachinko gaming machine 1, the functions of the segment display units SEG1, SEG2, LED1 to LED12 described above, and the contents printed on the function display sticker, Is printed on the function display sticker as a seal management number. Thereby, for example, in the manufacturer of the pachinko gaming machine 1, whether or not the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 correspond to the function display sticker 649 before the line operator attaches the function display sticker 649 to the game board 4. Can be confirmed by visually checking the seal management number 649a, and the sticking of the function display seal 649 that does not correspond to the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be prevented. Note that the function display seal 649 is a seal, and there is no work process for applying an adhesive or the like to the back surface of the function display seal 649, which contributes to improvement in productivity.

[5. Main control board, payout control board and peripheral control board]
Next, a control board for performing various controls of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 135 and 136. FIG. 135 is a block diagram of the main control board, the payout control board, and the peripheral control board, and FIG. 136 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. The control configuration of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is mainly configured by a main control board 4100, a payout control board 1186, and a peripheral control board 4139 as shown in FIGS. 135 and 136, and various controls are shared. First, the main control board 4100 will be described, and then the payout control board 1186 and the peripheral control board 4139 will be described.

[5-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 135, the main control board 4100 for controlling the progress of the game includes a main control MPU 4100a as a microprocessor, a main control I / O port 4100b as an input / output device (I / O device), and the above-described components. RAM clear switch 624a. The main control MPU 4100a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, as well as a watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and preventing fraud. It also has built-in functions.

  The main control MPU 4100a includes a first start port sensor 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001, a second start port sensor 2012 that detects a game ball that has entered the second start port 2002, and a general prize. A detection signal from a general prize opening sensor 3020 that detects a game ball that has entered the mouth 2004 is input via the main control I / O port 4100b, or a game that has passed through the gate outlet 2353 from the gate inlet 2351 of the gate portion 2350. Attached to a gate sensor 2352 that detects a ball, a general winning port sensor 3020 that detects a gaming ball that has entered the general winning port 2101, a count sensor 2014 that detects a gaming ball that has entered the big winning port 2003, and the back unit 3000 The detection signal from the magnetic detection sensor 3024 for detecting fraud using a magnet is attached to the game board 4 Panels relay board 3032, and or inputted via the main control I / O port 4100b. Based on these detection signals, the main control MPU 4100a outputs drive signals to the start port solenoid 2010 and the attacker solenoid 2016 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the panel relay board 3032, and the main control I / O The first special symbol display 641, the second special symbol display 642, the first special symbol storage display 643, the second special symbol storage display 644, via the port 4100b, the panel relay board 3032, and the function display board 640a. A drive signal is output to the normal symbol display 645, the normal symbol storage display 646, the game state display 647, and the round display 648.

  In the present embodiment, the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2012, the gate sensor 2352, and the count sensor 2014 are electromagnetic proximity sensors that are non-contact type sensors. On the other hand, as the general prize opening sensors 3020 and 2014, a mechanical sensor which is a contact type ON / OFF operation sensor is used. This is because the game balls frequently enter the first start port 2001 and the second start port 2002, and frequently pass through the gate outlet 2353 from the gate inlet 2351 of the gate portion 2350. The detection of game balls by the second starter sensor 2012 and the gate sensor 2352 also frequently occurs. Therefore, long-life proximity sensors are used for the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2012, and the gate sensor 2352. Further, when a big hit gaming state occurs, the big winning opening 2003 is opened and game balls frequently enter, so that the detection of the game balls by the count sensor 2014 also frequently occurs. For this reason, a long-life proximity sensor is also used for the count sensor 2014. On the other hand, detection by the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020 does not occur frequently at the general winning openings 2004 and 2101 where game balls do not enter frequently. For this reason, mechanical sensors having a shorter lifespan than the proximity sensor are used for the general prize opening sensors 3020 and 3020.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various information related to games (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 1186 via the main control I / O port 4100b and the main drawer relay board 1107. Various commands relating to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 1186 are received via the main drawer relay board 1107 and the main control I / O port 4100b. Further, the main control MPU 4100a transmits various commands related to the control of the game effects and various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 to the peripheral control board 4139 via the main control I / O port 4100b (the main control board 4100). And the peripheral control board 4139 are electrically connected by a harness (not shown). When the main control MPU 4100a receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 from the payout control board 1186, the main control MPU 4100a shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control board 4139.

  Various voltages are supplied to the main control board 4100 from the power supply board 1136. The power supply board 1136 includes an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) BC0 (see FIG. 137) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 4100 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. ing. The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 4100a to store various types of information in its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) even when the power is shut off. . The stored various information is erased (cleared) from the main control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 624a is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107.

  The main control board 4100 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit 4100d (see FIG. 137). The power failure monitoring circuit 4100d monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 1136, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning voltage when these voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. In addition to being input to the main control MPU 4100a via the main control I / O port 4100b, this power failure notice signal is also output to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107, and the peripheral control board 4139 and the inverter board 1411. Is also output.

[5-2. Dispensing control board]
As shown in FIG. 135, a payout control board 1186 that controls the payout of game balls, etc. includes a payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payout, a launch control unit 4120 that controls the launch motor 695, and a pachinko gaming machine. 1, an error LED display 4130 for displaying the state of 1, an error release switch 4131, and a ball removal switch 4132.

[5-2-1. Dispensing control unit]
As shown in FIG. 135, the payout control unit 4110 that performs various controls relating to payouts operates normally as a payout control MPU 4110a as a microprocessor, a payout control I / O port 4110b as an I / O device, and a payout control MPU4110a. And an external watchdog timer 4110c (hereinafter referred to as “external WDT 4110c”) for monitoring whether or not a payout motor is driven, and a payout motor drive circuit 4110d that outputs a drive signal to the payout motor 815. . The payout control MPU 4110a incorporates a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and also has a function for preventing fraud.

  The payout control MPU 4110a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 4100 and various commands related to the payout via the payout control I / O port 4110b or the RAM clear switch 624a from the main control board 4100. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) being input via the payout control I / O port 4110b, the detection signal from the full switch 916 is input via the payout control I / O port 4110b, 778, detection signals from the counting switch 812 and the rotation angle switch 855 are input via the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830 and the payout control I / O port 4110b. The opening signal (detection signal) from the door frame opening switch 4133 and the opening signal (detection signal) from the body frame opening switch 4134 are sent to the main control board via the payout control board 1186 and the main drawer relay board 1107. 4100 is input.

  When the payout control MPU 4110a receives various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 via the payout control I / O port 4110b, the payout control MPU 4110a passes the payout control I / O port 4110b based on the received various commands related to payout. When a driving signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 via the inward ball unit relay terminal plate 830, or when the ball removal switch 4132 is operated, this operation signal (detection signal) is used as the payout control I. / O port 4110b, and a payout control I / O port for discharging game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 based on the input detection signal. The prize ball unit relay terminal board 8 from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d through 4110b When a drive signal is output to the payout motor 815 via 0 or a lending request signal from a CR unit (not shown) is input via the CR unit terminal board 1150b and the payout control I / O port 4110b, Based on the ball request signal, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 4110d to the payout motor 815 via the payout control I / O port 4110b to the payout motor 815 via the prize ball unit relay terminal plate 830, or from the full switch 916. When the detection signal is input via the payout control I / O port 4110b, based on this detection signal, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d passes through the payout control I / O port 4110b and passes through the award ball unit relay terminal plate 830. The driving signal to the payout motor 815 is stopped and the payout motor 815 is stopped.

  Also, the payout control MPU 4110a displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 on the error LED display 4130 via the payout control I / O port 4110b, and various commands indicating the state via the payout control I / O port 4110b. When the detection signal from the counting switch 812 is input via the award ball unit relay terminal plate 830 and the payout control I / O port 4110b, based on this detection signal, The number of game balls actually paid out is output to the external terminal board 1150a via the payout control I / O port 4110b. The external terminal board 1150a is electrically connected to a hall computer installed in the game hall (hall). This hall computer monitors the player's game by ascertaining the number of game balls paid out by the pachinko gaming machine 1, game information of the pachinko gaming machine 1, and the like.

  The error LED display 4130 is a segment display, and displays the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters and figures. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 4130 include the following. For example, when the figure “-” is displayed, it is notified that it is “normal”, and when the numeral “0” is displayed, it indicates that it is “connection abnormality” (specifically, with the main control board 4100). An error has occurred in the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 1186 (that is, an error has occurred in various command signals), and when the number “1” is displayed, “out of ball” When the number “2” is displayed, it is informed that it is “sphere”, and when the number “3” is displayed, it is notified that it is a “counting switch error”. When the number “5” is displayed, the “retry error” is notified, and when the number “6” is displayed, the “full” is notified, and the number “7” is displayed. When it is, notify that it is “CR not connected” Are notifying is "in stock" when the letter "9" is displayed.

[5-2-2. Launch control unit]
As shown in FIG. 135, a launch control unit 4120 that performs launch control of the launch motor 695 includes an input circuit 4120a to which various signals are input, a transmission circuit 4120b that outputs a clock signal at regular intervals, and the clock signal. A firing control circuit 4120c that outputs a reference pulse for determining the rotation speed of the firing motor 695 based on the firing motor drive circuit 4120d that outputs a drive signal to the firing motor 695 based on the reference pulse from the firing control circuit 4120c; It is configured with. The launch control circuit 4120c controls the rotation speed of the launch motor 695 so that approximately 99.95 game balls per minute are launched toward the game area 605 based on the clock signal from the transmission circuit 4120b. . That is, the movement of the hitting ball 687 is controlled.

  Detection signals from the touch sensor 420 and the firing stop switch 422 built in the handle device 400 (operation handle portion 461) are input to the input circuit 4120a. Specifically, when the rotation operation member 464 of the operation handle portion 461 is touched, the touch sensor 420 detects the detection signal, and the detection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal 194. A detection signal detected by the stop switch 422 is input to the input circuit 4120a via the handle relay terminal 194. Further, when the CR unit is electrically connected to the CR unit terminal board 1150b, the CR connection signal is input to the input circuit 4120a via the CR unit terminal board 1150b.

  Various types of voltages are supplied to the payout control board 1186 from the power supply board 1136 in the same manner as the main control board 4100. The power supply board 1136 includes a capacitor BC1 (see FIG. 137) that supplies power to the payout control board 1186 for a predetermined time even when the power is shut off. With this capacitor BC1, the payout control MPU 4110a can store various payout information relating to payout in its built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) even when the power is shut off. The stored payout information is erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM when the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated when the power is turned on.

[5-3. Peripheral control board]
As shown in FIG. 136, the peripheral control board 4139 includes a peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control based on a command from the main control board 4100, and a liquid crystal display 1400 based on control data from the peripheral control unit 4140. And a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control.

[5-3-1. Peripheral control unit]
As shown in FIG. 136, the peripheral control unit 4140 that performs effect control includes a peripheral control MPU 4140a as a microprocessor, a peripheral control ROM 4140b that stores various processing programs and various commands, a sound source IC 4140c that performs high-quality sound performance, And a sound ROM 4140d in which sound information such as music and sound effects referred to by the sound source IC 4140c is stored.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a incorporates a plurality of parallel I / O ports, serial I / O ports, and the like. When various commands are received from the main control board 4100, each peripheral board of the game board 4 is received based on these various commands. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT (see FIG. 143) for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal to the provided color LED is emitted from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board. Synchronously with the clock signal SL-CLK (see FIG. 143), it is output to the lamp driving board 3031 or the game board side motors (rotating decorative body driving motor 3106, lifting drive motor 3160, swing driving motor 3212, ceiling driving motor 3312). , Character body drive motor 3418, right arm drive motor 3472, and gear drive motor 3514), and game board Game board side motor drive data SM-DAT (see FIG. 144) for outputting drive signals to the solenoids (lock solenoid 3127 and head solenoid 3455) is sent from the motor drive board serial I / O port to the game board side. In synchronization with the motor drive clock signal SM-CLK (see FIG. 144), the output is made to the motor drive board 3013 via the lamp drive board 3031, or the left rotating lamp motor 245 of the top lamp illumination unit 200 which is a door side motor. Rotating lamp motor driving data for outputting driving signals to the right rotating lamp motor 265 and the central rotating lamp motor 285, and vibrator driving data for outputting a driving signal to the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. In order to output lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to various color LEDs provided on the door side Door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT (see FIG. 140) composed of door side light emission data and door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK (see FIG. 140) from the serial I / O port for door decoration drive board. The control data (display command) indicating the screen to be output to the door decoration drive substrate 192 or the liquid crystal display device 1400 via the sub-drawer relay substrate 1108 and the door relay substrate 1102 is synchronized with the liquid crystal control unit. The data is output from the serial I / O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 in synchronization with the liquid crystal control unit clock signal. In the present embodiment, the rotary decoration body drive motor 3106, the lift drive motor 3160, the swing drive motor 3212, the ceiling drive motor 3312, the character body drive motor 3418, the right arm drive motor 3472, and the gears which are game board side motors are used. The drive motor 3514 and the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, and the center rotation lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which are door side motors, rotate their rotation axes once in 48 steps. A four-phase stepping motor is employed. These rotational speeds are controlled in a peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process described later of the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and reach the maximum rotational speed when driven with a pulse width of 2 ms. Since it becomes 96 ms (= 48 steps × 2 ms), it rotates only 1/96 ms per second and becomes 625 (= 60 s / 96 ms) per minute, so that the rotating shaft can rotate at high speed. Yes.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives serial data output from the door decoration drive board 192 via the door relay board 1102 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. The serial data includes the detection signal LB-SEN from the left sub button sensor 377L that detects the operation of the left sub button 372L and the right sub button sensor that detects the operation of the right sub button 372R. The detection signal RB-SEN from 377R and the detection signal CB-SEN from the main button sensor 376 for detecting the operation of the main button 371 are serialized by the door-side serial transmission circuit 192c (see FIG. 140) of the door decoration drive board 192. The serialized button operation detection data TS-DAT (see FIG. 140) is synchronized with the button operation detection clock signal TS-CLK (see FIG. 140) and relayed from the door-side serial transmission circuit 192c. Peripheral control M via substrate 1102 and sub drawer relay substrate 1108 Is input to U4140a serial I / O ports for the detection of the button operation.

  When the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives various commands from the main control board 4100, based on these various commands, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is driven from the motor drive board serial I / O port to the game board side motor drive. After being output to the motor drive board 3013 via the lamp drive board 3031 in synchronization with the clock signal SM-CLK, the game board side motor drive latch signal SM-LAT (see FIG. 143) is sent from the parallel I / O port to the lamp drive board. 3031 is output to the motor drive board 3013, or the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is synchronized with the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the door decoration drive board serial I / O port. To the door decoration drive board 192 via the relay board 1108 and the door relay board 1102 The door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT (see FIG. 140) is output from the parallel I / O port to the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108 and the door decoration drive board 192 via the door relay board 1102; A control signal (sound command) indicating sound information extracted from the sound ROM 4140d is output from the parallel I / O port to the sound source IC 4140c.

  In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is a game board side various detection sensor, which is a rotation position detection sensor 3134 for detecting the rotation position of the rotation decoration body 3102 (first rotation member 3112), and the slide position of the slide member 3152 in the lifting mechanism 3150. The vertical movement detection sensor 3164 to detect, the swing detection sensor 3218 to detect the slide position of the slide base 3206, the ceiling position detection sensor 3318 to detect the slide position of the cam member 3308, and the horizontal movement of the slide base 3414 (character body 3402). Character body movement detection sensor 3425 for detecting the position, right arm rotation detection sensor 3479 for detecting the rotation position of the right arm portion 3402c, and detection signal IN1-SEN from the gear position detection sensor 3524 for detecting the rotation position of the drive gear 3516. ~ IN7-S N (see FIGS. 143 and Fig. 144) is input to the parallel I / O ports through the motor drive board 3013 and the lamp driving substrate 3031,. The peripheral control MPU 4140a, based on these detection signals IN1-SEN to IN7-SEN, the first rotation member 3112, the slide member 3152, the slide base 3206, the cam member 3308, the slide base 3414 (character body 3402), the right arm portion 3402c. , And the original position of the drive gear 3516. The peripheral control MPU 4140a also detects detection signals LT-SEN from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 that detect the rotation positions of the rotary lights 244, 264, and 284 of the door frame 5. , RT-SEN, CT-SEN (see FIG. 140) are input to the parallel I / O port via the door relay board 1102 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. The peripheral control MPU 4140a grasps the original positions of the rotating lights 244, 264, and 284 based on these detection signals LT-SEN, RT-SEN, and CT-SEN. In addition, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the power cooling fan 1502 for cooling the power supply board 1136 is operating normally via the door relay board 1102 and the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108 in parallel. Input to I / O port. The peripheral control MPU 4140a monitors the operation of the power cooling fan 1502 based on this operation signal. The peripheral control MPU 4140a receives a signal (operation signal) indicating that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 to the parallel I / O port. The peripheral control MPU 4140a monitors the operation of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 based on this operation signal.

  The sound source IC 4140c extracts sound information from the sound ROM 4140d based on the control data (sound command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a, and the speakers 121, Control is performed so that music, sound effects, and the like according to various effects flow from 391 (side speakers 121 and lower speakers 391 of the door frame 5).

  In addition to the built-in watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “peripheral control built-in WDT”) 4140af (see FIG. 139), the peripheral control board 4139 has an external watchdog timer (hereinafter, not shown). The peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is running out of control using the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af in combination with the external WDT.

  Here, the bit rate (size of data that can be transmitted per unit time) set when serial communication is performed between the boards will be described. In the present embodiment, when serial communication is performed between various boards provided in the game board 4, a clock signal bit rate of 300 kilo (k) BPS (hereinafter referred to as “bps”) is used. In the case where serial communication is performed between the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5, 100 kbps is set as the bit rate of the clock signal. Specifically, the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK output from the motor drive board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the game board side light emission output from the lamp drive board serial I / O port. 300 kbps is set as the bit rate of the clock signal SL-CLK and the liquid crystal controller clock signal output from the liquid crystal controller serial I / O port, and the door is output from the door decoration drive board serial I / O port. 100 kbps is set as the bit rate of the side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK and the button operation detection clock signal TS-CLK input to the button operation detection serial I / O port.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when serial communication is performed between various boards provided in the game board 4, and when serial communication is performed between the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5, In this case, the bit rate of the clock signal is set to be different. Since various boards provided in the game board 4 are densely attached inside the outer shape of the game board 4, the distance between the boards is short, and the length of the harness for electrically connecting the boards is also shortened. Yes. On the other hand, the board between the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5 is different from the various boards densely attached to the game board 4 in the board and the door frame 5 provided in the game board 4. 85 is formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 shown in FIG. 85. The harness for electrically connecting the substrate provided to the game board 4 and the substrate provided to the door frame 5 is electrically separated from each other. The wiring opening 1124 and the wiring opening 537 formed in the main body frame 5 shown in FIG. 62 need to be passed through, so that the harness is routed and the board and the door frame 5 provided in the game board 4 The length of the harness that electrically connects the boards to the board provided in the game board 4 is extremely longer than the length of the harness that electrically connects the various boards provided in the game board 4.

  When the game balls rub against each other and are charged, electrostatic discharge generates noise, which may intrude into the harness that electrically connects the various boards and affect the various boards. . The inventor knows that the noise width of the game ball due to electrostatic discharge is about 0.8 microseconds (μs). However, when serial communication is performed at high speed, the bit rate of the clock signal needs to be set high, so that the pulse width of the clock signal approaches the noise width. Then, if serial data is transmitted at high speed to the harness that electrically connects the boards, when noise enters the harness, it becomes serial data that is different from the normal data due to the influence of this noise. It becomes difficult to transmit accurate serial data between boards. For this reason, for the bit rate that can be set to the clock signal, the pulse width must be larger than the noise width.

  As described above, the various boards included in the game board 4 are densely attached to the inside of the outer shape of the game board 4, the distance between the boards is short, and the length of the harness that electrically connects the boards is long. In addition, since the time is shortened, the time for transmission to the harness per bit of the serial data is short. On the other hand, the board of the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5 are separated from the board of the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5. It is necessary to pass a harness electrically connecting between the board provided to the board and the board provided to the door frame 5 through the wire opening 537 and the like, and the harness is routed and the board provided to the game board 4 and the door frame 5 Since the length of the harness for electrically connecting the board to the board provided for the game board 4 is significantly longer than the length of the harness for electrically connecting the various boards provided for the game board 4, one bit of serial data The time transmitted to the harness around is long. In other words, the harness that electrically connects between the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5 is less affected by noise than the harness that electrically connects various boards provided in the game board 4. Longer time to receive.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when serial communication is performed with various boards provided in the game board 4 having a short harness length, the clock signal pulse width is made larger than the noise width, and the clock signal bit rate is high. 300 kbps (pulse width, about 1.7 μs) is set. On the other hand, when serial communication is performed between the board having the long harness and the board provided in the game board 4 and the board provided in the door frame 5, the clock signal has a pulse width much larger than the noise width. The bit rate of 100 kbps (pulse width, 5.0 μs) is set.

[5-3-2. LCD controller]
As shown in FIG. 136, a liquid crystal control unit 4150 that performs drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 includes a liquid crystal control MPU 4150a as a microprocessor, a liquid crystal control ROM 4150b that stores various processing programs, various commands, and various data, and liquid crystal. A VDP (Video Display Processor) 4150c for controlling display of the display device 1400, a character ROM 4150d for storing various screen data displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and various data stored in the character ROM 4150d are transferred. And a character RAM 4150e to be copied.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a includes a parallel I / O port, a serial I / O port, and the like, and controls the VDP 4150c based on control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 to control drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1400. I do. If the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is operating normally, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a outputs an operation signal to that effect to the peripheral control unit 4140. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives a DMA execution signal DMAFLAG, which will be described later, from the VDP 4150c, and performs interrupt processing when the output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG is stopped every 16 ms.

  The liquid crystal control ROM 4150b includes, in addition to various programs for generating a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400, schedule data corresponding to control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4139 and control data (display command). A plurality of corresponding non-resident area transfer schedule data are stored. The schedule data is configured by arranging screen data defining the screen configuration in time series, and the order of screens drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is defined. The non-resident area transfer schedule data is constituted by arranging non-resident area transfer data that defines the order when transferring various data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this non-resident area transfer data, the order of transferring various data from the character ROM 4150d to the non-resident area of the character RAM 4150e in advance is defined for the screen data drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 according to the progress of the schedule data. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the top screen data of the schedule data corresponding to the control data (display command) from the peripheral control board 4139 from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. Then, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts the screen data following the head screen data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b and outputs it to the VDP 4150c. As described above, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a extracts screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data one by one from the head screen data, and outputs the extracted screen data to the VDP 4150c.

  When the screen data output from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is input, the VDP 4150c extracts sprite data from the character RAM 4150e based on the input screen data, and generates drawing data to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400. The generated drawing data is output to the liquid crystal display device 1400. When the VDP 4150c does not accept the screen data from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c outputs a DMA execution signal DMAFLAG to that effect to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The VDP 4150c employs a line buffer method. In this “line buffer system”, drawing data for one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is held in the line buffer, and the drawing data for one line held in this line buffer is stored in the liquid crystal display device 1400. This is the output method.

  The character ROM 4150d stores a very large amount of sprite data and has a large capacity. When the capacity of the character ROM 4150d increases, that is, when the number of sprites drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400 increases, the access speed of the character ROM 4150d cannot be ignored, and the drawing speed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is affected. Therefore, in this embodiment, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred and copied to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed, and the sprite data is extracted from the character RAM 4150e. The sprite data is base data that is data before the sprite is expanded into the bitmap format, and is stored in the character ROM 4150d in a compressed state.

  Here, the “sprite” will be described. The “sprite” is an image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 as a unit. For example, when displaying various persons on the liquid crystal display device 1400, data for drawing each person is referred to as “sprite”. Thus, when a plurality of persons are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, a plurality of sprites are used. In addition to a person, a house, a mountain, a road, and the like constituting the background are also sprites, and the entire background can be a single sprite. These sprites are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 by setting the position on the screen and the vertical relationship when the sprites overlap (hereinafter, referred to as “sprite superposition sequence”). Note that the sprite is configured by bonding a plurality of rectangular regions of 64 pixels vertically and horizontally. Data for drawing this rectangular area is called a “character”. In the case of a small sprite, it can be expressed using one character, and in the case of a relatively large sprite such as a person, for example, it is expressed using a total of 6 characters arranged in 2 × 3 horizontal, for example. be able to. In the case of a larger sprite such as the background, it can be expressed using a larger number of characters. Thus, the number and arrangement of characters can be arbitrarily designated for each sprite.

  The liquid crystal display device 1400 repeats main scanning in which the display state for each pixel is set in one direction along the pixels, and from the left to the right when viewed from the front, and in the direction intersecting with the one direction. It is driven by the sub-scan to be performed. When the drawing data for one line output from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the liquid crystal display device 1400, the main scanning is performed sequentially from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Output to each pixel. When the output for one line is completed, the liquid crystal display device 1400 shifts to a line immediately below as sub-scanning. Similarly, when drawing data for the next line is input, based on the drawing data for the next line. As main scanning, the data are sequentially output to pixels for one line from left to right as viewed from the front of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Note that the liquid crystal display device 1400 incorporates a backlight (cold cathode tube) whose lighting is controlled by the inverter substrate 1411.

[6. Power system]
Next, the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described. First, the power supply board 1136 will be described, and then the power supplied to each control board will be described. FIG. 137 is a block diagram showing a power supply system of a pachinko gaming machine, and FIG. 138 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG.

[6-1. Power supply board]
The power supply board 1136 has a power line connector 1138 electrically connected to a power cord (not shown), and a plug of the power cord is inserted into a power outlet of the pachinko island facility. When the power switch 1137 is operated, the power supplied from the pachinko island facility is supplied to the power supply board 1136, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 can be turned on.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the power supply board 1136 includes a + 34V creation circuit 1136a, a + 18V creation circuit 1136b, and a + 9V creation circuit 1136c. The + 34V creation circuit 1136a rectifies the AC 24 volts (AC24V) supplied from the Pachinko Island facility and describes it as DC + 34V (DC + 34V, hereinafter, “+ 34V.” In this embodiment, the maximum current is 6 amperes (A ). The + 18V creation circuit 1136b creates + 34V by rectifying the AC24V supplied from the Pachinko island facility, and describes the + 34V from the created + 34V (DC + 18V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 18V”. In the present embodiment, the maximum current is described. 4A can flow.) The + 9V creation circuit 1136c creates DC + 9V (DC + 9V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 9V”. In this embodiment, 0.4 A can be passed as the maximum current) from + 18V created by the + 18V creation circuit 1136b. ing. The voltages created by the + 34V creation circuit 1136a, + 18V creation circuit 1136b, and + 9V creation circuit 1136c are supplied to the payout control board 1186. In addition to the + 34V creation circuit 1136a and the + 18V creation circuit 1136b, the AC 24V supplied from the Pachinko island facility is also supplied to the CR unit terminal board 1150a via the power supply board 1136.

  The power supply board 1136 includes capacitors BC0 and BC1. The capacitor BC0 is a backup power source for a RAM (main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100, and the capacitor BC1 is a RAM (built-in payout control) built in the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 1186. RAM). The capacitor BC0, which is a backup power source for the main control built-in RAM, is charged when a voltage generated by a main control series regulator 4100c described later is applied via the main drawer relay board 1107. The voltage thus supplied is supplied to the main control built-in RAM via the main drawer relay board 1107 as the main VBB. The backup power source BC1 of the payout control built-in RAM is charged by applying a voltage created by a payout control series regulator 1186a, which will be described later, and this charged voltage is used as the payout voltage VBB. Is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM.

[6-2. Power supplied to each control board]
Next, the power supplied to each control board will be described. + 34V, + 18V and + 9V supplied from the power supply board 1136 are supplied to the payout control board 1186 and supplied to the main control board 4100 via the main drawer relay board 1107 as shown in FIGS. 137 and 138. . Then, + 34V and + 18V supplied to the main control board 4100 are supplied to the peripheral control board 4139. + 34V and + 18V supplied to the peripheral control board 4139 are supplied to the lamp decoration board 3031 and also to the door decoration drive board 192 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the door relay board 1102. . Further, + 34V supplied to the peripheral control board 4139 is also supplied to the inverter board 1411. + 34V and + 18V supplied to the lamp driving board 3031 are supplied to the motor driving board 3013. Here, the power supplied to the payout control board 1186 will be described first, followed by the power supplied to the main control board 4100, the power supplied to the peripheral control board 4139, the power supplied to the inverter board 1411, and the lamp. The power supplied to the drive board 3031, the power supplied to the motor drive board 3013, and the power supplied to the door decoration drive board 192 will be described.

[6-2-1. Power supplied to dispensing control board]
The payout control board 1186 includes a payout control series regulator 1186a in addition to the payout control MPU 4110a and the like. The payout control series regulator 1186a is supplied with + 9V from the power supply board 1136, and creates a direct current + 5V (DC + 5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 5V”) which is a reference voltage of the payout control board 1186 from the + 9V. ing. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC1 of the power supply board 1136, + 5V is supplied to the payout control MPU 4110a, the payout control I / O port 4110b, the external WDT 4110c, the payout motor drive circuit 4110d, and the firing shown in FIG. It is also supplied to the input circuit 4120a, firing control circuit 4120c, firing motor drive circuit 4120d, etc. of the control unit 4120.

  + 34V from the power supply board 1136 is supplied not only to the payout motor drive circuit 4110d but also to the launch motor drive circuit 4120d, and is used as a drive power source for the payout motor 815 and the fire motor 695 shown in FIG. . In addition to the door frame opening switch 4133, + 18V from the power supply board 1136 is a main body frame opening switch 4134, a full switch 916, a ball break switch 778, a counting switch 812, a rotation angle switch 855, etc. shown in FIG. Has also been supplied.

[6-2-2. Power supplied to main control board]
The main control board 4100 includes a main control series regulator 4100c and a power failure monitoring circuit 4100d in addition to the main control MPU 4100a and the like. The main control series regulator 4100c is supplied with + 9V from the payout control board 1186, and creates + 5V which is the reference voltage of the main control board 4100 from this + 9V. In addition to being supplied to the capacitor BC0 of the power supply board 1136, this + 5V is also supplied to the main control MPU 4100a, the main control I / O port 4100b, etc. shown in FIG. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100d is supplied with + 18V and + 9V from the payout control board 1186, and monitors these + 18V and + 9V power outages or signs of instantaneous power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 4100d receives a radio wave detection signal from the radio wave detection switch 4100e and monitors the radio wave detection signal. The radio wave detection switch 4100e is disposed in the vicinity of the main control series regulator 4100c. When the main control series regulator 4100c is irradiated with a high frequency, the main control series regulator 4100c temporarily stops generating + 5V. It is to detect whether or not.

  When the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d detects the sign of a power failure or a momentary power failure or when a radio wave detection signal is input from the radio wave detection switch 4100e, the power failure warning signal is transmitted as a power failure warning signal to the peripheral control board in addition to the main control MPU 4100a. 4139 and also to the payout control board 1186 via the main drawer relay board 1107. A power failure warning signal is input to the inverter board 1411 via the peripheral control board 4139.

  + 34V from the payout control board 1186 is used as a driving power source for the attacker solenoid 2016, the start-up solenoid 2010, and the like shown in FIG. Note that + 18V from the payout control board 1186 is also supplied to the first start port sensor 3022, the gate sensor 2352, and the like shown in FIG.

  The main control board 4100 includes a live line failure prevention circuit 4100f. First, + 34V, +18, and + 9V from the payout control board 1186 are supplied to the live line failure prevention circuit 4100f. Here, the “live line” means a state in which a current is flowing through the wiring (harness). The hot-wire failure prevention circuit 4100f does not manually turn off the power switch 1137, that is, the state in which the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is kept on (+ 34V, +18 and + 9V created by the power supply board 1136 are paid out) The main drawer relay connector 1200 provided on the main drawer relay board 1107 when the game board 4 is attached to the main body frame 3 while being supplied to the main drawer relay board 1107 via the control board 1186) When + 34V, +18 and + 9V from the payout control board 1186 are supplied toward the main control board 4100 at the moment when the main drawer connector 626 provided on the relay terminal board 625 of the game board 4 comes into contact with the main drawer board 625, Mainly due to a large current temporarily flowing in the contact portion between the drawer relay connector 1200 and the main drawer connector 626 It is a circuit for preventing the welding between the lower relay connector 1200 and the main drawer connector 626.

[6-2-3. Power supplied to the peripheral control board]
The peripheral control board 4139 includes a peripheral control power supply circuit 4139a in addition to the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the peripheral control ROM 4140b, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the VDP 4150c, and the like. The peripheral control power supply circuit 4139a is supplied with + 18V from the main control board 4100. From this + 18V, the reference voltage of the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, the peripheral control ROM 4140b, etc. is + 1.8V (DC + 1.8V, hereinafter referred to as “ + 1.8V ”), the reference voltage of the liquid crystal control substrate 4150, the peripheral control MPU 4140a, etc., is + 3.3V (DC + 3.3V, hereinafter referred to as“ + 3.3V ”), and the VDP 4150c. DC + 1.5V (DC + 1.5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 1.5V”) and DC + 2.5V (DC + 2.5V, hereinafter referred to as “+ 2.5V”), which are power sources, are created. doing. + 3.3V and + 1.8V are also supplied to a bus buffer circuit (not shown). Even if different voltages are supplied to the peripheral control MPU 4140a and the peripheral control ROM 4140b, or different voltages are supplied to the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a and the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, this bus buffer circuit is supplied from the peripheral control MPU 4140a. The peripheral control MPU 4140a and the peripheral control ROM 4140b are interfaced by converting the level of the signal voltage of the + 3.3V system signal to the + 1.8V system signal of the peripheral control ROM 4140b, or the + 3.3V system signal from the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a and the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b are interfaced by converting the level of the signal voltage into a + 1.8V system signal of the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b.

  In addition to the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and the bus buffer circuit, + 3.3V is supplied to the sound source IC 4140C, the VDP 4150c, the liquid crystal drive circuit (not shown) that drives the liquid crystal display device 1400, and the like shown in FIG. . In addition to the peripheral control ROM 4140b and the bus buffer circuit, +1.8 V is supplied to the sound ROM 4140b shown in FIG. + 1.5V is supplied to the character ROM 4150d and the character RAM 4150e shown in FIG. 135 in addition to the VDP 4150c. By supplying + 1.5V, + 2.5V and + 3.3V, the VDP 4150c can directly access the character ROM 4150d and the character RAM 4150e without passing through the bus buffer circuit, and exchanges signals with the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Can also be done directly.

  For example, + 18V from the main control board 4100 is also supplied to an amplification circuit (not shown) that amplifies music, sound effects and the like output from the side speakers 121 and 121 and the lower speaker 391 shown in FIG. Note that + 34V from the main control board 4100 is not used by the peripheral control board 4139 and is supplied as it is to the lamp drive board 3031, the door decoration drive board 192, and the inverter board 1411 via the peripheral control board 4139. .

[6-2-4. Power supplied to inverter board]
The inverter board 1411 includes a cold cathode fluorescent lamp lighting circuit 1411a. The cold cathode fluorescent lamp lighting circuit 1411 a is supplied with + 34V from the peripheral control board 4139 and lights a cold cathode tube which is a backlight of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

[6-2-5. Power supplied to lamp drive board]
The lamp driving substrate 3031 includes a lamp driving side power supply circuit 3031a, a gradation control IC 3031b, an electrical decoration driving circuit group 3031c, and the like. The lamp drive side power supply circuit 3031a receives + 18V from the peripheral control board 4139, and creates + 3.3V which is the reference voltage of the lamp drive board 3031 from + 18V. This + 3.3V is supplied to the gradation control IC 3031b and the like. The gradation control IC 3031b is an IC that turns on, blinks, and gradations the color LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the game board 4. + 18V from the peripheral control board 4139 is supplied to the electrical drive circuit group 3031c. This electrical decoration drive circuit group 3031c drives the color LEDs in accordance with the lighting signal, the blinking signal, and the gradation lighting signal from the gradation control IC 3031b. Note that + 34V from the peripheral control board 4139 is not used in the lamp driving board 3031 but is supplied to the motor driving board 3013 as it is via the lamp driving board 3031.

[6-2-6. Power supplied to motor drive board]
The motor drive board 3013 includes a motor drive side power supply circuit 3013a, a game board side motor drive circuit group 3013b, a serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c, and the like. The motor drive side power supply circuit 3013a is supplied with + 18V from the lamp drive board 3031 and creates + 3.3V which is the reference voltage of the motor drive board 3013 from this + 18V. This + 3.3V is supplied to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c and the like. The serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c is constituted by a so-called “daisy chain connection” in which a plurality of serial / parallel conversion ICs for converting received serial data to parallel data are connected in a daisy chain. Side motors (rotary decorative body drive motor 3106, lift drive motor 3160, swing drive motor 3212, ceiling drive motor 3312, character body drive motor 3418, right arm drive motor 3472, and gear drive motor 3514), and game board side solenoid ( Serial data (game board side motor drive data SM-DAT (see FIG. 144)) for outputting drive signals to the lock solenoid 3127 and the head solenoid 3455) is converted into parallel data. + 34V from the lamp drive board 3031 is supplied to the game board side solenoid drive circuit 3013d (see FIG. 144) in addition to the game board side motor drive circuit group 3013b. The game board side motor drive circuit group 3013b includes a rotary decoration body drive motor 3106, a lift drive motor 3160, a swing drive motor 3212, a ceiling drive motor 3312, a character body drive motor 3418, according to drive signals from the serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c. The right arm drive motor 3472 and the gear drive motor 3514 are driven. The game board side solenoid drive circuit 3013d drives the lock solenoid 3127 and the head solenoid 3455 in accordance with the drive signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c. It is.

[6-2-7. Power supplied to door decoration drive board]
The door decoration drive board 192 includes a door decoration drive side power supply circuit 192a, a game board side motor drive circuit group 192b, a door side serial transmission circuit 192c, a serial parallel conversion IC group 192d, and the like. The door side drive side power supply circuit 192a is supplied with + 18V from the peripheral control board 4139 via the sub drawer relay board 1108 and the door relay board 1102, and from this + 18V, the reference voltage of the door decoration drive board 192 is +3. .3V is created. This +3.3 V is supplied to the door side serial transmission circuit 192c, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d, and the like. The door-side serial transmission circuit 192c includes a detection signal LB-SEN from the left sub-button sensor 377L that detects the operation of the left sub-button 372L provided in the operation button unit 370, and the right that detects the operation of the right sub-button 372R. The detection signal RB-SEN from the sub button sensor 377R and the detection signal CB-SEN from the main button sensor 376 for detecting the operation of the main button 371 are serialized as button operation detection data TS-DAT (see FIG. 140). , The signal is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4139 via the door relay board 1102 and the sub drawer relay board 1108. The serial-parallel conversion IC group 192d is configured by daisy chaining a plurality of serial-parallel conversion ICs for converting received serial data into parallel data. To output drive signals to the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which is a door side motor, in the ST-DAT (see FIG. 140). The rotating lamp motor drive data and the vibrator drive data for outputting a drive signal of the main button 371 to the vibrator 371c are converted into parallel data. + 34V and + 18V from the lamp drive board 3031 are supplied to the door side motor drive circuit group 192b. This door side motor drive circuit group 192b drives the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, the central rotating lamp motor 285, and the vibrating body 371c in accordance with the driving signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d.

[7. Peripheral control MPU]
Next, the peripheral control MPU 4140a which is a microcomputer mounted on the peripheral control board 4139 will be described. FIG. 139 is a block diagram showing an outline of the peripheral control MPU.

  As shown in FIG. 139, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is configured around a peripheral control CPU core 4140aa, and includes a peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab, a peripheral control DMA (abbreviation of Direct Memory Access) controller 4140ac, and peripheral control various serial I / O. A port 4140ae, a peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af, peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4140ag, and the like are connected to each other through a bus 4140ah.

  The peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab is provided with a lamp driving board side transmission data area 4140ab, a door decoration driving board side transmission data area 4140abb, and a motor driving board side transmission data area 4140abc. Is a memory in which game board side light emission data SL-DAT (see FIG. 143) for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 is set. In the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb, the drive to the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, and the central rotation lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which is a door side motor, is provided. Rotating lamp motor drive data for outputting a signal and vibration of the main button 371 From vibration body drive data for outputting a drive signal to 371c and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to various color LEDs provided on the door side The door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT (see FIG. 140) to be configured is a storage area, and the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc has a center frame motor 2352, which is a game board side motor, In a storage area where game board side motor drive data SM-DAT (see FIG. 144) for outputting drive signals to the left motor 3110, the right motor 3210, the lower motor 3310, the upper left motor 3410, and the upper right motor 3510 is set. is there.

  The lamp driving board side transmission data area 4140ab, the door decoration driving board side transmission data area 4140abb, and the motor driving board side transmission data area 4140abc are each divided into two areas, a first area and a second area. In the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba, when a peripheral control unit 16ms steady process described later is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is stored in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba, When the next peripheral control unit 16ms steady process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is stored in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba, and the peripheral control part 16ms steady state is stored. Each time the process is executed, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is alternately stored in the first area and the second area of the lamp driving board side transmission data area 4140aba. For example, when the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is stored in the second area of the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba in the current peripheral control part 16ms steady process, When the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the first area of the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba.

  The door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb has door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT in the first area of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb when a peripheral control unit 2ms steady process described later is executed. When the next peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process is executed, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is stored in the second area of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb. Each time the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process is executed, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is alternately stored in the first area and the second area of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb. For example, when the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is stored in the second area of the door decoration drive board-side transmission data area 4140abb in the current peripheral control part 2ms steady process, When the previous peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT stored in the first area of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb. ing.

  In the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc, when the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is stored in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc. When the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is stored in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc. Each time the process is executed, the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT are alternately stored in the first area and the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc. For example, when the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is stored in the second area of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc in the current peripheral control part 2ms steady process, When the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process is executed, the process proceeds based on the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the first area of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc. .

  The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is a dedicated controller for independently transferring data without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa, and in this embodiment, the game board set in the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba Side light emission data SL-DAT, door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT set in the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb, and game board side motor drive data SM set in the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc -Control is performed to output DAT from various peripheral control serial I / O ports 4140ae without going through the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac has four channels, DMA0 to DMA3.

  The peripheral control various serial I / O ports 4140ae are independently controlled by the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac without directly passing through the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa, and the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board and the serial for the motor driving board In addition to the I / O port and the door decoration drive board serial I / O port, the liquid crystal controller serial I / O port directly controlled by the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa and the button operation detection serial I / O port have.

  The peripheral control various parallel I / O ports 4140ag include a game board side motor drive latch signal SM-LAT (see FIG. 143), a door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT (see FIG. 140), and a sound extracted from the sound ROM 4140d. While outputting the control signal (sound command) etc. which show information, the left rotation position detection sensor 250 which detects the rotation position of the rotation lamps 244,264,284 of the door frame 5, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, the center rotation position detection Detection signals LT-SEN, RT-SEN, CT-SEN (see FIG. 140) from the sensor 290, the character body 2351, the left movable body 3120, the right movable body 3220, the lower movable body 3320, and the upper left movable body 3420 of the game board 4. , Position detection sensors 2353, 3130, 3230, 3330, 343 for detecting the movable position of the upper right movable body 3520. , 3530 detection signals IN1-SEN to IN6-SEN (see FIG. 143 and FIG. 144), and a signal indicating that the power supply air cooling fan 1502 for air cooling the power supply board 1136 is operating normally, liquid crystal control A signal (operation signal) indicating that the unit 4150 is operating normally is input.

  Peripheral control built-in watchdog timer (peripheral control built-in WDT) 4140af is a timer for monitoring whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is running out of control. It has become. In other words, when the watchdog timer is started, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa resets if it does not output a clear signal for clearing the timer to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af within a certain period (until the timer expires). Will take. When the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa starts the watchdog timer and outputs a clear signal to the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af within a certain period, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa can restart the timer count, so that it is not reset.

[8. Electrical connection of various boards in the door frame and serial data captured by each board]
Next, electrical connection from the peripheral control board 4410 provided in the game board 4 to various boards provided in the door frame 5 and serial data from the peripheral control board 4139 taken in by various boards provided in the door frame 5 will be described. To do. FIG. 140 is a block diagram showing electrical connections from the peripheral control board provided in the game board to the door decoration drive board provided in the door frame, and FIG. 141 is a plate unit and left side speaker illumination unit from the door decoration drive board. And it is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection to a glass unit, FIG. 142 is a block diagram which shows the electrical connection from a glass unit to a top lamp electrical decoration unit and a right side speaker electrical decoration unit.

[8-1. Electrical connection of various substrates in the door frame]
First, electrical connection from the peripheral control board 4139 provided in the game board 4 to the door decoration drive board 192 provided in the door frame 5 will be briefly described. By attaching the game board 4 to the main body frame 3, A board between the control board 4139 and the sub drawer relay board 1108 provided in the frame board holder 1101 of the board unit 1100 shown in FIG. 85 is electrically connected. The sub-drawer relay board 1108 and the board of the door relay board 1102 provided in the frame board holder 1101 are electrically connected via a harness, and the board of the door relay board 1102 and the door decoration drive board 192 is connected. 85, the wiring opening 1124 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 shown in FIG. 85, and the wiring opening 537 formed in the main body frame 5 shown in FIG. It has become so.

  Next, the electrical connection between the door decoration drive board 192 and other boards provided in the door frame 5 will be briefly described. As shown in FIGS. 140 to 142, the door decoration drive board 192 and the dish unit 300 are provided. The board with the saucer relay board 190 is electrically connected via a harness, and the side decoration board 126 (hereinafter referred to as “left side decoration board 126L”) included in the saucer relay board 190 and the left side speaker illumination unit 120L. The board between the left side decorative board 126L and the glass decorative relay board 454 included in the glass unit 450 is electrically connected via the harness. The top of the left side of the pachinko gaming machine 1 connected to the glass decoration relay board 454 and the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 when viewed from the front. The board with the amplifier board 126 (hereinafter referred to as “left top lamp board 206L”) is electrically connected via a harness, and the pachinko gaming machine 1 provided in the same unit as the left top lamp board 206L. The right top lamp board 206 (hereinafter referred to as “right top lamp board 206R”) as viewed from the front is electrically connected to the right top lamp board 260R and the right side via a harness. The board | substrate with the side decoration board 126 (henceforth "right side decoration board 126R") with which the speaker electrical decoration unit 120R is equipped is electrically connected via the harness.

[8-2. Serial data captured by each board]
[8-2-1. Serial data captured by door decoration drive board]
Next, serial data captured by the door decoration drive board 192 will be described. As shown in FIG. 140, the door decoration drive board 192 includes a door-side motor drive circuit group 192b, a serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d, and the like. The door-side motor drive circuit group 192b includes a door-side motor drive circuit 192ba that drives the left rotation lamp motor 245 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, and a door-side motor drive circuit 192bb that drives the right rotation lamp motor 265 of the unit. The door side motor drive circuit 192bc for driving the central rotary lamp motor 285 of the unit and the door side motor drive circuit 192bd for driving the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371 are provided. The serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d is configured by daisy chain connection in which 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs 192da and 192db are electrically connected in a daisy chain, and the serial / parallel conversion IC 192da drives the left rotating lamp motor 245. The drive signal to the door side motor drive circuit 192ba is assigned 4 bits, the drive signal to the door side motor drive circuit 192bb that drives the right turn lamp motor 265 and 4 bits are assigned, and the serial / parallel conversion IC 192db is assigned to the central turn lamp motor 285. 4 bits are assigned as a drive signal to the door side motor drive circuit 192bc for driving the motor, and 1 bit is assigned as a drive signal to the door side motor drive circuit 192bd for driving the vibrating body 371c.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC 192da synchronizes the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, which is serial data from the peripheral control board 4139, with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the peripheral control board 4139, One bit is taken into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC 192db of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, thereby being built in the serial / parallel conversion IC 192db. One bit is taken into an 8-bit shift register.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs 192da and 192db receive the door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the peripheral control board 4139, and receive the serial data (door-side motor drive) taken in the built-in 8-bit shift register. Rotating lamp motor driving data for outputting driving signals to the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which constitute the light emission data ST-DAT, Vibration data for outputting a drive signal of the main button 371 to the vibration body 371c) is converted into parallel data, and the serial / parallel conversion IC 192da outputs a drive signal to the door side motor drive circuits 192ba and 192bb. Serial parallel conversion IC 192db is on the door side It outputs a drive signal to the over motor drive circuit 192Bb. Thereby, the door side motor drive circuit 192ba can drive the left rotation lamp motor 245 and the right rotation lamp motor 265 according to the drive signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC 192da, and the door side motor drive circuit 192bb can convert the serial / parallel conversion. The central rotary lamp motor 285 and the vibrating body 371c can be driven in accordance with a drive signal from the IC 192db.

  Note that the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the final-stage serial / parallel conversion IC 192db, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is synchronized with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. It is transmitted to the saucer relay board 190 via a harness that electrically connects the drive board 192 and the saucer relay board 190 provided in the dish unit 300, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST− from the peripheral control board 4139. The LAT is transmitted to the tray relay board 190 via the harness. Further, + 18V from the peripheral control board 4139 is supplied from the door decoration drive board 192 to the tray relay board 190 via its harness, and is provided in the top lamp electrical decoration unit 200 from the door decoration drive board 192 via the power harness. It is supplied to the top lamp power supply device 205.

[8-2-2. Serial data captured by the tray relay board]
Next, serial data captured by the tray relay board 190 will be described. As shown in FIG. 141, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the door decoration drive board 192 The data is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC group 190 a included in 190. This serial-parallel conversion IC group 190a has the same configuration as the serial-parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and a daisy circuit in which a plurality of 8-bit serial-parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In the present embodiment, the dish unit 300 is provided with six color LEDs 336a on the dish unit main body 320 and five color LEDs 375a on the operation button unit 370, and a total of eleven systems ( = 6 systems of plate unit main body 320 +5 systems of operation button unit 370), the serial-parallel conversion IC group 190a is configured to have two 8-bit serial-parallel conversion ICs.

  The first serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a receives the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the door decoration drive board 192 and the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the door decoration drive board 192. In synchronism with each other, the data is fetched bit by bit into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. One bit is taken into the shift register.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 190a are serials captured in a built-in 8-bit shift register when the door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the door decoration drive board 192. Data (door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs 336a and 375a constituting the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT) is converted into parallel data, and is illuminated. A lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the drive circuit group 192b. As a result, the illumination drive circuit group 192b causes the color LED 336a of the plate unit main body 320 and the color LED 375a of the operation button unit 370 according to the lighting signal, the flashing signal, or the gradation lighting signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a. Can be turned on, blinked, or lit in gradation. The electrical decoration drive circuit group 192b uses + 18V supplied from the door decoration drive board 192 as a light emission power source for the color LED 336a of the plate unit main body 320 and the color LED 375a of the operation button unit 370. The + 3.3V reference voltage of the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion IC 192db at the final stage in the serial-parallel conversion IC group 192d provided on the door decoration drive board 192, that is, door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is relayed. Since it is inputted to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 190a provided on the substrate 190, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d provided on the door decoration drive substrate 192 and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided on the saucer relay substrate 190 are provided. And, it is configured to be connected in a daisy chain by being electrically connected in a daisy chain.

  Note that the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the last serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a, that is, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Synchronously with the receiving tray relay board 190 and the left side decoration board 126L provided in the left side speaker electrical decoration unit 120L, it is transmitted to the left side decoration board 126L via a harness that electrically connects the boards, and the receiving tray relay board The door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from 190 is transmitted to the left side decorative board 126L via the harness. Further, + 18V from the door decoration drive board 192 is supplied from the tray relay board 190 to the left side decoration board 126L via the harness.

[8-2-3. Serial data captured by the left side decorative board]
Next, serial data captured by the left side decorative board 126L will be described. As shown in FIG. 141, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the tray relay board 190 The data is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La included in 126L. This serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and a daisy circuit in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In the present embodiment, the left side speaker illumination unit 120L is provided with 13 systems of color LEDs 126a, white LEDs 126b, and flashlights 129a in the illumination unit 122. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion IC group 126La has an 8-bit configuration. It is configured to have two serial / parallel conversion ICs.

  The first serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La synchronizes the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the tray relay board 190 with the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the tray relay board 190. Then, one bit is taken into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. One bit is taken into the shift register.

  The serial / parallel conversion ICs of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La are the serial data captured in the built-in 8-bit shift register when the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the tray relay board 190. (Door side light emission data for outputting lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal for color LED 126a, white LED 126b and flashlight 129a constituting door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT) is converted into parallel data Then, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the illumination driving circuit group 126Lb. Thereby, the illumination drive circuit group 126Lb controls the color LED 126a, the white LED 126b, and the flashlight 129a of the illumination unit 122 according to the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La. It can be lit, flashing, or lit in gradation. The illumination drive circuit group 126Lb uses + 18V supplied from the tray relay board 190 as a light emission power source for the color LED 126a, the white LED 126b, and the flashlight 129a of the illumination unit 122. A reference voltage of +3.3 V, which is a reference voltage of the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La, is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the last serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided on the tray relay board 190, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the left side decoration. Since it is inputted to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 126La provided on the board 126L, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided on the tray relay board 190 and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La provided on the left side decorative board 126L. And, it is configured to be connected in a daisy chain by being electrically connected in a daisy chain.

  The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion IC in the final stage of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 126La, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Synchronously with the left side decoration board 126L and the glass decoration relay board 454 provided in the glass unit 450, the harness is electrically connected to the glass decoration relay board 454 and transmitted from the left side decoration board 126L. The door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is transmitted to the glass decorative relay board 454 via the harness. Further, + 18V from the tray relay board 190 is supplied from the left side decorative board 126L to the glass decorative relay board 454 via its harness.

[8-2-4. Serial data captured by glass decorative relay board]
Next, serial data captured by the glass decoration relay board 454 will be described. As shown in FIG. 141, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the left side decorative board 126L The data is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454 a provided on the substrate 454. This serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and a daisy chain in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In the present embodiment, since the glass unit 450 is provided with six color LEDs 453a in the unit frame 451, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a is configured to have one 8-bit serial / parallel conversion IC. ing.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a receives the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the left side decorative board 126L and the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the left side decorative board 126L. In synchronism with each other, the data is fetched bit by bit into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. One bit is taken into the shift register.

  The serial / parallel conversion ICs of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a are serial data captured in a built-in 8-bit shift register when the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the tray relay board 190. (Door-side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED 453a constituting the door-side motor driving light emission data ST-DAT) is converted into parallel data, and an electric decoration drive circuit group A lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to 454b. Thereby, the illumination driving circuit group 454b lights or blinks the color LED 453a of the unit frame 451 according to the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal from the serial parallel conversion IC of the serial parallel conversion IC group 454a. The gradation can be lit. The electrical decoration drive circuit group 454b uses + 18V supplied from the left side decorative board 126L as a power source for light emission of the color LED 453a of the unit frame 451. +3.3 V, which is the reference voltage of the serial / parallel conversion ICs in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a, is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the final serial-parallel conversion IC in the serial-parallel conversion IC group 126La provided on the left side decorative board 126L, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the glass decoration. Since it is input to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 454a provided on the relay board 454, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La provided on the left side decoration board 126L and the serial / parallel conversion IC provided on the glass decoration relay board 454 The group 454a is electrically connected in a daisy chain and is daisy chain connected.

  The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial-parallel conversion IC in the final stage of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 454a, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Synchronously with the glass decoration relay board 454 and the left top lamp board 206L provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200, a harness that electrically connects the boards is transmitted to the left top lamp board 206L to transmit the glass decoration relay. A door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the board 454 is transmitted to the left top lamp board 206L via the harness. Further, + 18V from the left side decorative board 126L is supplied from the glass decorative relay board 454 to the left top lamp board 206L via the harness.

[8-2-5. Serial data captured by the left top lamp board]
Next, serial data captured by the left top lamp substrate 206L will be described. As shown in FIG. 142, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the glass decorative relay board 454 are left top lamps. The data is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on the substrate 206L. The serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and a daisy chain in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In this embodiment, the top lamp illumination unit 200 is provided with 18 color LEDs 224a, 226a, and 231a in the top lamp reflector unit 220. Therefore, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La has an 8-bit serial / parallel conversion. It is configured to have three ICs.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La includes the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the glass decoration relay board 454 and the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the glass relay board 454. In synchronism, one bit is taken into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the next-stage middle serial-parallel conversion IC in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Each bit is taken into the register, and every time one bit is taken in, the fetched serial data is shifted one bit at a time and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is emitted from the door side motor drive light. In synchronization with the clock signal ST-CLK, it is input to the final serial-parallel conversion IC, which is the next stage, so that it is fetched bit by bit into its built-in 8-bit shift register.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 206La are serials captured in the built-in 8-bit shift register when the door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the glass decoration relay board 454. Data (door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the color LEDs 224a, 226a, 231a constituting the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT) is converted into parallel data, A lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the illumination driving circuit group 206Lb. As a result, the illumination drive circuit group 206Lb lights the color LEDs 224a, 226a, and 231a of the top lamp reflector unit 220 according to the lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal from the serial / parallel conversion ICs of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La. , Flashing, and gradation lighting. The illumination drive circuit group 206Lb uses + 18V supplied from the glass decoration relay substrate 454 as a light emission power source for the color LEDs 224a, 226a, 231a of the top lamp reflector unit 220. The reference voltage + 3.3V of the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the last serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on the glass decorative relay substrate 454, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the left top. Since it is input to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 206La provided on the lamp board 206L, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on the glass decoration relay board 454 and the serial / parallel conversion IC provided on the left top lamp board 206L. The group 206La is configured to be connected in a daisy chain by being electrically connected in a daisy chain.

  The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the last serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La, that is, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. In synchronization with the left top lamp board 206L and the right top lamp board 206R provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200, the right top lamp board 206R is transmitted to the right top lamp board 206R via a harness to electrically connect the left top lamp board 206R and the left top lamp board 206R. A door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the board 206L is transmitted to the right top lamp board 206R via the harness. Further, + 18V from the glass decorative relay board 454 is supplied from the left top lamp board 206L to the right top lamp board 206R via the harness.

[8-2-6. Serial data captured by the right top lamp board]
Next, serial data captured by the right top lamp substrate 206R will be described. As shown in FIG. 142, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the left top lamp board 206L The data is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra included in the substrate 206R. This serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and is a daisy circuit in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In the present embodiment, the top lamp illumination unit 200 includes, in addition to the above-described top lamp reflector unit, 18 LEDs 224a, 226a, 231a, the left rotating lamp unit 240, three color LEDs 248a, and a right rotating lamp unit. Since 260 color LEDs 268a and 6 color LEDs 288a and 296a are provided in the central rotary lamp unit 280, a total of 12 color LEDs are provided, so the serial-parallel conversion IC group 206Ra is an 8-bit serial LED. It is configured to have two parallel conversion ICs.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra includes the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the left top lamp substrate 206L and the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the left top lamp substrate 206L. In synchronism with each other, the data is fetched bit by bit into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. One bit is taken into the shift register.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 206Ra are serials captured in the built-in 8-bit shift register when the door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the left top lamp board 206L. Data (door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to color LEDs 248a, 268a, 288a, and 296a constituting door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT) is converted into parallel data. Then, a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the illumination driving circuit group 206Rb. As a result, the illumination drive circuit group 206Rb causes the color LED 248a of the left rotation lamp unit 240 and the right rotation lamp unit 260 of the right rotation lamp unit 260 in accordance with the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra. The color LEDs 268a and the color LEDs 288a and 296a of the central rotary lamp unit 280 can be turned on, blinked, or lit in gradation. The illumination drive circuit group 206Rb supplies + 18V supplied from the left top lamp board 206L to the color LED 248a of the left rotating lamp unit 240, the color LED 268a of the right rotating lamp unit 260, and the color LEDs 288a and 296a of the central rotating lamp unit 280. The light source is used for light emission. The +3.3 V reference voltage of the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the last serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on the left top lamp substrate 206L, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the right top. Since it is inputted to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 206Ra provided on the lamp board 206R, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on the left top lamp board 206L and the serial / parallel conversion IC provided on the right top lamp board 206R. The group 206Ra is electrically connected in a daisy chain and is daisy chain connected.

  The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the serial / parallel conversion IC in the final stage of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra, that is, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. In synchronization with the right top lamp board 206R and the right side decorative board 126R provided to the right side speaker electrical decoration unit 120R, the right side decorative board 126R is transmitted to the right side decorative board 126R via a harness that electrically connects the boards. A door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the lamp board 206R is transmitted to the right side decorative board 126R via the harness. Further, + 18V from the left top lamp substrate 206L is supplied from the right top lamp substrate 206R to the right side decorative substrate 126R via the harness.

[8-2-7. Serial data captured by the right side decorative board]
Next, serial data captured by the right side decorative board 126R will be described. The door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT from the right top lamp board 206R are shown in FIG. The signal is input to the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra included in the substrate 126R. This serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and a daisy chain in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. It is configured by chain connection. In the present embodiment, the right side speaker illumination unit 120R is provided with 13 systems of color LEDs 126a, white LEDs 126b, and flashlights 129a in the illumination unit 122. Therefore, the serial-parallel conversion IC group 126La has an 8-bit configuration. It is configured to have two serial / parallel conversion ICs.

  The first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra receives the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT from the right top lamp board 206R and the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the right top lamp board 206R. In synchronism with each other, the data is fetched bit by bit into the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC of the final stage, which is the next stage, in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. One bit is taken into the shift register.

  The serial-parallel conversion ICs of the serial-parallel conversion IC group 126Ra are serials that are captured in a built-in 8-bit shift register when the door-side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT is input from the right top lamp board 206R. Data (door-side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to the color LED 126a, white LED 126b and flashlight 129a constituting the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT) as parallel data Conversion is performed, and a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal is output to the illumination driving circuit group 126Rb. Thereby, the illumination drive circuit group 126Rb controls the color LED 126a, the white LED 126b, and the flashlight 129a of the illumination unit 122 according to the lighting signal, the blinking signal, or the gradation lighting signal from the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra. It can be lit, flashing, or lit in gradation. The illumination drive circuit group 126Rb uses + 18V supplied from the right top lamp substrate 206R as a light emission power source for the color LED 126a, the white LED 126b, and the flashlight 129a of the illumination unit 122. The reference voltage + 3.3V of the serial / parallel conversion IC of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra is supplied from the top lamp power supply board 205 provided in the top lamp illumination unit 200.

  As described above, the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal of the final serial-parallel conversion IC in the serial-parallel conversion IC group 206Ra provided on the right top lamp substrate 206R, that is, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is displayed on the right side. Since it is inputted to the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial conversion IC group 126Ra provided on the decorative board 126R, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra provided on the right top lamp board 206R and the serial / parallel conversion IC provided on the right side decorative board 126R. The group 126Ra is electrically connected in a daisy chain connection and connected in a daisy chain.

  In this embodiment, as described above, (1) the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d provided on the door decoration drive board 192 and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided on the tray relay board 190 are electrically connected in a daisy chain. (2) The serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided on the saucer relay board 190 and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La provided on the left side decorative board 126L are electrically connected in a daisy chain. (3) The serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La provided on the left side decorative board 126L and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on the glass decorative relay board 454 are: Connected daisy chain and connected daisy chain (4) The serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on the glass decorative relay board 454 and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on the left top lamp board 206L are electrically connected in a daisy chain and daisy-chained. (5) The serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La included in the left top lamp substrate 206L and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra included in the right top lamp substrate 206R are electrically connected in a daisy chain. (6) a serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra included in the right top lamp substrate 206R, and a serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra included in the right side decorative substrate 126R; Is electrically connected to a daisy chain The serial-parallel conversion IC group 192d provided in the tray relay board 190, the serial-parallel conversion provided in the left side decoration board 126L, from the serial-parallel conversion IC group 192d provided in the door decoration drive board 192, depending on the configuration of the easy chain connection. Conversion IC group 126La, serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on the glass decorative relay board 454, serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on the left top lamp board 206L, serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra provided on the right top lamp board 206R, and right The serial-parallel conversion IC group 126Ra provided on the side decorative board 126R is electrically connected in a daisy chain in this order and is daisy chain connected.

  Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4139 is the board farthest from the peripheral control board 4139 when performing serial communication of the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT to the door decoration drive board 192 provided in the door frame 5. The door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is created so that the serial parallel conversion IC group 192d provided in the door decoration drive board 192 which is the closest board to the serial parallel conversion IC group 126Ra provided in the right side decoration board 126R is in the order. I'm waiting. Specifically, the peripheral control MPU 4140a includes the door side light emission data for the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra provided in the right side decorative board 126R, the door side light emission data for the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra provided in the right top lamp board 206R, Door side light emission data for serial parallel conversion IC group 206La provided on left top lamp board 206L, door side light emission data for serial parallel conversion IC group 454a provided on glass decoration relay board 454, serial parallel conversion provided on left side decoration board 126L Door side light emission data for the IC group 126La, door side light emission data for the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided in the tray relay board 190, and vibrator driving data for the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d provided in the door decoration drive board 192, and Revolving light motor Dynamic data, are creating a door-side motor driving the light emission data ST-DAT in the order of.

  Further, as described above, two 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are provided in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d provided in the door decoration drive board 192, two are provided in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 190a provided in the tray relay board 190, and left Two in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126La provided in the side decorative board 126L, one in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 454a provided in the glass decorative relay board 454, and three in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206La provided in the left top lamp board 206L, Since there are two in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 206Ra included in the right top lamp substrate 206R and two in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra included in the right side decorative substrate 126R, the total number is 14. As a result, the bit length of the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, which is serial data, becomes 112 bits (= 14 × 8 bits). Therefore, when serial communication is performed from the peripheral control board 4139 to various boards connected to the daisy chain provided in the door frame 5, the bit rate of the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK is set to 100 kbps as described above. Since it is set, the time for completing transmission of all door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is 1.12 milliseconds (ms) (= 112 ÷ 100 kbps).

  Rotating lamp motor driving for outputting driving signals to the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200 in the door side motor driving light emission data ST-DAT. Data and vibration body drive data for outputting a drive signal to the vibration body 371c of the main button 371. For example, the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, and the central rotation lamp are included. In some cases, the motor 285 is rotated at a high speed, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4139 outputs a door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT in a peripheral control unit 2ms steady process described later. That is, every time 2 ms elapses, a pulse for driving the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 is generated by the door side motor driving light emission latch signal ST-LAT. When the pulse width becomes 2 ms, the left rotating lamp motor 245, the right rotating lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 reach the maximum rotation speed.

  As described above, the rotation speed control of the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, and the central rotation lamp motor 285 is performed in the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Within the period of 2 ms, transmission of door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT must be completed in synchronization with the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. However, as described above, it takes 1.12 milliseconds (ms) to complete the transmission of the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT. Therefore, if the process is performed in the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process, 2 ms 56% (= 1.12 ms / 2 ms × 100). That is, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. 139 directly controls the door decoration drive board serial I / O port and waits until all door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is transmitted. In this state, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa spends 56% of the time taken from the start of transmission of the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT to the completion of transmission, that is, 56% of 2ms. There isn't enough time to do the other processing inside.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the door decoration drive board serial I / O port continuous transmission is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is a function of transferring data independently without using the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa, that is, each time a transfer request is generated, one transfer source data (1 byte) is transferred to the bus 4140af. The data is transferred to the transfer destination via Although the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac and the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa use the same bus 4140ah shown in FIG. 139, the bus use right of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is more than the bus use right of the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa. If the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa does not use the bus 4140af, when the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac uses the bus 4140af, the bus by the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is used until the use ends. The use of 4140af is prioritized. Such a method is called a “cycle steel method”. In the present embodiment, by adopting this cycle steal method, the operation from the generation of a transfer request to the completion of 8-bit data transfer can be performed at high speed.

  By adopting such a cycle steal method, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac uses the bus 4140ah to decorate the door of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab shown in FIG. 139 via the bus 4140ah every time a transfer request is generated. Transfer 1 data (1 byte) of the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT set in the drive board side transmission data area 4140abb to the transmission buffer of the door decoration drive board serial I / O port as the transfer destination. Write. Specifically, first, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa sends the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT having a 112-bit length (having 14 bytes) to the door of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab via the bus 4140ah. The decorative drive board side transmission data area 4140abb is set. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa designates transmission of the door decoration drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac and stores the door side stored in the head address of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb. The first byte of the motor drive light emission data ST-DAT (that is, the door side light emission data for the serial / parallel conversion IC in the final stage of the serial / parallel conversion IC group 126Ra provided in the right side decorative board 126R) is used as the bus. Via 4140ah, the data is transferred to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for door decoration drive board and written. The door decoration drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and synchronizes with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Start transmission bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the door I / O port serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer for the door I / O port serial I / O port). 1 byte data written to the transfer register is transferred to the transmission register, and the transmission buffer becomes empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa is using the bus 4140ah. If not, the remaining 13 bytes of door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT stored in the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb are sent byte by byte via the bus 4140ah to the serial I / O for the door decoration drive board. Serial I / O port for door decoration drive board by transferring to port transmission buffer and writing The controller transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and starts transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the drive board. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac sends all the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT stored in the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb to the door decoration drive board serial I / O via the bus 4140ah. When the transfer to the port transmission buffer is completed, the bus use right of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is returned to the bus use right of the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In this embodiment, although the bus use time of 4 cycles is required to set the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac by the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa, the bus use time of 4 cycles is the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Since the frequency of the external clock input to is 22 megahertz (MHz), it is about 182 (= 4 cycles ÷ 22 MHz) nanoseconds (ns). Thus, unlike the case where the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa directly controls the serial I / O port for the door decoration drive board as described above, in the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process, about 182 ns of this 2 ms is about The bus 4140ah is used at an extremely low rate of 9% (= 182 ns / 2 ms × 100), and sufficient time can be secured for performing other processing within 2 ms. Further, as described above, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa drives the door-side motor-driven emission data ST-DAT having a 112-bit length (having 14 bytes) via the bus 4140ah to the door decoration drive of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab. After the board side transmission data area 4140abb is set, the remaining 13 bytes of the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT are byte by byte, that is, 13 times, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac drives the door decoration via the bus 4140ah. Since the data is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the board serial I / O port, the usage time of the bus 4140ah by the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac in the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the door decoration driving board is about 2.37 ( = About 182 ns × 13 times) microsecond (μ s). That is, this time of about 2.37 μs is a state in which the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa directly controls the door decoration drive board serial I / O port and waits until all door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is transmitted. Compared to the time (1.12 ms) from the start of transmission of the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT to the completion of transmission in FIG.

  Further, in this embodiment, since the peripheral control board 4139 provided in the game board 4 and the door decoration drive board 192 provided in the door frame 5 are serially transferred between the boards, the peripheral control board 4139 Various control signals to the dish unit 300, the left side speaker illumination unit 120L, the glass unit 450, the top lamp illumination unit 200, and the right side speaker illumination unit 120R provided in the door frame 5 are individually supplied via a harness. Compared with the case of transmission, the number of harnesses passed through the wiring opening 1124 formed in the frame substrate holder 1101 shown in FIG. 85 and the wiring opening 537 formed in the main body frame 5 shown in FIG. Can be extremely reduced. When the door frame 5 is opened from the main body frame 3 and closed again, the harness is forced to be pushed in from the pulled out state to be bent and a reaction force is generated by the harness. The reaction force is also suppressed by the extremely small number of harnesses. Therefore, when the door frame 5 is gradually heavier when the door frame 5 is closed to the main body frame 3, an operator such as a clerk in the hall There is no feeling. Further, since the number of harnesses is extremely reduced (in this embodiment, the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and the door side motor drive light emission latch signal ST-LAT). 3), because the harness is hidden behind other harnesses so that it is not difficult to see, the workers such as the hall clerk should be able to position each harness so that each harness is not sandwiched between the door frame 5 and the body frame 3. The door frame 5 can be closed to the main body frame 3 while confirming the above. Therefore, it is possible to prevent each harness from being disconnected between the door frame 5 and the main body frame 3.

  By the way, with respect to the door decoration drive board 192, each of the receiving tray relay board 190, the left side decoration board 126L, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side decoration board 126R. In the case of being electrically connected individually via the harness, the harness from each board concentrates on the door decoration drive board 192, so that a plurality of harnesses enter the disorder around the door decoration drive board 192, Even if the harness is viewed, it is difficult to immediately determine which board is electrically connected to the door decoration drive board 192. Further, it is necessary to provide a space for routing the harness extending from each board to the door decoration drive board 192 in the door frame 5, but in a portion where a plurality of harnesses are bundled, if the space is formed too large, it is shown in FIG. In addition, the outer shape of the gaming window 101 in which the player can visually recognize the gaming area 605 is reduced and covers a part of the outer periphery of the gaming area 605. In other words, if a plurality of electrical decorations are provided on the door frame 5 to perform an attractive light emission effect, etc., the number of harnesses for transmitting control signals to the electrical decorations and the like increases, so the door frame 5 is used for routing the harnesses. It is necessary to form a large space at a portion where a plurality of harnesses are bundled, and the outer shape of the gaming window 101 must be reduced. Therefore, in the case where an effect that is attractive to the player over the entire game area 605 is used, such as when electrical decorations scattered throughout the game area 605 are used, the door can be reduced by reducing the size of the game area 605. While the number of electrical decorations and the like provided on the frame 5 can be increased, if the size of the gaming area 605 is increased, the number of electrical decorations and the like provided on the door frame 5 needs to be reduced. The number of electrical decorations provided on the door frame 5 is in a conflicting relationship.

  On the other hand, in this embodiment, from the door decoration drive board 192, the tray relay board 190, the left side decoration board 126L, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side. Since the decorative board 126R is electrically connected in a daisy chain in this order and connected in a daisy chain, the receiving board relay board is connected to the door decoration driving board 192 from the board provided in the door frame 5. Only the harness from 190 is electrically connected, and each of the left side decorative board 126L, the glass decorative relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side decorative board 126R. Harnesses from are not directly and electrically connected individually. Thereby, since the harness from each board | substrate does not concentrate on the door decoration drive board | substrate 192, in the periphery of the door decoration drive board | substrate 192, a plurality of harnesses do not enter and become disordered. The same applies to the harness that electrically connects the substrates. That is, the board between the door decoration drive board 192 and the tray relay board 190 is electrically connected by a harness, and the board between the tray relay board 190 and the left side decoration board 126L is electrically connected by a harness. The left side decorative board 126L and the glass decorative relay board 454 are electrically connected by a harness, and the glass decorative relay board 454 and the left top lamp board 206L are electrically connected by a harness. The left top lamp board 206L and the right top lamp board 206R are electrically connected by a harness, and the right top lamp board 206R and the right side decorative board 126R are electrically connected by a harness. Therefore, if you look at the harness, it is the harness that electrically connects between the boards It is possible to determine immediately.

  In addition, the door decoration drive board 192, the tray relay board 190, the left side decoration board 126L, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side decoration board 126R are in this order. In the configuration that is connected in a daisy chain and connected in a daisy chain, there is no part that bundles a plurality of harnesses that electrically connect each board, so there is a space for routing the harnesses formed in the door frame 5. Minimal size is required. That is, from the door decoration drive board 192, the tray relay board 190, the left side decoration board 126L, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side decoration board 126R in this order. In a configuration in which daisy chains are connected electrically in a daisy chain, even if a very large amount of electrical decoration is provided on the door frame 5 to perform an attractive light emission effect, etc. Since the number of harnesses that transmit signals does not increase (at least one door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK, and door side motor drive light emission latch) The signal ST-LAT is fixed to the three signal wirings), and there is no part that bundles a plurality of harnesses that electrically connect the substrates. The door frame 5, it is possible to form a space for routing the harness in minimum size. For example, the reception side of the left side decorative board 126L is electrically connected to the tray relay board 190 via a single harness, and the transmission side thereof is electrically connected to the glass decorative relay board 454 via a single harness. Therefore, even if the door frame 5 is provided with an extremely large number of various electrical members for game effects and performs an attractive effect, the number of harnesses on the reception side and the transmission side of the left side decorative board 126L can be reduced accordingly. There is no need to increase the number of serial parallel conversion ICs 126La of the serial parallel conversion IC group 126La on the left side decorative board 126L. Therefore, the reception side and the transmission side of the left side decorative board 126L have one harness. The door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT can be transmitted respectively. That is, there is no portion for bundling a plurality of harnesses on the reception side and the transmission side of the left side decorative board 126L, and a space for routing the harnesses can be formed in the door frame 5 with a minimum size. This is true for the door decoration drive board 192, the tray relay board 190, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the like. As a result, a relationship in which the relationship between the size of the game area 605 and the number of electrical decorations provided on the door frame 5 does not contradict is established, and the size of the game area 605 is greatly increased, and a very large number An electrical decoration or the like can be provided on the door frame 5. Therefore, a plurality of electrical decorations and the like can be provided on the door frame 5 regardless of the size of the game area 605.

  In the present embodiment, the left-side rotating lamp motor 245, the right-turning lamp motor 265, and the central rotating lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which are door-side motors, and the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371 are provided. The door decoration drive board 192 is driven by a drive signal, and the door decoration drive board 192 is positioned as a dedicated board for driving the door-side motor. As described above, since the door-side motor is driven by the drive signal from the door decoration drive board 192, the left rotating lamp motor 245 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, which forms the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, Rotating lamp motor driving data for outputting driving signals to the rotating lamp motor 265 and the central rotating lamp motor 285, and vibrating body driving data for outputting a driving signal to the vibrating body 371c of the main button 371. It becomes a side-by-side array. Thus, when the program creator confirms the contents of the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT created by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, It is possible to easily discriminate vibration body drive data and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals, or gradation lighting signals to various color LEDs provided on the door side. In other words, when the program creator includes unintended data in the contents of the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT created by the peripheral control MPU 4140a, the program creator first provides the data on the door-side motor or the door side. Since it is possible to determine in a large group which of the various color LED related data has a problem, it becomes a clue to solving the problem and leads to an early solution.

[9. Lamp drive board]
Next, the lamp driving substrate 3031 will be described. FIG. 143 is a part of a block diagram of the lamp driving substrate. As shown in FIG. 143, the lamp driving substrate 3031 includes a gradation control IC 3031b and an electrical decoration driving circuit group 3031c. First, the configuration of the gradation control IC 3031b will be described, and then various commands to the gradation control IC 3031b will be described.

[9-1. Configuration of gradation control IC]
As shown in FIG. 143, the gradation control IC 3031b includes a noise removal unit 3031ba, a serial unit 3031bb, a gradation update control unit 3031bc, an ON time setting table register group 3031bd, a waveform table register group 3031be, a pulse generation unit 3031bf, An input / output unit 3031bg and an output unit 3031bh are provided. The gradation control IC 3031b is a game board from the lamp control board serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4139 with the initial data of the gradation control IC 3031b as the game board side light emission data SL-DAT when the power is turned on. The light emission clock signal SL-CLK is inputted in synchronization with the side light emission clock signal SL-CLK.

[9-1-1. Noise removal unit]
The noise removal unit 3031ba emits light on the game board for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to the color LED provided on each decoration board of the gaming board 4 output from the peripheral control board 4139. The data SL-DAT is received from the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the serial input terminal 3031bk in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK, and is the electric signal, the game board side light emission data SL- Noise is removed from DAT. The gradation control IC 3031b has a built-in transmission circuit (not shown), and a clock signal from the transmission circuit is input to the noise removing unit 3031ba. The noise removing unit 3031ba performs filter processing for removing a predetermined band frequency component based on the input clock signal. In this filtering process, noise of about 0.8 microseconds (μs) is removed, and the gaming board side light emission data SL-DAT, which has been filtered, is input to the serial unit 3031bb. In this way, the game board side light emission data SL-DAT that is still affected by noise is not directly input to the serial unit 3031bb.

[9-1-2. Serial part]
When the game board side light emission data SL-DAT filtered by the noise removal section 3031ba is input, the serial unit 3031bb restores the game board side light emission data SL-DAT, which is serial data, to parallel data. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT restored to the parallel data is input to the gradation update control unit 3031bc. In addition, the serial unit 3031bb has an input / output direction register and an input register (not shown), and when the power is turned on, in addition to the game board side light emission data SL-DAT, the input / output direction setting command received from the peripheral control board 4139 Is stored in the input / output direction register. This input / output direction register sets the input / output unit 3031bg to the input side or the output side based on the input / output direction setting command. In this embodiment, the input / output direction register sets the input / output unit 3031bg on the output side so that all the terminals of the input / output terminal group 3031bm become output terminals. In the input / output direction register, when the input / output unit 3031bg is set to the input side so that the terminal of the input / output terminal group 3031bm becomes the input terminal, the signal is input to the terminal of the input / output terminal group 3031bm and the input / output unit 3031bg. Is input to the input register via the. The serial unit 3031bb outputs the signal input to the input register to the peripheral control board 4139 via the serial output terminal 3031bn (in this embodiment, the input / output direction register is the input / output terminal group 3031bm). Since the input / output unit 3031bg is set on the output side so that all of the terminals are output terminals, nothing is output from the serial output terminal 3031bn to the peripheral control board 4139).

[9-1-3. Gradation update control unit]
When the game board side light emission data SL-DAT restored to parallel data by the serial part 3031bb is inputted, the gradation update control part 3031bc receives the game board side light emission data SL- inputted as initial data when the power is turned on. DAT is stored in an ON time setting table register group 3031bd and a waveform table register group 3031be, which are RAMs incorporated in the gradation control IC 3031b, and lighting signals to color LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 The game board side light emission data SL-DAT for outputting a blinking signal or a gradation lighting signal is stored in a command register (not shown). The gradation update control unit 3031bc is a pattern for lighting, blinking, or gradation-lighting the color LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 based on the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the command register. Is created with reference to the initial data stored in the ON time setting table register group 3031bd and the waveform table register group 3031be. This created pattern is input to the pulse generator 3031bf.

[9-1-4. ON time setting table register group]
The ON time setting table register group 3031bd stores initial data received from the peripheral control board 4139, for example, when the power is turned on, under the control of the gradation update control unit 3031bc. The ON time setting table register group 3031bd is composed of a total of eight ON time setting tables including an ON time setting table 0 to an ON time setting table 7. Each ON time setting table is composed of a total of 32 gradations of 0 gradations to 31 gradations. In these 0 gradations to 31 gradations, ON times for designating light emission luminance are set by pulse widths, respectively, and 12-bit widths, that is, 0 to 4096 milliseconds (ms) ON times are set. The size of data stored in the ON time setting table register group 3031bd is 3072 bits (= 8 tables × 32 gradations × 12 bits), and serial communication is performed from the peripheral control board 4139 to the lamp driving board 3031. Since the bit rate of the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK is set to 300 kbps as described above, the transmission time of data stored in the ON time setting table register group 3031bd is 10. 24 ms (= 3072 bits / 300 kbps).

[9-1-5. Waveform table registers]
Similar to the ON time setting table register group 3031bd, the waveform table register group 3031be stores the initial data received from the peripheral control board 4139 under the control of the gradation update control unit 3031bc. It has become. The waveform table register group 3031be is composed of a total of three waveform tables, waveform table 0 to waveform table 2. Each waveform table is composed of a total of 90 waveforms of 0 to 89 waveforms. These 0 waveform to 89 waveform are set in an array in which 0 gradation to 31 gradation of the ON time setting table 0 to ON time setting table 7 stored in the ON time setting table register group 3031bd are arranged. A 5-bit width, that is, 0 gradation to 32 gradation is set. The size of data stored in the waveform table register group 3031be is 1350 bits (= 3 tables × 90 waveforms × 5 bits). When serial communication is performed from the peripheral control board 4139 to the lamp driving board 3031, a game is performed. Since the bit rate of the panel-side light emission clock signal SL-CLK is set to 300 kbps, the transmission time of data stored in the waveform table register group 3031be is 4.5 ms (= 1350 bits / 300 kbps).

[9-1-6. Pulse generator]
When a pattern for lighting, blinking, or gradation lighting is input to the color LED provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 created by the gradation update control unit 3031bc, the pulse generation unit 3031bf receives these patterns. A pulse is generated based on the pattern. The generated pulse is input to the input / output unit 3031bg and the output unit 3031bh. The input / output unit 3031bg provides the input pulse to each decorative board of the game board 4 as a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal from the terminal of the input / output terminal group 3031bm via the electrical drive circuit group 3031c. Output to the color LED. The output unit 3031bh is provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 as a lighting signal, a flashing signal, or a gradation lighting signal from the terminal of the output terminal group 3031bp via the electrical drive circuit group 3031c. Output to color LED. Thereby, the color LED provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 can be turned on, blinked, or lit in gradation. The illumination drive circuit group 3031c uses + 18V supplied from the peripheral control board 4139 as a light emission power source for the color LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4. In the present embodiment, all the input / output terminal groups 3031bm are set on the output terminal side, and when combined with the output terminal group 3031bp, the output terminals have a total of 64 channels (64 systems). The gradation control IC 3031b can control lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting on the color LEDs provided on the decorative boards of the game board 4 for all 64 systems. Has realized a variety of productions. In this way, the game board 4 has a large number of 64 color LEDs scattered therein and can be individually controlled for lighting, blinking and gradation lighting, so that it is gorgeous and attractive by electrical decoration. A certain production can be performed.

[9-2. Command to gradation control IC]
As described above, the gradation control IC 3031b outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal output from the peripheral control board 4139 to the color LED provided on each decoration board of the game board 4. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT is received. In this embodiment, for each of 64 systems of the input / output terminal group 3031bm and the output terminal group 3031bp, the color LED provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 is connected to the color LED. Since the lighting, blinking, or gradation lighting is controlled, all 64 game board side emission data SL-DAT are required. The game board side light emission data SL-DAT is, for one system, for example, the terminal number in which the input / output terminal group 3031bm is set as the output terminal (or the terminal number of the output terminal group 3031bp), 0 gradation to 31 The gradation number of any one of the gradations, the waveform table number of any of the waveform table 0 to the waveform table 2, the waveform transition time that is the time until transition to the next waveform, the initial value of the waveform counter (0 Waveform number of any one of waveform to 89 waveform), waveform counter maximum value (any waveform number of 0 waveform to 89 waveform), ON time setting of any of ON time setting table 0 to ON time setting table 7 It consists of a table number, etc., and has a size of 8 bytes (64 bits). For this reason, when serial communication is performed from the peripheral control board 4139 to the lamp driving board 3031, the bit rate of the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK is set to 300 kbps. The time for completing the transmission of the data SL-DAT is about 13.65 ms (= 64 systems × 8 bytes (64 bits) ÷ 300 kbps).

  By the way, the control of lighting, blinking, or gradation lighting on the color LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 is performed in a 2 ms steady process described later, and in a peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process described later. ing. This is because even if lighting, blinking, or gradation lighting control is performed on the color LED every 2 ms, the human eye cannot follow the change. As described above, the lighting, blinking, or gradation lighting control on the color LEDs provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 is performed in the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process, but within the period of 16 ms. , Transmission of all 64 game board side light emission data SL-DAT must be completed in synchronization with the game board side light emission clock signal SL-CLK. However, as described above, it takes about 13.65 ms to complete transmission of all 64 game board side light emission data SL-DAT. Therefore, when the processing is performed in the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady state processing, It occupies a time of about 85.3% (= about 13.65 ms ÷ 16 ms × 100). In other words, in the state shown in FIG. 139, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa of the peripheral control MPU 4140a directly controls the lamp drive board serial I / O port and waits until all the game board side light emission data SL-DAT is transmitted. Since the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa spends about 85.3% of the time from the start of transmission of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT, that is, about 85.3% of 16ms, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa takes 16ms. There isn't enough time to do the other processing inside.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. 139 is used to perform serial transmission of the door decoration drive board serial I / O port as described above, and for the lamp drive board. Serial I / O port continuous transmission is also performed. Each time a transfer request is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac receives the game board set in the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab shown in FIG. 139 via the bus 4140ah. One data (one byte) of the side light emission data SL-DAT is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board that is the transfer destination. Specifically, first, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa sends the generated 512-byte (= 64 systems × 8 bytes) game board side emission data SL-DAT to the ramp of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab via the bus 4140ah. It is set in the decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140aba. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa designates the transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac, and the game board side light emission stored in the head address of the lamp driving board side transmission data area 4140aba. The first 1 byte of the data SL-DAT is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the bus 4140ah. The serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to transfer 1 byte of data of the transmission register to 1 bit. Start sending one by one. Each time the peripheral interrupt DMA controller 4140ac generates a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board (in this embodiment, writing to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board) 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission register, and the transmission buffer is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.) When the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa does not use the bus 4140ah In addition, the remaining 511 bytes of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba are sent to the transmission buffer of the lamp drive board serial I / O port via the bus 4140ah. Serial I / O port for lamp drive board by transferring and writing Then, the written data of the transmission buffer is transferred to the transmission register, and transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Continuous transmission is performed via the I / O port. Then, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac transmits all the game board side emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp driving board side transmission data area 4140aba to the lamp driving board serial I / O port via the bus 4140ah. When the data is transferred to the buffer and the writing is completed, the bus use right of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is returned to the bus use right of the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In this embodiment, although the bus use time of 4 cycles is required to set the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac by the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa, the bus use time of 4 cycles is the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Since the frequency of the external clock input to is 22 megahertz (MHz), it is about 182 (= 4 cycles / 22 MHz) ns. As a result, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa differs from the case of directly controlling the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board as described above, and in the peripheral control unit 16ms steady process, about 182 ns out of the 16 ms is about 0. The bus 4140ah is used at an extremely low rate of 00114% (= 182 ns ÷ 16 ms × 100), and sufficient time can be secured for performing other processing within 16 ms. Further, as described above, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa sets the game board side light emission data SL-DAT having 512 bytes in the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab via the bus 4140ah. After that, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac sends the remaining 511 bytes of the game board side emission data SL-DAT byte by byte, that is, 511 times, to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the bus 4140ah. Since the data is transferred and written, the usage time of the bus 4140ah by the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac in the continuous transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board is about 93.0 (= about 182 ns × 511 times) μs. That is, this time of about 93.0 μs is on standby until the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa directly controls the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board and transmits all the 64 game board side light emission data SL-DAT. This is much shorter than the time (approximately 13.65 ms) required from the start of transmission of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT to the completion of transmission.

[10. Motor drive board]
Next, the motor drive board 3013 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 144 is a part of a block diagram of the motor drive board. As shown in FIG. 144, the motor drive board 3013 is a variety of game board side detection sensors, a rotation position detection sensor 3134 for detecting the rotation position of the rotation decoration body 3102 (first rotation member 3112), and a slide in the lifting mechanism 3150. Lift detection sensor 3164 for detecting the slide position of member 3152, swing detection sensor 3218 for detecting the slide position of slide base 3206, ceiling position detection sensor 3318 for detecting the slide position of cam member 3308, slide base 3414 (character body 3402) ) From the character body movement detection sensor 3425 for detecting the movement position in the horizontal direction, the right arm rotation detection sensor 3479 for detecting the rotation position of the right arm portion 3402c, and the gear position detection sensor 3524 for detecting the rotation position of the drive gear 3516. Detection signal IN1-SE When ~IN7-SEN is input, and transmitted to the peripheral control board 4139 through intact lamp driving substrate 3031 these detection signals. Peripheral control MPU 4140a, based on detection signals IN1-SEN1 to IN7-SEN, first rotation member 3112, slide member 3152, slide base 3206, cam member 3308, slide base 3414 (character body 3402), right arm 3402c, and The original position of the drive gear 3516 is grasped. The peripheral control MPU 4140a includes game board side motors (rotary decoration body drive motor 3106, lift drive motor 3160, swing drive motor 3212, ceiling drive motor 3312, character body drive motor 3418, right arm drive motor 3472, and gear drive motor 3514. ) And game board side motor drive data SM-DAT for outputting drive signals to the game board side solenoids (lock solenoid 3127 and head solenoid 3455) from the serial I / O port for motor drive board. In synchronization with the side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, it is output to the motor drive board 3013 via the lamp drive board 3031. The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is output from the serial I / O port for the motor drive board. Synchronized with side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK The game board side motor drive latch signal SM-LAT is output from the parallel I / O port to the motor drive board 3013 via the lamp drive board 3031 after being output to the motor drive board 3013 via the lamp drive board 3031. ing.

[10-1. Serial data captured by motor drive board]
Next, serial data captured by the motor drive board 3013 will be described. As shown in FIG. 144, the motor drive board 3013 includes a game board side motor drive circuit group 3013b, a serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c, a game board side solenoid drive circuit 3013d, and the like. The game board side motor drive circuit group 3013b includes a game board side motor drive circuit 3013ba that drives the rotary ornament drive motor 3106, a game board side motor drive circuit 3013bb that drives the lift drive motor 3160, and a swing drive motor 3212. Driving a game board side motor drive circuit 3013bc for driving, a game board side motor drive circuit 3013bd for driving the ceiling drive motor 3312, a game board side motor drive circuit 3013be for driving the character body drive motor 3418, and a right arm drive motor 3472 A game board side motor drive circuit 3013bf that drives the gear drive motor 3514, and a game board side motor drive circuit 3013bg that drives the gear drive motor 3514. The game board side solenoid drive circuit 3013d drives the lock solenoid 3127 and the head solenoid 3455. The serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c has the same configuration as the serial / parallel conversion IC group 192d of the door decoration drive board 192 described above, and a daisy chain in which a plurality of 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs are electrically connected in a daisy chain. Connected and configured. In the present embodiment, the first-stage serial-parallel conversion IC, which is the first stage, has 4 bits as a drive signal to the game board side motor drive circuit 3013ba that drives the rotary ornament drive motor 3106, and a game that drives the lift drive motor 3160. 4 bits are assigned as a drive signal to the board side motor drive circuit 3013bb, and the second stage serial-parallel conversion IC which is the next stage of the first stage is a game board side motor drive circuit 3013bc for driving the swing drive motor 3212. 4 bits are assigned as a drive signal to the 4th stage, and 4 bits are assigned as a drive signal to the game board side motor drive circuit 3013bd for driving the ceiling drive motor 3312. , Drive signal to game board side motor drive circuit 3013be for driving character body drive motor 3418 Then, 4 bits are assigned as a drive signal to the game board side motor drive circuit 3013bf for driving the right arm drive motor 3472, and the fourth serial / parallel conversion IC which is the final stage drives the gear drive motor 3514. 4 bits are assigned as a drive signal to the game board side motor drive circuit 3013bg, and 2 bits are assigned as a drive signal to the game board side solenoid drive circuit 3013d that drives the lock solenoid 3127 and the head solenoid 3455.

  The first serial / parallel conversion IC in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c incorporates game board side motor drive data SM-DAT from the peripheral control board 4139 in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. One bit is taken into the bit shift register. Each time the shift register fetches one bit at a time, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the second-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, so that it is stored in the built-in 8-bit shift register. Each bit is fetched bit by bit, and each time the bit is fetched bit by bit, the fetched serial data is shifted bit by bit and discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal. The serial data discharged from this daisy chain connection terminal is the game board side motor drive clock signal. By being input to the third-stage serial / parallel conversion IC in synchronization with SM-CLK, each bit is taken into the built-in 8-bit shift register, and the taken serial data is taken in every bit. Shift one bit at a time -The serial data discharged from the chain connection terminal and the serial data discharged from the daisy chain connection terminal is input to the serial-parallel conversion IC at the final stage in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, so that the built-in 8 Each bit is taken into a bit shift register.

  The serial / parallel conversion ICs in the serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c are serial data captured in the built-in 8-bit shift register when the game board side motor drive latch signal SM-LAT is input from the peripheral control board 4139. Are converted into parallel data, and the serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c outputs a drive signal to the game board side motor drive circuit group 3013b. Thereby, the game board side motor drive circuits 3013ba and 3013bb can drive the rotary decoration body drive motor 3106 and the elevation drive motor 3160 in accordance with the drive signal from the first-stage serial / parallel conversion IC, and the game board side motor drive circuit 3013bc, 3013bd can drive the swing drive motor 3212 and the ceiling drive motor 3312 according to the drive signal from the second-stage serial / parallel conversion IC, and the game board side motor drive circuits 3013be and 3013bf are the third-stage serial / parallel conversion IC. The character body drive motor 3418 and the right arm drive motor 3472 can be driven in accordance with the drive signal from the game board side motor drive circuit 3013bg and the game board side solenoid drive circuit 3013d. Gear drive motor 3514, lock solenoid 3127, and the head solenoid 3455 can be driven in accordance with. The game board side motor drive circuits 3013ba to 3013bg of the game board side motor drive circuit group 3013b are supplied with + 34V supplied from the peripheral control board 4139 via the lamp drive board 3031, the rotary decoration body drive motor 3106, the elevation drive motor 3160, The power source for driving the swing drive motor 3212, the ceiling drive motor 3312, the character body drive motor 3418, the right arm drive motor 3472, the gear drive motor 3514, the lock solenoid 3127, and the head solenoid 3455 is used.

  As described above, the serial / parallel conversion IC group 3013c of the motor drive circuit 3013 has four 8-bit serial / parallel conversion ICs, and the bit length of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT which is serial data is , 32 bits (= 4 × 8 bits). Therefore, when serial communication is performed from the peripheral control board 4139 to the motor drive board 3013, as described above, the bit rate of the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK is set to 300 kbps. The time for completing transmission of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT is about 110 μs (= 32 ÷ 300 kbps).

  When the game board side motors (rotating decorative body drive motor 3106, lift drive motor 3160, swing drive motor 3212, ceiling drive motor 3312, character body drive motor 3418, right arm drive motor 3472, and gear drive motor 3514) are rotated at high speed. Therefore, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control board 4139 outputs the game board side motor drive latch signal SM-LAT in the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process described later. That is, every time 2 ms elapses, the rotation decoration body drive motor 3106, the lift drive motor 3160, the swing drive motor 3212, the ceiling drive motor 3312, the character body drive motor 3418, the right arm drive are driven by the game board side motor drive latch signal SM-LAT. Pulses to drive the motor 3472 and the gear drive motor 3514 will be generated. When the pulse width is 2 ms, the rotary decoration body drive motor 3106, the elevation drive motor 3160, the swing drive motor 3212, the ceiling drive motor 3312, the character body drive motor 3418, the right arm drive motor 3472, and the gear drive motor 3514 The maximum rotation speed is reached.

  As described above, the rotational speed control of the rotary decorative body drive motor 3106, the lift drive motor 3160, the swing drive motor 3212, the ceiling drive motor 3312, the character body drive motor 3418, the right arm drive motor 3472, and the gear drive motor 3514 The peripheral control unit 2ms of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is configured to perform the steady process. As described above, the door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT is also used for the door decoration drive board serial I during the 2ms period. All transmission must be completed in synchronization with the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK from the / O port.

  Therefore, in this embodiment, in addition to performing serial transmission of the door decoration drive board serial I / O port using the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. The serial I / O port continuous transmission for the drive board is also performed. Each time a transfer request is generated, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac receives the game board set in the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab shown in FIG. 139 via the bus 4140ah. One data (one byte) of the side motor drive data SM-DAT is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for motor drive board which is the transfer destination. Specifically, first, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa sends the created game board side motor drive data SM-DAT having a 32-bit length (having 4 bytes) to the motor of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab via the bus 4140ah. It is set in the drive board side transmission data area 4140abc. Peripheral control CPU core 4140aa designates transmission of the serial I / O port for motor drive board as a request factor of peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac, and the game board side motor stored in the head address of motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc The first byte of the drive data SM-DAT is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I / O port via the bus 4140ah. The motor drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and synchronizes with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK to transfer 1 byte data of the transmission register to 1 Start sending bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac uses this as a trigger each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for motor drive board is generated (in this embodiment, writing to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for motor drive board) 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission register, and the transmission buffer is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.) When the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa does not use the bus 4140ah In addition, the remaining 3 bytes of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc are sent to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the bus 4140ah. Transfer to the buffer and write to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board The controller transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, starts transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission register bit by bit in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, and drives the motor. Continuous transmission is performed through the board serial I / O port. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac then sends all the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc to the motor drive board serial I / O port via the bus 4140ah. When the data is transferred to the transmission buffer and writing is completed, the bus use right of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is returned to the bus use right of the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  In this embodiment, although the bus use time of 4 cycles is required to set the request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac by the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa, this bus use time of 4 cycles is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a. Since the frequency of the external clock is 22 megahertz (MHz), it is approximately 182 (= 4 cycles / 22 MHz) ns. Compared to the door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT, which uses the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a to transmit serially the door decoration drive board serial I / O port, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuous. Although the bit length of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT to be transmitted is shorter, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa has sufficient time to perform other processing within 2 ms. There is an advantage that the serial I / O port continuous transmission for the motor drive board is performed using the DMA controller 4140ac.

  In this embodiment, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the channel DMA0 of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a within the 2 ms period, and the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac Serial transmission I / O port for door decoration drive board is performed using a channel called DMA2, and serial I / O for lamp drive board is used using a channel called DMA1 of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac within a 16 ms period. The port is transmitting continuously. Considering the case where these three DMA requests are generated at the same time, a priority is set for each channel of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac, and the processing proceeds in order from the channel with the highest priority. . As described above, the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac has four channels DAM0 to DMA3, and the priorities are set in the order of DMA0> DMA1> DMA2> DMA3. As described above, in this embodiment, when the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is used, the priority of serial transmission for the serial I / O port for motor driving board is set to be the highest, and the serial I / O port for lamp driving board is set. The priority order is set to be lower in the order of continuous transmission and door decoration drive board serial I / O port continuous transmission.

[11. Various commands related to transmission / reception of main control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 1186 and various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4139 will be described. First, a prize ball command which is a command related to payout transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 1186 will be described, and subsequently various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4139 will be described. Various commands from the payout control board 1186 received by the board 4100 will be described. FIG. 145 is a table showing an example of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the payout control board, and FIG. 146 is a table showing an example of various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board. 146 is a table showing the continuation of various commands transmitted from the main control board to the peripheral control board in FIG. 146, and FIG. 148 is a table showing an example of various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board.

[11-1. Various commands sent from the main control board to the payout control board]
The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 detects from various winning sensors such as the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020, the first starting opening sensor 3022, the second starting opening sensor 2012, and the count sensor 2014 shown in FIG. When the signal is input, based on these detection signals, a prize ball command for paying out a predetermined number of game balls as a prize ball is transmitted to the payout control board. This prize ball command is a command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). In this embodiment, the pachinko gaming machine 1 and a CR unit (a device that communicates with the pachinko gaming machine and drives the payout motor of the pachinko gaming machine (prize ball unit) to pay out the gaming ball as a rented ball to the storage tray). Are electrically connected (such a pachinko machine is referred to as a “CR machine”), as shown in FIG. 145 (a), an award transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 1186. Command 10H to command 1EH ("H" represents a hexadecimal number) are prepared for the ball command, one award ball is designated for the command 10H, two award balls are designated for the command 11H, .. 15 prize balls are specified in the command 1EH. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout of the game ball by driving the payout motor 815 for the designated number of prize balls.

  In addition, a pachinko gaming machine 1 and a ball lending machine (a device that pays out game balls directly as a lending ball to a storage tray) are installed adjacent to the game hall (hall), and the pachinko gaming machine 1 and the ball lending machine are electrically connected. (Such a pachinko gaming machine is referred to as a “general machine”), as shown in FIG. 145 (b), a prize ball command transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 1186 is displayed. Command 20H to command 2EH are prepared, one prize ball is designated by the command 20H, two prize balls are designated by the command 21H,..., 15 prize balls are designated by the command 2EH. Yes. The payout control board 1186 controls the payout of the game ball by driving the payout motor 815 for the designated number of prize balls.

  As shown in FIG. 145 (c), a command 30H is prepared as a command common to the CR machine and the general machine, and the self check is designated in the command 30H. By transmitting a command 30H and checking whether or not an ACK signal is input when the transmitting side does not input an ACK signal output as a command reception confirmation from the receiving side for a predetermined period after the command is transmitted. Check the connection status. In the case of the CR machine in the present embodiment, the payout control board 1186 confirms the connection state with the CR unit.

[11-2. Various commands sent from the main control board to the peripheral control board]
Next, various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4139 will be described. The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 transmits various commands to the peripheral control board 4139 based on the progress of the game. These various commands are commands having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits). As shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, statuses indicating the types of commands having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and And a mode showing variations of performance having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits).

  As shown in FIG. 146 and FIG. 147, the various commands are related to special figure 1 synchronized effect, special figure 2 synchronized effect related, jackpot related, power-on, general figure synchronized effect related, ordinary electric role effect related, notification display, state Classified into display and other.

[11-2-1. Special Figure 1 Entrainment Production Related]
The special figure 1 tuning effect is based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 shown in FIG. 135, and, as shown in FIG. 146, the function display board 640a shown in FIG. The first special symbol display 641 is composed of commands named special figure 1 synchronized effect start, special symbol 1 designation, special figure 1 synchronized effect end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “A * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 1 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 1 designated command designates the off, specific big hit and non-specific big hit. The special figure 1 tuning effect end command is for instructing the end of the special figure 1 tuning effect, and the variable state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 1 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 1 variation, and the special symbol 1 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 1 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 1 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 1 is determined), and the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the special symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process described later.

[11-2-2. Special figure 2 synchronized production]
The special figure 2 synchronization effect related is based on the detection signal from the second starter sensor 2012 shown in FIG. 135, and, as shown in FIG. 146, the function display board 640a shown in FIG. The second special symbol display 642 includes commands having names of special figure 2 synchronization effect start, special symbol 2 designation, and special figure 2 synchronization effect end. These various commands are assigned “B * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The special figure 2 synchronized production start command instructs the start of the special figure synchronized production with the production pattern designated in the mode, and the special symbol 2 designated command designates the off, specific big hit, and non-specific big hit. The special figure 2 synchronization effect end is an instruction to end the special figure 2 synchronization effect.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the special symbol 2 tuning effect start command is transmitted at the start of the special symbol 2 fluctuation start, and the special symbol 2 designation command is transmitted immediately after the start of the special symbol 2 tuning effect. The effect end command is transmitted when the special symbol 2 variation time has elapsed (when the special symbol 2 is confirmed). These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-3. Jackpot related]
As shown in FIG. 146, the jackpot-related category includes a jackpot opening, a grand prize opening 1 open Nth display, a big prize opening 1 closing display, a big prize opening 1 count display, a jackpot ending, a jackpot symbol display, a small hit opening , A small hit opening display, a small hit count display, and a command with the names of small hit ending. These commands are assigned “C * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The jackpot opening command is for instructing the start of the jackpot opening, and the Nth display command for the winning prize opening 1 is started during the opening of the winning prize opening 1 for the 1st to 16th rounds (the attack unit 2000 shown in FIG. 97). The command indicating that the Nth round of the grand prize opening 2003 is being opened or the start of opening is instructed, and the grand prize opening 1 closing display command is the start of closing the grand prize opening 1 between rounds (the grand prize opening of the attacker unit 2000) During the closing of the round of 2003 or the start of closing), and the winning prize 1 count display command indicates that 0 to 10 counts have been counted (detected by the count sensor 2014 shown in FIG. 135, The number of game balls that have entered the big prize opening 2003), and the jackpot ending command is the jackpot endy Is intended to instruct the grayed start, big hit symbol display command is for instructing the big hit symbol information display.

  The small hit opening command is for instructing the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit opening display command is for starting the small hit opening (when the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is being opened or opened at the small hit). The small hit count display command is used when the count sensor 2014 detects a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2003 during the small hit. The small hit ending command is an instruction to start the small hit ending.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the big hit opening command is sent at the start of the big hit opening, and the big winning opening 1 opening N-th display command is when the big winning opening 1 is opened in the 1st to 16th rounds (the large amount of the attacker unit 2000). The winning prize opening 1 closing display command is sent when the winning prize opening 1 is closed (the closing of the winning prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is started). The mouth 1 count display command is used when the winning prize opening 1 is opened and when the count of the winning prize opening 1 is changed (when the winning prize opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened and when the game ball that has entered the winning prize opening 2003 is counted The jackpot ending command is sent at the start of the jackpot ending. Is Shin, big hit symbol display command is sent during the special winning opening open (when opening the special winning opening 2003 of attacker unit 2000).

  The small hit opening command is transmitted at the start of the small hit opening, and the small hit release display command is transmitted when the small hit is released (when the big winning opening 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 is opened at the small hit), the small hit opening display command is transmitted. The hit count display command is transmitted at the time of winning a small hit middle and big prize opening (when a game ball that has entered the big winning opening 2003 is detected by the count sensor 2014 during the small hit), and the small hit ending command is Sent when a small hit ending starts These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-4. Power on]
As shown in FIG. 146, the power-on category includes various commands named power-on. This power-on command is assigned “D * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The power-on command is for instructing the start of the RAM clear effect and the start of each state effect (for example, instructing the start of the effect when the RAM clear switch 624a shown in FIG. 135 is operated). ).

  As the transmission timing of the power-on command, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure and the RAM clear switch 624a is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is executed. A power-on command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-5. General drawing related production]
The general-synchronization effect is based on the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 shown in FIG. 135, and is divided into the normal symbol display of the function display board 640a shown in FIG. The command 645 is composed of commands with the names of general drawing synchronization production start, universal symbol designation, universal drawing synchronization production end, and variable state designation. These various commands are assigned “E * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The general pattern synchronization production start command is for instructing the general pattern synchronization production start with the production pattern specified in the mode, and the general pattern designation command is for specifying off, specific big hit, non-specific big hit, The figure synchronization effect end command is for instructing the end of the common figure synchronization effect, and the change state designation command is for instructing the probability and the short time state.

  As the transmission timings of these various commands, the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start command is transmitted at the time of the normal symbol 1 variation start, the ordinary symbol designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol synchronization effect start, and the ordinary symbol synchronization effect end command is When the normal symbol variation time has elapsed (when the normal symbol is determined), the variation state designation command is transmitted immediately after the ordinary symbol winning information designation. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-6. Ordinary electric role production related]
The ordinary electric role effect is related to the pair of movable pieces 2005 shown in FIG. 97 that are opened and closed by the driving of the start-up solenoid 2010 shown in FIG. 135. As shown in FIG. It consists of commands named “Opening per figure”, “Opening of public power”, and “Ending per common figure”. These various commands are assigned “F * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The opening command per base map is an instruction to start the opening per base map, and the open command display command is a normal power open start (a pair of movable pieces 2005 are expanded in the left-right direction by driving the start opening solenoid 2010). The ending command per universal map indicates the start of ending per universal map.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the opening command per base map is transmitted at the start of the opening per base map, and the general power open display command is displayed when the general power is open (the pair of movable pieces 2005 are driven by the start opening solenoid 2010). The ending command per universal map is transmitted at the start of ending per universal map. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-7. Notification display]
As shown in FIG. 147, the notification display section includes commands having names such as winning abnormality display, connection abnormality display, disconnection / short circuit abnormality display, magnetic sensor abnormality display, door opening, and door closing. These various commands are assigned “6 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The winning anomaly display command is used when a winning ball is won other than during a big hit (when the condition device is in operation) (a game ball enters the big winning port 2003 of the attacker unit 2000 even though it is not a big hit). When the count sensor 2014 detects it, it instructs the start of a prize abnormality notification. The connection abnormality display command indicates that, for example, an electrical connection abnormality occurs in a path between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186. In some cases, the start of connection abnormality notification is instructed, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes, for example, the main control board 4100, the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2012, the count sensor 2014, and the like. This command instructs the start of the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display when the electrical connection is disconnected or short-circuited. Is for instructing the start of magnetic sensor abnormality notification when an abnormality occurs in the magnetic detection sensor 3024 shown in FIG. 135.

  Further, the door opening command is executed when the main body frame 3 is released based on detection signals (opening signals) from the door opening switch 4133 and the main body frame opening switch 4134 input via the payout control board 1186 shown in FIG. When the door 2 is open with respect to the frame 2 or when the door frame 5 is open with respect to the main body frame 3, the door opening notification is instructed. Based on detection signals from the opening switch 4133 and the body frame opening switch 4134, the body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the body frame 3. In some cases, the end of door opening notification is instructed.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the winning abnormality display command is transmitted when winning a prize winning opening other than during the big hit (condition apparatus is operating), and the connection abnormality displaying command is sent from the main control board 4100 to the payout control board 1186. Is transmitted when there is no ACK reply (ACK signal) from the payout control board 1186 at the time of command transmission, and the disconnection / short circuit abnormality display command includes the first start port sensor 3022, the second start port sensor 2012, the count sensor 2014, etc. Is transmitted when any one of them is broken or short-circuited, the magnetic sensor abnormality display command is transmitted when abnormality is detected in the magnetic detection sensor 3024, and the door opening command is detected when door opening is detected (door opening). Based on detection signals from the switch 4133 and the body frame opening switch 4134, the body frame 3 is moved to the outer frame. The door closing command is transmitted when the door is closed (door opening switch 4133). And when the main body frame 3 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 and the door frame 5 is closed with respect to the main body frame 3 based on the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch 4134) Sent to. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-8. Status display]
As shown in FIG. 147, the status display section includes commands named “frame state 1”, “error cancellation navigation”, and “frame state 2”. These various commands are assigned a status of “7 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command are commands transmitted from the payout control board 1186, and detailed descriptions thereof will be described later. When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 1186, as shown in FIG. 146, “7 * H” is displayed. While setting as a status, the received command is set as a mode as it is. That is, when the main control MPU 4100a receives the frame state 1 command, the error release navigation command, and the frame state 2 command from the payout control board 1186, it adds “7 * H” as additional information to these received commands. Thus, the command is shaped into a command having a storage capacity of 2 bytes (16 bits).

  The shaped frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the status of the frame is changed, and when the error cancellation navigation is performed. The error cancellation navigation command is transmitted when the error cancellation navigation is performed. And when the frame state changes. Note that the shaped frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-9. Test related]
As shown in FIG. 147, the test-related category is composed of various commands named test. This test command is assigned “8 * H” as a status and “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) as a mode (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). And is predetermined according to the specification content of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The test command instructs various inspections of the peripheral control board 4139 (for example, various kinds of boards such as the sound source IC 4140c, the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the lamp driving board 3031, and the door decoration driving board 192 shown in FIG. 136). Inspection).

  As a test command transmission timing, it is transmitted when the main control board power is turned on when the RAM is not cleared and when the RAM is not cleared. Specifically, when the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, when it recovers from a power failure or a momentary power failure and the RAM clear switch 624a is operated, the main control side power-on process described later is executed. A test command is transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

[11-2-10. Others]
As shown in FIG. 147, the other categories include start opening prize, change shortening operation end designation, high probability end designation, special symbol 1 memory, special symbol 2 memory, normal symbol memory, special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect, and It consists of a command with the name of special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect. These various commands are assigned a status of “9 * H” and a mode of “** H” (“H” represents a hexadecimal number) (“*” is a specific hexadecimal number). This is predetermined according to the specification contents of the pachinko gaming machine 1).

  The start opening prize command is an instruction to start the start opening winning effect, and the start of the effect when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3022. , And the start of the production when a game ball enters the second start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012, respectively. The command for instructing state transition from the shortened operating state to the variable shortening non-operating state, and the high probability end designation command is for instructing state transition from the high probability state to the low probability state. The special symbol 1 hold 0 to 4 pieces (the game ball enters the first starting port 2001 shown in FIG. 97 and the first special symbol display 641 of the function display board 640a changes the special symbol variation table. The special symbol 2 memory command is used to send 0 to 4 special symbol 2 hold commands (the game ball enters the second starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 97). The number of balls that have not been used yet for the variable symbol display (holding number) in the second special symbol display 642 of the function display board 640a is transmitted, and the normal symbol storage command is the normal symbol 1 hold. 0-4 pieces (the number of balls that have not yet been used for the normal symbol change display on the normal symbol display 645 of the function display board 640a after passing through the gate entrance 2351 of the gate portion 2350 shown in FIG. The special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is pre-read before the special symbol 1 hold is used for the special symbol variable display on the first special symbol display 641 of the function display board 640a. The The special symbol 2 hold is a function display board 640a for instructing the start of a pre-reading effect informing the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 641 based on the special symbol 1 hold. Before the second special symbol display unit 642 is used to display the variation of the special symbol, the pre-reading effect is started to pre-read and notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display unit 642 based on the special symbol 2 hold. It is an instruction.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the start opening prize command is the start opening winning prize (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 based on the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3022, Mainly from the side speaker 121 shown in FIGS. 17 and 19 and the lower speaker 391 shown in FIG. 37 when a game ball enters the second start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the start port sensor 2012. This command is sent to notify that effect by voice, and the command to end change shortening operation is sent at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the stoppage stop period has elapsed) after digesting the specified number of changes, and ends with a high probability. The designated command is transmitted at the end of the stop period after the change is confirmed (after the outage stop period has elapsed) after digesting the high probability count in the case of “high probability N times”. At the time of the change of the number of symbols held in the symbol 1 operation (there is a number of reserves that have not yet been used for the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol indicator 641 of the function display board 640a when a game ball enters the first start port 2001. In the state, when the game ball enters the first starting port 2001 and the number of held is increased, or from the number of held, the first special symbol display 641 is used to display the fluctuation of the special symbol, the number of held The special symbol 2 storage command is transmitted when the number of special symbol 2 operation suspension balls changes (the game ball enters the second start port 2002 and the second special symbol display 642 on the function display board 640a). In the state where there is a number of holdings that are not yet used for the special symbol fluctuation display, when the number of holdings increases when the game ball enters the second start port 2002, or from the number of holdings, the second special symbol display is performed. Special design with vessel 642 The normal symbol storage command is used when the number of reserved balls for normal symbol 1 changes (the game ball passes through the gate entrance 2351 of the gate unit 2350 and displays the function). In a state where there is a holding number that is not yet used for the normal symbol variation display on the normal symbol display 645 of the board 640a, when the gaming ball passes through the gate entrance 2351 of the gate part 2350 and the holding number increases, The special symbol display unit 645 uses the normal symbol display unit 645 to display the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command is transmitted. When the game ball enters the first starting port 2001 and the number of held balls increases, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command is sent when the number of special symbol 2 actuated held balls increases (second starting port 20). 02 when a game ball enters and the number of holds increases. These various commands are actually transmitted in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process.

  By the way, as described above, the start opening prize command is given when the start opening is won (when a game ball enters the first start opening 2001 based on a detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3022, When a game ball enters the second start port 2002 based on the detection signal from the sensor 2012), the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 are transmitted mainly to notify that effect by voice. How the peripheral control board 4139 shown in 136 uses the start opening winning command may differ depending on the specifications of the pachinko gaming machine. For example, in the pachinko gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment, in addition to notifying by sound from the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391, as described later, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is also used to monitor the presence or absence of fraud. On the other hand, in other pachinko gaming machines 1 ′, there is a specification in which the peripheral control board 4139 ′ simply receives the start opening winning command and does not notify by sound from the side speaker 121 ′ or the lower speaker 391 ′. .

[11-3. Various commands from the payout control board received by the main control board]
Next, various commands from the payout control board 1186 received by the main control board 4100 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 148, each command from the output control board 1186 is composed of commands named frame state 1, error release navigation, and frame state 2. The frame state 1, error release navigation, and Priorities are set in the order of frame state 2.

  In the frame state 1 command, a ball breakage, a full tank, a connection abnormality and a CR non-connection are prepared in 50 or more stocks. Value 1 is set, bit 1 (B1) is set to 1 when full, bit 1 (B2) is set to 1 when there are 50 or more stocks, and bit 3 (B3) is set when connection is abnormal 1 is set, and the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4) when the CR is not connected. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 1 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 0 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  In the error canceling navigation command, there are provided a sphere, a count switch error, and a retry error. In the case of a sphere, a value 1 is set in bit 2 (B2), and in a count switch error, a value is set in bit 3 (B3). 1 is set, and in the case of a retry error, the value 1 is set in bit 4 (B4). Here, “counting switch error” indicates whether or not a malfunction of the counting switch 812 has occurred. The “retry error” indicates that a game ball that is not consistent with the retry operation has been repeatedly paid out. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the error cancellation navigation command, a value 0 is set in B5, a value 1 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  The frame state 2 command is prepared for ball removal, and the value 1 is set to bit 0 (B0) during ball removal. In bit 5 (B5) to bit 7 (B7) of the frame state 2 command, a value 1 is set in B5, a value 1 is set in B6, and a value 0 is set in B7.

  As the transmission timing of these various commands, the frame status 1 command is transmitted when the power is restored, when the frame status is changed, and during error cancellation navigation, and the error cancellation navigation command is transmitted during error cancellation navigation. Is transmitted when the power is restored and when the frame state changes. These various commands are actually transmitted in the command transmission process in step S360 in the payout control unit main process of the payout control part power-on process described later.

[12. Various control processes of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 4100 according to the progress of the game of the pachinko gaming machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 157. First, various random numbers used for game control will be described, and then main control side power-on processing, main control side timer interruption processing, special symbols and special electric actor control processing, and special symbol change waiting processing will be described. FIG. 149 is a flowchart showing an example of main control side power-on processing, FIG. 150 is a flowchart showing the main control side power-on processing of FIG. 149, and FIG. 151 shows an example of main control timer interruption processing. 152 is a flowchart showing an example of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process. FIG. 153 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the special symbol and special electric accessory control process of FIG. 152. 154 is a flowchart showing an example of the start opening winning process, FIG. 155 is a flowchart showing an example of the storage prefetching process, and FIG. 156 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the storage prefetching process of FIG. These are flowcharts which show an example of special symbol change waiting processing.

[12-1. Various random numbers]
As the various random numbers used for game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and an initial value for determining the big hit for use in determining the initial value of this big hit determination random number Random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach (reach out of reach) when the big hit gaming state is not generated, the first special symbol display 641 and the first special symbol display 641 shown in FIG. The random display pattern random number for use in determining the variable display pattern of the special symbol variably displayed on the two special symbol indicators 642, and the first special symbol indicator 641 and the second special symbol when the big hit gaming state is generated. A jackpot symbol for use in determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed by the indicator 642 and a jackpot symbol for use in determining the initial value of the jackpot symbol The initial value determination random number or the like are prepared use. In addition to these random numbers, for determining the normal symbol per random number for use in determining whether or not to move the movable piece 2005 shown in FIG. 97, and for determining the initial value of the random symbol per normal symbol for determination. Random numbers for determining initial values for normal symbols to be used, random numbers for normal symbol variation display patterns for use in determining the variation display pattern of ordinary symbols variably displayed on the ordinary symbol display 645 shown in FIG. Is prepared.

  Here, the range of the jackpot determination random number will be described. The jackpot determination random number is updated in the range of value 0 to value 32767, and the jackpot range is set to value 32668 to value 32767 at the time of uncertain change. In addition, the preliminary range is set to a value that continues with a value 32667 that is one lower than the value of the uncertain variation lower limit value ORG-NV-LOW (value 32668) of the big hit range, and the range is a value 32667 to a value. It is set to 32665. Thus, “preliminary range” + “big hit range” at the time of uncertain change is a value that continues from value 32265 to value 32767. At the time of probability change, the big hit range is set to a value 32438 to a value 32767. In addition, the upper limit value of the preliminary range is set to a value that continues to a value 32437 that is one smaller than the value of the probability variation lower limit value ORG-PV-LOW of the jackpot range (value 32438), and the range is a value 32437 to a value 32435. Is set to Thus, “preliminary range” + “big hit range” at the time of probability change is a value that continues from value 32435 to value 32767. In the present embodiment, the upper limit value ORG-V-UPP of the big hit range is set to be the same value as the upper limit value (value 32767) of the big hit determination random number range.

[12-2. Main control side power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs main control side power-on processing as shown in FIGS. When the main control side power-on processing is started, the main control MPU 4100a sets the stack pointer (step S10). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that is stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S10, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are stacked on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S10, output of a power failure clear signal is started to the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d shown in FIG. 137 (step S12). This power failure monitoring circuit 4100d is composed of a voltage comparison circuit and a D-type flip-flop IC. The voltage comparison circuit compares the voltage between + 18V and the reference voltage, or compares the voltage between + 9V and the reference voltage, and outputs the comparison result. This comparison result shows that when no power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, the logic becomes HI and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC23, while when a power failure or instantaneous power failure occurs, The logic becomes LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is a preset terminal of the D type flip-flop IC23. In step S12, output of the power failure clear signal is started to the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D type flip-flop IC. The power failure clear signal is input to the clear terminal via the main control I / O port 4100b with the logic being LOW. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can release the latch state of the D-type flip-flop IC, and the logic input to the PR terminal, which is the preset terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, until the latch state is set. It can be inverted and output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal, and the signal from the 1Q terminal can be monitored.

  Following step S12, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S14), and it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal is input (step S16). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when there is a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), when the voltage drops and becomes smaller than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S14 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure warning voltage and stabilizes. ms) is set. In step S16, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. This determination is performed based on a signal output from the 1Q terminal, which is the output terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC, as the power failure notice signal.

  Subsequent to step S16, the output of the power failure clear signal is stopped at the CLR terminal which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC (step S18). By stopping the output of the power failure clear signal, the logic becomes HI via the main control I / O port 4100b and is input to the CLR terminal which is a clear terminal. As a result, the main control MPU 4100a can set the D-type flip-flop IC in the latched state. When the D-type flip-flop IC latches the state where the logic is LOW and is input to the PR terminal which is the preset terminal, the D-type flip-flop IC outputs a power failure warning signal from the 1Q terminal which is the output terminal.

  Following step S18, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a shown in FIG. 135 has been operated (step S20). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the main control MPU 4100a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 624a is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 624a is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 624a is operated in step S20, a value 1 is set to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S22). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 624a is not operated in step S20, the RAM clear is cleared. A value 0 is set in the notification flag RCL-FLG (step S24). This RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) built in the main control MPU 4100a, and games relating to games such as probability fluctuations, unpaid prize balls, etc. It is a flag indicating whether or not to erase information, and is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. Note that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in step S22 and step S24 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 4100a.

  Subsequent to step S22 or step S24, wait timer processing 2 is performed (step S26). In the wait timer process 2, the system waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the liquid crystal display device 1400 by the liquid crystal control unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4139 shown in FIG. For example, various control programs compressed from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 136 are read out and stored in a RAM built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a shown in FIG. In this embodiment, 2 seconds (s) is set as a time until booting (boot timer).

  Following step S26, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S28). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when erasing game information and a value of 0 when not erasing game information. When the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 in step S28, that is, when the game information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S30). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value and calculating the sum.

  Following step S30, whether or not the calculated checksum value (sum value) matches the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off) described later. Is determined (step S32). If they match, it is determined whether or not the backup flag BK-FLG is 1 (step S34). The backup flag BK-FLG is stored and held in the main control built-in RAM in the main control side power-off processing described later, such as game information, checksum value (sum value), and backup flag BK-FLG value. This flag is set to a value of 1 when the main control side power-off process is normally terminated, and to a value of 0 when the main control-side power-off process is not terminated normally.

  When the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S34, that is, when the main control side power-off processing is normally terminated, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S36). In this setting, the backup flag BK-FLG is set to a value 0, and the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the main control MPU 4100a (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). Time information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. Here, “when power is restored” means in addition to a state where the power is turned on from a state where the power is shut off, a state where the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power loss, and a reset is detected upon detection of high frequency irradiation. In addition, the state after the return is also included.

  Subsequent to step S36, power-on command creation processing is performed (step S38). In the power-on command creation process, game information is read from the backup information, and various commands corresponding to the game information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S28, that is, when the game information is erased, or when the checksum value (sum value) does not match in step S32. Alternatively, when the backup flag BK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S34, that is, when the main control side power-off process is not normally terminated, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared ( Step S40). Specifically, the value 0 is written in the main control built-in RAM (a predetermined value may be read from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set). Thereby, for example, the initial value 0 is set to the above-described values such as the big hit determination random number, the initial value update type counter, or the like.

  Following step S40, the work area of the main control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S42). In this setting, the initial information is read from the main control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S42, RAM clear notification and test command creation processing is performed (step S44). In this RAM clear notification and test command creation processing, a power-on command classified into power-on shown in FIG. 146 for notifying that the main control built-in RAM is cleared and the initial setting is performed is created. Test commands classified into test relations shown in FIG. 147 for performing various inspections of the control board 4139 are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S38 or step S44, interrupt initialization is performed (step S46). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a main control timer interrupt process described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S46, interrupt permission is set. (Step S48). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S46, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S48, the value A is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S50). The watchdog timer is cleared by setting value A, value B and value C in this order in this watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S50, it is determined whether a power failure warning signal is input (step S52). This determination is made based on a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d. When the power supply of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, and a power failure warning signal is input as a power failure warning from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d.

  When no power failure warning signal is input in step S52, non-winning random number update processing is performed (step S54). In this non-winning random number update process, the big hit determination initial value determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number, the big hit symbol initial value determination random number, and the like are updated. For example, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is the above-described initial value update type counter, and the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the big hit determination random number (the range from 0 to 32767) is described below. Each time the control-side timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 (counts up). When the big hit determination initial value determination random number is set (updated) by the non-winning random number update process, this counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number to the upper limit (value 32767), and then continues. It counts up from the lower limit value (value 0) to the random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination. Then, the big hit determination initial value determination random number is updated again by the non-winning random number update process. In this way, in the non-winning random number update process, random numbers that are not involved in the winning determination (big hit determination) are updated. It should be noted that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination, random numbers for initial value determination for normal symbol determination, random numbers for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like described above are also updated by this non-winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Following step S54, the process returns to step S50 again to set the value A in the watchdog timer clear register WCL. In step S52, it is determined whether or not a power failure warning signal has been input. For example, a non-winning random number update process is performed in step S54, and steps S50 to S54 are repeated. The processing from step S50 to step S54 is referred to as “main control side main processing”.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S52, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S56). With this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of game information is protected.

  Following step S56, a power failure clear signal is output to the CLR terminal, which is the clear terminal of the D-type flip-flop IC of the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d, via the main control I / O port 4100b, or the start shown in FIG. Mouth solenoid 2010, attacker solenoid 2016, first special symbol display 641, second special symbol display 642, first special symbol storage display 643, second special symbol storage display 644, normal symbol display 645, normal symbol The drive signal output to the memory display 646, the game status display 647, the round display 648, etc. is stopped (step S58). When the power failure clear signal is output, the D-type flip-flop IC can release the latched state.

  Subsequent to step S58, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S60). This checksum is calculated by regarding the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM as a numerical value excluding the storage area for the checksum value (sum value) and backup flag BK-FLG described above.

  Subsequent to step S60, the value 1 is set to the backup flag BK-FLG. (Step S62) This completes the storage of the backup information.

  Subsequent to step S62, the watchdog timer is cleared (step S64). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL.

  Following step S64, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, so that the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the main control MPU 4100a is reset, and then the main control MPU 4100a performs the main control side power-on process again. Note that the processing of step S56 to step S64 and the infinite loop are referred to as “main control side power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (main control MPU 4100a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and performs power-on processing on the main control side by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S32, it is checked whether or not the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. In step S34, it is checked whether or not the main control side power-off process has been normally completed. I am inspecting. In this way, by checking the backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM twice, it is inspected whether the backup information is stored by an illegal act.

[12-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt process will be described. This main control side timer interrupt process is repeated at every interrupt period (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control side power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets a value B in the watchdog timer clear register WCL as shown in FIG. 151 (step S70). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value A set in step S50 of the main control side power-on process (main control side main process).

  Subsequent to step S70, the interrupt flag is cleared (step S72). By clearing the interrupt flag, the interrupt cycle is initialized, and the next interrupt cycle is counted from the initial value.

  Subsequent to step S72, switch input processing is performed (step S74). In this switch input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 135, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3020 that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2004, a general winning opening that detects a game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2101, and the like. A detection signal from the sensor 3020, a detection signal from the count sensor 2014 that detects a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2003, and a first start port sensor 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001. A detection signal, a detection signal from the second starter sensor 2012 that detects a game ball that has entered the second starter port 2002, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 that detects a game ball that has passed through the gate 2201, and a magnet are used. The payout control board 11 shown in FIG. 135 shows detection signals from the magnetic detection sensor 3024 for detecting fraud and prize ball commands transmitted in prize ball control processing described later. Reading ACK signal from the payout control board 1186 to convey the fact that 6 has normally received, respectively, is stored in the input information storage area as the input information. In addition, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2001, and a detection from the second start port sensor 2012 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2002. When each signal is read, the corresponding start opening winning command shown in FIG. 147 shown in FIG. 147 is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above. That is, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022, a corresponding start port winning command is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012. The start opening winning command corresponding to this is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. In this embodiment, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3020 that detects the game ball that has entered the general winning opening 2004, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3020 that detects the gaming ball that has entered the general winning opening 2101, and the like. A detection signal, a detection signal from the count sensor 2014 that detects a game ball that has entered the grand prize opening 2003, a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001, This switch input process starts with the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 that detects the game ball that has entered the second start port 2002 and the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 that detects the game ball that has passed through the gate 2201. Then, each is read as the first time, and after a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs), each is read again as the second time.Then, the result read at the second time is compared with the result read at the first time. It is determined whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the third time, and the result read at the third time is compared with the result read at the second time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those that are not the same result are read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is determined again whether there is a comparison result among the comparison results. Those with the same result are treated as having no game balls. As described above, in the switch input process, the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020, the count sensor 2014, the first starting opening sensor 3022, the second starting opening sensor 2012, and the gate sensor 2352 are used for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice in total, that is, the twice reading that is compared over two times and the twice reading that is compared between the second time and the fourth time, false detection due to chattering, noise, and the like is avoided. Therefore, the reliability of the detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 3020 and 3020, the count sensor 2014, the first starting opening sensor 3022, the second starting opening sensor 2012, and the gate sensor 2352 can be improved.

  Subsequent to step S74, timer subtraction processing is performed (step S76). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time during which the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing described later, In addition to the time that the normal symbol display 645 is turned on according to the normal symbol variation display pattern determined in the symbol and normal electric accessory control process, various commands transmitted by the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) are issued. When determining whether or not an ACK signal indicating that the signal is normally received is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as the determination condition is performed. Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption period is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction process is performed, the fluctuation time is subtracted by 4 ms. When the subtraction result is 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time this timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S76, a winning random number update process is performed (step S78). In the winning random number update process, the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number described above are updated. In addition to these random numbers, the big hit determination initial value determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S54 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. The random number for determining the initial value for the jackpot symbol is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for jackpot determination and the initial value determining random number for the jackpot symbol are updated in the main control side main process and the main control side timer interrupt process, respectively, thereby further improving the randomness. On the other hand, since the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number are random numbers related to the winning determination (big hit determination), each counter is incremented only when the winning random number update process is performed. For example, the counter that updates the big hit determination random number counts up the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the big hit determination random number every time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. This counter counts up from the big hit determination initial value determination random number to the upper limit value, and then counts up from the lower limit value to the big hit determination initial value determination random number. When the counter finishes counting the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the jackpot determination random number, the initial value determination random number for jackpot determination is updated by this winning random number update processing (this initial value determination random number for jackpot determination) Is also updated in the above-mentioned non-winning random number update process). Note that the above-described random numbers for normal symbol determination and random numbers for determining the initial value for normal symbol determination are also updated by this winning random number update process. The random number for determining normal symbols is the same as the method for updating the random number for determining big hits, and the description thereof is omitted.

  Subsequent to step S78, prize ball control processing is performed (step S80). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and the prize ball command shown in FIG. 145 for paying out the game ball based on this input information is created, or the main control board 4100 The self-check command shown in FIG. 145 for confirming the connection state between the board and the payout control board 1186 is created. Then, the created prize ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 1186. For example, when one game ball enters the big prize opening 2003 shown in FIG. 97, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created and transmitted to the payout control board 1186. When the payer ACK signal notifying that the payout control board 1186 has normally received is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186 is created. To the payout control board 1186.

  Subsequent to step S80, frame command reception processing is performed (step S82). The payout control board 1186 transmits various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame state 2 command) of 1 byte (8 bits) classified into the state display shown in FIG. In the frame command reception process in step S82, when the various commands are normally received, information that informs the payout control board 1186 to that effect is stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, the normally received command is shaped into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame state 1 command, error clearing navigation command, and frame state 2 command) classified into the status display of FIG. 147) And stored in the transmission information storage area described above as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S82, an illegal act detection process is performed (step S84). In this fraud detection process, the abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, when the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area and the detection signal from the count sensor 2014 is input when the game is not in the big hit game state (when a game ball enters the big prize opening 2003), etc. Then, a winning abnormality display command classified into the notification display shown in FIG. 147 as an abnormal state is created, and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S84, a special symbol and special electric accessory control process is performed (step S86). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control processing, the value of the big hit determination random number described above is taken out and within the big hit range pre-stored in the main control built-in ROM (for example, as the big hit range, when there is a non-probable change, While it is set in a range from the lower limit value ORG-NV-LOW (value 32668) to the upper limit value ORG-V-UPP (value 32767), the probability change lower limit value ORG-PV-LOW ( Value 32438) to the upper limit value ORG-V-UPP (value 32767).) Is determined (whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state) Taking out the value of the jackpot symbol random number and determining whether or not the value is within the range of the probability variation determination stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (determining whether or not to generate a probability variation) To. When these determination results are based on the first start port sensor 3022, various commands related to the special figure 1 synchronization effect shown in FIG. 146 are created, while the lottery results are based on the second start port sensor 2012. In some cases, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect shown in FIG. 146 are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the first special symbol display is performed according to the determined special symbol variation display pattern. The lighting signal output to the first special symbol indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator 642 is set so that the indicator 641 or the second special symbol indicator 642 is lit, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above. To do. Also, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when the game state is a big hit game state, various commands (a big hit opening command, a big winning opening 1 opening Nth display command, a big winning opening 1 shown in FIG. A closing display command, a winning prize 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command), and stores them in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or opens / closes the opening / closing member 2006 to the attacker solenoid 2016 When the number of times (round) when the special winning opening 2003 is changed from the closed state to the open state is two times, the two-round display lamp 648a is set to the output of the driving signal. Set lighting signal output to 2 round display lamp 648a to light up The output information is stored in the output information storage area, or when the number of rounds is 15, the output of the lighting signal to the 15 round display lamp 648b is set so that the 15 round display lamp 648b is turned on. The output of the lighting signal to the game state display 647 is set so as to be stored in the storage area or the presence / absence of the probability variation is turned on in a predetermined color, and stored as output information in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S86, normal symbol and normal electric accessory control processing is performed (step S88). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 has been input to the input terminal. Based on this determination result, when a detection signal is input to the input terminal, the gate information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information by extracting the counter value etc. for updating the random number for determination per normal symbol described above To remember.

  This gate information storage area is provided with 0th partition to 3rd partition (four partitions), and gate information is stored in the order of 0th partition, 1st partition, 2nd partition, and 3rd partition. It is like that. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2352 is input to the input terminal, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. To do.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is in the first section of the gate information storage, The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, respectively, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when gate information is stored in the first partition to the second partition of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first partition of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th partition of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become empty areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the above-described gate is turned on so that the normal symbol storage display 646 is turned on using the total number of stored gate information as a holding ball. Based on the information, the output of the lighting signal of the normal symbol memory display 646 is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Following the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read out, and the normal design random number is extracted from the read gate information and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not it matches the determination value per normal symbol (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece 2005 is to be opened and closed is determined based on the determination result (the lottery result by the normal lottery). The variable display pattern of the normal symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the random number for the normal symbol variable display pattern described above, and various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. The output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 645 is set so that the normal symbol display 645 is turned on in accordance with the determined variation display pattern of the normal symbol as well as the transmission information storage area described above, and the output information described above Store in the output information storage area. Further, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for normal symbol determination matches the normal symbol determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the ordinary electric role effect shown in FIG. Is generated and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the output of the drive signal to the start port solenoid 2010 is set so as to open and close the movable piece 2005, and is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. . In addition, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-described normal symbol variation display pattern random numbers, and various commands classified as related to the common symbol synchronization effect shown in FIG. In addition to storing in the storage area, the output of the lighting signal to the normal symbol display 645 is set so that the normal symbol display 645 is turned on according to the determined normal symbol variation display pattern, and the output information is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information. Remember.

  Subsequent to step S88, port output processing is performed (step S90). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from the output terminal of the main control I / O port 4100b, and various signals are output based on this output information. For example, a main payout ACK signal is output to the payout control board 1186 when various commands from the payout control board 1186 are normally received from the output terminal based on the output information, or a big winning opening 2003 when the game is in the big hit gaming state. In addition to outputting a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2016 that opens and closes the opening / closing member 2006, and outputs a drive signal to the start-up solenoid 2010 that opens and closes the movable piece 2005, a 15-round big hit information output signal, Various information related to games (game information) such as 2-round jackpot information output signal, probability changing information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, normal symbol display information output signal, short and medium time information output information, start opening prize information output signal, etc. A signal is output to the payout control board 1186.

  Subsequent to step S90, peripheral control board command transmission processing is performed (step S92). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4139. In this transmission information, various commands classified in the special figure 1 tuned effect related and various types classified in the special figure 2 tuned effect related shown in FIG. Commands, various commands classified as jackpot related, various commands classified as power-on, various commands classified as related to general drawing production, various commands classified as related to ordinary electric performance, shown in FIG. Various commands classified into the notification display, various commands classified into the status display, various commands classified into the test-related, and various commands classified into others are stored.

  Subsequent to step S92, a value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL (step S94). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register WCL in step S94, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL following the value B set in step S70. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register WCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S94, the register is switched (returned) (step S96), and this routine is terminated. Here, when the main control side timer interrupt processing, which is this routine, is started, the main control MPU 4100a loads the contents of the general-purpose registers on the stack and saves them. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the main process on the main control side from being destroyed. In step S96, the contents saved on the stack are read and written to the original register. Note that the main control MPU 4100a sets the interrupt permission after the return in step S96.

[12-4. Special design and special electric accessory control processing]
Next, the special symbol and special electric accessory control process will be described with reference to FIG. The special symbol and special electric accessory control process is executed in step S86 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol and special electric accessory control process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 shown in FIG. 135 as shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not (step S100). This determination is performed by reading the presence / absence of a detection signal from the first start port 3022 in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 151 and storing it in the input information storage area of the main control internal RAM. Based on information. In step S100, input information is read from the input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022.

  When there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 in the input information in step S100, main control built-in as a transmission information is a start port winning command classified in the other shown in FIG. The information is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM (step S102), and a value indicating that a game ball has entered the first start opening 2001 shown in FIG. 97 is stored in the start opening identification area of the main control built-in RAM (step S102). S104), a start opening winning process is performed (step S106). In the start-up prize winning process, the detailed description thereof will be described later, and various random numbers described above are acquired. The value stored in the start port identification area is the game information described above, and is backed up in the main control side power-off process shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S106 or when there is no detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 in the input information in step S100, it is determined whether there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 shown in FIG. (Step S108). This determination is performed based on the input information stored in the input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM by reading the presence / absence of the detection signal from the second start port 2012 in the switch input process of step S74 in the main control side timer interrupt process. . In step S108, input information is read from this input information storage area, and it is determined whether or not there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 2012.

  When there is a detection signal from the second starter sensor 2012 in the input information in step S108, the transmission information stored in the main control built-in RAM is sent as a starter prize command classified into the other corresponding to the second starter sensor 2012 as transmission information. In the area (step S110), a value indicating that a game ball has entered the second start port 2002 shown in FIG. 97 is stored in the start port identification area of the main control built-in RAM (step S112). A winning process is performed (step S114).

  Subsequent to step S114 or when there is no detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 in the input information in step S108, the type of branching process executed in accordance with the progress of the game is designated. The value is checked (step S116). This game progress state variable is stored in the game progress state storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and is updated in each branch process executed in accordance with the progress of the game. In step S116, the process proceeds to a branch process designated based on the value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area. When the branch process is completed, this routine is terminated. The value of the game progress state variable stored in the game progress state storage area is game information and is backed up in the main control side power-off process.

  In step S116, based on the value of the game progress state variable, special symbol variation waiting processing (step S118), special symbol variation processing (step S120), special symbol jackpot determination processing (step S122), special symbol, as branch processing. Outage stop processing (step S124), special symbol big hit stop processing (step S126), interval process before opening the big winning opening (step S128), big winning opening opening process (step S130), big winning opening closing process (step S132) Alternatively, the special winning opening opening end interval process (step S134) is performed.

  In the special symbol variation waiting process in step S118, the first special symbol display shown in FIG. 133 is based on the game ball entering the first starting port 2001 and the second starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 641 and the second special symbol display unit 642 perform processing for starting the variation display of the special symbol.

  In the special symbol changing process of step S120, a process of starting the special symbol change display on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 is performed.

  In the special symbol jackpot determination process in step S122, based on the fact that a game ball has entered the first start winning prize port 2001 or the second start winning prize port 2002, it is determined whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state.

  In the special symbol losing stop processing in step S124, when the big hit gaming state is not generated, processing for stopping the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 and informing the fact, etc. I do.

  In the special symbol jackpot stop process in step S126, when the jackpot gaming state is generated, processing for stopping the special symbol variation display on the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 and informing the fact, etc. I do.

  In the interval process before opening the big winning opening in step S128, a process for notifying that the big hit gaming state is generated and the big hit operation is started is performed.

  In the big winning opening opening process of step S130, the process related to the big hit operation that makes it easy for the game ball to enter the big winning opening 2003 by changing the opening / closing member 2006 from the closed state to the open state shown in FIG. Do.

  In the large winning opening closing process in step S132, processing relating to a big hit operation that makes it difficult for a game ball to enter the large winning opening 2003 is performed by changing the open / close member 2006 from the open state to the closed state.

  In the winning opening opening end interval process in step S134, it is determined whether or not the operation has ended in a big hit, and when it has ended, a process for notifying that is performed.

[12-4-1. Processing at start-up winning a prize]
Next, the start opening winning time process will be described with reference to FIG. This start opening winning time process is executed in step S106 or step S114 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG.

  When the start opening winning process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 sets the second starting opening winning control data table as control data as shown in FIG. 154 (step S140). This second start opening winning control data table is based on the fact that the game ball that entered the second start opening 2002 shown in FIG. 97 is detected by the second start opening sensor 2012 shown in FIG. Is a data table in which the various random numbers described above used for the advancement are stored as the second start memory information, and stored in the start port winning control data storage area of the main control built-in RAM. The control data table at the time of the second start opening winning prize manages a plurality of pieces of second start storing information, and enters the second start opening 2002 with the total number of sections storing the second start storing information. It is possible to grasp the number of special symbol 2 actuated balls that are not used for game progress. In the present embodiment, the total number of sections in which the second start memory information is stored in the second start port winning time control data table is set to a total of four sections from the 0th section to the third section. The information in the data table stored in the start opening winning control data storage area is the game information described above, and is backed up in the main control side power-off process shown in FIG.

  Subsequent to step S140, it is determined whether or not a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 is input (step S142). This determination is made based on the value stored in the start port identification area of the main control built-in RAM in the process of step S104 or step S112 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. In step S142, a value is read from the start port identification area to determine whether or not there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012.

  When there is no detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 in step S142, the first start port winning time control data table is set as control data (step S144). This first start port winning control data table is based on the fact that the game ball that entered the first start port 2001 shown in FIG. 97 is detected by the first start port sensor 3022 shown in FIG. Is a data table in which the various random numbers described above used for the progress are stored as the first start storage information, and stored in the start opening prize control data storage area. The first start opening winning control data table divides and manages a plurality of first start storage information, and enters the first start opening 2001 with the total number of sections storing the first start storage information. It is possible to grasp the number of special symbol 1 operation reserved balls that are not yet used in the progress of the game. In the present embodiment, the total number of sections in which the first start memory information is stored in the first start opening winning control data table is set to a total of four sections from the zeroth section to the third section.

  Subsequent to step S144 or when there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 in step S142, the special symbol * number of suspended balls is acquired from the control data (step S146). The special symbol * "actual holding ball number" * is the first start opening prize data table set in the control data in step S144 when step S146 is performed subsequent to step S144. This means that the number of special symbol 1 operation hold balls is acquired by the total number of sections storing the first start memory information in the start opening winning time data table, whereas in step S142, from the second start opening sensor 2012. When step S146 is subsequently performed when there is a detection signal, since the second start port winning data table is set in the control data in step S140, the second start port winning data table in the second start port winning data table is set. This means that the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls is acquired by the total number of sections in which the start memory information is stored. That is, in step S146, the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls or the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls is acquired.

  It is determined whether or not the number of special symbol 1 action reserved balls or the number of special symbol 2 action reserved balls acquired in step S146 is 4 or more (step S148). This value 4 is the total number of sections in which the first start memory information is stored in the first start opening winning control data table and the section in which the second start storage information is stored in the second start opening winning control data table. The total number is the same as the value set in the present embodiment. In step S148, based on the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls or the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls, whether or not there is an empty section for storing the first start memory information in the first start port winning time control data table. It is determined whether or not there is an empty section for storing the second start memory information in the second start port winning time control data table.

  In step S148, when the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls or the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls is not 4 or more (less than 4), that is, the first start storage information is stored in the first start port winning time control data table. When there is an empty section for storing, or when there is an empty section for storing the second start memory information in the second start port winning time control data table, the big hit determination random number, for the big hit symbol A random number, a reach determination random number, and a variation pattern random number are acquired and stored in the control data (step S150). In this step S150, when the first start opening prize data table is set in the control data, the obtained various random numbers are stored in the first start opening prize data table as the first start storage information. When the second start opening prize data table is set in the control data, the obtained various random numbers are stored in the empty section of the second start opening winning data table as the second start storage information. For example, in step S150, when the first start opening prize data table is set in the control data, when the number of special symbol 1 action-reserved balls is 2 in the determination in step S148, that is, the first start opening winning prize. When the first start storage information is already stored from the 0th section to the 1st section of the hour control data table, the second section and the third section following the first section of the first start port winning time control data table Since this is an empty partition, the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern random number acquired in step S150 are stored in the second partition following the first partition. ing. As described above, in step S150, there are a plurality of empty sections from the 0th section to the 3rd section of the first start opening winning control data table or the 0th section to the 3rd section of the second starting opening winning control data table. In the case where it exists, the acquired big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, and fluctuation pattern random number are stored in the small partition number.

  Subsequent to step S150, special symbol hold identification history update processing is performed (step S152). In the special symbol hold identification history update process, the first start memory information stored in the first start port winning data table and the second start memory information stored in the second start port winning data table are mutually connected. A history of the order in which the information is stored is created and stored in the hold identification history storage area of the main control built-in RAM as start port identification history information.

  Subsequent to step S152, storage prefetch processing is performed (step S154), and this routine is terminated. Although detailed description will be given later in this storage prefetch process, when the process is started, the type of effect is determined based on the various random numbers acquired in step S150 that are not yet used for the progress of the game at this time. By doing so, the player is notified of information about the various random numbers acquired (for example, jackpot and reach out) before the game effect that the acquired random numbers are actually used for the progress of the game is performed. In other words, in the memory prefetching process, the various random numbers acquired in step S150 that have not been used yet for the progress of the game are prefetched to determine the type of the prefetch effect, and the acquired various random numbers actually contribute to the progress of the game. By performing the pre-reading effect determined before performing the game effect to be used, the player is notified of information regarding the various random numbers that have been acquired.

  On the other hand, when the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls is 4 or more in step S148, that is, the special symbol 1 operation reservation balls number is a free space for storing the first start memory information in the first start port winning time control data table. When there is no remaining or when the number of special symbol 2 operation holding balls is 4 or more, that is, when there is no empty section for storing the second start memory information in the second start opening winning control data table This routine is finished as it is.

  In the present embodiment, when the start opening winning process is started, first, the second start opening winning control data table is set as control data in step S140, and then in step S142, the second start opening sensor 2012 is set. In the determination, if there is no detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2012, the control data table for setting the first starting port winning prize is set as control data in step S144 (flow). ). That is, the presence / absence of a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 is determined, and after this determination, the control flow branches to two flows and is used as control data in the first start port winning control data table or the second starting port winning control. There is no flow of setting the data table. This is because the pachinko gaming machine 1 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to noise caused by electrostatic discharge of the game ball, and the main control board 4100 is one of the important control boards for controlling the progress of the game. This is part of noise countermeasures. If this determination is skipped when the presence or absence of a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 happens to be affected by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, the two flows after this determination It is impossible to branch to the first start port winning control data table and the second starting port winning control data table as control data, and the first start memory information or the second start can be set. This is a disadvantageous situation for the player that the stored information is not stored. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, even if the determination in step S142 happens to be influenced by noise due to electrostatic discharge of the game ball, the control data table at the time of winning the second start opening is already set as control data in step S140. Therefore, it is not disadvantageous for the player by being stored as at least the second start storage information.

  Further, in the present embodiment, in the special symbol hold identification history update process in step S152, the first start memory information stored in the first start port winning data table and the second start port winning data table are stored. The second start memory information and the order in which they are stored are created in the order history, but other specifications that are used for the progress of the game using this created history It has been introduced to share processing with pachinko machines. In the present embodiment, as will be described later, the second start storage information has a specification that is used for the progress of the game in preference to the first start storage information, and therefore the second start storage information is based on the history created in step S152. Although the second start memory information and the first start memory information are not used for the progress of the game, whether or not the first start memory information and the second start memory information are stored in the created history in the special symbol change waiting process described later It is used for the judgment.

[12-4-2. Prefetch processing]
Next, the storage prefetch process will be described with reference to FIGS. 155 and 156. This storage prefetching process is executed in step S154 in the start opening prize winning process shown in FIG. In the storage prefetching process, the prefetching effect is determined by determining whether the prefetching effect is won or lost based on the values of the jackpot determination random number and the reach determination random number. At this time, the big hit determination random number is not compared by referring to the big hit range stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM described above, but the lottery determination range in which the same range as the big hit range is set in advance is main controlled. Reference is made from the built-in ROM. In other words, the jackpot range stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM is referred to in the special symbol variation waiting process of step S118 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. Thus, the lottery determination range stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM is referred to in the storage prefetching process which is this routine. At the time of non-probability change, the lottery determination range is set to a value 32668 to a value 32767, similarly to the big hit range. The non-probable variation lower limit value NV-LOW is the same value as the non-probable variation lower limit value ORG-NV-LOW (value 32668) of the big hit range, and the lottery determination range upper limit value V-UPP is the upper limit value of the big hit range This is the same value as ORG-V-UPP (upper limit value of random number for jackpot determination (value 32767)). In addition, for the preliminary range that is continuous with the lottery determination range, the upper limit value is set to a value that continues to a value 32667 that is one smaller than the value of the uncertain variation lower limit value NV-LOW (value 32668) of the lottery determination range, The range is set to value 32667 to value 32665. Thus, “preliminary range” + “lottery determination range” at the time of uncertain change is a value that continues from value 32265 to value 32767. Further, at the time of probability change, the lottery determination range is set to a value 32438 to a value 32767, similarly to the big hit range. The probability variation lower limit PV-LOW is the same as the value of the jackpot range probability variation lower limit value ORG-PV-LOW (value 32438), and the lottery determination range upper limit value V-UPP is the jackpot range upper limit value ORG-. It is the same value as V-UPP (upper limit value of random number for jackpot determination (value 32767)). In addition, for the preliminary range that is continuous with the lottery determination range, the upper limit value is set to a value that continues to a value 32437 that is one smaller than the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW value (value 32438) of the lottery determination range. The range is set to value 32437 to value 32435. Thus, “preliminary range” + “lottery determination range” at the time of probability change is a value that continues from value 32435 to value 32767.

  When the storage prefetching process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 is input, as shown in FIGS. 155 and 156. (Step S160). This determination is made based on the value stored in the start port identification area of the main control built-in RAM in the process of step S104 or step S112 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. In step S160, a value is read from this start port identification area to determine whether or not there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012.

  When there is no detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 in step S160, it is determined whether or not the time is short (step S162). This determination is performed based on the game information set in the special symbol variation waiting process of step S118 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG. As described above, this game information is stored in the main control built-in RAM. In step S162, based on the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM, the value of the short time flag is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the short time gaming state is occurring as the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1. judge.

  If it is not time-saving in step S162, it is determined whether or not a big hit is being made (step S164). This determination is made based on the game information set in the special symbol variation waiting process of step S118 in the special symbol and special electric equipment control process. In step S162, the value of the big hit flag is acquired based on the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM, and whether the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is a big hit gaming state (is a big hit) Determine whether or not.

  When it is a big hit in step S164 or when there is a detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 in step 160, a big hit determination random number is acquired from the control data (step S166). This control data is the second start opening prize data table set in step S140 in the start opening winning prize process or the first start opening prize data table set in step S144. In step S166, in step S150 of the start opening winning time process, the 0th section to the 3rd section of the first start opening winning control data table, or the 0th section to the third section of the second starting opening winning control data table. If there are multiple vacant partitions before, a big hit determination random number is obtained from the stored random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern random number) with the smaller block number To do. For example, when the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are stored in the second section of the first start opening winning prize control data table in step 150, this second Get the jackpot determination random number stored in the partition.

  Subsequent to step S166, based on the value of the probability variation flag, it is determined whether or not a probability variation has occurred in the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 (step S168). This determination is made based on the game information set in the special symbol variation waiting process of step S118 in the special symbol and special electric equipment control process. In step S162, based on the game information stored in the main control built-in RAM, the value of the probability variation flag is acquired to determine whether or not the game state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 has a probability variation. To do.

  When the value of the probability variation flag indicates non-probability change in step S168, that is, when the probability fluctuation has not occurred in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (during non-probability change), the jackpot determination obtained in step S166 It is determined whether or not the random number is greater than or equal to the uncertain variation lower limit value NV-LOW (step S170).

  On the other hand, when the value of the probability change flag indicates the probability change in step S168, that is, when the probability fluctuation is occurring in the pachinko gaming machine 1 (at the time of probability change), the jackpot determination obtained in step S166. It is determined whether or not the random number is greater than or equal to the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW (step S174).

  When the big hit determination random number is greater than or equal to the non-probable variation lower limit value NV-LOW in step S170, or when the big hit determination random number is greater than or equal to the probable variation lower limit value PV-LOW in step S172, the big hit determination random number is the upper limit value V−. It is determined whether or not it is greater than or equal to UPP (step S174). In the present embodiment, the gaming state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is branched into two flows: a state in which a probability variation has occurred and a state in which no probability variation has occurred. On the other hand, in the determination of the upper limit value of the jackpot determination random number, a common value called the upper limit value V-UPP is used. Note that the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW is set to a value larger than the non-accuracy variation lower limit NV-LOW and smaller than the upper limit V-UPP. That is, the non-probable variation lower limit value NV-LOW <the probability variation lower limit value PV-LOW <the upper limit value V-UPP.

  When the big hit determination random number is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value V-UPP in step S174, that is, when the big hit determination random number is within the lottery determination range, it is determined that the pre-reading effect is won and the big hit is determined from the control data. A design random number is acquired (step S176). As described above, this control data is the second start port winning time data table set in step S140 in the start port winning time processing or the first start port winning time data table set in step S144. In step S176, as in step S166, in step S150 of the start opening winning time process, the 0th to 3rd sections of the first starting opening winning control data table, or the second start opening winning control data table. When there are a plurality of empty sections from the 0 section to the 3rd section, from the stored random numbers (random number for big hit determination, random number for big hit symbol, random number for reach determination, random number for fluctuation pattern) to the one with a small division number Get random numbers for jackpot symbol. For example, when the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are stored in the second section of the first start opening winning prize control data table in step 150, this second Get the jackpot symbol random number stored in the section.

  Subsequent to step S176, prefetch effect type determination processing based on the jackpot symbol random number is performed (step S178). In the prefetch effect type determination process based on the jackpot symbol random number, the prefetch effect type determination process is performed based on the jackpot symbol random number acquired in step S176. In the present embodiment, a plurality of types of prefetch effects are prepared, and a plurality of patterns are prepared for one type of prefetch effects. For this reason, in this embodiment, about 400 patterns of prefetching effects are prepared.

  On the other hand, when the big hit determination random number is not greater than or equal to the non-probable variation lower limit NV-LOW in step S170, or when the big hit determination random number is not greater than or equal to the probable variation lower limit PV-LOW in step S172. Alternatively, when the value is equal to or greater than the upper limit value V-UPP in step S174, that is, when the big hit determination random number is not within the lottery determination range (out of the lottery determination range), the reach determination random number is acquired from the control data (step S180). ). As described above, this control data is the second start port winning time data table set in step S140 in the start port winning time processing or the first start port winning time data table set in step S144. In step S180, similarly to step S166, in step S150 in the start opening winning time process, the 0th to 3rd sections of the first starting opening winning control data table, or the second start opening winning control data table. When there are a plurality of empty sections from the 0th section to the third section, from the stored various random numbers (big hit determination random number, big hit symbol random number, reach determination random number, variation pattern random number) Get a random number for reach determination. For example, when the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are stored in the second section of the first start opening winning prize control data table in step 150, this second Get the reach determination random number stored in the partition.

  Following step S180, based on the reach determination random number acquired in step S180, it is determined whether or not to perform reach (reach off) (step S182). In this determination, it is determined whether the acquired reach determination random number is a value within the reach determination range.

  If the reach determination random number is a value within the reach determination range in step S182, the prefetch effect type determination process based on the reach determination random number is performed (step S184). In the type determination process of the prefetch effect based on the reach determination random number, the big hit determination random number is a value continuous with the non-probability lower limit NV-LOW of the lottery determination range at the time of non-probability change, and the non-probability change lower limit NV-LOW. When the value is within the preliminary range (value 32665 to value 32667) having a smaller value as the upper limit value, or a value that is continuous with the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW of the lottery determination range at the time of probability variation, the probability variation lower limit value PV-LOW One of the types of prefetching effects determined in the prefetching effect type determination process based on the big hit symbol random number in step S178 when it is within the preliminary range (value 32435 to value 32437) with the smaller value as the upper limit. While the process of determining the type of pre-reading effect is performed, the non-probability variation lower limit NV-LOW of the lottery determination range when the big hit determination random number is uncertain When the value is not within the preliminary range (value 32665 to value 32667) that is a continuous value and smaller than the non-probable change lower limit value NV-LOW, or the probability change lower limit value PV-LOW of the lottery determination range at the time of probability change When the value is not within the preliminary range (value 32435 to value 32437) that is a continuous value and smaller than the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW, the prefetch effect is based on the reach determination random number acquired in step S180. Process to determine the type.

  Subsequent to step S178 or step S184, a random number for variation pattern is acquired from the control data (step S186). As described above, this control data is the second start port winning time data table set in step S140 in the start port winning time processing or the first start port winning time data table set in step S144. In step S186, similarly to step S166, step S176, or step S180, in step S150 in the start opening winning time process, the 0th section to the 3rd section of the first start opening winning control data table, or the second start opening When there are a plurality of empty sections in the winning control data table from the 0th section to the 3rd section, various stored random numbers (a big hit determination random number, a big hit design random number, a reach determination random number) , Random number for variation pattern) is obtained from (random number for variation pattern). For example, when the big hit determination random number, the big hit symbol random number, the reach determination random number, and the variation pattern random number are stored in the second section of the first start opening winning prize control data table in step 150, this second Get random numbers for variation pattern stored in the partition.

  Subsequent to step S188, based on the prefetching effect determined in step S188, the special symbol * memorized prefetching command and special symbol * memory command shown in FIG. Each is set in the transmission information storage area of the control built-in RAM (step S190), and this routine is terminated. The special symbol * memorized prefetch effect command and the special symbol * memorized command "*" are the special symbol 1 memorized prefetched effect determined in step S188 based on the first starting memorized information in the data table at the time of the first medal opening prize. This means that a command is created and a special symbol 1 storage command is created and set as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Based on the second start storage information, the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command determined in step S188 is created, and the special symbol 2 storage command is created and transmitted as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It means to set each.

  On the other hand, if the time is short in step S162, or if it is a big hit in step S164, or if the reach determination random number is a value outside the reach determination range in step S182, it is deselected for the prefetch effect. Since it is determined that the pre-reading effect is not performed as a thing (as if it is out of the pre-reading effect lottery), the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command are not created in step S190. A symbol * storage command is created, set as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, and this routine is terminated.

[12-5. Special symbol waiting process]
Next, the special symbol variation waiting process will be described with reference to FIG. This special symbol variation waiting process is executed in step S118 in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process shown in FIG.

  When the special symbol variation waiting process is started, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines whether or not the value stored in the special symbol hold identification history area is not zero (value 0) as shown in FIG. Is determined (step S200). This determination is made based on the start opening identification history information stored in the hold identification history storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the special symbol hold identification history update process of step S152 in the start opening winning process shown in FIG. The start port identification history information includes the first start memory information stored in the first start port winning data table and the second start memory information stored in the second start port winning data table. It shows the history of the order in which the data are stored in the order. In step S200, based on the total number of the first start memory information and the second start memory information stored in the start port identification history information, when the total number is zero (value 0), the first start memory is stored in the start port identification history information. While it is determined that no information or second start memory information is stored, the first start memory information or the second start memory information is stored in the start port identification history information when the total number is not zero (value 0). Is determined.

  When the value stored in the special symbol hold identification history area is zero (value 0) in step S200, that is, no first start memory information or second start memory information is stored in the start port identification history information. Sometimes, the routine is terminated as it is, but when the value stored in the special symbol hold identification history area is not zero (value 0) in step S200, that is, the first start memory information or the second start is included in the start port identification history information. When the stored information is stored, the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set as variation setting data (step S202). This special symbol 2 variation setting data is set with an address indicating the 0th section among the 0th section to the 4th section of the second start opening winning control data table stored in the starting opening winning control data storage area described above. Is done.

  Subsequent to step S202, the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls is acquired (step S204). As described above, the special symbol 2 operation reserved ball number is acquired by the total number of sections storing the second start memory information in the second start port winning time data table.

  Subsequent to step S204, it is determined whether or not the acquired number of special symbol 2 action reserved balls is zero (value 0) (step S206). This determination is performed based on the total number of partitions in which the second start memory information acquired in step S204 is stored. When the total number is not zero (value 0), the second start memory information is stored, so FIG. While the game ball that entered the second starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 4 is grasped that there is a special symbol 2 operation holding ball number that has not yet been used for the progress of the game, when the total number is zero (value 0) Since the two start memory information is not stored, it is grasped that there is no special symbol 2 operation holding ball number that the game ball that has entered the second start port 2002 is not yet used for the progress of the game.

  When the number of the special symbol 2 operation reserved balls acquired in step S206 is zero (value 0), that is, the game balls that have entered the second starting port 2002 are not yet used for the progress of the game. When there is no number, special symbol 1 variation setting data is set as variation setting data (step S208). This special symbol 1 variation setting data is set with an address indicating the 0th section among the 0th section to the 4th section of the first start opening winning control data table stored in the above starting opening winning control data storage area. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the number of special symbol 2 action hold balls acquired in step S206 is not zero (value 0), that is, the game balls that have entered the second start port 2002 are not yet used for the progress of the game. When there is a ball number or following step S208, the holding history is shifted (step S210). In step S210, when the special symbol 2 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data in step S202, the 0th section according to the address indicating the 0th section of the second starting port winning time control data table set in the fluctuation setting data. Is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, and the second start storage information is stored in the first to third sections, the section number becomes smaller. As described above, the second start memory information stored in each section number is shifted. For example, when the second start memory information is stored in the first section, the second start memory information is shifted from the first section to the zeroth section, or the second start memory information is stored in the second section. When the second start memory information is shifted from the second section to the first section, or when the second start memory information is stored in the third section, the second start memory information is transferred from the third section to the first section. Shift to 2 sections. In step S210, when the special symbol 1 fluctuation setting data is set as the fluctuation setting data in step S208, the first symbol according to the address indicating the 0th section of the first start opening winning control data table set in the fluctuation setting data is used. When the first start memory information stored in the zero section is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, and the first start memory information is stored in the first section to the third section, the section number is The first start memory information stored in each section number is shifted so as to be smaller. For example, when the first start memory information is stored in the first section, the first start memory information is shifted from the first section to the zeroth section, or the first start memory information is stored in the second section. When the first start memory information is shifted from the second section to the first section, or when the first start memory information is stored in the third section, the first start memory information is transferred from the third section to the first section. Shift to 2 sections.

  Following step S210, a special symbol / flag setting process is performed (step S210). In this special symbol / flag setting process, the value of the big hit determination random number is extracted based on the first start memory information or the second start memory information shifted to the work area in step S210, and stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance. It is determined whether or not the value is within a big hit range (determining whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state) (referred to as "special lottery"), and whether or not it matches the small hit value Or the value of the big hit symbol random number is taken out to determine whether or not it matches the probability variation determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM (determination of whether or not to generate a probability variation). Here, “probability fluctuation” means that the probability of big hit is set higher than normal time (also referred to as non-probability change. The probability of big hit set in normal time (non-probability change) is called low probability). The above-mentioned jackpot range is read from the normal time determination table at low probability (at the time of non-probability change), while it is at high probability (at the time of probability change). In this case, it is read from the probability variation determination table. Also, in the special symbol / flag setting process, the short game when the variation time of the special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display 641 and the second special symbol display 642 shown in FIG. 133 is set shorter than the normal time. When the state is generated, the value 1 (short time medium) is set as the value of the short time flag, and when the short time gaming state is not generated, the value 0 (non-short time medium) is set as the value of the short time flag. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the value 1 is set as the value of the big hit flag when the big hit gaming state is generated, and the value 0 is set as the value of the big hit flag when the big hit gaming state is not generated. In the special symbol / flag setting process, the value 1 (probability variation) is set as the value of the probability variation flag when the probability variation is generated, and the value 0 (non-probability variation) is set as the value of the probability variation flag when the probability variation is not generated. ) Is set.

  Subsequent to step S210, special symbol variation pattern setting processing is performed (step S212), and this routine is terminated. In this special symbol variation pattern setting process, the first special symbol display 641 or the second special symbol display 642 varies based on the first start memory information or the second start memory information shifted to the work area in step S210. A variation pattern to be displayed is set, and various commands classified as related to special effects shown in FIG. 146 or related to effects as shown in FIG. 2 are stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  In this embodiment, after setting the special symbol 2 variation setting data as variation setting data in step S202, it is determined in step S206 whether or not the number of special symbol 2 operation suspension balls is zero (value 0). In this determination, when the number of special symbol 2 operation reservation balls is zero (value 0), the flow is to set special symbol 1 variation setting data as variation setting data in step S206. That is, when the number of special symbol 2 operation reserved balls is not zero (value 0), the special symbol 2 variation setting data set as the variation setting data in step S202 is given priority regardless of the presence of the special symbol 1 operation retention balls. Subsequent processing proceeds based on (second start memory information stored in the 0th section to the 4th section of the second start port winning time control data table). Such processing from step S202 to step S208 is referred to as “priority variation processing”.

[13. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 1186 will be described with reference to FIGS. 158 to 161. First, the payout control unit power-on process will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 158 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process of the payout control unit, FIG. 159 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process of the payout control unit in FIG. 158, and FIG. FIG. 161 is a flowchart showing an example of a payout control unit timer interrupt process.

[13-1. Discharge control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 1186 performs a payout control unit power-on process as shown in FIGS. When the payout control unit power-on process is started, the payout control MPU 4110a sets an interrupt mode (step S300). This interrupt mode is for setting the priority order of the interrupt of the payout control MPU 4110a. In this embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, the process is preferentially performed.

  Subsequent to step S300, input / output setting (I / O input / output setting) is performed (step S302). In this I / O input / output setting, the I / O port input / output setting of the payout control MPU 4110a is performed.

  Following step S302, wait timer processing 1 is performed (step S304). The voltage does not increase immediately from when the power is turned on until the voltage reaches the predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage decreases. Input from the circuit 4100d. A power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 4100d when the voltage is equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to a predetermined voltage. Therefore, in the wait timer process 1, after the power is turned on, the process waits until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage. In this embodiment, 200 milliseconds (ms) is set as the waiting time (wait timer).

  Subsequent to step S304, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a is operated (step S306). This determination is made based on whether or not the RAM clear switch 624a of the main control board 4100 is operated and an operation signal (detection signal) is input to the payout control MPU 4110a. When the detection signal is input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 624a is operated. On the other hand, when the detection signal is not input, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 624a is not operated.

  When the RAM clear switch 624a is operated in step S306, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value 1 (step S308). On the other hand, when the RAM clear switch 624a is not operated in step S306, the payout A value 0 is set to the RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S310). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”) built in the payout control MPU 4110a, for example, stored in various flags and various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the CR communication information storage area) Flag indicating whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is set) is to be deleted. When not deleted, the value is set to 0. The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in step S308 and step S310 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 4110a.

  Subsequent to step S308 or step S310, setting is made to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S312). With this setting, the payout control built-in RAM can be accessed, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S312, the stack pointer is set (step S314). The stack pointer indicates, for example, the address accumulated on the stack to temporarily store the contents of the memory element (register) being used, or temporarily returns the return address of this routine when returning to this routine after completing the subroutine. It indicates the address that has been stacked on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S314, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and the contents of the register, the return address, etc. are loaded on the stack from this initial address. Then, the stack pointer returns to the initial address by sequentially reading from the last stacked stack to the first stacked stack.

  Subsequent to step S314, it is determined whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 (step S316). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to a value of 1 when the payout information is erased and to a value of 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  When the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is 0 in step S316, that is, when the payout information is not deleted, a checksum is calculated (step S318). This checksum calculates the sum by regarding the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S318, it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off process (power-off) described later (step S320). . If they match, it is determined whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is 1 (step S322). This payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and checksum value is stored in the payout control built-in RAM in the payout control unit power-off process described later. A value of 1 is set when the control unit power-off process is normally terminated, and a value of 0 is set when the payout control unit power-off process is not normally terminated.

  When the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 in step S322, that is, when the payout control unit power-off process is normally terminated, the work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as power recovery (step S324). In this setting, in addition to setting the payout backup flag HBK-FLG to a value of 0, the power recovery time information is read from a ROM built in the payout control MPU 4110a (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”). The power recovery information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. Accordingly, the above-mentioned payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, etc. (for example, prizes stored in the prize ball information storage area, PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, and the like, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of inconsistency counter reset determination time (stored in the time management information storage area). Note that “recovery” refers to a state in which power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power interruption in addition to a state in which the power is turned on from a state in which the power is shut off.

  On the other hand, when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S316, that is, when the payout information is erased, or when the checksum values do not match in step S320, or step If the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in S322, that is, if the payout control unit power-off process has not ended normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S326). ). As a result, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is cleared.

  Following step S326, a work area of the payout control built-in RAM is set as an initial setting (step S328). In this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S324 or step S328, interrupt initialization is performed (step S330). This setting is to set an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process to be described later is performed. In this embodiment, it is set to 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S330, interrupt permission setting is performed (step S332). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeated every interrupt cycle set in step S330, that is, every 1.75 ms.

  Subsequent to step S332, it is determined whether or not a power failure notice signal is input (step S334). As described above, when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is cut off, or when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is displayed as a power failure monitoring circuit 4100d on the main control board 4100. It is input from. The determination in step S334 is made based on this power failure notice signal.

  If no power failure warning signal is input in step S334, it is determined whether or not the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 (step S336). This 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process processed every 1.75 ms, which will be described later. The value is set to 0 when 75 ms has not elapsed.

  When the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0 in step S336, that is, when 1.75 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S334 to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input.

  On the other hand, when the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1 in step S336, that is, when 1.75 ms has elapsed, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is set to 0 (step S338) and the external watchdog is set. An external WDT clear signal is output to the timer (external WDT) 4110c (turned ON, step S340). This external WDT 4110c monitors the operation (system) of the payout control MPU 4110a, and outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4110a and the payout control I / O port 4110b when the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time. To reset (periodically diagnosing whether the system of the payout control MPU 4110a is out of control).

  Subsequent to step S340, port output processing is performed (step S342). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information for notifying that various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 145) have been received normally, payout motor 815 Various information such as drive information for performing drive control, prize ball information on the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 815, LED display information displayed on the error LED display 4130, and the like are stored. When various commands relating to payout from the main control board 4100 are normally received from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b based on the output information, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 4100 or the payout motor 815 The number of balls that the payout motor 815 actually pays out the game ball is used as the award ball number information signal. Error LED (in this embodiment, every time the payout motor 815 actually pays out 10 game balls, a prize ball number information signal is output to the external terminal plate 1150a). A display signal is output to the display 4130.

  Subsequent to step S342, port input processing is performed (step S344). In this port input process, various signals input to the input terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal of the error release switch 4131, a detection signal from the rotation angle switch 855, a detection signal from the counting switch 812, a detection signal from the full switch 916, a BRQ signal from the CR unit, a BRDY signal, and a CR connection signal, The main payment board ACK signal from the main control board 4100 that informs that the main control board 4100 has normally received various commands transmitted in the command transmission process described later is read and stored as input information in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S344, timer update processing is performed (step S346). In this timer update process, when determining whether or not the above-described sprocket 807 is in a stagnation state, the sphere detection time set as the determination condition and the fixed position determination of the sprocket 807 are not performed. The skip determination time set at the time, the ball removal determination time set when the game balls stored in the prize ball tank 720 and the tank rail member 740 are discharged, and the full tank unit 900 is a game ball. When determining whether or not the vehicle is full, the full tank determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 by the detection signal from the ball break switch 778 is determined. In addition to performing time management such as the ball breakage determination time set as the determination condition when determining whether or not the number is over a predetermined number, Whether the number of game balls received and paid out in the recesses of the card 807 and the number of balls actually detected by the counting switch 812 are repeatedly paid out due to a mismatch. When determining whether or not to reset the inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not, the determination condition and the inconsistency counter reset determination time set are managed. For example, when the sphere collision determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interruption period is set to 1.75 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the sphere collision determination time is subtracted by 1.75 ms. Since the subtraction result is a value of 0, the sphere collision determination time is accurately measured.

  In this embodiment, the skip determination time is 22.75 ms, the ball removal determination time is 60060 ms, the full tank determination time is 504 ms, the ball breakage determination time is 119 ms, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time is 7000 s (about 2 hours). Each time this timer update process is performed, the ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball shortage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are subtracted by 1.75 ms, and the subtraction result becomes 0. The ball removal determination time, the full tank determination time, the ball breakage determination time, and the inconsistency counter reset determination time are accurately measured. These various determination times are stored as time management information in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Following step S346, CR communication processing is performed (step S348). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on this input information, whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. Based on various signals from the CR unit, the payout control MPU 4110a exchanges various signals with the CR unit. In the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S324, as described above, the various flags that are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM and the various information stored in the various information storage areas. (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area, etc. Information to be used for various processes is set based on payout information relating to payout of PRDY signal output setting information or the like in which the logic state of the signal is set. By this process, for example, even if there is a momentary power failure or a power failure, values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, and the inconsistency counter INCC at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. The value of the award ball stock number PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure can be restored. As a result, when the game ball payout operation by the prize ball unit 800 is being executed, even if it becomes impossible to continue the payout operation due to a momentary power failure or power failure, the payout operation should be continued at the time of power recovery. Therefore, the game balls can be paid out to the storage tray 311 without excess or deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 4110a exchanges various signals with the CR unit, and when the game ball is paid out to the storage tray 311, the payout control MPU 4110a causes an instantaneous power failure or a power failure to send the CR unit and various signals. Even if the exchange is interrupted and it is not possible to continue paying out the game ball, the values of the prize ball stock PBS, the real ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the inconsistency counter INCC, etc. at the time of power recovery are paid out. Immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure stored as backup information, it is restored to values such as the prize ball stock number PBS, actual ball count PB, drive command number DRV, inconsistency counter INCC, etc., thereby causing a momentary power failure or power failure. The exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit immediately before the power recovery It is possible to continue, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls. As described above, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or stop at the time of power recovery even if the power outage stops or stops. Thus, various signals from the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of the exchange of various signals between the pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) and the CR unit can be improved. Various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information as described above. In the CR communication process, when power is restored, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the process of setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S324. When the read PRDY signal output setting information is set to the logic state of the PRDY signal that indicates that the payout operation for paying out the rented ball is not possible, for example, the PRDY signal is paid out. Output from the output terminal of the I / O port 4110b to the CR unit. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC in the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM, which is included in the payout backup information, for example, in the retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main action setting process Is determined whether the value of the mismatch counter INCC is smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH. If the value of the mismatch counter INCC is not smaller than the mismatch threshold INCTH, the retry operation is abnormal. In other words, it is determined that the game ball payout operation by the winning ball unit 800 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, and in the payout ball removal determination setting process, For example, if you are not communicating with the CR unit, pay a rental ball as an error status output setting to the CR unit. The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting. As a result, in the CR communication processing, at the next timer interruption from the time of power recovery, the logic state of this PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is read from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b. Output to CR unit. Thus, for example, if the game ball payout operation by the prize ball unit 800 is in an abnormal state immediately before the momentary power failure, the state is restored at the time of power recovery. At an early stage, a PRDY signal can be output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b to the CR unit to notify that the payout operation for paying out the ball is impossible. The fact that the game ball payout operation by 800 is in an abnormal state can be notified. As a result, it is possible to prevent the BRDY, which is a useless rental request signal from the CR unit, from being output at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery. In the CR communication process, when the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM and the logic is HI based on the CR connection signal in the port input process of step S344, that is, a pachinko machine. When the power supply 1 is turned on and the payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are electrically connected via the CR unit terminal board 1150b, a payout operation for paying out the rental ball is possible. In order to convey the fact, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to HI and output from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, the pachinko machine 1 is turned on. The payout control board 1186 and the CR unit are electrically connected via the CR unit terminal board 1150b. When it is not connected to the terminal, in order to notify that the payout operation for paying out the rental ball is impossible, the logic state of the PRDY signal is set to LOW from the output terminal of the payout control I / O port 4110b to the CR unit. Output. The logical state of the EXS signal that indicates that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as EXS signal output setting information, and the payout control board 1186 A CR connection signal that tells whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S348, a full tank and out-of-ball check process is performed (step S350). In this full tank and out-of-ball check process, input information is read from the above-mentioned input information storage area, and based on this input information, the above-described full tank unit 900 is filled with a game ball based on a detection signal from the full tank switch 916. It is determined whether or not the number of game balls taken into the above-described ball path unit 770 by the detection signal from the ball break switch 778 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number. . For example, whether or not the full tank unit 900 is full of game balls is determined by detecting from the full tank switch 916 in the current full tank and out-of-ball check process using a timer interruption period of 1.75 ms. When the signal is ON and the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is OFF in the previous full (1.75 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 transitions from OFF to ON. When this is done, the timer update process in step S346 starts counting the full tank determination time (504 ms) described above. When the full tank determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is ON in this full tank and out-of-ball check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is ON, the full tank information indicating that the full tank unit 900 is full of game balls is stored in the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank switch 916 is OFF, the full tank information notifying that the full tank unit 900 is not full of game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  Whether or not the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 is equal to or greater than a predetermined number is also determined by the timer full cycle and the ball shortage check process using the timer interruption period 1.75 ms. When the detection signal from the switch is ON, the detection signal from the ball break switch is OFF in the previous full (1.75 ms before) full ball and ball break check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball break switch 778 is OFF. When transitioning to ON, the timer update process in step S346 starts counting the ball breakage determination time (119 ms) described above. When the ball breakage determination time becomes 0 in the timer update process, that is, when the ball breakage determination time is reached, whether or not the detection signal from the ball breakage switch 778 is ON in this full tank and ball breakage check process. Determine whether. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 778 is ON, the ball break information for notifying that the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number is stored in the state information storage area. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the ball break switch 778 is OFF, the ball break information indicating that the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 is not equal to or greater than the predetermined number is stored in the state information storage area. To remember.

  Following step S350, command reception processing is performed (step S352). In this command reception process, various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 (award ball command and self-check command shown in FIG. 145) are received. When the various commands are normally received, the payer ACK information indicating that is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when various commands cannot be received normally, a connection abnormality that indicates that an abnormality has occurred in the connection between the main control board 4100 and the payout control board 1186 (an abnormality has occurred in various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Following step S352, command analysis processing is performed (step S354). In this command analysis processing, the command received in step S352 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S354, main operation setting processing is performed (step S356). In this main motion setting process, motion settings such as winning balls, lending balls, ball removal and ball scooping are performed, retry operation determination is performed, and the number of unpaid balls (prize ball stock number) is monitored. To do.

  Following step S356, LED display data creation processing is performed (step S358). In this LED display data creation process, various types of information are read from the state information storage area described above, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 4130 of the payout control board 1186 is created, and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area described above. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned ball piece information is read from the state information storage area, and when the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on this piece of ball information, the corresponding display data (this embodiment In the embodiment, a display value 1 (number “1”) is created and LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Following step S358, command transmission processing is performed (step S360). In this command transmission process, various information is read from the state information storage area described above, and various commands (frame state 1 command, error release navigation command, and frame are classified into the state display shown in FIG. 148 based on the various information. (State 2 command) is created and transmitted to the main control board 4100. For example, when the piece of ball information is read from the state information storage area, a frame state 1 command is created when the number of game balls taken into the ball passage unit 770 is not equal to or greater than a predetermined number based on the piece of ball information. Or transmitted to the main control board 4100.

  Subsequent to step S360, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external watchdog timer (external WDT) 4110c is stopped (turns OFF, step S362). As a result, the external WDT 4110c is cleared so that the payout control MPU 4110a and the payout control I / O port 4110b are not reset. The external WDT 4110c starts measuring the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped.

  Following step S362, the process returns to step S334 again to determine whether or not a power failure warning signal is input. If this power failure warning signal is not input, the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 in step S336. When the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 1.75 ms elapses, the value 0 is set in the 1.75 ms elapse flag HT-FLG in step S338. In step S340, an external WDT clear signal is output (ON) to the external WDT 4110c, port output processing is performed in step S342, port input processing is performed in step S344, timer update processing is performed in step S346, and CR communication is performed in step S348. Processing, and in step S350, a full tank and out of ball check process is performed. In step S352, command reception processing is performed. In step S354, command analysis processing is performed. In step S356, main operation setting processing is performed. In step S358, LED display data creation processing is performed. In step S360, command transmission processing is performed. In step S362, the output of the external WDT clear signal to the external WDT 4110c is stopped (OFF), and steps S334 to S362 are repeated. The processing from step S334 to step S362 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  Depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 4100, the processing content of the payout control unit main process varies. For this reason, the time required for processing of the payout control MPU 4110a varies. Therefore, the payout control MPU 4110a preferentially outputs to the main control board 4100 a payer ACK signal notifying that various commands related to payout from the main control board 4100 have been normally received in the port output processing of step S342. Yes. As a result, the payout control MPU 4110a secures the processing time so that other fluctuating processes can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, when a power failure warning signal is input in step S334, interrupt prohibition setting is performed (step S364). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the payout information described above is protected. Subsequent to step S364, output of the drive signal to the payout motor 815 is stopped (step S366). Thereby, payout of the game ball is stopped. Subsequent to step S366, an external WDT clear signal is output to the external WDT 4110c and the output is stopped (ON / OFF, step S368). As a result, the external WDT 4110c is cleared. Subsequent to step S368, a checksum is calculated and the calculated value is stored (step S370). This checksum is calculated by regarding the payout information in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as a numerical value, excluding the storage area for the checksum value calculated in step S318 and the payout backup flag HBK-FLG. Subsequent to step S370, the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is set to a value of 1. (Step S372) Thereby, storage of the payout backup information is completed. Subsequent to step S372, prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM is set (step S374). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited and writing and reading cannot be performed, and payout backup information stored in the payout control internal RAM is protected. Following step S374, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the clear signal is not turned ON / OFF to the external WDT 4110c. Therefore, the external WDT 4110c outputs a reset signal to the payout control MPU 4110a and the payout control I / O port 4110b to reset it. Thereafter, the payout control MPU 4110a performs this payout control unit power-on process again. The processing from step S364 to step S374 and the infinite loop are referred to as “payout control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 (payout control MPU 4110a) is reset when a power failure occurs or when an instantaneous power failure occurs, and a payout control unit power-on process is performed by subsequent power recovery.

  In step S320, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal. In step S322, whether or not the payout control unit power-off process has been normally completed. Are inspected. In this way, by checking the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM twice, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information is stored by fraud.

[13-2. Payment control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt process will be described. This payout control unit timer interrupt process is repeatedly performed every interrupt cycle (1.75 ms in the present embodiment) set in the payout control unit power-on process shown in FIGS.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 4110a of the payout control board 1186 sets the timer interrupt to be prohibited and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 161 (step S380). Here, the general purpose storage element (general purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main process is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt process, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose register used in the payout control unit main process from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S380, the value 1 is set in the 1.75 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S382). The 1.75 progress flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 1.75 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt process is performed, that is, every 1.75 ms. Set to 0 when no 75 ms has elapsed. Subsequent to step S382, the register is switched (returned) (step S384). This restoration is switched from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the payout control unit main process, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents destruction of the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt process. Subsequent to step S384, interrupt permission is set (step S386), and this routine ends.

[14. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 4139 that receives various commands from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) will be described. First, various control processes of the peripheral control unit will be described, and subsequently, various control processes of the liquid crystal control unit will be described.

[14-1. Various control processes of peripheral control unit]
Various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4140 will be described with reference to FIGS. 162 to 171. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process, the peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process, the liquid crystal serial command A control process, a transmission buffer empty interrupt process, a DSP-ACK signal interrupt process, a start opening prize abnormality notification determination process, and a start opening prize abnormality notification process will be described. FIG. 162 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on process, FIG. 163 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process, and FIG. 164 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process. 165 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, FIG. 166 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process, and FIG. 167 is an example of the liquid crystal serial command control process. 168 is a flowchart showing an example of a transmission buffer empty interrupt process, FIG. 169 is a flowchart showing an example of a DSP-ACK signal interrupt process, and FIG. 170 is a start opening prize abnormality notification determination process. It is a flowchart which shows an example, FIG. Is a flow chart showing an example of a start-up hole winning abnormality notifying process. The liquid crystal serial command control process is performed in step S762 in the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process described later, and the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process is the payout state determination process in step S728 in the peripheral control unit power-on process described later. It is performed in one process. Also, regarding various control processes of the peripheral control unit 4140, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt processing, DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing, transmission buffer empty interrupt processing, peripheral control unit base timer interrupt processing, Priorities are set in the order of the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process and the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process in steps S710 to S740 in the peripheral control unit power-on process.
[14-1-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is powered on, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 performs a peripheral control unit power-on process as shown in FIG. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a performs an initial setting process (step S700). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control MPU 4140a, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, and a color LED provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 is turned on, blinked, or lit in gradation. A process of transmitting initial data composed of pattern creation data to the lamp driving substrate 3031 at a time is performed. In this initial setting process, the peripheral control MPU 4140a first performs a process of initializing itself, thereby outputting various commands related to control of game effects and various conditions related to the state of the pachinko gaming machine 1 output from the main control board 4100. The command can be received, and interrupt permission is set. The time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control MPU 4140a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control MPU 4140a can be initialized in a very short time.

  Subsequent to step S700, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a value 1 (step S702). The 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a flag for measuring 16 ms in a peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process described later, and is set to a value of 1 when 16 ms has elapsed and a value of 0 when 16 ms has not elapsed.

  If the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step 702, the process returns to step S702 again to determine whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is a value 1. When the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is 1 in step S702, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the value 0 is set in the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG (step S704), and the 16 ms in-process flag SP-FLG is increased. 1 is set (step S706). This 16 ms in-process flag SP-FLG is set to a value of 1 when starting the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process, and a value of 0 when ending.

  Subsequent to step S706, an external WDT clear signal is output to an external watchdog timer (peripheral control external WDT) (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 4139 (turns ON, step S710). This peripheral control external WDT monitors the operation (system) of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. When the external WDT clear signal is not stopped at the clear signal release time, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is reset (the system of the peripheral control MPU 4140a runs out of control). Is regularly diagnosed). In step S710, the peripheral control MPU 4140a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af shown in FIG. 139 in addition to turning on the external WDT clear signal for the peripheral control external WDT. As described above, the peripheral control MPU 4140a diagnoses whether the system of the peripheral control MPU 4140a is running out of control by using the peripheral control external WDT and the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af in combination.

  Subsequent to step S710, it is determined whether or not the test mode flag TM-FLG has a value of 0 (step S712). This test mode flag TM-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in the command analysis process described later is a test command classified as related to the test shown in FIG. The value is set to 1 when it is a test command, and is set to 0 when it is not a test command. In step S712, the process is performed based on a command analyzed by a command analysis process described later 16 ms before.

  When the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0 in step S712, that is, when the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is not a test command, an effect selection switch input process is performed (step S716). In this effect selection switch input process, the detection signal LB-SEN from the left sub button sensor 377L that detects the operation of the left sub button 372L provided in the operation button unit 370 and the right sub button 372R shown in FIG. The detection signal RB-SEN from the right sub button sensor 377R that detects the operation of the main button 371 and the detection signal CB-SEN from the main button sensor 376 that detects the operation of the main button 371 are used as the door side serial transmission circuit of the door decoration drive board 192 The button operation detection data TS-DAT serialized at 192c is input from the door-side serial transmission circuit 192c to the button operation detection serial I / O port of the peripheral control MPU 4140a via the door relay board 1102 and the auxiliary drawer relay board 1108. It is determined whether or not it has been done. Specifically, it is performed based on each history information of detection signals LB-SEN, RB-SEN, CB-SEN from the left sub button sensor 377L, the right sub button sensor 377R, and the main button sensor 376 of the operation button unit 370. . History information having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, “B” represents a bit) is detected signal LB-SEN. , RB-SEN, CB-SEN, and every time this effect selection switch input process is executed, the information stored in each bit is shifted from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. Processing is performed, and the input detection signals LB-SEN, RB-SEN, and CB-SEN are stored in the least significant bit B7. For example, in the history information of the main button 371 of the operation button unit 370, where the value 1 is stored, the logic of the detection signal CB-SEN from the operation button unit 370 due to the operation of the main button 371 is displayed. HI means that the value 0 is stored, and the logic of the detection signal CB-SEN from the operation button unit 370 becomes LOW because the operation button unit 370 is not operated. It means that In the effect selection switch input processing, when all the values stored in the lower 4 bits (B7, B6, B5 and B4) of each history information are 1, that is, the left sub button sensor 377L of the operation button unit 370, the right Whether or not the logic of the detection signals LB-SEN, RB-SEN, and CB-SEN from the sub button sensor 377R and the main button sensor 376 is HI continuously (for 64 ms (= 16 ms × 4 times)). Determine whether.

  Subsequent to step S716, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the gradation control IC is performed (step S718). In the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the gradation control IC, the serial I / O port serial transmission for the lamp driving board is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. 139 is a color provided on each decorative board of the game board 4 based on a command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in a command analysis process described later. Game board side light emission data SL-DAT (having a size of 512 bytes (= 64 lines × 8 bytes)) for outputting a lighting signal, blinking signal, or gradation lighting signal to the LED is created. Then, it is set in the lamp decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140aba of the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab via the bus 4140ah shown in FIG. Then, the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the lamp drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac, and the game board side stored in the head address of the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba The first byte of the light emission data SL-DAT is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board via the bus 4140ah. As a result, the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and synchronizes with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side to transfer 1 byte of data of the transmission register. Start transmission bit by bit. Each time the peripheral interrupt DMA controller 4140ac generates a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board (in this embodiment, writing to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the lamp driving board) 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission register, and the transmission buffer is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.) When the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa does not use the bus 4140ah In addition, the remaining 511 bytes of the game board side light emission data SL-DAT stored in the lamp drive board side transmission data area 4140aba are sent to the transmission buffer of the lamp drive board serial I / O port via the bus 4140ah. Serial I / O port for lamp drive board by transferring and writing Then, the written data of the transmission buffer is transferred to the transmission register, and transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission register is started bit by bit in synchronization with the light emission clock signal SL-CLK on the game board side. Continuous transmission is performed via the I / O port. The lamp driving board 3031 is capable of controlling lighting, blinking, and gradation lighting on the electrical decorations such as color LEDs provided on each decoration board of the game board 4 for all 64 systems. It is possible to realize various productions by electric decoration and provide players with gorgeous and attractive productions in reach production and jackpot production. In step S718, the process is performed based on the command analyzed by the command analysis process 16 ms before.

  Following step S718, the sound source IC 4140c is initialized (step S720). In the initialization of the sound source IC 4140c, an analog amount of a volume knob (not shown) is detected, and the master volume of the sound source IC 4140c is such that the sound volume corresponding to the analog amount flows from the side speaker 121 and the lower speaker 391 shown in FIG. Set the value.

  Following step S720, it is determined whether a DSP-RUN signal is input (step S722). The DSP-RUN signal is a signal that is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 and indicates that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally. The reading of the DSP-RUN signal is performed by a peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process described later, and the determination in step S722 is performed based on the DSP-RUN signal read by the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process.

  When the DSP-RUN signal is input in step S722, that is, when the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is operating normally, the RAM-CLR signal is output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 (turned ON, step S724). The RAM-CLR signal is a signal for forcibly resetting the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and is turned on when not resetting and turned off when resetting.

  On the other hand, when the DSP-RUN signal is not input in step S722, that is, when the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is not operating normally, or following step S724, command analysis processing is performed (step S726). In this command analysis process, various commands from the main control board 4100 are received by a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process and a peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process, which will be described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. The various commands shown in FIG. 146 are classified into the various commands classified as related to the special figure 1 tuning effect, the various commands classified as related to the special figure 2 synchronous effect, the various commands classified as related to the jackpot, and the power-on. , Various commands categorized in relation to ordinary drawing effect, various commands categorized in relation to ordinary electric role effect, various commands categorized in notification display, and status display shown in FIG. There are various commands, various commands classified as test-related, and various commands classified into others.

  Subsequent to step S726, a RAM clear determination process is performed (step S727). In this RAM clear determination process, it is determined whether or not the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S726 is a RAM clear notification command. If the analyzed command is a RAM clear notification command, a notification to that effect is given. .

  Subsequent to step S727, a payout state determination process is performed (step S728). In this payout state determination process, it is determined whether or not the command analyzed in the command analysis process in step S726 is various commands classified into the status display shown in FIG. 147, and the analyzed command is classified into the status display. If it is a variety of commands, various notification processes are performed based on the analyzed command. For example, a start opening prize abnormality notification determination process for monitoring the presence or absence of cheating is performed. The start opening prize abnormality notification determination process will be described in detail later.

  Subsequent to step S728, effect selection switch main processing is performed (step S730). In this effect selection switch main process, the determination result of the effect selection switch input process in step S716 (each history of effect selection signals from the main button sensor 376, left sub button sensor 377L, and right sub button sensor 377R of the operation button unit 370). Based on the information (determination result), various processes relating to effects are performed.

  Following step S730, scheduler main processing is performed (step S732). In this scheduler main process, various data related to the tone generator IC 4140c, the gradation control IC 3031b of the lamp driving board 3031 and the door decoration driving board 192 are newly set based on the command analyzed in step S726, and the set various data are set. Advance (pointer advances). For example, in the scheduler main process, the fact that a game ball has entered the first start opening 2001 based on the start opening winning command divided into others shown in FIG. Various data are set in the sound source IC 4140c in order to notify the side ball 121 or the lower speaker 391 by voice that a game ball has entered 2002. The scheduler main process includes a timer update process as one process. In this timer update process, when the start of timing of various timers used in the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process described later is set, the process of starting or updating the timing of various timers is performed.

  Subsequent to step S732, symbol main processing is performed (step S734). In this symbol main process, the control data (display command) to be output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is prepared based on the command analyzed in step S726. This display command indicates a screen to be drawn on the liquid crystal display device 1400. Specifically, the display command is determined based on a winning information command indicating a hit or miss, which is a command from the main control board 4100, and the winning information command. The production pattern information command indicating the type of production pattern (production by animation, production by live action, production by combination of these, etc.), switching points for switching the production by live action from the production by animation, and the like. The peripheral control MPU 4140a stores the created display command in a peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab of the peripheral control MPU 4140a. This "peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. Remember.

  On the other hand, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S712, that is, when the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is a test command, test command acquisition processing is performed. (Step S736). In this test command acquisition process, based on the test command analyzed in the command analysis process of step S726, preparation of inspection commands for performing various inspections of the lamp driving board 3031 and the door decoration driving board 192 is performed, and the sound source IC 4140c. , And preparation of control data (inspection command) for performing various inspections of the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

  Subsequent to step S736, a test process is performed (step S738). In this test process, the inspection command prepared in the test command acquisition process in step S36 is transmitted to the lamp drive board 3031 and the door decoration drive board 192, and the control data (inspection command) prepared in the test command acquisition process in step S36. ) To the sound source IC 4140c and the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

  Subsequent to step S734 or step S738, output of the external WDT clear signal to the peripheral control external WDT is stopped (turns OFF, step S740). This clears the peripheral control external WDT and prevents the peripheral control MPU 4140a from being reset. The peripheral control external WDT starts measuring the clear signal release time when the output of the external WDT clear signal is stopped. The peripheral control MPU 4140a clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af only in step S710, and clears the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af every 16 ms (every time a peripheral control unit 16ms steady process described later is started). It has become. As described above, if the peripheral control built-in WDT 4140af is not cleared every 16 ms, the peripheral control MPU 4140a is reset. Note that the processing in steps S710 to S740 is referred to as “peripheral control unit 16 ms steady processing”.

  Subsequent to step S740, the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is set to the value 0 (end of the peripheral control unit 16ms steady processing) (step S742), and the process returns to step S702 again.

  Returning to step S702, it is determined whether or not the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG has a value of 1. When the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when 16 ms has elapsed, the 16 ms elapsed flag in step S704. A value 0 is set in ST-FLG, a value 1 is set in 16-ms processing flag SP-FLG in step S706, a peripheral control unit 16ms steady processing is performed in steps S710 to S740, and a 16-ms processing flag SP is set in step S742. -A value 0 is set in FLG, and the process returns to step S702 again. On the other hand, when the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG is not a value 1 in step S702, that is, when 16 ms has not elapsed, the process returns to step S702 again.

[14-1-2. Peripheral control unit 2ms steady process]
Next, the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process will be described. When the peripheral control unit 2ms steady process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a value 1 as shown in FIG. 163 (step S750). ). This 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process described later, and is set to a value of 0 when 2 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when no ms have elapsed.

  When the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is 1 in step S750, that is, when 2 ms has elapsed, the value 2 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG (step S752), and the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0. Is determined (step S754). As described above, the test mode flag TM-FLG indicates that the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in the command analysis process in step S726 in the peripheral controller power-on process shown in FIG. This flag is set to 1 when the command is a test command, and 0 when the command is not a test command.

  When the test mode flag TM-FLG is 0 in step S754, that is, when the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is not a test command, switch input processing is performed (step S756). In this switch input process, a rotation position detection sensor 3134 for detecting the rotation position of the rotary decoration body 3102 (first rotation member 3112), which is various game board side detection sensors shown in FIGS. 143 and 144, and an elevating mechanism 3150. , A lift detection sensor 3164 for detecting the slide position of the slide member 3152, a swing detection sensor 3218 for detecting the slide position of the slide base 3206, a ceiling position detection sensor 3318 for detecting the slide position of the cam member 3308, and a slide base 3414 (character Character body movement detection sensor 3425 for detecting the horizontal position of the body 3402), right arm rotation detection sensor 3479 for detecting the rotation position of the right arm 3402c, and a gear position detection sensor for detecting the rotation position of the drive gear 3516. Detection signal IN from 3524 It is determined whether or not -SEN to IN7-SEN are input via the motor drive board 3013 and the lamp drive board 3031, or the rotation lamps 244, 264 and 284 of the door frame 5 shown in FIG. Detection signals LT-SEN, RT-SEN, and CT-SEN (see FIG. 140) from the left rotation position detection sensor 250, the right rotation position detection sensor 270, and the center rotation position detection sensor 290 (see FIG. 140) that detect the rotation position are door relay boards 1102. Then, it is determined whether or not the input is made via the sub drawer relay board 1108.

  In the switch input process, a history of various input detection signals is created. Specifically, history information having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits: most significant bits B7, B6, B5, B4, B3, B2, B1, least significant bit B0, “B” represents a bit) is stored. Assigned to each detection signal, each time this switch input process is executed, the information stored in each bit is shifted from the least significant bit B0 toward the most significant bit B7. Various input detection signals are stored in B7. For example, the value 1 is stored when the logic of the detection signal IN1-SEN from the rotation position detection sensor 3134 that detects the rotation position of the rotating decoration body 3102 (first rotation member 3112) is HI, and when the logic is LOW. Store the value 0.

  Subsequent to step S756, DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board is performed (step S758). In the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the motor drive board, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board is continuously transmitted using the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. 139 receives the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in the command analysis process of step S726 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the game board side motors (rotary decorative body drive motor 3106, lift drive motor 3160, swing drive motor 3212, ceiling drive motor 3312, character body drive motor 3418, right arm drive motor 3472, and gear drive motor 3514), and The game board side motor drive data SM-DAT (having a size of 4 bytes) for outputting drive signals to the game board side solenoids (the lock solenoid 3127 and the head solenoid 3455) is created. Via bus 4140ah shown in FIG. 139 Is set on the motor drive board side transmits data area 4140abc near control-RAM4140ab. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa designates transmission of the serial I / O port for the motor drive board as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac, and the game board side stored in the start address of the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc The first byte of the motor drive data SM-DAT is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the motor drive board serial I / O port via the bus 4140ah. As a result, the serial I / O port for the motor drive board transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and the 1-byte data of the transmission register is synchronized with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK. Starts transmission bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac uses this as a trigger each time a transmission interrupt request for the serial I / O port for motor drive board is generated (in this embodiment, writing to the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for motor drive board) 1 byte data is transferred to the transmission register, and the transmission buffer is empty because the 1 byte data disappears.) When the peripheral control CPU core 4140aa does not use the bus 4140ah In addition, the remaining 3 bytes of the game board side motor drive data SM-DAT stored in the motor drive board side transmission data area 4140abc are sent to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board via the bus 4140ah. Transfer to the buffer and write to the serial I / O port for the motor drive board The controller transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, starts transmission of 1-byte data of the transmission register bit by bit in synchronization with the game board side motor drive clock signal SM-CLK, and drives the motor. Continuous transmission is performed through the board serial I / O port. The motor drive board 3013 includes game board side motors (rotary decorative body drive motor 3106, lift drive motor 3160, swing drive motor 3212, ceiling drive motor 3312, character body drive motor 3418, right arm drive motor 3472, and gear drive motor 3514. ) And the game board side solenoids (the lock solenoid 3127 and the head solenoid 3455), the various members of the upper unit 3002, the character unit 3400, and the gear decoration body unit 3500 shown in FIG. It can be moved to achieve a variety of performances, providing players with gorgeous and attractive performances such as reach production and jackpot production.

  Subsequent to step S758, a DMA serial continuous transmission process to the door decoration drive board is performed (step S760). In the DMA serial continuous transmission processing to the door decoration drive board, serial transmission of the door decoration drive board serial I / O port is performed using the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa of the peripheral control MPU 4140a shown in FIG. 139 receives the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) in the command analysis process of step S726 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. Based on the rotation light motor drive data for outputting drive signals to the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, and the central rotation lamp motor 285 of the top lamp illumination unit 200, and the vibrating body of the main button 371 From vibration body drive data for outputting a drive signal to 371c and door side light emission data for outputting lighting signals, blinking signals or gradation lighting signals to various color LEDs provided on the door side Configured door side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT (having a size of 14 bytes). Form, shown in Figure 139, through the bus 4140Ah, set the door decoration drive substrate side transmits data area 4140abb near control-RAM4140ab. The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa designates transmission of the door decoration drive board serial I / O port as a request factor of the peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac, and the door stored in the head address of the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb. The first byte of the side motor drive emission data ST-DAT is transferred and written to the transmission buffer of the door decoration drive board serial I / O port via the bus 4140ah. As a result, the door decoration drive board serial I / O port transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and synchronizes with the door side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Start transmitting data bit by bit. The peripheral control DMA controller 4140ac is triggered by a transmission interrupt request for the door I / O port serial I / O port (in this embodiment, the transmission buffer for the door I / O port serial I / O port). 1 byte data written to the transfer register is transferred to the transmission register, and the transmission buffer becomes empty because the 1 byte data disappears.), The peripheral control CPU core 4140aa is using the bus 4140ah. If not, the remaining 13 bytes of door-side motor drive light emission data ST-DAT stored in the door decoration drive board side transmission data area 4140abb are sent byte by byte via the bus 4140ah to the serial I / O for the door decoration drive board. Serial I / O port for door decoration drive board by transferring to port transmission buffer and writing The controller transfers the written data of the transmission buffer to the transmission register, and starts transmitting 1-byte data of the transmission register bit by bit in synchronization with the door-side motor drive light emission clock signal ST-CLK. Continuous transmission is performed through the serial I / O port for the drive board. The door decoration drive board 192 can control electric drive sources such as the left rotation lamp motor 245, the right rotation lamp motor 265, the central rotation lamp motor 285, and the vibrating body 371c. The decoration board 126L, the glass decoration relay board 454, the left top lamp board 206L, the right top lamp board 206R, and the right side decoration board 126R are turned on and blinking on the electrical decorations such as various color LEDs provided on the door frame 5. In addition, by controlling gradation lighting, it is possible to achieve a variety of effects using electrical drive sources and decorations, providing players with gorgeous and attractive effects such as reach effects and jackpot effects. ing.

  Subsequent to step S760, liquid crystal serial command control processing is performed (step S762). In the liquid crystal serial command control process, the detailed description thereof will be described later, but the control data (display command) indicating the screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 is output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. As described above, the display command is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab, and the peripheral control MPU 4140a extracts the display command from the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer and extracts the liquid crystal control unit. The data is transmitted from the serial I / O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

  On the other hand, when the test mode flag TM-FLG is not 0 (value 1) in step S754, that is, when the command received from the main control board 4100 (main control MPU 4100a) is a test command, or following step S762, The value 1 is added to the value of the 2 ms update counter C (increment. Step S764). The 2 ms update counter C is a counter that counts the number of times that the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process has been performed. A value 1 of the 2 ms update counter C corresponds to a time of 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S764, it is determined whether or not the 2 ms update counter C has a value of 8, that is, 16 ms (= 2 ms update counter C × 2 ms) (step S766). If it is 16 ms in step S766, the value 1 is set to the 16 ms elapsed flag ST-FLG (step S768). At this time, the value 0 is set in the 2 ms update counter C.

  Subsequent to step S768, whether or not the 16ms processing flag SP-FLG is 0, that is, the peripheral control unit 16ms steady processing in steps S710 to S740 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 162 is performed. It is determined whether or not (step S770).

  When the 16 ms processing flag SP-FLG is 0 in step S770, that is, when the peripheral control unit 16ms steady processing is not performed, the work area is backed up (step S772), and this routine is terminated. This work area backup is a copy of the information processed in the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process in steps S710 to S740 in the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 162 on the work area provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab. Copy to area.

  On the other hand, when the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S750, that is, 2 ms has not elapsed, 16 ms has not elapsed in step S766, or the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady processing in step S770. If no information is set, the routine is terminated as it is.

[14-1-3. Peripheral control unit base timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process will be described. This peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process is repeated every 130.227 μs as the base clock. When the peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 adds 1 to the value of the base update counter BC (increment, as shown in FIG. 164) (step S780). The base update counter BC is a counter that counts the number of times that the peripheral control unit base timer interrupt process is performed, and a value 1 of the base update counter BC corresponds to a time of 130.227 μs that is a base clock.

  Subsequent to step S780, it is determined whether or not the base update counter BC has a value of 16, that is, 2 ms (base update counter BC × 130.227 μs) (step S782). If it is not 2 ms in step S782, this routine is ended. On the other hand, if it is 2 ms in step S782, a value 1 is set to the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG (step S784), and this routine is ended. In the process of step S782, a value 0 is set in the base update counter BC. As described above, the 2 ms elapsed flag STB-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms, and is set to a value of 0 when 2 ms have elapsed and a value of 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed.

[14-1-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 starts receiving a command from the main control board 4100 as shown in FIG. And a signal for selecting various boards from the main control board 4100 (hereinafter referred to as “SEL signal”) are determined to be 1 (step S790). The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 first sets the SEL signal corresponding to the peripheral control board 4139 to the value 1 and the WR signal to the value 1, and transmits a command to the peripheral control board 4139.

  This command is composed of 4 nibbles per packet. This “nibble” means 4 bits, which is 8 bits (1 byte) in 2 nibbles, that is, 16 bits (2 bytes) in 4 nibbles. In the extraction of 1 nibble data, the WR signal rises from the value 0 to the value 1 (referred to as “up edge”) and is held for a predetermined time (for example, 20 microseconds (μs) to 50 μs). This is performed by falling from the value 1 to the value 0 (referred to as “down edge”).

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 1 in step S790, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a transmits a command to the peripheral control board 4139, command reception processing is performed (step S792), and this routine is terminated. In this command reception process, the received 1 nibble command (one of four divided commands) is stored in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab. This "peripheral control unit reception ring buffer" is a buffer that is used so that the end and the top of the buffer are connected. Remember.

  After storing in the peripheral control unit reception ring buffer, the buffer write counter is incremented by “1”. This buffer write counter increments by one each time a command reception process is performed. Therefore, when 1 packet (4 nibbles) is stored, the buffer write counter has a value of 4.

  On the other hand, when both the SEL signal and the WR signal are 0 in step S790, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a does not transmit a command to the peripheral control board 4139, this routine is ended as it is. At the time of command transmission from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4139, as described above, a predetermined time (for example, 20 μs to 50 μs) from the up edge to the down edge of the WR signal, the SEL signal, the WR signal, and the data (4 Bit) is held constant, but the signal may be disturbed due to noise and the command may not be received normally. Therefore, as a countermeasure against this noise, the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) (first time), and after a predetermined time elapses (for example, 1 μs), the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4) again. Bit). Then, it is determined whether or not it matches the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time. If the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time coincide with each other, it is determined in step S790 whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are “1”. On the other hand, when it does not match the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) received at the first time, the SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits) are received again after a predetermined time has elapsed, and received at the first time. The determination is repeated until it matches the selected SEL signal, WR signal, and data (4 bits).

[14-1-5. Peripheral controller command reception end interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process will be described. When the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 as shown in FIG. Step S795). When the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 completes the transmission of the command to the peripheral control board 4139, the main control board 4100 sets the WR signal to the value 0 and then sets the SEL signal to the value 0 (down edge).

  When both the WR signal and the SEL signal are 0 in step S795, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a completes command transmission to the peripheral control board 4139, command reception end processing is performed (step S797), and this routine is ended. . In this command reception end process, the value 0 is set in the buffer write counter added in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. When the command is normally received, the buffer write counter has a value of 4 because one packet is 4 nibbles. Further, when reception of one packet cannot be performed, that is, when the buffer write counter is less than 4, the received command is discarded.

  On the other hand, when both the WR signal and the SEL signal are not 0 in step S795, that is, when the main control MPU 4100a has not completed transmission of a command to the peripheral control board 4139, this routine is ended as it is. As described above, as a noise countermeasure, when the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the SEL signal (first time), the peripheral control MPU 4140a receives the SEL signal again after a predetermined time (for example, 1 μs), and receives the SEL signal received the first time. It is determined whether or not they match. If it matches the SEL signal received for the first time, it is determined in step S795 whether or not both the WR signal and the SEL signal are zero. On the other hand, when it does not coincide with the SEL signal received for the first time, the SEL signal is received again after a predetermined time, and the determination is repeated until it coincides with the SEL signal received for the first time.

[14-1-6. LCD serial command control processing]
Next, the liquid crystal serial command control process will be described. In this liquid crystal serial command control process, control data (display command) is output as serial data from the peripheral control board 4139 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

  When the liquid crystal serial command control process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether there is a display command as shown in FIG. 167 (step S800). As described above, this display command indicates a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400, and is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab. In step S800, it is determined whether a display command is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer.

  When there is a display command in step S800, that is, when a display command is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer, it is determined whether or not the transmission flag TX-FLG is 1 (step S802). This transmission flag TX-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not a display command is being transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, and has a value of 1 when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. When the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted, the value is set to 0.

  When the transmission flag TX-FLG is not a value 1 (value 0) in step S802, that is, when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is empty (step S804). . This determination determines whether or not the transmission buffer is empty based on the status indicating the state of the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit that transmits the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. .

  If the transmission buffer is empty in step S804, a sum value is calculated (step S806). This sum value is determined based on a display command stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer. Here, the display command is composed of one or more basic commands composed of a status having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits) and a mode having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits). ing. The status indicates the type of command, and the mode indicates a variation of production. The base command is various commands transmitted from the main control board 4100 to the peripheral control board 4139 shown in FIGS. 146 and 147, and a status is assigned as the first byte and a mode is assigned as the second byte. In step S806, the information indicated by the status allocated as the first byte of the base command and the information indicated by the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value) is calculated. . Then, a base command for transmission is created by adding the calculated sum value to the base command, that is, expanding and assigning it as the third byte of the base command. In other words, the base command status for transmission is assigned the status of the base command as the first byte, the mode of the base command is assigned as the second byte, and the status of the base command and the mode of the base command are regarded as numerical values as the third byte. A sum value is calculated to calculate the sum. Thus, the transmission base command has a storage capacity of 3 bytes and is handled as a packet composed of 3 bytes.

  Subsequent to step S806, the first byte is set in the transmission buffer (step S808). Here, by setting the status allocated as the first byte of the transmission base command in the transmission buffer, the status information is transmitted bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Thereby, transmission of control data (display command) as liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is started.

  Subsequent to step S808, the value 1 is set in the transmission counter TXC (step S810). The transmission counter TXC is a counter that indicates how many bytes of the transmission base command are set in the transmission buffer. When the second byte is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 3. The transmission counter TXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on.

  Following step S810, a DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set (step S812). The DSP-ACK signal waiting time sets a period during which the DSP-ACK signal from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 can be input. In this embodiment, an asynchronous serial is adopted as a transmission method from the peripheral control unit 4140 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the bit rate is 19.2 kbps, the format of the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is 8-bit communication, LSB First, even parity added, 1 stop bit. As a result, since the transmission base command has a storage capacity of 3 bytes (24 bits) as described above, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time including the processing time is 1.6 milliseconds (ms ) Is set. Here, the DSP-ACK signal is a signal indicating that the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 has received the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a displays the display that the peripheral control MPU 4140a has started to transmit in step S808. When a command is received within the DSP-ACK signal waiting time, a DSP-ACK signal indicating that fact is output to the peripheral control MPU 4140a.

  Subsequent to step S812, assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, a value 1 is set to the transmission flag TX-FLG (step S814), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the transmission flag TX-FLG is 1 in step S802, that is, when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, it is determined whether the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has timed out (step S816). .

  When the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has timed out in step S816, that is, when the DSP-ACK signal exceeds the period during which the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the display command stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer is configured. In step S804, it is determined whether or not the transmission buffer is empty. When the transmission buffer is empty, information indicated by the status allocated as the first byte of the base command in step S806. And the information indicated by the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command is regarded as a numerical value and the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value is extended and allocated as the third byte of the base command. A base command for transmission is created. In step S810, it is determined that the first byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value 1 is set in the transmission counter TXC, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set in step S812, and the DSP-ACK signal is liquid crystal controlled. The period input from the unit 4150 is set, and in step S814, the value 1 is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG, assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted, and this routine is terminated. In this embodiment, the number of retransmissions is set to 4 times, and the same transmission base command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 up to 5 times.

  On the other hand, when the DSP-ACK signal waiting time has not timed out in step S816, that is, when the DSP-ACK signal is within the period during which the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, two bytes of the transmission base command created in step S806. Since the mode allocated as the eye and the sum value allocated as the third byte are transmitted in order, this routine is terminated. Note that the mode and the sum value are interrupted when the transmission buffer becomes empty. In this interrupt processing, the mode and the sum value are respectively set in the transmission buffer and each bit from the serial input / output port controls the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Sent to.

  On the other hand, when there is no display command in step S800, that is, when no display command is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer, there is no display command to be transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. When the transmission buffer is not empty, the routine is terminated as it is to wait for the transmission buffer to become empty.

  As described above, this liquid crystal serial command control process is performed in step S762 in the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process shown in FIG. That is, it is repeated every 2 ms. When the peripheral control MPU 4140a creates a transmission base command in step S806 in the liquid crystal serial command control process and sets the first byte in the transmission buffer, the peripheral control MPU 4140a starts transmission to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 bit by bit from the serial input / output port. In step S812, the DSP-ACK signal waiting time is set, and in step S814, the value 1 is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG, assuming that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. As a result, even if the liquid crystal serial command control processing is started after the elapse of 2 ms, the value 1 is set in the transmission flag TX-FLG on the assumption that the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. Unless the time is up, that is, within the period during which the DSP-ACK signal can be input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the second byte and the third byte following the first byte of the transmission base command are not set in the transmission buffer. It has become. When the transmission of the first byte set in the transmission buffer is completed and the transmission buffer is emptied, the second byte of the base command for transmission is interrupted. Then, transmission is started bit by bit from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. The third byte of the base command for transmission is set in the transmission buffer during the interruption process when the transmission of the second byte set in the transmission buffer is completed and the transmission buffer becomes empty. Transmission is started bit by bit from the serial I / O port to the liquid crystal controller 4150. As described above, in the liquid crystal serial command control process, when the transmission base command is created in step S806 and the first byte is set in the transmission buffer, the second and third bytes of the transmission base command are transmitted. It comes to be separated. As a result, the load of the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process shown in FIG. 163 performed every 2 ms is reduced.

  When the display command is composed of a plurality of base commands, when the liquid crystal control unit 4150 receives all the base commands and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 controls the drawing of the liquid crystal display device 1400, The peripheral control MPU 4140a can transmit the base command one bit at a time from the serial input / output port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 and transmit the sum value after completing the transmission of all the base commands. This sum value is a value obtained by regarding the transmitted base command as a numerical value and calculating the sum. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 receives all the base commands and the sum value, then regards these received base commands as numerical values, calculates a sum value that is the sum, By determining whether or not the received sum value matches, it is possible to confirm whether or not all received base commands, that is, display commands are correctly transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. . If they do not match, the peripheral control MPU 4140a retransmits the same display command to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. However, after all the base commands have been transmitted, the sum value is transmitted, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a determines whether the display command is correctly transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the above-described determination based on the sum value. For example, when the display command is large, that is, when the number of basic commands is large, one of the basic commands is a harness for electrically connecting the peripheral control board 4139 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150 between the boards. If it happens to change due to the influence of noise that has entered the LCD, the other base command is correctly transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Judging that the peripheral control unit 4140 did not correctly transmit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 Becomes, peripheral control MPU4140a becomes possible to retransmit the same display command to the LCD control unit 4150. Then, it is possible to maintain the synchronization between the upper main control board 4100 and the lower peripheral control board 4139 liquid crystal control section 4150 by spending unnecessary transmission time between the peripheral control section 4140 and the liquid crystal control section 4150. Disappear. Therefore, in this embodiment, a sum value is calculated based on the base command, the calculated sum value is added to the base command to create a transmission base command, and the generated transmission base command is used as the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Is sending to. As a result, even if the transmission base command changes due to the influence of noise that has entered between the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the peripheral control MPU 4140a controls the same transmission base command using the liquid crystal control. By retransmitting to the unit 4150, it is not necessary to retransmit all the base commands constituting the display command to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and useless transmission time is not consumed. Therefore, by adopting a method of creating a transmission base command for each base command and transmitting it to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the upper level main control board 4100 and the lower level peripheral control board 4139 have the liquid crystal control unit 4150. Synchronization can be maintained.

[14-1-7. Transmit buffer empty interrupt processing]
Next, the transmission buffer empty interrupt process will be described. This transmission buffer empty interrupt process is started when the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control MPU 4140a becomes empty.

  When the transmission buffer empty interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not the transmission counter TXC is a value 3 as shown in FIG. 168 (step S820). As described above, the transmission counter TXC is a counter that indicates how many bytes of the transmission base command are set in the transmission buffer. When the first byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value 1 When the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 2, and when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, the value is 3.

  When the transmission counter TXC is not 3 in step S820, that is, when the third byte of the transmission base command is not set in the transmission buffer, the next byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer (step S822), The value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC (increment, step S824), and this routine is terminated.

  On the other hand, when the transmission counter TXC is 3 in step S820, that is, when the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, this routine is terminated as it is.

  In step S808 in the liquid crystal serial command transmission control process shown in FIG. 167, as described above, the first byte of the base command for transmission is set in the transmission buffer, and the first byte of the base command for transmission is the liquid crystal. When one bit is outputted from the serial I / O port for the control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 and the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt processing is started. Then, in step S822 in the transmission buffer empty interrupt process shown in FIG. 168, the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, and it is assumed that the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer in step S824. The value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC, the value of the transmission counter is set to the value 2, and this routine is terminated. The second byte of the base command for transmission set in the transmission buffer is output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 bit by bit from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt is again generated. Processing begins. In step S822, the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer, and it is determined that the third byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer. In step S824, the value 1 is added to the value of the transmission counter TXC. The counter value is set to 3 and this routine is terminated. The third byte of the transmission base command set in the transmission buffer is output bit by bit from the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit to the liquid crystal control unit 4150. When the transmission buffer becomes empty, this transmission buffer empty interrupt is again generated. Processing begins. In this case, since the transmission counter TXC has already reached the value 3, this routine is terminated as it is in step S820. As described above, the liquid crystal serial command transmission control processing shown in FIG. 167 sets only the first byte of the transmission base command in the transmission buffer, and the transmission buffer empty interrupt processing performs the second and third bytes of the transmission base command. It is set in the transmission buffer.

[14-1-8. DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing]
Next, DSP-ACK signal interrupt processing will be described. This DSP-ACK signal interruption process is started when the DSP-ACK signal from the liquid crystal control unit 4150 is input to the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140.

  When the DSP-ACK signal interrupt process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 sets a value of 0 to the transmission flag TX-FLG as shown in FIG. 169 (step S830), and ends this routine. To do. The transmission flag TX-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not the display command is transmitted to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER as described above, and the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is being transmitted. Is set to 1 when the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is not being transmitted.

  When the DSP-ACK signal is input from the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the peripheral control MPU 4140a determines that the liquid crystal control unit 4150 has received the transmission base command created based on the base command constituting the display command in step S830. A value 0 is set in the transmitting flag TX-FLG. In addition to setting the transmission flag TX-FLG to 0 in step S830, the peripheral control MPU 4140a sets the next command constituting the display command stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab. If there is a command, the pointer is advanced to the address where the next command is stored so that the next command can be extracted.

[14-1-9. Starting opening prize abnormality notification determination process]
Next, the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process will be described. When the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not there is a start opening prize command as shown in FIG. 170 (step S840). In this determination, various commands from the main control board 4100 analyzed in the command analysis process in step S726 in the peripheral control unit 16ms steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 162 are added to the other commands shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a start port winning command to be classified is included, and a first start port sensor 3022 that detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not it corresponds. That is, in step S840, it is not determined whether or not a game ball has entered the second start port 2002 disposed below the first start port 2001 shown in FIG. It is determined whether or not a game ball has entered.

  When the start port winning command corresponding to the first start port sensor 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 in step S840 is included in the various commands received from the main control board 4100, the start port winning is determined. The value 1 is added to the value of the command reception counter PCC (increment. Step S842). The start port winning command reception counter PCC is a counter that counts the number of times the start port winning command corresponding to the first starting port sensor 3022 that detects the game ball that has entered the first starting port 2001 is received, The value 0 is set as the initial value at the time of power-on, reset, etc.

  On the other hand, when the start port winning command corresponding to the first start port sensor 3022 for detecting the game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 in step S840 is not included in the various commands received from the main control board 4100, or Subsequent to step S842, it is determined whether or not the counter initialization timer TMR has passed 15 minutes (step S844). The counter initialization timer TMR is a timer for initializing the start opening winning command reception counter PCC every predetermined period of 15 minutes. The peripheral control unit of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. The time is counted in the timer update process included in the scheduler main process in step S732 in the 16 ms steady process. That is, the counter initialization timer TMR is timed every 16 ms, which is the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process. In the timer update process, when the start of counting of the counter initialization timer TMR is set, the counting of the counter initialization timer TMR is started. The counter initialization timer TMR is initialized upon power recovery (power-on, reset, etc.), and the start of timing is set.

  When the counter initialization timer TMR has passed 15 minutes in step S844, the counter initialization timer TMR is initialized, and it is determined whether or not the start opening winning command reception counter PCC is equal to or greater than the upper limit value LMT (step S846). This upper limit value LMT is a value determined based on an upper limit value of the number of times that a game ball can enter the first start port 2001 per unit time (referred to as “unit start number”). In this embodiment, although depending on the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed, even if the player actually starts the game, considering that the unit start number is about 7 times / min at the maximum, 10 times / minute is set as an assumed value of the number of unit starts. Thereby, the upper limit value LMT becomes a value 150 (= 15 minutes × unit start number (10 times / minute)) when the counter initialization timer TMR has passed 15 minutes.

  When the start port winning command reception counter PCC is equal to or greater than the upper limit value LMT (value 150) in step S846 (when the starting port winning command reception counter PCC has reached the upper limit value LMT), a timer for measuring the notification time is used. A start of timing of a certain notification timer HTMR is set, and start opening prize abnormality notification processing is performed (step S848). Although detailed description will be given later in this start opening prize abnormality notification processing, various types of door frames 5 shown in FIG. 10 and various game boards 4 shown in FIG. 97 are provided based on a timed notification timer HTMR. A hall clerk or the like is informed that the game ball entering the first starting port 2001 by causing the LED to emit light exceeds the assumed value of the number of unit startings.

  On the other hand, when the start port winning command reception counter PCC is not equal to or greater than the upper limit value LMT (value 150) in step S846 (when the starting port winning command reception counter PCC has not reached the upper limit value LMT), or following step S848. , The value of the start opening winning command reception counter PCC is initialized by setting it to 0 (step S850), the counter initialization timer TMR is reset and initialized, the start of timing is set again (step S852), and this routine is executed. finish.

  On the other hand, if the counter initialization timer TMR has not passed 15 minutes in step S844, this routine is ended as it is.

  In this way, every time 15 minutes elapse, the start port winning command reception counter PCC can be initialized in step S850, so that the game ball entering the first start port 2001 in step S846 is assumed to have a unit start number. A determination of whether the value is exceeded can be made every 15 minutes. That is, it is possible to monitor every 15 minutes whether or not the game ball entering the first start port 2001 exceeds the assumed value of the unit start number. Thus, for example, by aiming at the timing when one game ball enters the first start port 2001, the radio wave transmitter emits radio waves from the front surface of the pachinko gaming machine 1 toward the first start port 2001. One detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 input to the control board 4100 is divided into a plurality of detection signals, and a plurality of game balls enter the first start port 2001 (referred to as “joint ball”). ) Even if a fraudulent act pretending to be performed is performed, the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 2001 exceeds the assumed number of unit starting numbers according to the determination in step S846 performed every 15 minutes. When it is, the hall opening clerk abnormality notifying process of step S848 can be used to notify the hall clerk or the like that the cheating is being performed by causing various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 or the game board 4 to emit light. It has become the jar. For this reason, the player is forced to stop the act for fear of such an illegal act, and it is extremely difficult to continue. Therefore, it is possible to suppress the number of illegal game balls acquired by the player.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 and the like in the switch input process in step S74 in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. By performing two readings in total, that is, two readings that are compared over two times and two readings that are compared over the second to fourth times, avoiding false detection due to chattering or noise. Since the reliability of the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 or the like is enhanced, the first start port sensor that is input to the main control board 4100 by radiating radio waves toward the first start port 2001 with a radio wave transmitter. Even if one detection signal from 3022 is divided into a plurality of detection signals, the waveform of this divided detection signal and the actual situation when a game ball is connected to the first start port 2001 If the waveform of the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 does not match, the waveform of the divided detection signal is removed by this switch input process as being caused by chattering or noise. It has become. Further, in the switch input process, when there is a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022, the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, as shown in FIG. The start opening prize command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4139 in the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S92 in the main control side timer interruption process. As described above, in order to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, and the like, the program incorporated in the switch input process also prevents an illegal act of radiating a radio wave from the radio wave transmitter toward the first start port 2001. Therefore, even if the illegal act is performed, the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 and the corresponding start port winning command are always stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. It is not necessarily done. In other words, the number of start opening prize commands stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area does not necessarily increase according to the illegal act. However, when one detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 is divided into a plurality of detection signals due to the fraud, some of the detection signals may pass through the switch input process. is there. In such a case, the detected detection signal is judged as a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022, and the corresponding start port winning command is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as described above, on the peripheral control board 4139 side, the start opening prize command corresponding to the detection signal from the first start opening sensor 3022 in the start opening prize abnormality notification determination process shown in FIG. Based on the received number, it is determined every 15 minutes whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2001 exceeds the assumed value of the unit start number. It is possible to monitor whether or not a game ball is illegally entered, that is, whether or not there is an illegal act.

  By the way, as fraudulent acts, in addition to the above-described one that radiates a radio wave toward the first starting port 2001 with a radio wave transmitter, various things such as a game ball that is attracted by a magnet and guided to the first starting port 2001 are various. There is something. For this reason, manufacturers of pachinko machines can respond to known illegal acts with mechanisms, electrical circuits, programs, etc., but prevent unknown illegal acts that exceed the manufacturer's assumptions. It is difficult to build. Therefore, in the present embodiment, when a game ball enters the first start port 2001 based on a detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022, a start that is originally prepared for notifying mainly by voice. By using a mouth winning command and a program on the main control board 4100 side originally incorporated in the switch input processing in order to avoid erroneous detection due to the effects of chattering, noise, etc., it is called a starting mouth winning abnormality notification determination processing. In the program on the peripheral control board 4139 side, it is determined whether or not the number of game balls that have entered the first starting port 2001 exceeds the assumed value of the unit starting number every 15 minutes, so that unknown fraud Has become a prevention against. Although an illegal game ball is acquired by a player due to an unknown fraud, as described above, the presence or absence of fraudulent behavior is repeatedly monitored every 15 minutes by a program called start opening prize abnormality notification determination processing on the peripheral control board 4139 side. However, if there is an illegal act, various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are made to emit light to notify the store clerk of the hall. The unknown fraud must be stopped because of fear, and the unknown fraud cannot be repeated. Therefore, even if an unknown illegal act is performed, the number of illegal game balls acquired by the player can be suppressed.

  As described above, a plurality of obstacle nails are planted in the game panel 600, but a game ball is accidentally caught between the obstacle nails and the obstacle nails, and one after another on the game balls. There are cases where a game ball is formed in a grape shape on the game ball. Depending on the place where such a lump is formed, there may be a route for guiding the game ball to the first starting port 2001. Even if the game is continued in such a state, in the present embodiment, as described above, when the number of game balls that have entered the first start port 2001 exceeds the assumed unit start number, Since various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are caused to emit light and notify the store clerk or the like of the hall, the player has to stop the act. Therefore, even if a path for guiding the game ball to the first starting port 2001 is formed using the block of game balls in a grape shape, the number of game balls acquired by the player through this path can be suppressed. .

[14-1-10. Starting entry prize abnormality notification process]
Next, the start opening prize abnormality notification process will be described. When the start opening prize abnormality notification process is started, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 determines whether or not the notification timer HTMR has passed 5 minutes as shown in FIG. 171 (step S860). This notification timer HTMR is a timer for measuring the notification time, and is counted in the timer update process included in the scheduler main process in step S732 in the peripheral control unit 16ms steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 162. ing. That is, the notification timer HTMR is timed every 16 ms, which is the peripheral control unit 16 ms steady process. In the timer update process, when the time measurement start of the notification timer HTMR is set, the time measurement of the notification timer HTMR is started. The notification timer HTMR is initialized when power is restored (when power is turned on, reset, etc.).

  When the notification timer HTMR has not passed 5 minutes in step S860, a light emitting mode (for example, red) that lights all the LEDs provided on the door frame 5 shown in FIG. 10 and the game board 4 shown in FIG. This mode is finished (step S862).

  On the other hand, when the notification timer HTMR has passed 5 minutes in step S860, the various lights provided in the door frame 5 and the game board 4 that are all lit in step S862 are returned to the light emission mode in the gaming state, and the notification timer HTMR Is initialized by resetting (step S864), and this routine is terminated.

  In step S862, the various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are all lit, so that the presence of the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is fully lit is made more conspicuous than the other pachinko gaming machines installed in the hall. Can be easily noticed by shop assistants. As a result, the pachinko gaming machine 1 that is fully lit can be found at an early stage after the various LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 start to be fully lit. Tell the hall clerk, etc. that the number of game balls to be played exceeds the assumed value of the number of unit starts (in this embodiment, 10 times / minute), that is, that fraudulent acts are or are likely be able to.

  In the present embodiment, a one-step notification mode is employed in which all the LEDs provided on the door frame 5 and the game board 4 are all lit in step S862. If a multi-step notification mode is adopted in which the notification mode is gradually escalated, when the player conducts cheating and moves from the initial stage to the notification mode at a certain stage, the player If the fraudulent behavior is continued and a transition is made from the next stage to a full-scale notification mode, the notification mode becomes a mere “notification alarm” for the player. As described above, when a multi-level notification mode is adopted, it is difficult for a player to detect a fraudulent act from the initial stage to a certain level of the multi-level notification mode. It may be reminiscent and is not preferable.

[4-2. Various control processes of the LCD controller]
Next, various processes of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 that receives control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4139 (peripheral control MPU 4140a) will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the liquid crystal control unit power-on process will be described, and then the drawing control process and the liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt process will be described. FIG. 172 is a flowchart showing an example of the power-on process of the liquid crystal controller, FIG. 173 is a flowchart showing an example of the drawing control process, and FIG. 174 is a flowchart showing an example of the liquid crystal controller command reception interrupt process. FIG. 175 is a timing chart showing transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data.

[14-2-1. LCD controller power-on processing]
When the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 performs a process for turning on the liquid crystal control unit as shown in FIG. When the liquid crystal control unit power-on process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a performs a boot process (step S1000). In this boot process, various programs stored in the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b are copied to a RAM (hereinafter referred to as “liquid crystal control built-in RAM”) built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a reads and executes various programs from the liquid crystal control built-in RAM as necessary. In this embodiment, the schedule data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b without being copied due to the limitation of the capacity of the liquid crystal control built-in RAM. Also good.

  Subsequent to step S1000, SIO initial setting processing is performed (step S1002). In this SIO initial setting process, serial input / output built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is initialized, and control data (display command) indicating a screen displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the peripheral control unit 4140 is displayed as the liquid crystal serial data DSP. -Set permission for command interrupt processing received as SER. As a result, when the serial input / output reception buffer incorporated in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a receives the display command, it notifies the CPU core, which is the central processing unit incorporated in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, that an interrupt has been received.

  Subsequent to step S1002, transfer IC initial setting processing is performed (step S1004). In this transfer IC initial setting process, a transfer IC (not shown) mounted on the liquid crystal controller 4150 is initialized. This transfer IC transfers the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the character RAM 4150e having a high access speed and copies it.

  Subsequent to step S1004, sprite data resident area transfer start processing is performed (step S1006). In the sprite data resident area transfer start processing, various setting values such as a transfer source address, a transfer destination address, and the number of transfer bytes are written and set in a register group of the transfer IC, and a sprite data transfer start signal is output to the transfer IC. When this sprite data transfer start signal is input, the transfer IC starts transferring sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e based on various setting values written in the register group. When the transfer IC performs the sprite data resident area transfer start process, the transfer IC is stored in the character ROM 4150d independently of the control by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, that is, based on various setting values written in the register group. Transfer of sprite data to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e is started. Specifically, for example, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a sends a transfer source address and a transfer destination address to the register group of the transfer IC in order to notify that the power is being restored first, such as when the power of the pachinko gaming machine 1 is turned on. Then, various setting values such as the number of transfer bytes are written and set, and a sprite data transfer start signal is output to the transfer IC. The transfer IC transfers and copies the sprite data with the characters “power is being restored” to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e. As a result, the VDP 4150c extracts the sprite data “power is being restored” (including information to be drawn at a predetermined position of the liquid crystal display device 1400) from the resident area of the character RAM 4150e, and the extracted sprite data is extracted. Drawing data is generated by expanding it into a bitmap on a canvas that is a virtual screen. Thereafter, when this liquid crystal power-on process is started on the liquid crystal display device 1400, characters “power is being restored” are first drawn. While the character “recovering power” is being drawn, sprite data for unexpected drawing on the liquid crystal display device 1400 such as background sprite data and sprite data such as “big hit” characters. Are continuously transferred to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e. In this embodiment, since the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is extremely large, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e until the transfer is completed. It takes seconds (s).

  Subsequent to step S1006, port setting processing is performed (step S1008). In this port setting process, various input / output ports built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a are set. Specifically, the input / output direction of various input / output ports is set.

  Subsequent to step S1008, VDP initial setting processing is performed (step S1010). In this VDP initial setting process, the VDP 4150c is initialized. Specifically, of the drawing condition setting data, data related to the environment setting of VDP 4150c is written into the VDP register of VDP 4150c. This drawing condition setting data includes data for setting the size of the canvas, which is a virtual screen, data for cutting out a portion of the canvas into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, and placing grouped sprites on the layer Data for setting the composite screen, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the line buffer, data for setting the resolution, and the like. Here, data for setting the size of the canvas, which is a virtual screen, in the VDP register of the VDP 4150c, data for cutting out a part of the canvas into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen Then, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the liquid crystal display device 1400 and data for setting the resolution are written from the line buffer. The VDP 4150c completes preparation for output of the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG by this VDP initial setting process.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the non-interrupt-side steady process is repeatedly performed (step S1012). In this non-interrupt-side steady process, it is determined whether or not to display a sprite that does not affect the game result displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Various other types of pachinko gaming machines are installed in the hall where the pachinko gaming machine 1 is installed. For this reason, there is a possibility that an instantaneous stop in which the power supplied to the pachinko gaming machine 1 is temporarily stopped may occur depending on the power situation of the hall. If a momentary power failure occurs while the player is playing a game with the pachinko gaming machine 1, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 performs the main control side power-on process shown in FIG. The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 performs the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit in FIG. 162, and the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 performs the power-on process of the liquid crystal control unit illustrated in FIG.

  The main control MPU 4100a is a process that waits until the boot process in step S1000 in the liquid crystal control unit power-on process is completed in the wait timer 2 in step S26 in the main control-side power-on process. After the interrupt permission is set in step S46 in the power-on process, the game proceeds in the main control timer interrupt process shown in FIG. 151 every 4 ms. The peripheral control MPU 4140a performs a process of initializing itself in an extremely short time of microsecond (μs) order in the initial setting process of step S700 in the peripheral control unit power-on process, and after setting the interrupt permission, FIG. It becomes possible to receive a game effect command from the main control board 4100 by the peripheral control unit command reception interruption process shown, and the progress of the effect is performed by the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process shown in FIG. 163 every 2 ms. ing. Control data (display command) can be output to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 by the liquid crystal serial command control process in step S762 in the peripheral control unit 2 ms steady process. The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a performs the boot process of step S1000 in the process when the liquid crystal control unit is turned on, and then performs the SIO initial installation process of step S1002. In the SIO initial setting process, as described above, control data (display command) indicating a screen to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the peripheral control unit 4140 can be received as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER. When the transfer IC performs the sprite data resident area transfer start process by the SIO initial installation process in step S1002, followed by the transfer IC initial setting process in step S1003 and the sprite data resident area transfer start process in step S1006, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a Without passing through the control, that is, independently, the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is started to be transferred to the resident area of the character RAM 4150e based on the set values written in the various registers.

  As described above, even if a momentary power failure occurs, at the time of power recovery, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a performs the SIO initial setting process in step S1002 in the process following the boot process in step S1000 in the liquid crystal control unit power-on process. Therefore, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER from the peripheral control unit 4140 can be received without missing. In addition, when the setting value is written to the various register groups of the register group by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, the transfer IC writes the setting values to the various registers independently of the control by the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a based on the setting value. Based on the set value, transfer of sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d to the character RAM 4150e is started. Therefore, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a performs the port setting process of step S1008 in the power-on process of the liquid crystal control unit without waiting for the completion of the transfer after the sprite data stored in the character ROM 4150d is transferred to the character RAM 4150e. Subsequently, the VDP initial setting process in step S1010 can be performed promptly. Therefore, even if a momentary power failure occurs, the game can be resumed promptly upon power recovery.

[14-2-2. Drawing control processing]
Next, the drawing control process will be described. This drawing control process is performed as an interrupt process when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 4150c shown in FIG. 136 is stopped every 16 ms, and is repeatedly performed every 16 ms.

  When the drawing control process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 performs setting of multiple interrupt permission as shown in FIG. 173 (step S1020). In this multiple interrupt permission setting, various interrupt processes such as an interrupt by the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 4150c shown in FIG. 136 and an interrupt when receiving control data (display command) from the peripheral control unit 4140 are enabled. Set. If these various interrupt processing settings are changed from valid to invalid due to the influence of noise, for example, there is a possibility that various interrupt processing cannot be performed, and the game must be interrupted. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the setting for permitting multiple interrupts is made in the interrupt process called the drawing control process, that is, every 16 ms.

  Subsequent to step S1020, noise cancellation determination processing is performed (step S1022). In this noise cancellation determination process, the influence of noise at a terminal to which the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG from the VDP 4150c is input is determined. Specifically, the signal input to the terminal is sampled (referred to as “terminal level”), and whether or not the noise removal time is exceeded is determined.

  Following step S1022, it is determined whether the terminal level is normal (step S1024). This determination is made based on the terminal level in step S1022. Specifically, when the terminal level exceeds the noise elimination time, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal that is not affected by noise, the terminal level is determined to be normal. When the removal time has not been exceeded, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal affected by noise, it is determined as abnormal.

  If the terminal level is abnormal in step S1024, that is, if the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is a signal affected by noise, this routine is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when the terminal level is normal in step S1024, that is, when the DMA execution signal DMAFLAG input to the terminal is not affected by noise, port setting processing is performed (step S1026). In this port setting process, the same process as the port setting process in step S1008 in the liquid crystal control unit power-on process shown in FIG. 172 is performed to set various input / output ports built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a.

  Subsequent to step S1026, VDP initial setting processing is performed (step S1028). In this VDP initial setting process, the same process as the VDP initial setting process in step S1010 in the liquid crystal control unit power-on process is performed. Data for setting the size of a certain canvas CV, data for cutting a part of the canvas into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, and one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the line buffer Write the data to set the size of the minute and the data to set the resolution. That is, each data is overwritten.

  Subsequent to step S1028, command analysis processing is performed (step S1030). In this command analysis processing, control data (display command) from the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 shown in FIG. Do.

  Subsequent to step S1030, a drawing condition setting data setting process is performed (step S1032). In this drawing condition setting data setting process, schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in step S1030 is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b shown in FIG. 136, and the first screen data is extracted from the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b. Of the extracted first screen data, the drawing condition setting data is output to the VDP register of the VDP 4150c, or when the schedule data is in progress, the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data is 1 The next screen data is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and the drawing condition setting data among the extracted screen data is output to the VDP register of the VDP 4150c. The drawing condition setting data includes data for setting the size of the canvas CV that is a virtual screen, data for cutting a part of the canvas CV into a window shape (rectangular area) and displaying it on the screen, and grouped sprites as layers. It is composed of data for setting the composite screen by arranging, data for setting the size of one line for drawing the horizontal direction of the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 from the line buffer, data for setting the resolution, and the like.

  Subsequent to step S1032, a sprite setting data setting process is performed (step S1034). In this sprite setting data setting process, the schedule data corresponding to the display command analyzed in step S1030 is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, the first screen data is extracted from the extracted schedule data from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and the extracted first data Among the screen data, the sprite setting data is output to the sprite register of the VDP4150c, or when the schedule data is in progress, the screen data arranged in time series in the schedule data is advanced by one and the next screen data Is extracted from the liquid crystal control ROM 4150b, and the sprite setting data out of the extracted screen data is output to the sprite register of the VDP 4150c. The sprite setting data is composed of data to be displayed on the screen as a sprite by pasting a plurality of characters, data for setting the sprite drawing color, data for setting the drawing position of the sprite, data for grouping a plurality of sprites, and the like. .

  The output to the VDP 4150c is generated by the drawing condition setting data setting process in step S1032 and the sprite setting data setting process in step S1034 to generate drawing data expanded in the bitmap format on the canvas CV which is a virtual screen. Data is drawn on the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  Subsequent to step S1034, sprite optimization processing is performed (step S1036), and this routine is terminated. In this sprite optimization processing, sprites that are out of the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 are deleted from the drawing data developed in the bitmap format on the canvas CV. As a result, unnecessary sprites are eliminated from the VDP 4150c, so that the arithmetic processing capability of the VDP 4150c can be improved.

[14-2-3. LCD controller command reception interrupt processing]
Next, liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt processing will be described. When the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER from the peripheral control board 4139 starts to be transmitted, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 receives the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER as a trigger, and the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. Then, 1 byte (8 bits) of information is taken into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated as a trigger, and this liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. As described above, the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER is a base command for transmission created based on the base command constituting the display command, and the status of the base command is assigned as the first byte of the base command for transmission. The base command mode is assigned as the second byte of the base command for transmission, and the sum value is calculated as the third byte of the base command for transmission, regarding the status of the base command and the mode of the base command as numerical values. It is.

  When the liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt process is started, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 determines whether or not the 1-byte reception period timer has timed out as shown in FIG. 174 (step S1100). This 1-byte reception period timer sets a period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the peripheral control board 4139.

  When the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1100, that is, within the period in which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received from the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the peripheral control board 4139. Then, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a is fetched (step S1102), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter RXC (increment, step S1104). The reception counter RXC is a counter that indicates the number of times it has been extracted from the reception buffer. If the status that is the first byte of the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER, that is, the base command for transmission, is extracted from the reception buffer from the peripheral control board 4139, the value is 1. When the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 2, and when the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 3. The reception counter RXC is set to an initial value of 0 when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the DSP-ACK signal is set from ON to OFF (step S1106). By setting the DSP-ACK signal from ON to OFF, the peripheral control board 4139 is informed that reception of the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission has started.

  Subsequent to step S1106, it is determined whether or not the reception counter RXC has a value of 3, that is, whether or not the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1108). In this determination, the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission, the mode that is the second byte of the base command for transmission, and the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission are sequentially received from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been taken out.

  When the reception counter RX is not 3 in step S1108, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the transmission base command, the mode that is still the second byte of the transmission base command, and the third byte of the transmission base command When the sum values are not sequentially taken out from the reception buffer, the 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1110), and this routine is terminated. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1110, the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command or the period during which the sum value that is the third byte of the transmission base command can be received is set.

  On the other hand, when the reception counter RXC is 3 in step S1108, that is, following the status that is the first byte of the transmission base command, the mode that is the second byte of the transmission base command, and the transmission base command 3 When the sum value which is the byte is taken out from the reception buffer in order, the initial value 0 is set in the reception counter RXC (step S1112), and the sum value is calculated (step S1114). In this calculation, the status that is the first byte of the base command for transmission and the mode that is the second byte of the base command for transmission that have already been extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 are regarded as numerical values and the sum (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1114, it is determined whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the transmission base command already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102, matches the sum value calculated in step S1114 (step S1114). S1116). The sum value, which is the third byte of the transmission base command already taken out from the reception buffer in step S1102, is calculated in step S806 in the liquid crystal serial command control process shown in FIG. 167 as described above. It should match the sum value calculated in S1116. However, as described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 is supplied with gaming balls from the pachinko island equipment, and when the gaming balls are rubbed against each other and charged, they generate electrostatic discharge and generate noise. 1 is susceptible to noise and is in an environment. Therefore, in this embodiment, the peripheral control unit 4140 side creates a transmission base command based on the base command that constitutes the display command. As described above, in this basic command for transmission, the status of the basic command is allocated as the first byte of the basic command for transmission, and the mode of the basic command is allocated as the second byte of the basic command for transmission. As the third byte, the sum value is calculated by regarding the status of the base command and the mode of the base command as numerical values and calculating the sum. On the other hand, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 side regards the status assigned as the first byte of the received transmission base command and the mode assigned as the second byte as numerical values, and calculates the sum (sum value). Then, it is determined whether or not the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the received transmission base command. As a result, it is determined whether or not the transmission base command has been changed to a transmission base command different from the normal due to the influence of noise between the peripheral control unit 4140 and the liquid crystal control unit 4150.

  In step S1116, if the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 matches the sum value calculated in step S1114, the received base command for transmission is determined. The information is stored in the liquid crystal control unit reception ring buffer (step S1118). This “liquid crystal control unit reception ring buffer” is a buffer that is used so that the end and the beginning of the buffer are connected. The data is stored sequentially from the beginning of the buffer, and when it reaches the end of the buffer, it returns to the beginning. Remember. When the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a stores in the liquid crystal control unit reception ring buffer in step S1118, the status allocated as the first byte of the received transmission base command and the mode allocated as the second byte are displayed. It is stored in association with each other, and the thumb value assigned as the third byte is discarded.

  Subsequent to step S1118, the DSP-ACK signal is set from OFF to ON (step S1120), and this routine is terminated. By setting this DSP-ACK signal from OFF to ON, the peripheral control indicates that reception of the status that is the first byte of the basic command for transmission, the mode that is the second byte, and the sum value that is the third byte is completed. This is transmitted to the substrate 4139.

  On the other hand, when the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out in step S1100, that is, it exceeds the period during which 1-byte (8-bit) information can be received in the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER transmitted from the peripheral control board 4139. If the sum value that is the third byte of the base command for transmission already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1102 and the sum value calculated in step S1114 do not match at step S1116, Exit the routine. As a result, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a cannot set the DSP-ACK signal from OFF to ON. As described above, in step S816 in the liquid crystal serial command control process shown in FIG. It is determined that the time has expired, a transmission base command is created again from the same base command, and transmission of the first to third bytes is sequentially started.

  Next, transmission and reception confirmation of liquid crystal serial data will be described with reference to the timing chart of FIG. In this embodiment, as described above, the asynchronous serial is adopted as the transmission method from the peripheral control unit 4140 to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, the bit rate is 19.2 kbps, and the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER format is used. 8-bit communication, LSB first, even parity addition, 1 stop bit.

  When the display command is stored in the peripheral control unit transmission ring buffer provided in the peripheral control built-in RAM 4140ab, the peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 creates a transmission base command based on the base command constituting the display command. Then, the status STTS allocated as the first byte of the created transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer of the serial I / O port for the liquid crystal control unit of the peripheral control MPU 4140a (timing T0, the liquid crystal serial command shown in FIG. 167 Step S808 in the control process). By setting the status allocated as the first byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the serial input / output port sets the status to the liquid crystal controller 4150 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. 175 (a). Transmission starts (transmission content is status STTS shown in FIG. 175 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal control unit 4150 receives the status assigned as the first byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 in the reception buffer of the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a. When the capture is completed, the status allocated as the first byte of the transmission base command is captured from the reception buffer, and the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 175 (b) is set from ON to OFF (timing T1, FIG. Step S1106 in the liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs the status allocated as the first byte of the base command for transmission to the liquid crystal control unit 4150 bit by bit from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port, and the liquid crystal control unit serial I When the transmission buffer of the / O port becomes empty, the mode allocated as the second byte of the transmission base command is set in the transmission buffer (timing T2, step S822 in the transmission buffer empty interrupt processing shown in FIG. 168). By setting the mode allocated as the second byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the serial input / output port 1 bit at a time as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. Transmission starts (transmission contents are in the mode MODE shown in FIG. 175 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a captures the mode assigned as the second byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 in the reception buffer of the serial input / output port. The status allocated as the second byte of the trust group command is fetched. At this time, the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 175 (b) remains off.

  Subsequently, the peripheral control MPU 4140a outputs the mode allocated as the second byte of the transmission base command bit by bit from the liquid crystal control unit serial I / O port to the liquid crystal control unit 4150, and the liquid crystal control unit serial I When the transmission buffer of the / O port becomes empty, the sum value allocated as the third byte of the transmission base command is set in this transmission buffer (timing T3, step S822 in the transmission buffer empty interrupt process shown in FIG. 168). . By setting the sum value allocated as the third byte of the base command for transmission in this transmission buffer, the liquid crystal control unit 4150 as the liquid crystal serial data DSP-SER shown in FIG. 175 (a) bit by bit from the serial input / output port. (The transmission content is the sum value SUM shown in FIG. 175 (c)).

  Subsequently, the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a captures the sum value allocated as the third byte of the transmission base command transmitted from the peripheral control unit 4140 in the reception buffer of the serial input / output port built in the liquid crystal control MPU 4150a, and captures this sum. Is completed, the sum value allocated as the third byte of the transmission base command is fetched from the reception buffer, the status already allocated from the reception buffer as the first byte of the transmission basic command, and the transmission base command The mode allocated as the 2nd byte is considered as a numerical value, and the sum (sum value) is calculated. The calculated sum value and the received reception buffer are allocated as the 3rd byte of the basic command for transmission. It is determined whether or not the sum value matches. If they match, the DSP-ACK signal shown in FIG. 175 (b) is set from OFF to ON (timing T4, step S1120 in the liquid crystal control unit command reception interrupt process shown in FIG. 174).

[15. Direction]
[15-1. Pre-reading production]
Next, the prefetching effect drawn on the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 will be described with reference to FIG. Here, a player sitting directly facing the pachinko machine 1 is playing a game ball at the second starting port 2002 shown in FIG. 97 while the effect of one variation drawn on the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is in progress. An example of a pre-reading effect when entering a ball will be described. Note that “1 variation” means that the second special symbol display unit 642 shown in FIG. 133 starts from the display of variation of the special symbol until it stops, and is rendered on the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400. Also, it is done according to the time when the special symbols are displayed. FIG. 176 shows a prefetch effect showing an example of one variation drawn on the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device.

  The effect of one variation drawn on the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is as shown in FIG. 176 (a), when the second special symbol display device 642 starts the variation display of the special symbol, on the upper left of the drawing screen. Is displayed as a decorative symbol 1400a, a decorative symbol 1400b at the center, and a decorative symbol 1400c at the upper right. The decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c are translucent enough to allow a background image to be visually recognized, the decorative symbol 1400a is from the upper left to the lower left of the drawing screen, the decorative symbol 1400a is from the upper to the lower portion of the drawing screen, and the decorative symbol 1400c is the drawing screen. The display is variably displayed as if the reels are rotating from the upper right to the lower right. When the variation display of the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c is started, the number of game balls in which the game balls that have entered the first start port 2001 shown in FIG. When two are displayed, the operation reservation images 1400da and 1400db having an elliptical shape are drawn in the special symbol 1 operation reservation ball number drawing area 1400d on the lower left side of the liquid crystal display device 1400, and at the second start port 2002, When the number of game balls that have not been used for the progress of the game (the number of reservations) is one, the special symbol 2 on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is drawn. An operation hold image 1400ea having an elliptical shape is drawn in the area 1400e.

  After that, if a game ball enters the second start port 2002 before the display of variation of the decorative symbols 1400a to 1400c stops, the variation ball is still being displayed, so that the game ball that has entered is used for the progress of the game. Since there are two holding balls, the number of the holding balls is two, and as shown in FIG. 176 (b), the special symbol 2 action reserved ball number drawing area 1400e on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 has an elliptical shape. The operation hold image 1400eb is drawn on the right side of the operation hold image 1400ea. At this time, the type of prefetching effect in the prefetching effect type determination process based on the jackpot symbol random number in step S178 in the storage prefetching process shown in FIG. When the pre-reading effect is determined in the pre-reading effect determining process in step S188, as shown in FIG. 176 (c), the special symbol 2 action reserved ball drawing area on the lower right side of the liquid crystal display device 1400 is determined. The pre-reading effect is implemented by changing to an operation reservation image 1400eb ′ having a different star shape from the operation reservation image 1400eb drawn on 1400e. At this time, the music and sound effects output from the side speakers 121 and 121 and the lower speaker 391 shown in FIG. 2 are also changed. As described above, in this embodiment, as the reserved ball on which the pre-reading effect is performed is actually used for the progress of the game, as the reserved ball is digested one by one as it is used for the progress of the game, A sense of expectation that a big hit gaming state may occur can be gradually increased for the player.

  In this embodiment, in addition to a plurality of types of pre-reading effects that generate a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous for the player, a plurality of types of pre-reading effects that do not generate a jackpot gaming state but expect the possibility Has been. In addition, since the “hit range” is followed by the “hit range” in the range of the big hit determination random number, the big hit determination random number is within the “reserve range” + “hit range” For example, the pre-reading effect that changes to the operation reservation image 1400eb ′ having a star shape different from the operation reservation image 1400eb drawn in the special symbol 2 operation reservation ball number drawing area 1400e shown in FIG. 176 (c) is performed. It is like that. In other words, the prefetch effect shown in FIG. 176 (c) is prefetched in the prefetch effect type determination process based on the big hit symbol random number in step S178 in the storage prefetch process shown in FIG. 156, and then in the prefetch effect determination process in step S188. When the effect is determined, it may be performed, or when the big hit determination random number is within the preliminary range in the type determination process of the prefetch effect based on the reach determination random number in step S184, the prefetch effect determination in step S188 is performed. It is also implemented when a pre-reading effect is determined in the process. In other words, if such a pre-reading effect is implemented and no big hit gaming state occurs, the big hit determination random number is not in the “hit range” but in the “preliminary range” that follows it, so the big hit game It is possible to notify the player that the situation has been lost without causing a condition. Therefore, by implementing such a pre-reading effect, it is possible to make the player feel sorry for the pre-reading effect without being a big hit at a breath.

  According to the pachinko gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first starting port sensor 3022, the second starting port sensor 2012, the first special symbol display 641, and the second special symbol display 642 are provided. When a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the display section of the one special symbol display 641 or the display section of the second special symbol display 642, a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. The first start port sensor 3022 detects a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 provided in the game area 605, and the second start port sensor 2012 is provided in the game area 605. A game ball that has entered the second start port 2002, which is set with a higher probability of a game ball entering than the one start port 2001, is detected. The first special symbol display unit 641 is configured to store the first start condition based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 (the start port winning time control data storage area of the main control built-in RAM stores the first start condition). When the address indicating the 0th section is set among the 0th section to the 4th section of the control data table at the time of winning the first opening opening), the special symbol variation display is started and the display result is derived and displayed. The second special symbol display 642 is stored in the control data storage area when the second start condition is established based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012 (the start port winning time control data storage area of the main control built-in RAM). When the address indicating the 0th section among the 0th section to the 4th section of the control data table at the time of the second start opening is set, the special symbol variation display is started and the display result is derived and displayed.

  The pachinko gaming machine 1 further includes a main control board 4100 and a peripheral control board 4139. The main control board 4100 displays the variation of the first special symbol display 641 based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 and the second special symbol display 642 based on the detection signal from the second start port sensor 2012. And a command relating to the progress of the game are transmitted. The peripheral control board 4139 controls the liquid crystal display device 1400 based on various commands shown in FIGS. 146 and 147 from the main control board 4100 to execute various effects.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 updates the reach determination random number and the variable display pattern random number in the non-winning random number update process of step S54 in the main control side power-on process of FIG. In the control timer interruption process, the winning random number update process in step S78 updates the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number. The jackpot determination random number is used to determine whether or not to generate a jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player. The variable display pattern random number is used for the determination of whether or not, and the variation of the special symbol that is variably displayed on the display unit of the first special symbol display unit 641 and the display unit of the second special symbol display unit 642 This is for use in determining the display pattern, and the jackpot symbol random number is derived at the display unit of the first special symbol display unit 641 and the display unit of the second special symbol display unit 642 when the jackpot game state is generated. It is for use in determining the jackpot symbol to be displayed.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the jackpot determination random number based on the detection signal from the first start port sensor 3022 or the second start port sensor 2012 in the process of step S150 in the start port winning process of FIG. , Reach determination random number, fluctuation pattern random number, and jackpot symbol random number are obtained as start-up memory information.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a game ball that has entered the first start port 2001 that has not yet been used for the special symbol change display by the first special symbol display 641 because the first start condition is not satisfied. As a special symbol 1 operation holding ball number, by grasping the total number of sections in which the first start memory information is stored in the first start port winning control data table of the start opening winning control data storage area Individually specified up to a predetermined upper limit number (value 4). That is, the first start opening winning control data table partitions and manages a plurality of first start storage information.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a game ball that has entered the second starting port 2002 that has not been used for the special symbol variation display by the second special symbol indicator 642 because the second starting condition is not satisfied. As a special symbol 2 operation hold ball number by grasping the total number of sections in which the second start memory information is stored in the second start port winning control data table of the start opening winning control data storage area Individually specified up to a predetermined upper limit number (value 4). That is, the second start opening winning time control data table partitions and manages a plurality of second start storage information.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 has a special symbol based on the game ball that has entered the second start port 2002 in the priority variation process that is the process from step S202 to step S208 in the special symbol variation waiting process of FIG. The change display is executed in preference to the change display of the special symbol based on the game ball that has entered the first start port 2001.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 is stored in the first start port winning time control data table in the start port winning time control data storage area when the first start condition is satisfied in the memory prefetching processing of FIGS. 155 and 156. Before the start memory information is used for the progress of the game, is the pre-reading effect for pre-reading and notifying the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 641 based on the start memory information being won? Before the second start condition is satisfied and the start memory information stored in the second start port winning control data table in the start opening winning control data storage area is used for the progress of the game. Deciding whether or not the pre-reading effect for notifying the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol display 642 based on the start-up memory information is won. That.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 includes the special symbol 1 storage command divided into the other in FIG. 147 and the other in FIG. 147 in the peripheral control board command transmission process in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt process in FIG. In addition to the special symbol 2 storage command to be classified, when the pre-reading effect for notifying the advance notice of the display result by the first special symbol display 641 based on the start storage information is won, the other of FIG. 147 Special symbol 1 memory pre-reading effect command, special symbol 2 memory when winning the pre-reading effect to notify the advance notice of the display result by the second special symbol indicator 642 based on the start memory information A prefetch effect command is transmitted to the peripheral control board 4139.

  The peripheral control MPU 4140a of the peripheral control unit 4140 of the peripheral control board 4139 performs the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process of FIG. 167 and the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process of FIG. 166 from the main control board 4100 in the command reception control means. The command of is received.

  The liquid crystal control MPU 4150a of the liquid crystal display unit 4150 of the peripheral control board 4139 is the first start port winning control data table in the start port winning control data storage area in the processing from step S1026 to step S1036 in the drawing control processing of FIG. 176 corresponding to the number of special symbol 1 operation reservation balls stored in FIG. 176, and the second start opening winning control data table in the starting opening winning control data storage area shown in FIG. 176 corresponding to the number of the special symbol 2 actuated reserve balls is drawn on the drawing screen (display unit) by controlling the liquid crystal display device 1400 and performing the pre-reading effect. For example, the image is drawn on the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400 shown in FIG. Of the operation hold images 1400ea and 1400eb, the display mode of the operation hold image 1400eb on which the pre-reading effect is performed is shown in FIG. 176 (c). The operation hold image 1400eb ′ having a display mode different from the operation hold image 1400eb shown in FIG. And drawing on the drawing screen of the liquid crystal display device 1400.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 establishes the first start condition in the determination in step S170 in the storage prefetching process in FIG. 155, the determination in step S172 in the storage prefetching process in FIG. 156, and the determination in step S174. Before using the first start memory information stored in the first start port prize control data table in the start opening prize control data storage area for the progress of the game, the first start memory information is pre-read and It is determined whether the big hit determination random number included in the first start storage information is within the lottery determination range, or the second start condition is satisfied, and the second start of the control data storage area at the start opening winning prize Before using the second start memory information stored in the control data table at the time of winning a prize for the progress of the game, the second start memory information is pre-read and the second start memory information is used. Jackpot determining random number contained in the 憶 information or to determine whether or not it is within the lottery determination range. The lottery determination range is a range from the uncertain variation lower limit value NV-LOW to the upper limit value V-UPP (value 32668 to value 32767) at the time of non-probability change, whereas the probability change lower limit value PV-LOW at the time of probability change. To the upper limit value V-UPP (value 32438 to value 32767). Thereby, before using the first start memory information and the second start memory information for the progress of the game, the big hit determination random number included in the first start memory information and the second start memory information is the big hit game state Even if it is not possible to compare and determine whether or not it is within the big hit range that generates the game, whether or not the big hit determination random number is within the lottery determination range because the same range as the big hit range is preset in the lottery determination range It is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot determination random number included in the first start memory information or the second start memory information is to generate a jackpot gaming state. .

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the big hit determination random number is smaller than the non-probable variation lower limit value NV-LOW in the determination in step S170 in the storage prefetch processing of FIG. When it is determined that the value is smaller than the value PV-LOW and larger than the upper limit value V-UPP in the determination in step S174 in the storage prefetching process of FIG. When it is determined that it is outside, or when it is determined that it is out of the lottery determination range at the time of probability change, in the determination of step S182, the first start stored most recently in the first start port winning time control data table Determining whether or not to perform reach deviation based on the reach determination random number included in the stored information Or, or to determine whether or not to perform reach out on the basis of the second start memory reach determining random number included in the information stored most recently in the second start hole winning time control data table.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the winning of the prefetch effect is won when the big hit determination random number is within the lottery determination range, and in step S178 in the storage prefetch processing of FIG. Based on the jackpot symbol random number included in the first start memory information most recently stored in the hour control data table, the type of prefetch effect that generates a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player is determined, and step 188 is performed. The jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player based on the random number for the jackpot symbol included in the second start memory information stored in the control data table at the time of the second start opening winning prize is determined. The type of pre-reading effect that causes the generation of the pre-reading effect is determined, and the pre-reading effect is determined in step 188. When the first start memory information and the second start memory information including the jackpot design random numbers are actually used for the progress of the game, a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player is generated. By performing the pre-reading effect, it is possible to notify the player that there is a high possibility that a big hit gaming state will occur, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the big hit determination random number is outside the lottery determination range in the prefetch effect type determination process based on the reach determination random number in step S184, and in the storage prefetch process of FIG. In the determination of step S182, when the reach is deviated based on the reach determination random number included in the first start memory information stored most recently in the first start port winning control data table, the big hit determination Preliminary range (value 32665 to value 32667) in which the random number for use is a value that is continuous with the non-probability variation lower limit value NV-LOW of the big hit range at the time of non-probability variation and smaller than the non-probability variation lower limit value NV-LOW Is within the range, or is a value that is continuous with the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW of the jackpot range at the time of probability variation, and the probability variation The pre-reading effect type based on the jackpot symbol random number in step S178, assuming that the pre-reading effect is won when it is within the preliminary range (value 32435 to value 32437) having an upper limit value smaller than the limit value PV-LOW. One prefetch effect is determined from the types of prefetch effects determined in the determination process, and the prefetch effect is determined in step 188. On the other hand, the big hit determination random number is the lower probability limit of the big hit range at the time of non-probable change. Probability variation lower limit value of big hit range when it is not within the preliminary range (value 32665 to value 32667) that is a value that is continuous with the value NV-LOW and is smaller than the non-probability variation lower limit value NV-LOW as an upper limit value Preliminary range (value 32435 to be the upper limit value which is a value that is continuous with PV-LOW and is smaller than the probability variation lower limit value PV-LOW) When not 32,437) within, as those elected to the implementation of read-ahead effect determines a prefetch effect based on the reach determining random number, determines the look-ahead effect in step 188.

  Further, the main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines that the big hit determination random number is out of the lottery determination range in the prefetch effect type determination process based on the reach determination random number in step S184, and the storage prefetch in FIG. In the determination of step S182 in the processing, when the reach deviation is performed based on the reach determination random number included in the second start storage information stored most recently in the second start port winning time control data table, A preliminary range (value 32665-value) in which the random number for jackpot determination is a value that is continuous with the non-probability variation lower limit value NV-LOW of the jackpot range at the time of non-probability variation and is smaller than the non-probability variation lower limit value NV-LOW. 32667), or a value that is continuous with the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW of the big hit range at the time of probability variation. When it is within the preliminary range (value 32435 to value 32437) whose upper limit is a value smaller than the probability variation lower limit PV-LOW, the prefetch effect based on the random number for the big hit symbol in step S178 is determined to be won. One prefetch effect is determined from the types of prefetch effects determined in the type determination process, and the prefetch effect is determined in step 188. On the other hand, the big hit determination random number is not probable in the big hit range at the time of non-probable change. Probability lower limit of big hit range when it is not within the preliminary range (value 32665 to value 32667) that is a value that is continuous with the lower limit value NV-LOW and smaller than the non-accuracy lower limit value NV-LOW as an upper limit value or at the time of probability change Preliminary range (value 324) having an upper limit value that is continuous with the value PV-LOW and is smaller than the probability variation lower limit value PV-LOW. When 5 value 32437) not within, as those elected to the implementation of read-ahead effect determines a prefetch effect based on the reach determining random number, it determines the look-ahead effect in step 188. As described above, when the big hit determination random number is outside the lottery determination range and still in the preliminary range, any of the types of prefetch effects determined in the prefetch effect type determination process based on the big hit symbol random number in step S178 is selected. Since the prefetching effect is determined and the prefetching effect is determined in step 188, the big hit gaming state does not occur even if the determined prefetching effect is executed. It is possible to make a player expect the possibility of occurrence.

  The main control MPU 4100a of the main control board 4100 determines the reach included in the first start memory information stored most recently in the first start port winning control data table in the determination of step S182 in the storage prefetch process of FIG. The reach is not shifted based on the random number for reach determination included in the second start memory information stored in the control data table at the time of the second start port winning prize when the reach shift is not performed based on the random number for use. Sometimes, it is decided not to implement the pre-reading effect as having been elected to perform the pre-reading effect.

  As described above, in the prefetching effect type determination process based on the reach determination random number in step S184 in the storage prefetching process of FIGS. 155 and 156, the lottery determination range that is the range of the lottery determination value is the same range as the big hit range. The preliminary range is configured such that the preliminary range and the lottery range are continuous with the lower limit value of the lottery determination range being continuously lower than the lower limit value as the upper limit value. For this reason, when the big hit determination random number is outside the lottery determination range and is within the preliminary range that is continuous with the lottery determination range, it is determined in the prefetch effect type determination process based on the big hit symbol random number in step S178 in the same process. Since one of the prefetch effects is determined from the types of prefetch effects, and the prefetch effect is determined in the prefetch effect determination process in step 188 in the same process, the determined prefetch effects are implemented. Thus, even if the player guesses the progress of the subsequent production, it is difficult to determine whether or not the big hit gaming state occurs. Thereby, even if such a pre-reading effect is repeatedly performed, the player can obtain the expectation without losing the expectation that the jackpot gaming state given to the pre-reading effect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game. Also, based on the reach determination random number by using the jackpot determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation pattern random number, and the jackpot symbol random number stored as the first start storage information or the second start storage information It is possible to determine a look-ahead effect that does not generate a big hit gaming state but expects that possibility. That is, when the pre-reading effect is implemented, it is possible to convey to the player a sense of expectation that a big hit gaming state may occur. For this reason, when the pre-reading effect is implemented, the player gradually feels the expectation that a big hit gaming state will occur as the reserved balls on which the pre-reading effect is implemented are digested one by one Can tell. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that a big hit gaming state will occur as the reserved ball is digested.

  Further, the big hit range which is the range of the big hit determination value is the value 32668 to the value 32767 at the time of non-probable change among the range of the value 0 to the value 32767 which is a range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the big hit determination random number. The value is set to a value of 32438 to 32767 at the time of probability change. The lottery determination range that is the range of the lottery determination value is set in advance so as to be the same range as the big hit range, and the preliminary range that is a predetermined value range different from the big hit determination value is continuous with the lower limit value of the lottery determination range. A value smaller than the lower limit value is set as the upper limit value, and is set to value 32665 to value 32667 at the time of non-probability change, and set to value 32435 to value 32437 at the time of probability change. That is, the “preliminary range” and the “lottery determination range” are continuous. Thus, when the big hit determination random number is outside the lottery determination range and still in the preliminary range, the prefetch effect determined in the prefetch effect type determination process based on the big hit symbol random number in step S178 in the storage prefetch process of FIG. Since one of the types of pre-reading effects is determined and the pre-reading effects are determined in the pre-reading effect determining process of step 188 in the same process, the determined pre-reading effects are implemented. Even if the big hit gaming state does not occur, it is possible to make the player feel sorry for such a pre-reading effect without being a big hit at a breath.

  Furthermore, since the big hit determination random number can be added (counted up) by one value, the big hit determination random number can surely enter the lottery determination range via the preliminary range.

[16. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the big hit range that is the range of the big hit determination value is the range from the value 0 to the value 32767 that is a range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the big hit determination random number, and at the time of non-probability change. The value 32668 to the value 32767 are set, and the value 32438 to the value 32767 are set at the time of probability change. As the big hit determination value, a predetermined range of the big hit determination random number range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value is set. You may limit only to a value. For example, when the range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the random number for jackpot determination is the value 0 to the value 321, the jackpot determination value may be limited to one point such as a value 7. In this case, when the jackpot determination random number coincides with the value 6 smaller than the value 7, which is the jackpot determination value, or the value 8 larger than the value 1, the jackpot determination random number in step S178 in the storage prefetch process of FIG. Any prefetch effect may be determined from the prefetch effect types determined in the prefetch effect type determination process based on the prefetch effect determination process in step 188 in the process. .

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the reserve range that is continuous with the big hit range has a value that has an upper limit value that is continuous with the non-probable variation lower limit value ORG-NV-LOW of the big hit range at the time of non-probability change. Although it was a value that is continuous with the probability variation lower limit value ORG-PV-LOW of the big hit range, another spare range that is continuous with the upper limit value ORG-V-UPP of the big hit range is provided, and within the range of the random number for jackpot determination In this case, it is possible to configure such that “preliminary range” + “big hit range” + “preliminary range” is continuous and sandwich the “big hit range” between “preliminary ranges”. As in the case of the present embodiment, when the range of the value 0 to the value 32767 is updated, the big hit range is set to the value 12668 to the value 12767 at the time of non-probability change. In addition, the upper limit value of the first preliminary range is set to a value that continues to a value 12667 that is one less than the value (value 12668) of the uncertain variation lower limit value ORG-NV-LOW of the big hit range, and the range is a value. While the second reserve range is set to 12667 to 12665, the lower limit value thereof is set to a value that is continuous with a value 12768 that is one greater than the value (value 12767) of the upper limit value ORG-V-UPP of the big hit range. The range is set to a value 12768 to a value 12770. Thus, the “first reserve range” + “big hit range” + “second reserve range” at the time of non-probability change is a value that continues from the value 12665 to the value 12770. On the other hand, at the time of probability change, the big hit range is set to a value 12438 to a value 12767. The upper limit value of the first preliminary range is set to a value continuous with a value 12437 that is one smaller than the value of the probability variation lower limit value ORG-PV-LOW of the jackpot range (value 12438).
On the other hand, the second reserve range is set to a value that is continuous with a value 12768 that is lower than the upper limit value ORG-V-UPP (value 12767) of the big hit range by the second reserve range. The range is set to a value 12768 to a value 12770. As described above, “first preliminary range” + “big hit range” + “second preliminary range” at the time of probability change is a value that continues from value 12435 to value 12770. As the lottery determination range stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM referred to in the storage prefetching processing shown in FIGS. 155 and 156, the same range as the big hit determination is set, and as a range continuous with the lottery determination range If the first spare range and the second spare range are set, the “lottery determination range” can be sandwiched between the “first spare range” and the “second spare range”. Compared to the case where only one of the “first preliminary range” or the “second preliminary range” is made to be continuous with the “lottery determination range”, the jackpot determination random number is slightly less than the “lottery determination range”. First, it is possible to increase the chance of notifying the player that the pre-reading effect has been implemented.

  Furthermore, in the embodiment described above, the pachinko gaming machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko gaming machine, such as a slot machine or The present invention can also be applied to a fusion game machine in which a pachinko game machine and a slot machine are fused (one that uses a game ball to play a slot game).
(Solution 1)
First detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the first start area provided in the game area, and a probability that the game ball is provided in the game area and that enters the first start area are set higher than the first start area. A second detecting means for detecting a game ball that has entered the second starting area, and a display result when a first starting condition is established on the basis of a detection signal from the first detecting means and the symbol variation display is started. The first symbol display means for deriving and displaying, and the second symbol display for deriving and displaying the display result when the second start condition is established based on the detection signal from the second detection means And a pachinko that generates a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the display unit of the first symbol display unit or the display unit of the second symbol display unit. A gaming machine, The pachinko gaming machine further includes a fluctuation display of the first symbol display means based on a detection signal from the first detection means and a fluctuation of the second symbol display means based on a detection signal from the second detection means. A main control means for controlling the display and transmitting a command relating to the progress of the game, and a peripheral control means for controlling the effect display device based on the command from the main control means and executing various effects, The main control means is at least used for determining whether or not to generate the jackpot gaming state, and determining whether or not to generate a reach loss when the jackpot gaming state is not generated. A random number for reach determination, a variable for use in determining a variable display pattern of a symbol that is variably displayed on the display unit of the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. Display pattern random numbers, jackpot symbol random numbers for use in determining the jackpot symbols derived and displayed on the display units of the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means when generating the jackpot gaming state, respectively Random number update control means for updating, and the jackpot determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number, and the jackpot symbol based on detection signals from the first detection means or the second detection means Random number acquisition control means that can respectively acquire random numbers for use as start-up storage information, and the first start-up condition is not satisfied, so that the first design display means has not yet been used for the symbol variation display. First start memory information that can individually specify the number of game balls that have entered the first start area up to a predetermined upper limit number as the first operation hold ball number The first operation hold storage control means for storing information and the second start area that has not yet been used for the symbol change display by the second symbol display means because the second start condition is not established. Based on the second start area, second action hold memory control means for storing second start memory information capable of individually specifying the number of game balls as the second action hold ball number up to a predetermined upper limit number Priority variation display execution control means for executing symbol variation display in preference to symbol variation display based on the first start area, and the first operation hold storage control means when the first start condition is satisfied. Before using the memorized first start memorized information for the progress of the game, I won the suggestion effect for suggesting the display result by the first symbol display means based on the first memorized memorized information. Whether or not Based on the second start memory information before the second start condition is satisfied and the second start memory information stored in the second operation hold memory control means is used for the progress of the game. Preliminary lottery determination control means for determining whether or not a suggestion effect for suggesting a display result by the second symbol display means has been won, and the first operation hold storage control means storing the first A lottery determination by the preliminary lottery determination control means, in addition to a command for transmitting the number of one active hold balls and a command for transmitting the second number of active balls stored in the second operation hold storage control means Command transmission control means for transmitting a command for transmitting the suggestion effect to the peripheral control means when a result is won for implementation of the suggestion effect, the peripheral control means, At least, a command reception control unit that receives a command from the main control unit, and the first operation suspension stored in the first operation suspension storage control unit based on the command received by the command reception control unit The action hold image corresponding to each of the number of balls and the second action hold ball number stored in the second action hold memory control means is rendered on the display unit by controlling the effect display device, and the suggestion When performing an effect, among the operation hold images drawn on the display unit of the effect display device, the display mode of the operation hold image in which the suggestion effect is executed is different from the operation hold image. An on-hold image drawing control means for changing to a hold image and drawing on the display unit of the effect display device, and the pre-lottery determination control means at least satisfies the first start condition Before the first operation hold storage control means or the first start storage information stored in the second operation hold storage control means when the second start condition is established, A first determination control means for determining whether or not the jackpot determination random number included in one start-up storage information is within a predetermined range; and the jackpot determination random number by the first determination control means Is determined to be out of reach based on the reach determination random number included in the one start-up storage information. When the jackpot determination random number is determined to be within the predetermined range by the two determination control means and the first determination control means, the one of the above-mentioned ones is won. Included in the startup memory information When the jackpot suggestion effect winning control means for determining the suggestion effect based on the winning design random number and the second determination control means determine that the reach determination random number is to be out of reach, The jackpot determination random number is a value that is continuous with the lower limit value of the predetermined range, and a value smaller than the lower limit value is set as an upper limit value and extends to a lower limit value that is smaller than the upper limit value by a predetermined value. When the value is within the first preliminary range composed of continuous values, and a value that is continuous with the upper limit value of the predetermined range and is larger than the upper limit value, the lower limit value is set in advance and the lower limit value is set in advance. The jackpot-suggested effect winning control is determined to have been won for the implementation of the suggested effect when it is within the second preliminary range composed of continuous values up to a predetermined upper limit value. One of the suggested effects is determined from the suggested effects determined by a stage, while the big hit determination random number is a value that is continuous with the lower limit value of the predetermined range and is smaller than the lower limit value Is not within the first preliminary range composed of values that are continuous up to a lower limit value that is smaller by a predetermined value than the upper limit value, and is continuous with the upper limit value of the predetermined range. A value that is larger than the upper limit value as a lower limit value and is not within a second preliminary range composed of continuous values up to an upper limit value that is larger than the lower limit value by a predetermined value. The reach determination random number is determined by the reach deviation suggestion effect winning control means for determining the suggestion effect based on the reach determination random number and the second determination control means as the winning determination implementation. Including a suggestion effect defeat control means for determining that the suggestion effect is not to be implemented, as a result of being determined to perform the suggestion effect when it is determined that the reach is not performed. Gaming machine.
The pachinko gaming machine includes first detection means, second detection means, first symbol display means, and second symbol display means. The display portion of the first symbol display means or the display portion of the second symbol display means A jackpot gaming state that is advantageous to the player is generated when a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed. The first detection means detects a game ball that has entered the first start area provided in the game area, and the second detection means is provided in the game area, and the game ball is more than the first start area. The game ball that has entered the second starting area where the probability of entering is set high is detected. The first symbol display means starts the symbol variation display based on the detection signal from the first detection means and derives and displays the display result of the symbol variation. The second symbol display means Is a display for displaying the display result by starting the variable display of the symbol when the second start condition is established based on the detection signal from the second detection means.
The pachinko gaming machine further includes main control means and peripheral control means. The main control means controls the fluctuation display of the first symbol display means based on the detection signal from the first detection means and the fluctuation display of the second symbol display means based on the detection signal from the second detection means, A command related to the progress of the game is transmitted. The peripheral control means controls the effect display device based on commands from the main control means and executes various effects.
The main control means is at least a random number update control means, a random number acquisition control means, a first action hold storage control means, a second action hold storage control means, a priority variation display execution control means, a pre-lottery determination control means, a command transmission control means Is included.
The random number update control means updates the jackpot determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number, and the jackpot symbol random number. The big hit determination random number is used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and the reach determination random number is used to determine whether or not a reach loss occurs when the big hit gaming state is not generated. The random number for variable display pattern is for use in determining the variable display pattern of the symbol that is variably displayed on the display portions of the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means. The random number for use is used to determine the big hit symbol derived and displayed on the display portions of the first symbol display means and the second symbol display means when the big hit gaming state is generated.
Based on the detection signal from the first detection means or the second detection means, the random number acquisition control means uses the jackpot determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number, and the jackpot symbol random number as starting storage information. Each can be acquired.
The first action hold memory control means calculates the number of game balls that have entered the first start area which has not been used for the symbol change display by the first symbol display means because the first start condition is not satisfied. The first starting storage information that can be individually specified up to a predetermined upper limit number as one operation holding ball number is stored.
The second action hold memory control means determines the number of game balls that have entered the second start area which has not been used for the symbol change display by the second symbol display means because the second start condition is not satisfied. The second starting storage information that can be individually specified up to a predetermined upper limit number as the number of the two operation reserved balls is stored.
The priority variation display execution control means executes the symbol variation display based on the second start region in preference to the symbol variation display based on the first start region.
The preliminary lot determination control means is based on the first start memory information before the first start condition is satisfied and the first start memory information stored in the first operation hold memory control means is used for the progress of the game. It is determined whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect for suggesting the display result by the first symbol display means is won, and the second start condition is established and the second operation hold storage control means stores the second (2) Before using the start memory information for the progress of the game, it is determined whether or not the implementation of the suggestion effect for suggesting the display result by the second symbol display means based on the second start memory information is determined. It is.
The command transmission control means transmits a command for transmitting the number of first operation hold balls stored in the first operation hold storage control means and a second operation hold ball number stored in the second operation hold storage control means. In addition to the command for the purpose, when the lottery determination result by the preliminary lottery determination control means is won for the implementation of the suggestion effect, a command for transmitting the suggestion effect is transmitted to the peripheral control means. is there.
The peripheral control means includes at least a command reception control means and an operation pending image drawing control means. The command reception control means receives a command from the main control means. Based on the command received by the command reception control unit, the operation suspension image drawing control unit stores the first operation suspension ball number stored in the first operation suspension storage control unit and the second operation suspension storage control unit. The action hold images respectively corresponding to the number of second action hold balls are drawn on the display unit by controlling the effect display device, and are drawn on the display unit of the effect display device when the suggestion effect is performed. Among the operation hold images, the display mode of the operation hold image on which the suggestion effect is performed is changed to an operation hold image having a display mode different from the operation hold image and is drawn on the display unit of the effect display device.
The preliminary lottery determination control means includes at least a first determination control means, a second determination control means, a big hit suggestion effect winning control means, a reach out suggesting suggestion effect winning control means, and a suggested effect defeat control means.
The first determination control means is one start storage information stored in the first operation hold storage control means when the first start condition is satisfied or stored in the second operation hold storage control means when the second start condition is satisfied. Is used for the progress of the game, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number included in the one start-up memory information is within a predetermined range.
The second determination control means is based on the reach determination random number included in the one start-up storage information when the first determination control means determines that the big hit determination random number is outside the predetermined range. In this case, it is determined whether or not the reach is to be shifted.
The big hit suggestion effect winning control means determines that the first hit determination information means that the big hit determination random number is determined to be within a predetermined range. The suggestion effect is determined based on the included jackpot symbol random number. When one start memory information including this jackpot symbol random number is actually used for the progress of the game, a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and thus the determined suggestion effect is implemented. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player in advance that there is a high possibility that the big hit gaming state will occur, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation.
When the second determination control means determines that the reach determination random number is to be out of reach by the second determination control means, the reach loss suggestion effect winning control means is such that the big hit determination random number is continuous with the lower limit value of a predetermined range. When the value is within the first preliminary range composed of continuous values up to a lower limit value that is smaller than the upper limit value and smaller than the upper limit value by a value that is smaller than the lower limit value, And a value that is continuous with an upper limit value in a predetermined range, and that is a value that is greater than the upper limit value is a lower limit value and that is continuous over an upper limit value that is larger than the lower limit value by a predetermined value. When it is within the second preliminary range, one of the suggested effects is determined from the suggested effects determined by the jackpot suggested effect winning control means as having been won for the implementation of the suggested effect. The big hit determination random number is a value that is continuous with a lower limit value in a predetermined range, and a value that is smaller than the lower limit value is set as an upper limit value, and is continuous over a lower limit value that is smaller than the upper limit value by a predetermined value When the value is not within the first preliminary range composed of the values to be performed, and is a value that is continuous with the upper limit value of the predetermined range and is larger than the upper limit value, and a value that is predetermined from the lower limit value The suggested effect is determined on the basis of the reach determination random number as a result of winning the implied effect when it is not within the second preliminary range composed of continuous values up to a large upper limit value. . If the big hit determination random number is outside the predetermined range and is within the first and second preliminary ranges, one of the suggested effects is determined from the suggested effects determined by the big hit suggestion effect winning control means. Therefore, although the big hit gaming state does not occur even if the determined suggestion effect is performed, the player can be expected to have the possibility of the big hit gaming state.
When the second determination control means determines that the reach determination random number is not intended to deviate from the reach, the suggestion effect defeat control means determines that the suggestion effect is not implemented as having been lost in the implementation of the suggestion effect. To do.
In this way, even if the big hit determination random number is outside the predetermined range, if it is within the first and second preliminary ranges that are continuous with the predetermined range, the big hit suggestion effect winning control means determines Since one of the suggested effects is determined from among the effects, even if the determined suggested effect is implemented and the player guesses the progress of the subsequent effects, a big hit gaming state occurs It is difficult to determine whether or not to do so. This allows the player to
Even if such a suggestion effect is repeatedly performed, the expectation can be obtained without losing the expectation that the jackpot gaming state given to the suggestion effect occurs. Even if the determined suggestion effect is not implemented and a big hit game state does not occur, the player feels sorry for such a suggestion effect without being a big hit at a breath. You can make it. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.
Further, by using the jackpot determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number, and the jackpot symbol random number stored as the start memory information, the suggested effect for generating the jackpot gaming state is determined. Although it does not generate a big hit gaming state, it is possible to determine a suggestive effect that expects the possibility. That is, when the suggestion effect is implemented, it is possible to convey to the player a sense of expectation that a big hit gaming state may occur. For this reason, when the suggestion effect is implemented, the player gradually feels that the big hit gaming state will occur as the reserved balls on which the suggestion effect is implemented are digested one by one. Can tell. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that a big hit gaming state will occur as the reserved ball is digested.
In the present embodiment, for example, the game area 605 in FIG. 97 corresponds to the game area, the first start port 2001 in FIG. 97 corresponds to the first start area, and the first start port sensor 3022 in FIG. 97, the second starting port 2002 in FIG. 97 corresponds to the second starting region, the second starting port sensor 2012 in FIG. 135 corresponds to the second detecting means, and “the ball entered the second starting port 2002” When there is no special symbol 2 action-reserved ball number that is not yet used for the progress of the game, the special symbol 1 variation setting data is set as variation setting data (step S208). An address indicating the 0th section among the 0th section to the 4th section of the first start opening winning control data table stored in the start opening winning control data storage area described above is set. In Appropriately, “When the first start memory information and the second start memory information are stored in the start port identification history information, the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set as the variation setting data (step S202). As the variation setting data, an address indicating the 0th section among the 0th section to the 4th section of the second start opening winning control data table stored in the start opening winning control data storage area is set. Corresponds to the establishment of the second start condition, the first special symbol display 641 in FIG. 133 corresponds to the first symbol display means, the second special symbol display 642 in FIG. 133 corresponds to the symbol display means, 135 corresponds to one pachinko gaming machine, the main control board 4100 in FIG. 135 corresponds to the main control means, the liquid crystal display device 1400 in FIG. 101 corresponds to the effect display device, and the peripheral control in FIG. The substrate 4139 corresponds to the peripheral control means, the reach determination random number updated in the non-winning random number update process in step S54 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 152, and the variation display pattern random number is a reach determination random number, The big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol random number corresponding to the variable display pattern random numbers, which are updated by the winning random number update processing in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. 151, are the big hit determination random number and the big hit symbol. The random number update control means corresponds to the random number update control means, and the non-winning random number update process in step S54 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. 152 and the win random number update process in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt process in FIG. 154, the process of step S150 in the start opening winning process of FIG. Corresponding to the first stage, the first action hold memory control means, and the second action hold memory control means, the special symbol 1 action hold ball number corresponds to the first action hold ball number, and the special symbol 2 action hold ball number is the second. The priority variation process corresponding to the number of suspended balls in operation and the processing from step S202 to step S208 in the special symbol variation waiting process of FIG. 157 corresponds to the priority variation display execution control means, and the memory prefetching process of FIGS. 155 and 156 Corresponds to the pre-lottery determination control means, and the special symbol 1 storage pre-reading effect command and special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command shown in FIG. 147 correspond to “commands for transmitting the suggestion effect”. The special symbol 1 memory command classified into the others corresponds to the “command for transmitting the number of first activated balls to be held”, and the special symbol 2 memory command classified into others in FIG. Corresponds to the “command for transmitting the number of active balls to be held”, the peripheral control board command transmission processing in step S92 in the main control timer interrupt processing of FIG. 151 corresponds to command transmission control means, and the peripheral control unit of FIG. 167 The command reception interrupt process and the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process of FIG. 166 correspond to the command reception control means, and the operation reservation image 1400eb drawn in the special symbol 2 operation reservation ball number drawing area 1400e of FIG. 176 (b). , The display mode changed to the operation reservation image 1400eb ′ having a star shape different from the operation reservation image 1400eb of FIG. 176 (c) is “the indication of the operation reservation image drawn on the display unit of the effect display device. The display mode of the operation hold image in which the presentation is performed is changed to the operation hold image having a display mode different from the operation hold image. , And the process from step S1026 to step S1036 in the drawing control process of FIG. 173 corresponds to the operation pending image drawing control means, and the lottery determination range (indeterminate change). (Time: value 12668 to value 12767, time of probability change: value 12438 to value 12767) corresponds to a predetermined range, the determination in step S170 in the storage prefetching process in FIG. 155, the determination in step S172 in the storage prefetching process in FIG. The determination in step S174 corresponds to the first determination control means, the determination in step S182 in the storage prefetching process in FIG. 156 corresponds to the second determination control means, and the big hit symbol in step S178 in the storage prefetching process in FIG. Type determination process of pre-reading effect based on random numbers for use, and pre-reading performance in step S188 The determination process corresponds to the jackpot suggesting effect winning control means, the first preliminary range (when the non-probable change is the value 12667 to the value 12665, the probable change is the value 12437 to the value 12435) corresponds to the first preliminary range, and the second The preliminary range (when uncertain change: value 12768 to value 12770, when probable change: value 12768 to value 12770) corresponds to the second preliminary range, and prefetching based on the reach determination random number in step S184 in the storage prefetching process of FIG. The effect type determination process and the pre-reading effect determination process in step S188 correspond to reach-notice-predictive effect winning control means, and it is determined that the time is short in the determination in step S162 in the storage pre-reading process in FIG. When it is determined that there is no reach in the determination of step S182 in the storage prefetching process of FIG. A flow in which the pre-reading effect is set as a result of being lost in the pre-reading effect lottery (assuming that the pre-reading effect has been lost) and the storage pre-reading process is terminated corresponds to the notice effect selection control unit.
(Solution 2)
Detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the start area provided in the game area, and starting display of the symbols when the start condition is satisfied based on the detection signal from the detection means, and the display result is derived and displayed. A pachinko gaming machine that generates a jackpot gaming state advantageous to a player when a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on a display unit of the symbol display means, the pachinko gaming machine The machine further controls the fluctuation display of the symbol display means based on the detection signal from the detection means, and transmits a command relating to the progress of the game, based on the command from the main control means. Peripheral control means for controlling the effect display device to execute various effects, and the main control means determines whether or not to generate at least the jackpot gaming state A jackpot determination random number for use, a reach determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a reach loss when the jackpot gaming state is not generated, and a symbol variably displayed on the display unit of the symbol display means A random number for variable display pattern for use in determining a variable display pattern, a random number for jackpot symbol for use in determining a big hit symbol derived and displayed on the display unit of the symbol display means when generating the big hit gaming state, Random number update control means for updating each, and based on the detection signal from the detection means, the random number for jackpot determination, the random number for reach determination, the random number for variation pattern, and the random number for jackpot symbol as starting storage information Random number acquisition control means that can be acquired respectively, and because the start condition is not satisfied, the symbol display means still Operation hold memory control for storing start memory information that can individually specify up to a predetermined upper limit number of game balls that have entered the start area that are not used for the variable display of symbols And the display result by the symbol display means based on the start memory information before the start memory information stored in the operation hold memory control means is used for the progress of the game. In addition to the pre-lottery determination control means for determining whether or not the execution of the suggestion effect for performing is won, and the command for transmitting the number of the operation hold balls stored in the operation hold storage control means, A command for transmitting a command for transmitting the suggestion effect to the peripheral control means when the lottery determination result by the preliminary lottery determination control means is won for the execution of the suggestion effect. Transmission control means, and the peripheral control means includes at least a command reception control means for receiving a command from the main control means, and the operation pending storage based on the command received by the command reception control means. When the action display image corresponding to the number of operation hold balls stored by the control means is controlled and rendered on the display unit by controlling the effect display device, the display of the effect display device is performed. The display mode of the effect display device is changed by changing the display mode of the operation hold image in which the suggestion effect is implemented among the operation hold images drawn in the unit to the operation hold image having a display mode different from the operation hold image. Operation preserving image drawing control means for drawing, and the preliminary lot determination control means stores at least the start condition and stores the operation preserving storage control means Before using the one start memory information for the progress of the game, the random number for jackpot determination included in the one start memory information is set in advance to the same value as the jackpot determination value for generating the jackpot game state A first determination control means for determining whether or not the lottery determination value is matched, and the first determination control means determines that the big hit determination random number does not match the lottery determination value Sometimes, the second determination control means for determining whether or not the reach is shifted based on the reach determination random number included in the one start-up storage information, and the first determination control When the jackpot determination random number is determined by the means to match the lottery determination value, the jackpot symbol included in the one start-up memory information is determined to have been won for the suggestion effect. Based on random numbers When the jackpot suggestion effect winning control means for determining the suggestion effect and the second determination control means determine that the reach determination random number is to be out of reach, the jackpot determination random number is When matching with a predetermined value set to a value different from the lottery determination value, the winning effect is determined to be one of the suggested effects determined by the jackpot suggesting effect winning control means as being won. While determining the suggestion effect, when the jackpot determination random number does not match the predetermined value set to a value different from the lottery determination value, the winning determination is performed based on the reach determination random number. Reach out of the suggestion production to determine the suggestion production
When the control means and the second determination control means determine that the reach determination random number does not deviate from the reach, do not execute the suggestion effect as having been rejected for the suggestion effect. A pachinko gaming machine characterized by including a suggestion effect defeat control means for determining
This pachinko gaming machine is provided with detection means and symbol display means, and generates a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player when a predetermined jackpot symbol is derived and displayed on the display unit of the symbol display means. The detecting means detects a game ball that has entered a start area provided in the game area. The symbol display means starts the symbol variation display when the start condition is established based on the detection signal from the detection means and derives and displays the display result.
The pachinko gaming machine further includes main control means and peripheral control means. The main control means controls the fluctuation display of the symbol display means based on the detection signal from the detection means and transmits a command relating to the progress of the game. The peripheral control means controls the effect display device based on commands from the main control means and executes various effects.
The main control means includes at least random number update control means, random number acquisition control means, operation hold storage control means, preliminary lottery determination control means, and command transmission control means.
The random number update control means updates the jackpot determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation display pattern random number, and the jackpot symbol random number. The big hit determination random number is used to determine whether or not to generate a big hit gaming state, and the reach determination random number is used to determine whether or not a reach loss occurs when the big hit gaming state is not generated. The random number for the variable display pattern is for use in determining the variable display pattern of the symbol that is variably displayed on the display unit of the symbol display means, and the random number for the big hit symbol indicates the big hit gaming state. This is for use in determining the jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the display unit of the symbol display means when it is generated.
The random number acquisition control means can acquire the jackpot determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation pattern random number, and the jackpot symbol random number as starting storage information based on the detection signal from the detection section. is there.
The operation hold memory control means is a predetermined upper limit as the number of game hold balls that has entered the start area that has not yet been used for the symbol change display by the symbol display means because the start condition is not established. The starting storage information that can be individually specified up to the number is stored.
The preliminary lot determination control means suggests a display result by the symbol display means based on the start memory information before the start condition is satisfied and the start memory information stored in the operation hold memory control means is used for the progress of the game. It is determined whether or not the implementation of the suggestion effect to do is won.
The command transmission control means is the one in which the lottery determination result by the preliminary lottery determination control means is won for the execution of the suggestion effect in addition to the command for transmitting the number of the operation hold balls stored in the operation hold storage control means. At a certain time, a command for transmitting the suggestion effect is transmitted to the peripheral control means.
The peripheral control means includes at least a command reception control means and an operation pending image drawing control means. The command reception control means receives a command from the main control means. The operation hold image drawing control means controls the effect display device to display an operation hold image corresponding to the number of operation hold balls stored in the operation hold storage control means based on the command received by the command reception control means. When the suggestion effect is performed, the operation hold image is displayed as the operation hold image in which the suggestion effect is executed among the operation hold images drawn on the display unit of the effect display device. Is changed to an operation hold image having a different display mode and is drawn on the display unit of the effect display device.
The preliminary lottery determination control means includes at least a first determination control means, a second determination control means, a big hit suggestion effect winning control means, a reach out suggesting suggestion effect winning control means, and a suggested effect defeat control means.
The first determination control means is included in the one start memory information before the start condition is satisfied and the one start memory information stored in the operation hold memory control means is used for the progress of the game. The jackpot determination random number is used to determine whether or not the same value as the jackpot determination value for generating the jackpot gaming state matches a preset lottery determination value. Thereby, before the start memory information is used for the progress of the game, even if the big hit determination random number included in the start memory information cannot be compared with the big hit determination value for generating the big hit gaming state, the lottery determination Since the same value as the jackpot determination value is preset in the value, it is possible to determine whether or not the jackpot determination random number and the lottery determination value match, and the jackpot included in the start memory information It can be determined whether or not the determination random number is what generates a big hit gaming state.
When the first determination control means determines that the big hit determination random number does not match the lottery determination value, the second determination control means uses the reach determination random number included in the one start-up storage information. Based on this, it is determined whether or not the reach is to be shifted.
The big hit suggestion effect winning control means is one start storage information that is determined to have won the implementation of the suggestive effect when the first judgment control means determines that the random number for jackpot determination matches the lottery determination value. The suggestion effect is determined based on the jackpot symbol random number included in the. When one start memory information including this jackpot symbol random number is actually used for the progress of the game, a jackpot gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, and thus the determined suggestion effect is implemented. Accordingly, it is possible to notify the player in advance that there is a high possibility that the big hit gaming state will occur, and it is possible to increase the player's expectation.
When the second determination control means determines that the reach determination random number is to be out of reach, the big hit determination random number is set to a value different from the lottery determination value. When the value matches the predetermined value, it is determined that one of the suggested effects is determined from the suggested effects determined by the jackpot suggested effect winning control means, and the random number for determining the big hit is determined by lottery. When the value does not coincide with a predetermined value set to a value different from the value, the suggested effect is determined based on the reach determination random number as a result of winning the suggested effect. Even if the big hit determination random number does not match the lottery determination value, if it matches the predetermined value set to a value different from the lottery determination value, one of the suggested effects determined by the big hit suggestion effect winning control means is selected. Because the suggested performance is determined, even if the determined suggested performance is implemented, the big hit gaming state does not occur, but the player expects the possibility of the big hit gaming state to occur be able to.
When the second determination control means determines that the reach determination random number is not intended to deviate from the reach, the suggestion effect defeat control means determines that the suggestion effect is not implemented as having been lost in the implementation of the suggestion effect. To do.
In this way, even if the big hit determination random number does not match the lottery determination value, when it matches the predetermined value set to a value different from the lottery determination value, Since one of the suggested performances is determined from the inside, whether or not the jackpot gaming state occurs even if the determined suggested performance is implemented and the player guesses the progress of the subsequent performance It is difficult to determine whether or not. Thereby, even if such a suggestion effect is repeatedly implemented, the player can obtain the expectation without losing the expectation that the jackpot gaming state given to the suggestion effect occurs. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the game.
Further, by using the jackpot determination random number, the reach determination random number, the variation pattern random number, and the jackpot symbol random number stored as the start memory information, the suggested effect for generating the jackpot gaming state is determined, Although it does not generate a big hit gaming state, it is possible to determine a suggestion effect that expects the possibility. That is, when the suggestion effect is implemented, it is possible to convey to the player a sense of expectation that a big hit gaming state may occur. For this reason, when the suggestion effect is implemented, the player gradually feels that the big hit gaming state will occur as the reserved balls on which the suggestion effect is implemented are digested one by one. Can tell. Therefore, it is possible to increase the expectation that a big hit gaming state will occur as the reserved ball is digested.
In the present embodiment, for example, the game area 605 in FIG. 97 corresponds to the game area, the second start opening 2002 in FIG. 97 corresponds to the start area, and the second start opening sensor 2012 in FIG. 135 corresponds to the detection means. “When the first start memory information and the second start memory information are stored in the start port identification history information, the special symbol 2 variation setting data is set as the variation setting data (step S202). As the data, an address indicating the 0th section among the 0th section to the 4th section of the second start opening winning control data table stored in the start opening winning control data storage area is set. 133, the second special symbol display 642 in FIG. 133 corresponds to symbol display means, corresponds to the pachinko gaming machine 1 in FIG. 1, and the main control board 4100 in FIG. 101 corresponds to the main control means, the liquid crystal display device 1400 in FIG. 101 corresponds to the effect display device, the peripheral control board 4139 in FIG. 136 corresponds to the peripheral control means, and step S54 in the main control side power-on process in FIG. The reach determination random number and the variation display pattern random number updated in the non-winning random number update processing correspond to the reach determination random number and the variation display pattern random number, respectively, in step S78 in the main control side timer interrupt processing of FIG. The jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number that are updated in the winning random number update process correspond to the jackpot determination random number and the jackpot symbol random number, respectively. The winning random number update process in step S78 in the random number update process and the main control timer interrupt process in FIG. 154 corresponds to the new control means, the process of step S150 in the start opening winning process of FIG. 154 corresponds to the random number acquisition control means and the action hold memory control means, and the special symbol 1 action hold ball number corresponds to the action hold ball number 155 and 156 correspond to the pre-lottery determination control means, and the special symbol 2 storage pre-reading effect command divided into the other in FIG. 147 corresponds to “a command for transmitting the suggestion effect”, The special symbol 2 storage command divided into others in FIG. 147 corresponds to a “command for transmitting the number of suspended balls for operation”. Corresponding to the transmission control means, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process of FIG. 167 and the peripheral control unit command reception end interrupt process of FIG. 166 Corresponds to the command reception control means, and the star shape different from the operation reservation image 1400eb of FIG. 176 (c) is obtained from the operation reservation image 1400eb drawn in the special symbol 2 operation reservation ball number drawing area 1400e of FIG. 176 (b). The display mode changed to the operation hold image 1400eb ′ having “the operation hold image is the display mode of the operation hold image in which the suggestion effect is implemented among the operation hold images drawn on the display unit of the effect display device”. The processing from step S1026 to step S1036 in the drawing control processing of FIG. 173 is performed by the operation holding image drawing control means. Corresponding, any one within the lottery determination range (non-probable change: value 32668 to value 32767, probable change: value 32438 to value 32767) Is equivalent to the lottery determination value. The determination in step S170 in the storage prefetching process in FIG. 155, the determination in step S172 in the storage prefetching process in FIG. 156, and the determination in step S174 correspond to the first determination control means. The determination in step S182 in the storage prefetch process in FIG. 156 corresponds to the second determination control means, the prefetch effect type determination process based on the jackpot symbol random number in step S178 in the storage prefetch process in FIG. 156, and the prefetch in step S188. The effect determination process corresponds to the jackpot suggestion effect winning control means, and any value in the preliminary range (non-probable change: value 32667 to value 32665, probable change: value 32437 to value 32435) continuous with the lottery determination range is “ Corresponds to a “predetermined value set to a value different from the lottery determination value”, and the scan in the storage prefetching process of FIG. The pre-reading effect type determination process based on the reach determination random number in step S184 and the pre-reading effect determination process in step S188 correspond to reach-out suggestion effect winning control means, and the time is shortened in the determination in step S162 in the storage pre-reading process in FIG. If it is determined that the game is a big hit in the determination in step S164 and it is determined that there is no reach in the determination in step S182 in the storage prefetching process in FIG. The flow of setting the prefetch effect and ending the storage prefetch process corresponds to the suggestion effect defeat control means.
(Solution 3)
The pachinko gaming machine according to Solution 2, wherein the jackpot determination value is any value within a predetermined jackpot range in a range from a lower limit value to an upper limit value of the jackpot determination random number. The lottery determination value is any value within a lottery determination range set in advance so as to be in the same range as the jackpot range, and the predetermined value is continuously with a lower limit value of the lottery determination range. Any value in the preliminary range having a value smaller than the lower limit as an upper limit, and / or a preliminary range having a value greater than the upper limit in succession to the upper limit of the lottery determination range. A pachinko machine characterized by being one of these values. In this way, when the jackpot determination random number is outside the lottery determination range and is still in the preliminary range, one of the suggested effects determined by the jackpot suggestion effect winning control means is determined. Therefore, even if the determined suggestion effect is not carried out and a big hit game state does not occur, such a suggestion effect will not be a big hit at a breath, and the game will be disappointed. Can be held by a person.
In the present embodiment, for example, a range from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the jackpot determination random number corresponds to “range of value 0 to value 32767”, and “at the time of non-probability change, the jackpot range is value 32668 to value ”Is set to 32767.” and “At the time of probability change, the big hit range is set to the value 32438 to the value 32767” corresponds to the big hit range. As with the big hit range, the value is set to 32668 to 32767. ”and“ At the time of probability change, the lottery determination range is set to the value 32438 to the value 32767 like the big hit range. ” Corresponds to the lottery determination range, and “the preliminary range continuous with the lottery determination range” corresponds to the preliminary range.
(Solution 4)
The pachinko gaming machine according to Solution 3, wherein the jackpot determination random number is incremented by one. In this way, since the big hit determination random number can be incremented by 1 (count up), the big hit determination random number passes through the preliminary range to the lottery determination range, or passes through the lottery determination range to the preliminary range. You can enter without fail.
In the present embodiment, for example, “For example, the counter for updating the big hit determination random number is the above-described initial value update type counter, and ranges from the lower limit value to the upper limit value of the big hit determination random number (value 0 to value 32767). Is incremented by 1 each time the main control timer interrupt process described later is performed ("counts up") corresponds to "added by 1".

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine (pachinko machine), 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Main body frame, 4 ... Game board, 5 ... Door frame, 120L ... Left side speaker illumination unit, 120R ... Right side speaker illumination unit, 126L ... Left side decorative board, 126R ... Right side decorative board, 126La, 126Ra ... Serial parallel conversion group, 126Lb, 126Rb ... Electric decoration drive circuit group, 190 ... Tray receiving relay board, 190a ... Serial parallel conversion IC group, 190b ... Electric decoration Drive circuit group, 192: Door decoration drive board, 192b ... Door side motor drive circuit group, 192ba-bd ... Door side motor drive circuit, 192d ... Serial parallel conversion IC group, 192da, db ... Serial parallel conversion IC, 245, 265 , 371 ... Door side motor, 200 ... Top lamp illumination unit, 206L ... Left top lamp substrate 206R ... right top lamp substrate, 206La, 206Ra ... serial parallel conversion IC group, 206Lb, 206Rb ... electric decoration drive circuit group, 300 ... plate unit, glass unit 450, glass decoration relay board 454, 454a ... serial parallel conversion IC group, 454b ... Electric decoration drive circuit group, 605 ... game area, 641 ... first special symbol display (first symbol display means), 642 ... second special symbol display (second symbol display means), 650 ... ball hitting device , 2001 ... 1st start opening (first start area), 2002 ... 2nd start opening (2nd start area), 2012 ... 2nd start opening sensor (2nd detection means), 3022 ... 1st start opening sensor (1st 1 detection means), 3013 ... motor drive board, 3031 ... lamp drive board, 4100 ... main control board (main control means), 4100a ... main control MP 4139 ... Peripheral control board (peripheral control means), 4140 ... Peripheral control unit, 4140a ... Peripheral control MPU, 4140aa ... Peripheral control CPU core, 4140ab ... Peripheral control built-in RAM, 4140ac ... Peripheral control DMA controller, 4140ae ... Peripheral control Serial I / O port, 4140af ... peripheral control built-in WDT, 4140af ... peripheral control various parallel I / O ports, 4140ah ... bus, 4150 ... liquid crystal control unit.

Claims (3)

Random number acquisition means for acquiring a winning random number based on the acceptance of a game ball at the start port;
When the value of the winning random number acquired by the random number acquisition means is a winning value within the winning numerical value range, it is determined that the big hit is won, and when the winning random number value is outside the winning numerical value range A winning determination means for determining that the player has lost the jackpot,
A jackpot game execution means for performing a jackpot game advantageous to a player when the winning judgment means determines that the jackpot is won;
When a winning random number is acquired by the random number acquiring means, a game holding means for waiting the determination by the winning determination means according to the acquired winning random number until the execution condition is satisfied,
When the execution condition of the determination by the winning determination unit is established and the hold state is released, the variation display control unit that performs control related to the symbol variation display,
When a value outside the winning numerical range is acquired as the value of the winning random number, the acquisition is performed as a determination regarding the preceding effect indicating the big hit expectation degree for the determination by the winning determining means before the execution condition is satisfied. The value outside the hit numerical value range is within a specific numerical value range that is continuous with the hit numerical value range at least in a specific gaming state, or the acquired value outside the hit numerical value range is the Random number preceding determination means for determining whether the remaining numerical range has a numerical range wider than the specific numerical range;
As a result of the determination by the random value preceding determination means, it is determined that the value outside the winning numerical value range is within the specific numerical value range, and the remaining numerical value out of the winning numerical value range. The preceding effect can be executed in any of the cases where it is determined to be within the range, but any of a plurality of effect modes appears as an effect mode that appears when the preceding effect is executed. For the case where it is determined that the value outside the hit numerical range is within the specific numerical range, and the value outside the hit numerical range is within the remaining numerical range. Preceding effect mode determining means for determining at a different rate from the determined case, the preceding effect is executed when it is determined that the value outside the hit numerical value range is within the specific numerical value range. If , As compared with the case where the preceding effect is executed when it is determined in the effect that those in the rest of the numerical range of the per numerical value outside the range, the effect of the plurality of representation embodiment sac Chi specific A gaming machine characterized in that the proportion of appearance of the aspect is increased. In the gaming machine according to claim 1,
A game machine further comprising sound output control means for performing control related to sound output. In the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2,
A gaming machine, further comprising a light emission control means for performing control related to light emission.

Images